The Project Gutenberg EBook of By Right of Conquest, by G. A. Henty

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org


Title: By Right of Conquest
       Or, With Cortez in Mexico

Author: G. A. Henty

Release Date: September 28, 2006 [EBook #19398]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ASCII

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BY RIGHT OF CONQUEST ***




Produced by Martin Robb




By Right of Conquest:
Or, With Cortez in Mexico
by G. A. Henty.



Contents


            Preface.
Chapter  1: A Startling Proposal.
Chapter  2: Bound To Unknown Parts.
Chapter  3: The Voyage.
Chapter  4: Among The Islands.
Chapter  5: Shipwrecked.
Chapter  6: Anahuac.
Chapter  7: A Wonderful Country.
Chapter  8: At Tezcuco.
Chapter  9: Life In A Palace.
Chapter 10: News From The Coast.
Chapter 11: Cortez.
Chapter 12: The Fugitives.
Chapter 13: The Massacre Of Cholula.
Chapter 14: In Mexico.
Chapter 15: Again At Tezcuco.
Chapter 16: A Treasure Room.
Chapter 17: The Insurrection.
Chapter 18: The Rising In Mexico.
Chapter 19: The Passage Of The Causeway.
Chapter 20: At Tlascala.
Chapter 21: A Victim For The Gods.
Chapter 22: Home.



Preface.


The conquest of Mexico, an extensive empire with a numerous and
warlike population, by a mere handful of Spaniards, is one of the
romances of history. Indeed, a writer of fiction would scarcely
have dared to invent so improbable a story. Even the bravery of the
Spaniards, and the advantage of superior arms would not have
sufficed to give them the victory, had it not been that Mexico was
ripe for disruption. The Aztecs, instead of conciliating by wise
and gentle government the peoples they had conquered, treated them
with such despotic harshness that they were ready to ally
themselves with the invaders, and to join with them heartily
against the central power; so that instead of battling against an
empire single-handed, the Spaniards had really only to war with a
great city, and were assisted by a vast army of auxiliaries.

Fortunately, the details of the extraordinary expedition of Cortez
were fully related by contemporary writers, several of whom were
eyewitnesses of the scenes they described. It was not necessary for
me, however, to revert to these; as Prescott, in his admirable work
on the conquest of Mexico, has given a summary of them; and has
drawn a most vivid picture of the events of the campaign. The book
far surpasses in interest any volume of fiction, and I should
strongly recommend my readers to take the first opportunity that
occurs of perusing the whole story, of which I have only been able
to touch upon the principal events.

While history is silent as to the voyage of the Swan, it is
recorded by the Spaniards that an English ship did, in 1517 or
1518, appear off the port of San Domingo, and was fired at by them,
and chased from the islands; but it was not until some twenty or
thirty years later that the English buccaneers openly sailed to
challenge the supremacy of the Spaniards among the Western Islands,
and to dispute their pretensions to exclude all other flags but
their own from those waters. It may, however, be well believed that
the ship spoken of was not the only English craft that entered the
Spanish main; and that the adventurous traders of the West country,
more than once, dispatched ships to carry on an illicit trade
there. Such enterprises would necessarily be conducted with great
secrecy, until the relations between Spain and England changed, and
religious differences broke up the alliance that existed between
them during the early days of Henry the 8th.

G. A. Henty.



Chapter 1: A Startling Proposal.


On March 3rd, 1516, the trading vessel the Swan dropped anchor at
Plymouth. She would in our days be considered a tiny craft indeed,
but she was then looked upon as a large vessel, and one of which
her owner, Master Diggory Beggs, had good reason to be proud. She
was only of some eighty tons burden, but there were few ships that
sailed out from Plymouth of much larger size; and Plymouth was even
then rising into importance as a seaport, having flourished
mightily since the downfall of its once successful rival--Fowey.
Large ships were not needed in those days, for the only cargoes
sent across the sea were costly and precious goods, which occupied
but small space. The cloths of the Flemings, the silks and satins
of Italy, the produce of the East, which passed first through the
hands of the Venetian and Genoese merchants, and the wines of
France and Spain were the chief articles of commerce. Thus the
freight for a vessel of eighty tons was a heavy venture, and none
but merchants of wealth and position would think of employing
larger ships. In this respect the Spaniards and the Italian
Republics were far ahead of us, and the commerce of England was a
small thing, indeed, in comparison with that of Flanders.

In Plymouth, however, the Swan was regarded as a goodly ship; and
Master Diggory Beggs was heartily congratulated, by his
acquaintances, when the news came that the Swan was sailing up the
Sound, having safely returned from a voyage to Genoa.

As soon as the anchor was dropped and the sails were furled, the
captain, Reuben Hawkshaw, a cousin of Master Beggs, took his place
in the boat, accompanied by his son Roger, a lad of sixteen, and
was rowed by two sailors to the landing place. They were delayed
for a few minutes there by the number of Reuben's acquaintances,
who thronged round to shake him by the hand; but as soon as he had
freed himself of these, he strode up the narrow street from the
quays to the house of Master Diggory.

Reuben Hawkshaw was a tall, powerfully built man, weatherbeaten and
tanned from his many comings and goings upon the sea; with a voice
that could be heard in the loudest storm, and a fierce look--but,
as his men knew, gentle and kind at heart, though very daring; and
having, as it seemed, no fear of danger either from man or tempest.

Roger was large boned and loosely jointed, and was likely some day
to fill out into as big a man as his father, who stood over
six-feet-two without his shoes.

Reuben was wont to complain that he, himself, was too big for
shipboard.

"If a crew were men wholly of my size," he would say, "a ship would
be able to carry but a scant crew; for, lie they as close as they
would, there would not be room for a full complement below."

For indeed, in those days space was precious, and on board a ship
men were packed well-nigh as close as they could lie; having small
thought of comfort, and being well content if there was room to
turn, without angering those lying next on either side.

The merchant, who was so stout and portly that he offered a strong
contrast to his cousin, rose from his desk as the latter entered.

"I am glad, indeed, to see you back, Cousin Reuben; and trust that
all has fared well with you."

"Indifferent well, Cousin Diggory. We have a good stock of Italian
goods on board; but as, of course, these took up but a small
portion of her hold, I put into Cadiz on my way back. There I
filled up with three-score barrels of Spanish wine, which will, I
warrant me, return good profit on the price I paid for them."

"And you have met with no accidents or adventures, Reuben?"

"Not more than is useful. We had a fight with some Moorish pirates,
who coveted the goods with which, as they doubtless guessed, we
were laden; but we beat them off stoutly, with a loss of only six
men killed among us. We had bad weather coming up the Portugal
Coast, and had two men washed overboard; and we had another stabbed
in a drunken brawl in the street. And besides these there are, of
course, many who were wounded in the fight with the Moors and in
drunken frays ashore; but all are doing well, and the loss of a
little blood will not harm them, so our voyage may be termed an
easy and pleasant one.

"That is well," the merchant said, in a tone of satisfaction. "We
cannot expect a voyage like this to pass without accident.

"And how are you, Roger?" he asked, turning to the boy, who was
standing near the door with his cap in his hand, until it should
please his elders to address him.

"I am well, I thank you, Master Diggory. It is seldom that anything
ails with me. I trust that Mistress Mercy and my cousins are well."

"You had best go upstairs, and see them for yourself, Roger. Your
father and I have weighty matters to talk over, and would fain be
alone."

Roger was glad to escape from the merchant's counting house and,
bowing to his cousin, went off with a quiet step; which, after he
had closed the door behind him, was changed into a rapid bound as
he ascended the stairs.

"Gently, Roger," Mistress Beggs said, as he entered the room where
she and her two daughters were sitting, at work. "We are truly glad
to see you, but you must remember that we stay-at-home people are
not accustomed to the boisterous ways of the sea."

The reproof was administered in a kindly tone, but Roger colored to
the hair; for indeed, in his delight at being back again, he had
forgotten the manners that were expected from a lad of his age, on
shore. However, he knew that, although Mistress Beggs was somewhat
precise in her ways, she was thoroughly kind; and always treated
him as if he were a nephew of her own, rather than a young cousin
of her husband's. He therefore recovered at once from his momentary
confusion, and stepped forward to receive the salute Mistress Beggs
always gave him, on his return from his voyages.

"Dorothy, Agnes, you remember your Cousin Roger?"

The two girls, who had remained seated at their work--which had,
however, made but little progress since their father had run in,
two hours before, to say that the Swan was signaled in the
Sound--now rose, and each made a formal courtesy, and then held up
her cheek to be kissed, according to the custom of the day; but
there was a little smile of amusement on their faces that would
have told a close observer that, had their mother not been present,
their greeting would have been a warmer and less ceremonious one.

"Well, well, Roger," Mistress Beggs went on, "it is marvelous to
see how fast you grow! Why, it is scarce six months since you
sailed away, and you seem half a head taller than you were when you
went! And so the Swan has returned safely, without damage or
peril?"

"No damage to speak of, Cousin Mercy, save for a few shot holes in
her hull, and a good many patches on her side--the work of a
Moorish corsair, with whom we had a sharp brush by the way."

"And was there loss of life, Roger?"

"We have come back nine hands shorter than we sailed with, and
there are a few on board still unfit for hard work."

"And did you fight, Cousin Roger?" Dorothy Beggs asked.

"I did what I could with my bow, until I got alongside, and then
joined in the melee as well as I could. The heathen fought bravely,
but they were not a match for our men; being wanting in weight and
strength, and little able to stand up against the crushing blows of
our axes. But they are nimble and quick with their curved swords;
and the fierceness of their faces, and their shouting, would have
put men out of countenance who had less reason to be confident than
ours."

"And the trading has gone well?" asked Mistress Beggs, who was
known to have a keen eye to the main chance.

"I believe that my father's well satisfied, Cousin Mercy, and that
the venture has turned out fully as well as he looked for."

"That is well, Roger.

"Do you girls go on with your work. You can sew while you are
listening. I will go and see that the preparations for dinner are
going on regularly, for the maids are apt to give way to talk and
gossip, when they know that the Swan is in."

As soon as she had left the room, the two girls threw down their
work and, running across to Roger, saluted him most heartily.

"That is a much better welcome," Roger said, "than the formal
greetings you before gave me. I wonder what Cousin Mercy would have
said, had she chanced to come in again."

"Mother guessed well enough what it would be, when we were alone
together," Dorothy said, laughing. "She always thinks it right on
special occasions to keep us to our manners, and to make us sure
that we know how it is becoming to behave; but you know well,
Roger, that she is not strict with us generally, and likes us to
enjoy ourselves. When we are staying up at the farm with Aunt
Peggy, she lets us run about as we will; and never interferes with
us, save when our spirits carry us away altogether. I think we
should be glad if we always lived in the country.

"But now, Roger, let us hear much more about your voyage, and the
fight with the Moors. Are they black men?"

"Not at all, Dorothy. They are not very much darker than our own
fishermen, when they are bronzed by the sun and wind. There are
black men who live somewhere near their country, and there were
several of these fighting with them. These blacks are bigger men
than the Moors, and have thick lips and wide mouths. I believe that
they live as slaves among the Moors, but those who were with them
fought as bravely as they did; and it needed a man with a stout
heart to engage with them, so ugly were their faces."

"Were you not terrified, Roger?"

"I was frightened at first, Dorothy, and felt a strange weakness in
my knees, as they began to swarm up the ship's side; but it passed
off when the scuffle began. You see, there was no time to think
about it. We all had to do our best, and even had I been frightened
ever so badly, I hope that I should not have showed it, for it
would have brought shame upon my father as well as myself; but in
truth I thought little about it, one way or the other. There they
were on the deck, and had to be driven back again; and we set about
the work like Englishmen and honest men and, thanks to our pikes
and axes, we had not very much trouble about it; especially when we
once became fairly angered, on seeing some of our friends undone by
the heathen.

"I myself would rather go through two or three such fights, than
encounter such another storm as we had off the coast of Portugal,
for four days. It seemed that we must be lost, the waves were of
such exceeding bigness--far surpassing anything I had ever seen
before. My heart was in my mouth scores of times, and over and over
again I thought that she would never rise again, so great was the
weight of water that poured over her. Truly it was the mercy of God
which alone saved us, for I believe that even my father thought the
ship would be beaten to pieces, though he kept up a show of
confidence in order to inspirit the men. However, at the end of the
fourth day the gale abated; but it was days before the great sea
went down, the waves coming in long regular hills, which seemed to
me as big as those which we have here in Devonshire; but smooth and
regular, so that while we rolled mightily, there was naught to fear
from them."

"I should not like to be a sailor," Agnes said. "It would be far
better, Roger, were you to come into our father's counting house.
You know he would take you into his business, did Cousin Reuben
desire it."

Roger laughed.

"I should make but a poor penman, Agnes. I love the sea dearly, and
it is seldom that we have such gales to meet as that; and after
all, it is no worse to be drowned than it is to come to any other
death. I am well content, cousin, with matters as they are; and
would not stay ashore and spend my life in writing, not to be as
rich as the greatest merchant in Plymouth. I almost wish,
sometimes, I had been born a Spaniard or a Portugal; for then I
might have a chance of sailing to wondrous new countries, instead
of voyaging only in European waters."

"It seems to me that you have plenty to see as it is, Roger,"
Dorothy said.

"I do not say nay to that," Roger assented; "but I do not see why
Spain and Portugal should claim all the Indies, East and West, and
keep all others from going there."

"But the pope has given the Indies to them," Dorothy said.

"I don't see that they were the pope's to give," Roger replied.
"That might do for the king, and his minister Wolsey, and the
bishops; but when in time all the people have read, as we do,
Master Wycliffe's Bible, they will come to see that there is no
warrant for the authority the pope claims; and then we may,
perhaps, take our share of these new discoveries."

"Hush, Roger! You should not speak so loud about the Bible. You
know that though there are many who read it, it is not a thing to
be spoken of openly; and that it would bring us all into sore
trouble, were anyone to hear us speak so freely as you have done.
There has been burning of Lollards, and they say that Wolsey is
determined to root out all the followers of Wycliffe."

"It will take him some trouble to do that," Roger said, shrugging
his shoulders. "Still, I will be careful, Dorothy, for I would not
on any account bring trouble upon you, here. But, thank Heaven,
England is not Spain, where men are forever being tortured and
burned for their religion. The English would never put up with
that. It may be that there will be persecution, but methinks it is
rather those whose opinions lead them to make speeches that are
regarded as seditious, and who stir up the people into discontent,
who fall into trouble; and that, as long as folks hold their own
opinions in peace and quiet, and trouble not others, neither king
nor cardinal will seek to interfere with them.

"It is not so in Spain. There, upon the slightest suspicion that a
man or woman holds views differing from those of the priests, he is
dragged away and thrown into the prisons of the Inquisition, and
tortured and burned."

Mistress Mercy now returned, and she and the girls busied
themselves in laying the table for dinner.

That evening, after Mistress Mercy, the girls, and Roger had
retired to bed, Reuben Hawkshaw and his cousin had a long talk
together, concerning the next voyage of the Swan. After Master
Diggory had discussed the chances of a voyage to the low countries,
or another trip to the Mediterranean, Reuben, who had been silently
listening to him, said:

"Well, Cousin Diggory, to tell you the truth, I have been turning
over a project that seems to me to offer a chance of greater
profit, though I deem it not without risk. That is the case, of
course, with all trading affairs; and, as you know, the greater the
risk the greater the profit, so the question to be considered is
whether the profit is in fair proportion to the risk run. I think
that it is, in this case, and I am ready to risk my life in
carrying it out. It is for you to consider whether you are ready to
risk your venture."

"What is it, Reuben? There are no other voyages that I know of;
unless, indeed, you think of sailing up to Constantinople, and
trading with the Grand Turk."

"My thoughts go farther afield still, Diggory. It is a matter I
have thought over for some time, and when I was at Cadiz the other
day I made many inquiries, and these have confirmed me in my
opinions on the matter. You know that the Spaniards are gaining
huge wealth from the Indies, and I heard at Cadiz that, after the
conquest they made, a year since, of the island they call Cuba, the
stores of precious things brought home were vast indeed. As you
know, they bring from there gold and spices and precious woods, and
articles of native workmanship of all kinds."

"I know all that, Reuben; and also that, like dogs in the manger,
they suffer none others to sail those seas; and that no English
ship has ever yet traversed those waters."

"That is so, Diggory; but by all I hear the number of islands is
large, and there are reports that there lies, farther west, a great
land from which it is they procure, chiefly, the gold and silver
and precious things. Now it seems to me that, were the matter
secretly conducted, so that no news could be sent to Spain, a ship
might slip out and cruise there, dealing with the natives, and
return richly stored with treasures.

"The Swan is a fast sailer and, did she fall in with the Spanish
ships, would show them a clean pair of heels. Of course she would
avoid the places where the Spaniards have forts and garrisons, and
touch only at those at which, I hear, they trade but little;" and
he took out a scroll from his bosom, unrolled it, and showed it to
be a map.

"This I purchased, for ten gold pieces, of a Spanish captain who
had come to poverty and disgrace from his ship being cast away,
while he was asleep in liquor, in his cabin--a fault which is rare
among the Spaniards, and therefore thought all the more of. I met
him in Cadiz, at a wine shop near the port. He told me his story as
we drank together, for he spoke Dutch, having traded much with the
Low Countries.

"He took out a map, to show me some of the places at which he had
had adventures. I said that the thing was curious, and would buy it
of him, if he was disposed to sell. He said that it would be as
much as his life were worth to part with it, to an Englishman; and,
indeed, that it was only captains of ships trading in those seas
who were allowed to have them, seeing that all matters connected
with the islands were held as a state secret. After some trouble
and chaffering, however, he agreed to make me an exact copy, and to
sell it me for ten gold pieces.

"This is the copy. It is exact, for I compared it with the
original, before I paid for it. Now here, you see, are laid down
the position and bearing of all the islands, together with all the
ports and places where the Spaniards have their settlements. This
line over here represents the mainland, but it is, as you see, but
vaguely drawn; seeing that, except at one or two points, the
Spaniards themselves have but little knowledge of it. Now it seems
that, with the help of this, I might so navigate the Swan as to
avoid much risk of falling in with the Dons; and might yet make a
shift to fill up the ship with goods of all kinds, such as would
sell here for great prices. I know, of course, that were we taken
we should be killed without mercy; but in the first place they
would have to catch us, which would not be easy; and in the second
to capture us, which, methinks would be more difficult still,
seeing that a crew of stout Devonshire lads, fighting with halters
round their necks, would give a good account of themselves, even if
overhauled by a great Spanish galleon.

"What think you of the scheme, Cousin Diggory?"

"It is a perilous one, certainly, Reuben," the merchant replied,
after a long silence. "There is the risk of the loss of the ship
and all her freight, and there is the risk of the loss of your life
and of those of the crew; and I would rather lose even the Swan,
Reuben, than that harm should come to you and Roger. Then it may
well be that, even if you carried the scheme to a successful end,
and returned laden with wealth, the king and his counselors, when
the matter came to their ears--which it would be sure to do on your
return, for it would make a prodigious talk--might be grievously
offended, accuse us of embroiling England with Spain, confiscate
the cargo, visit me with fine and imprisonment, and treat you and
the crew as pirates."

"I do not fear that," Reuben said. "Our relations with Spain have
grown cold, lately, and there is a talk of peace between us and
France. In the next place, I should say that the king would be
mightily glad to see a chance of us English having a finger in this
pie, that the Spaniards want to keep to themselves; and that he
will perceive that great advantage will arise, from our obtaining a
share of the trade with the Indies. There is a rare jealousy in the
country, at the Spaniards and Portugals keeping all the trade of
both the Indies in their hands; and methinks that, even if he
judged it necessary to make a show of displeasure against the men
who led the way in this matter, there would in the end be much
honor, as well as profit, in this venture."

"It is a grave matter, Reuben, and one not to be undertaken without
much thought and calculation. Still, I own that the proposal is a
tempting one, and that the possession of this map, which I will
examine at my leisure, would help you much in your enterprise.
Truly, as you say, although the king might frown, there would be
much honor as well as profit in being the first English merchant to
dispatch a ship to the Spanish main. I love not the Spaniards and,
like all Englishmen who think as I do on matters of religion, have
viewed with much disfavor our alliance with men who are such cruel
persecutors of all who are not of their religion."

"I hate them," Reuben Hawkshaw said, energetically. "They swagger
as if they were the lords of the world, and hold all others as of
no account beside them. If you resolve on this enterprise I shall,
of course, do my utmost to avoid them; but should they try to lay
hand on us, I shall be right glad to show them that we Englishmen
hold ourselves fully a match for them."

"Well, well, we must not think of that," Diggory Beggs said,
hastily; "but, nevertheless, cousin, if the Swan sails for those
seas, I will see that she is well provided with ordnance and small
arms, so that she shall be able to hold her own with those who
would meddle with her."

"That is all I ask, Diggory. We shan't meddle with them, if they do
not meddle with us; but if they treat us as pirates, to be slain
without form of trial, they must not blame us if we act as pirates
when they come upon us. They hold that they are beyond the law,
when they are once beyond sight of land, going westward; and we
have only to take them at their word.

"As to piracy, if the things that are whispered as to their cruelty
to the natives be true, pirates are an innocent and kindly folk
compared to them. They openly proclaim that all found in these
seas, which they claim as their own, will be treated as enemies and
slain without mercy; and we shall be, therefore, fully justified in
treating as an enemy any Spanish ship that we may come across; and
holding her as a fair prize, if we are strong enough to take her."

"But you must not go out with that intent, Reuben. If I fit out the
Swan to go to the Indies, it is that she may trade honestly with
such natives as are ready to trade with her, and not that she may
wage war against the Spaniards."

"I quite understand that, Cousin Diggory," Reuben Hawkshaw said,
with a grim smile; "and that also is my intent, if the Spaniards
will but let me adhere to it; only if we are attacked, we must
defend ourselves. If they try to capture us, and we beat them, it
is but natural that we should capture them."

"Against that I have nothing to say, Reuben. I can find no
authority, in Scripture, for the Spaniards claiming a portion of
the seas as their right. The world is all, as it seems to me, open
to trade, and neither the pope nor anyone else has a right to
parcel it out, for the exclusive use of one or two nations. As we
all know, the seas within a mile or two of shore are held to
belong, naturally, to those who own the land; but that is a
different thing, altogether, to holding that more than half the
seas, inasmuch as we know of them, are to be held as private
property by Spaniards and Portugals.

"Well, we will say no more about it, at present. There is plenty of
time to think it over, while the Swan is unloading. I certainly do
not like to take so great a risk as this would be on my own
shoulders; but if I could get two or three others to join me, I
should be willing enough to embark upon it."

"I need not tell you, Diggory, that it behooves you to be right
careful as to those to whom you may broach it. Remember that an
incautious word might ruin the enterprise altogether. If so much as
a whisper of it reached the ear of the Spanish ambassador in
London, he would apply to the king to put a stop to it; and
whatever King Harry might think of it, he could hardly permit the
Swan to sail in the face of such a remonstrance, for to do so would
assuredly embroil him with Spain."

"I will be careful, Reuben; for I see this as well as you do, and
shall only speak to men who have, before now, worked with me in
joint adventures, and on whose discretion I can surely rely. I will
talk the matter over with them, Reuben, first; and if they appear
favorably disposed, you shall meet them here, show them your map,
and explain your intentions fully to them. If three others join me,
in equal shares, I shall propose that, as it is your idea, and as
you have obtained this map, you shall have an equal share with each
of us in the business; and shall, in addition to your pay as
master, take one-fifth of the profits, after payment of expenses.
Will that content you?"

"Right well, Cousin Diggory; and from this moment I shall, I can
tell you, regard myself as a rich man."

The unloading of the Swan occupied some time. There was no undue
haste, in those days. The bales were hoisted by whips from the
hold, and then carried up to Master Beggs' warehouse. The sailors
had earned a fair time for repose, after the hardships of the
voyage, and took matters easily, and it was more than a week before
the Swan's hold was empty.

During that time the merchant had not made any allusion, to Reuben,
as to their conversation on the evening after the Swan came into
port. But Reuben was neither surprised nor anxious at this silence.
He knew that his cousin although an enterprising was a cautious
man, and had hardly hoped to find his proposal so favorably
entertained. He had looked for absolute refusal at first, and
expected that he would only arrive at his end after long disputes
and discussion. Therefore he doubted not that Diggory was turning
the matter over and over in his mind, settling the details, and
perhaps broaching the matter to the merchants he had spoken of.

The Swan, once empty, was laid up on the shore; where she dried at
low tide, so that she could have her seams caulked, and a coat of
pitch laid on below the waterline, and be made tight and sound for
any voyage on which she might be dispatched Reuben Hawkshaw had
lost his wife years before and, when in port at Plymouth, always
occupied lodgings in a house a short distance from that of his
cousin; spending his evenings mostly at Master Diggory's, but
refusing to take his breakfast or dinner there.

"I know what is what, cousin," he would say, when the merchant
pressed him and Roger to come to breakfast or dinner. "Women are
women and, as is only right, they hold to the nicety of things; and
nothing displeases them more than for people to come in late for
their meals. When I am at work I work, and if when the clock
strikes the hour for meals I am in the middle of a job, I see that
it is finished before the men knock off. Then there is the matter
of washing and cleaning up, for one gathers much dust and dirt in
the hold of a ship; so that, do what I would, Roger and I could
never reckon upon being punctual, and the matter would weigh on my
mind when I ought to be thinking of other things. No, no, Diggory,
we will be free men, taking our bite and sup on board, as we can
make shift to get them; and then, when work is over, coming with
clean hands and a clear mind, to supper with you. When the Swan's
hold is empty, it will be time enough to talk about amusement."

The evening after the unlading of the cargo was completed, Master
Diggory said to his wife:

"Get the table cleared as soon as you can, Mercy, and bring two
flasks of that last batch of Spanish wine out of the cellar, and
put them and some cups on the board. I have two or three friends
coming in, to talk over a matter of business with Reuben and me."

As soon as the table was cleared, Roger asked permission of his
aunt to take his cousins for a walk upon the Hoe. This was readily
granted, as there was no other room in which they could well be
bestowed; and having set the wine upon the table, Dame Mercy
retired to look after domestic matters, of which she always found
an abundance to occupy her.

In a short time Master Turnbull, Master Streatham, and Master
Winslow, three worshipful traders of Plymouth, arrived.

"Cousin Reuben," Master Diggory said, "I have spoken to these good
friends of mine in respect of that venture which you proposed to
me, and they would fain hear more of it, from your own lips. You
can speak with confidence before them; for, whether they agree to
cast in their lot with us or not, no word of this matter will pass
their lips."

Reuben addressed himself to his task, and that at much greater
detail than he had given, when first speaking of the matter to
Diggory. He told them what he had gathered from the sea captains,
and others, as to the articles with which the Dons traded with the
natives. That they were for the most part cheap and common, and
that the amount required for a sufficient stock of such merchandise
would be very small. Small hand mirrors, strings of colored glass
beads, brass rings and trinkets, colored handkerchiefs and bright
cloths, were the articles chiefly used in barter. Knives and axes
were greatly prized, the natives considering iron to be more
valuable than silver or gold. Small bells and brass vessels were
also valued, and iron spear and arrow heads were eagerly sought
for; but the Spaniards were chary of providing such goods, seeing
that they might be used in conflicts against themselves.

Then he produced a list of the stores that would be required for
the ship and crew.

"In this matter," he said, "you will think, perhaps, that my
demands are excessive; but I am of opinion that money in this way
would be well spent. As a rule--though I say it before men
accustomed to victualing ships--our crews are vilely provided for.
Salt meat they must eat, for no other can be obtained at sea; but
it should be of good quality, likewise the other provisions. I want
not biscuits that are alive with maggots, nor moldy flour, nor peas
or other things that cattle would turn up their noses at. I want
everything to be the very best of its kind, with cider good, and
sound, and in fair abundance.

"This is not an ordinary voyage. We shall be away for many months,
maybe for a year or two; and unless the men are well fed they will
assuredly lose their health, and likely enough become mutinous. If
we come upon a Spanish ship when three parts of the crew are weak
with scurvy, we shall make but a poor fight of it. Therefore, I
want to keep my men in good strength and in good heart, and to do
this they must be well fed. Such a voyage as this no English ship
has ever made before and, cooped up as we shall be in the Swan--for
we must carry a great crew--everything depends upon there being no
fair ground for grumbling. Many a ship has been lost from the crew
being weakened by scurvy, and if you are to bring this enterprise
to a good end, I say that there must be no stint in the matter of
provisions, and that all must be the very best of their kind.

"I trust that, once out there, we shall be able to obtain an
abundance of fruit and vegetables from the natives; for these are
things, above all, necessary to keep men's blood sweet on
shipboard.

"Then, as to arms. I think we should carry twelve pieces, six of a
side; of which four should be of good size, and yet not too large
to be quickly handled. In the matter of weight, the Spaniards are
sure to have the advantage of us; but if we can shoot much more
quickly than they can, it will equalize matters. Then, of course,
there will be bows and arrows. I do not hold greatly to the new
musketoons--a man can shoot six arrows while he can fire one of
them, and that with a straighter and truer aim, though it is true
they can carry somewhat farther. Then, of course, there will be
pikes, and boarding axes, and a good stock of powder and balls for
the cannon. These are the complete lists I have made out.

"Now I hold that we should carry from eighty to a hundred men.
These I should pay only the ordinary rate of wage, but each should
have an interest in the venture, according to his rank. As to the
profits, I would leave it to you, my masters, to reckon; but seeing
that in fair trade one can get gold, to say nothing of silver,
weight for weight for iron; and other things in proportion; you can
judge for yourselves what it will amount to--to say nothing of the
chance of our falling in with a Spanish treasure ship, which may be
rash enough, regarding us an easy prize, to fall foul of us."

"There is no doubt that the profits will be great, if you return
safely home, Master Hawkshaw," Nicholas Turnbull said; "but the
chances of that seem but small."

"I think that the chances are good enough to risk my life upon,
Master Turnbull," Reuben replied; "and no man can show greater
confidence than that. This is the map of which my Cousin Diggory
has no doubt spoken to you. You see that the islands are many, and
some of them great; and that the places at which the Spaniards have
ports are few, in comparison. We have to avoid these, but anywhere
else we can open trade with the natives. If we are chased, and find
the place too hot for us, we can make away to the mainland and,
cruising along there, may come upon places that the Spaniards have
never visited, and may there gather great store of gold and silver,
without danger. But I wish no one, and certainly not my Cousin
Diggory, to enter upon this affair unless with confidence and good
heart. I would far rather take a horse and travel to Bristol, and
lay my scheme before some of the traders there."

This idea was most distasteful to the traders, for Plymouth
regarded Bristol with great jealousy; and Diggory Beggs at once
said:

"No, no, Reuben. My friend Master Nicholas Turnbull did not mean
that he regarded your scheme as hopeless, only that the risks were
doubtless great. But we all know that to earn great profit one must
run such risk; and the venture, divided between four of us, would
not be a very heavy one--that is to say, not beyond what we are
justified in periling.

"Would you leave us for a while, Reuben? We will examine these
lists that you have made, and reckon up the total cost; and we
shall then see the better how much we shall each have to
contribute, to make up our venture."

Reuben nodded and, putting on his hat, left the room, saying, "In
an hour I will return;" and then strolled over to a tavern much
frequented by the masters of the ships in the port.



Chapter 2: Bound To Unknown Parts.


When Reuben Hawkshaw returned to the chamber where Diggory Beggs
was in conference with the other three traders, he found that these
had finished their calculations.

"The matter is settled, Reuben, as far as we are concerned. My
three friends and myself will go equal shares in the matter. The
value of the Swan is to be taken as part of my contribution, and if
she ever comes back again, as we hope she may do, that sum will be
deducted from my share of the profits, due allowance being made for
what damage or injury she may have suffered. You, it is understood,
will take a share of the profits equal to ours, and one-third share
will, in the first place, be set aside to be divided among the
other officers and crew. It will be left entirely to you to choose
your officers and men, and I need not tell you the sort of fellows
to pick out for such a business.

"I shall see that the Swan is provided with new rigging and gear,
and that there is a plentiful store of all things on board, to
repair any damage you may suffer from storm or foe. My good friends
here are willing that the purchasing of all the stores required
shall be in my hands, and you shall yourself test the quality of
all the provisions before the bargains are concluded, so as to see
that everything is sweet and wholesome. My friends here will not
appear in the affair at all, for if folks saw that four of us were
concerned in the venture, they would think that it was something
quite out of ordinary.

"All preparation will be made as quietly as possible, and it will
be given out that the Swan is going to make a voyage to the Levant,
and that she will carry a stronger battery of guns than usual to
beat off any Moorish pirates she may meet by the way. As it is
known that she had a sharp fight, coming homeward, it will seem
only natural that we should add to her armament. I shall write up
to my agent in London to purchase for me the articles required to
trade with the natives, and bid him send them round here by sea,
well packed in bales. If we were to purchase so many strange
articles, here, it would give rise to talk; for people would wonder
with whom we intended to trade such goods.

"Tomorrow morning you and I will make out a list of what you deem
advisable for the purpose."

For another hour the party sat and talked; for, now that the other
traders had fully determined to go into the venture, they were
quite excited over it.

"Truly if I could but be spared from my business, here, I would
gladly go with you myself," Master Streatham said. "I have always
had a longing to see strange climes, and as no Englishman has yet
set eyes on these countries you are about to visit, Friend Reuben,
I would gladly be by your side, and take share in your perils and
adventures."

"I doubt not your heart and courage, Master Jonas," Reuben replied,
"and would warrant that you would behave doughtily, in case of
fight with Spaniard or Indian; but I question whether you would
support the hardships of the voyage, as cheerfully as you would the
dangers. Although you may store the Swan with the best provisions
that money can buy, a diet of naught but biscuit and salt meat
palls after some weeks--to say nothing of some months--of it; and
this all the more in a hot climate, where the appetite weakens, and
one comes to pine for dainty cakes such as our Devonshire wives are
famous for."

"Yes, I fear I never should support that," Master Streatham, who
was a large corpulent man, mightily fond of the pleasures of the
table, agreed with a sigh.

"Besides, Friend Jonas," Diggory Beggs put in, "Mistress Tabitha
would have her voice in the matter; and however much your spirit
would lead you to such an adventure, I doubt whether she would let
you put foot on board."

"No, it is not for us to be running after adventure," Nicholas
Turnbull said. "In the first place, we are sober citizens, and have
our wives and families to think about, and our business and the
affairs of the town; and in the next place, even could we leave all
these, Master Reuben Hawkshaw would not thank us for our company.
Every foot of space is of value on the ship; and men who take up
space and consume food, and can neither set a sail nor work a
cannon, are but useless encumbrances."

"You have spoken truly, Master Nicholas," Reuben said bluntly. "In
the matter of a trip to London, or even as far as the Low
Countries, we could accommodate your worshipful honors well enough;
but on a journey like this, any man who cannot, if needs be, drink
bilge water and eat shoe leather, is best at home. I took a voyage
once--it is many years ago, now--to Amsterdam, and the owner, not
my good cousin here, but another, took a fancy to go with me; and
his wife must needs accompany him, and verily, before that voyage
was over, I wished I was dead.

"I was no longer captain of the ship. My owner was my captain, and
his wife was his. We were forever putting into port for fresh bread
and meat, milk and eggs, for she could eat none other. If the wind
got up but ever so little, we had to run into shelter and anchor
until the sea was smooth. The manners of the sailors shocked her.
She would scream at night when a rat ran across her, and would lose
her appetite if a living creature, of which, as usual, the ship was
full, fell from a beam onto her platter. I was tempted, more than
once, to run the ship on to a rock and make an end of us all.

"No, no: a day's sail out from Plymouth, in a freshly launched
ship, on a fine day, with a store of good victuals and a few flasks
of good wine, is a right merry business; but farther than that I
wish not to see a passenger, on board any ship which I command."

The others laughed.

"Well, Master Diggory, we must be going," Nicholas Turnbull said;
"it is getting late. Tomorrow I will come over in the forenoon, as
you suggest; and we will go through these lists more carefully, and
talk over prices and see what bulk they will occupy, and discuss
many other matters with the aid and advice of Master Hawkshaw.
There is no occasion for undue haste; and yet, if the thing is to
be done, the sooner it be done the better."

As the party went out, Reuben found his son waiting outside the
door.

"Well, father?" he asked anxiously, when the three merchants had
walked briskly off towards their homes.

"It is all settled, Roger. As soon as everything is prepared, the
Swan will sail for the Spanish main."

Roger threw his cap high in the air, with a lusty shout that
startled the better passers-by, hurrying towards their homes; for
it was now long after dark, and although the town watch patrolled
the streets regularly, prudent citizens did not care to be abroad
after nightfall.

"You silly boy;" Reuben said; "you have lost your cap."

"Nay, I heard it fall somewhere here," Roger said, searching;
"besides, a cap is a small matter, one way or other.

"Ah! Here it is, floating in a pool of mud; however, a bucket of
water will set it all right, in the morning.

"O father! I feel wild with joy, only to think that all we have
talked over together is going to be true, and that we are to be the
first Englishmen who ever saw the beautiful islands they talk
about, and the natives with their feathers and strange attire.
And--"

"And the Spaniards with their loaded guns, and their dungeons and
gibbets," Reuben Hawkshaw put in.

"Not for us, father. The bottom of the sea maybe, but not a Spanish
dungeon."

"I hope not, my lad. Still, no man can see the future. However, I
am right glad that we are to try this adventure. It is a glorious
one, and will bring us honor in the eyes of all Englishmen if we
succeed, to say nothing of wealth.

"But mind that you let not your spirits run away with your tongue.
No word of this must be spoken to a soul, nor must any mention be
made of it in the hearing of my Cousin Mercy, or the girls. The
four partners in the adventure have all taken a solemn promise to
each other, that they will not breathe a word of it even to their
wives, averring that women could never be trusted to keep a secret;
though as far as I have seen of them, methinks a woman can keep a
bridle on her tongue just as well as a man--and indeed, somewhat
better, since they do not loosen them with cider, or wine, or
strong waters. But I believe, myself, it was not so much that they
doubted whether their wives would keep the secret, as whether they
would approve of the enterprise; and that they made the contract
together, in order that each might, afterwards, be able to assure
his wife that, for his part, he would gladly have taken her into
his confidence, but that he was obliged to fall in with the wishes
of his partners.

"It is a strange thing, Roger, but methinks that, whereas most men
behave valiantly enough when it comes to blows with an enemy, a
great proportion are but cowards with their wives."

"But why should they be, father?"

"That is an easy question to ask, Roger, but a difficult one to
answer. Maybe you will understand the matter better, some day, when
you have taken a wife to yourself. In some matters there is no
doubt that women's wits outrun those of men, and that they have a
wonderful sharpness of tongue. Now a man, when things go wrong with
him, speaks out loudly and roundly; he storms and he rages, but
when it is over, there is an end of it. Now a woman is not like
that. She seems to ponder the matter over in her heart, and to
bring it out as it were piecemeal--throwing little darts at you
when you don't expect it; saying little things to which, from their
suddenness, you can find no reply; and pricking you furiously all
over, until you are ready to roar out with pain and vexation. You
see, Roger, a prick hurteth more than a great cut."

"I should not have thought that, father."

"That is because you have not thought the matter over, Roger. In
that fight with the Moors many of the men were sorely cut and
wounded, but you heard no cry from them; they only set their teeth
the harder, and smote more furiously upon their foes; but there was
no one of them all but, had he sat down suddenly on a small nail,
would have roared out like a bull, and have sworn lustily for a
good half hour. So it is in domestic matters: the man rages and
storms when things go wrong; and his wife, if she be a woman of
judgment, holds her peace until it is over, knowing well enough
that he will be at her mercy, afterwards. Then she sets to work,
like those gnats that came on board at Genoa, that they call
mosquitoes, and startles him with shrill buzzings in his ears, and
pricketh him in the tenderest spots she can find; drawing but the
smallest speck of blood, but causing an itching that makes him
ready to tear his flesh.

"Your mother, Roger, was one of the best of women. She was a good
housewife, and an affectionate. I do not know that I ever saw her
greatly ruffled in temper, but there were times when I would fly
from my house, and not come up from my work on board, until it was
time to go straight away to bed, so did she prick and sting me with
her tongue; and that not shrilly or with anger, but with little
things, let slip as it were unawares, and with an air of ignorance
that they in any way applied to me.

"No, Roger, if you will take my advice you will make your ship your
mistress. She will have her ways, but you will learn them, and will
know just how much helm she requires, and how the sail should be
trimmed; but with a woman no man attains to this knowledge, and if
you take my advice, you will give them a wide berth.

"I know," he went on, in answer to Roger's merry laugh, "that this
is a matter in which no man will trust to other experience than his
own. Every man who takes a woman to wife thinks that he can manage
her, and goes into the matter with a light heart, as if it were a
mere pleasure excursion on which he is embarking; whereas, in
truth, it is a voyage as full of dangers and perils as that upon
which we are about to adventure.

"Now let us turn back to our lodging, for I have nearly gone on my
face four times already, in these deep ruts and holes. I would that
the councilors of this town could see the streets of Genoa, or
Cadiz, or Amsterdam! They might then try to mend the ways of
Plymouth, and make them somewhat less perilous to passengers, after
dark."

Work began in earnest upon the following day. A number of
shipwrights were set upon the hull of the Swan, which was to be
thoroughly overhauled, caulked and pitched, within and without. The
masts and rigging were to be carefully looked to, and every defect
repaired. A new suit of sails was ordered, the old ones to be
patched where the Moorish shot had torn them, so as to be of use as
a second suit, did any misadventure happen to the others.

James Standing, the first mate, took charge of these matters;
Reuben Hawkshaw assisting Diggory Beggs in all things relating to
the stores. Greatly were the provision merchants of the town
surprised at the quality of the provisions that Master Beggs
ordered for the use of the Swan. Nothing but fine flour of the last
year's grinding; freshly killed beef and pork, to be carefully
salted down in barrels; and newly baked biscuits would satisfy
Reuben Hawkshaw. They could scarce believe that such articles could
be meant for use on shipboard; for, as a rule, the very cheapest
and worst quality of everything was considered as amply good enough
for the use of sailors.

Then, too, the cider and beer must be neither thin nor sour, but
sweet and of good body. Surely, Master Beggs must have gone off his
head, thus to furnish his ship! For never before had a vessel
sailed out of Plymouth harbor, provided after this fashion. An
ample store of ropes and cordage, and of all matters required for a
ship's equipage, were also laid in. To all questions as to the
surprising lavishness of cost, Diggory replied:

"I would have the ship well found in all matters. It was but the
other day that the Antelope returned from a voyage to the Levant.
She had lost a third of her crew from scurvy, and of the rest but
six were strong enough to pull at a rope when she came into port.
Did not the women follow Master Skimpole, her owner, through the
streets, and cry after him that he was the murderer of their
husbands, by reason of the foul victual that he had provided for
their use? No, no, it will cost more to start with, but it will be
cheaper in the end; for a weak crew often means the losing of a
ship, besides the loss of a good name. I have never carried economy
to such lengths as did Master Skimpole; but I am resolved, in the
future, that those who sail in my ships shall have good and
wholesome fare. Then, if misfortune happens, no one will be able to
point to me in the streets, and say that I fed my men worse than
dogs, and thought only of my profits and nothing of the lives of
those who served me."

Indeed Master Diggory, after a short time, quite forgot that all
this provision for the health and comfort of the crew was but the
outcome of Reuben Hawkshaw's insistence; and came to regard
himself, with a feeling of pride, as a man possessed of greater
benevolence than his fellow merchants.

A week after the refitting of the Swan was completed she was
afloat, with a large proportion of her stores in her hold. A ship
from London came round and took up her berth alongside of her,
discharging large numbers of bales and cases into her; together
with six cannon, in addition to those she before carried, and a
large store of ammunition. This naturally gave rise to fresh talk
in the town.

"They say that you are fitting the Swan out for a pirate, Master
Beggs," one of the merchants said to him; "for twelve cannon are
more than a peaceful trader can positively require."

"Yes, if she is to meet with none but peaceful people, neighbor;
but if she meets with those who are not peaceful, at all, she needs
just as much defense as if she were a ship of war. Master Hawkshaw
had much ado to beat off the Moorish pirates who attacked him on
his last voyage; and as the present one will be longer, and more
dangerous, he has put stress upon me to add much to her armament.
She will have valuable cargo on her return voyage, and he has
strongly urged upon me to provide such means of defense as may
ensure her being able to beat off any who meddle with her; besides,
as far as I can read the course of politics, it seems to me that
our alliance with Spain is well nigh at an end, and before the Swan
is on her return we may be at war with her. This in itself is good
reason why I should give my master the means of defending himself
stoutly.

"The money spent on the guns is not wasted. They will be none the
worse for keeping; and should the Swan, on her next voyage, go into
a safer line of trade, I can sell them for as much as they now cost
me."

In the meantime, Reuben Hawkshaw had been carefully and quietly
picking a crew. He was going to take with him fully twice as many
as had, before, sufficed to navigate the Swan. Of the forty men who
had sailed with him he had lost nine, and five others had not
sufficiently recovered from their wounds to sail with him again. Of
the remainder he engaged twenty, all of whom were stout and willing
fellows who would, he knew, sail with him wherever he bid them. The
remaining six, being given to grumbling, he would have none of,
good sailors though they were.

"Half-a-dozen grumblers are enough to spoil a whole crew," he said.

There were, therefore, some sixty new hands to engage. Towards
these he found eighteen who had sailed with him on previous
voyages, and were glad enough to rejoin him; for he had the name of
being a good captain, considerate to his men; one who would be
obeyed, but who did not harass his crew, and did all he could, in
reason, to make them comfortable.

The others were picked up carefully, one by one. For this purpose
he took some of his best men aside, and confided to them,
privately, that the present voyage was to be out of the ordinary,
and that he needed not only stout fellows but willing and cheerful
ones: men who would take hardships without grumbling, and who, with
a prospect of good reward in addition to their pay, would go
without question where they were told, and do as they were
ordered--were it to singe the beard of the Grand Turk, himself, in
his own palace. He charged them, therefore, to find for him men of
this kind, among their relations, or men who had sailed with him.

"I would rather," he said, "have landsmen, providing they are
strong and stout hearted, than sailors, however skillful, who are
given to grumbling and disaffection. We shall have plenty of good
sailors on board, and the others will soon learn their business;
therefore, choose you not for seamanship, but rather for
willingness and good temper. And broach not the subject to any
unless you feel assured, beforehand, that they will be willing to
join; for I want not the matter talked about. Therefore those who
join are to keep the matter private, and are not to come on board
until the night before we get up our anchors. We are taking a much
stronger crew than usual, for we have many guns that need working,
if it comes to fighting."

As these instructions were given separately, none of the twelve men
he spoke to knew that the others had received similar instructions;
and that instead of forty men, as usual, the Swan was to carry
nearly ninety.

As to the officers, Reuben Hawkshaw needed none others than those
who had before sailed with him. The two mates had each been with
him for upwards of ten years, and had learned their business under
his eye; and he intended, although he had not as yet told him so,
to rate Roger as third mate. His boatswain would go in the same
capacity as before; and he shipped, as gunner, one who had served
for some years in a king's ship in that rank, and was well
acquainted with the working of ordnance.

Mistress Mercy had, of course, heard from her gossips of the talk
that was going on, concerning the unusual preparations that were
being made, by her husband, for the forthcoming voyage of the Swan;
and the trader was often put to his wits' end by her questions on
the subject. His professions of benevolence towards the crew, and
his explanations of his reasons for her powerful armament had
sufficed for others, but they by no means satisfied her.

"Do you think, Diggory Beggs," she asked, indignantly, "that after
all these years I do not know you as well as I do the contents of
my linen chest? I have never before known you open your purse
strings one inch wider than was necessary. Have I not always had to
ask, until I am verily ashamed, before I can get a new gown for
myself, or a decent cloak for the girls? You have ever been hard
fisted with your money, and never disposed to spend a groat, save
on good occasion. There is not the wife of a trader of your
standing in Plymouth but makes a braver show than I do, when we
walk on the hoe on holidays or feast days.

"There is something at the bottom of all this I don't understand;
but mark you, Diggory, I am not to be kept in the dark. As your
wife, I have a right to know why you are throwing about good and
lawful money. I toil and slave to keep your house decent and
respectable, at small cost; but I shall do so no longer. If you can
afford to throw money into the gutter in one way, you can in
another; and people will cry shame on you, when, as they say, you
are pampering up your sailors, in such manner as will cause
discontent among all others in the port, while your wife and
daughters are walking about in homespun!"

Mistress Mercy did not succeed in extracting the information she
desired from her husband, who was, however, forced to fall back
upon the defense that he had his reasons, but that he was pledged
to say nothing concerning them.

"Pledged!" she replied, scornfully. "And to whom are you pledged, I
should like to know? I thought you were pledged to me, and that you
were bound to cherish and comfort me; which means, of course, that
you were to have no secrets from me, and to tell me all that I
desire to know."

But though Diggory kept the secret, albeit with much trouble; and
with many misgivings as to what would happen in the future, when
his wife came to learn of the important venture he had undertaken,
without consulting her; she nevertheless succeeded so far that, in
order to pacify her, he was obliged to allow her a free hand in
choosing, from his magazines, such pieces of cloth and silk for
herself and the girls as she had a fancy to. This permission she
did not abuse as to quality, for she knew well enough what was
becoming, in the way of dress, for the wife of a merchant; and that
it was not seemly, for such a one, to attire herself in apparel
suited for the wives of nobles, and ladies of the Court. But
Diggory groaned in spirit, although he prudently said nothing, at
seeing that she took advantage of the present position to carry off
a store which would amply suffice, for at least two or three years'
wearing, for herself and the girls.

"You have done me a parlous ill turn, Cousin Reuben," he said sadly
to his cousin, "by bidding me hide this matter from my wife. A few
more such secrets, and I should be a ruined man. Never before have
I known her seized with a desire for such prodigality of vesture. I
have looked upon her, all these years, as a sober and discreet
woman, well content to wear what was quiet and becoming to her
station; but now--truly my heart melted when I saw how she fingered
the goods, and desired John, my assistant, to cut off such lengths
as she desired from some of my goodliest cloths."

"Tut, tut, cousin; you exaggerate things greatly. It is no wonder
that Mistress Mercy, seeing that you are flourishing greatly in
trade, and able to spend your money freely, should deem it but
fitting that she, as your wife, should make a braver show than
heretofore. Besides, the girls are growing up, and need to be a
little bright and gay. Why, man, there are many London citizens,
who could not count their broad pieces with you, whose wives spend
many times as much, every year, on their attire as Mistress Mercy
has cost you now."

"Well, well, Reuben, there may be something in what you say; but no
more secrets, or there is no saying what wild extravagance she
might take in her head, next time. She might quarrel with the house
and insist upon a new one, furnished from top to bottom; or set her
heart on a coach, with running footmen. No, no more secrets, or I
shall be having her so set herself up that I shall be no more
master of my own house."

Roger was plied with many questions by his cousins, who tried
alternately coaxing, and pouting, to learn from him why it was
that, as all told them, preparations were being made for the voyage
of the Swan such as were unknown, before, at Plymouth. All he could
reply was that the ship was only being victualed as all ships ought
to be whose owners cared, as they should do, for the comfort and
health of their crews. More than that he could not say. He would
not deny that he had certain ideas of his own as to the voyage; but
if Cousin Diggory and his father thought it well to make no talk
about the matter, it was not for him to say what were his thoughts
about it.

"But we would tell nobody," Dorothy urged. "Don't you think we
could keep a secret, as well as you can?"

"That is just it, Cousin Dorothy! Don't you see, if I were to tell
you, it would be a proof that I could not keep a secret? And then,
if you told it, I could not blame you for blabbing. I don't say
there is any secret; but if there is, I must keep it."

"I know that you are going into danger, Reuben; else you would not
have all those great guns they say there are, on board."

"The great guns will keep us out of danger, you see. The more guns,
the less danger."

"Come away, Agnes," Dorothy said, with an assumption of
stateliness. "Cousin Roger is altogether too smart for us. Let him
keep his secrets, if he will; and let us go and help mother with
her sewing."

And so, for the last two or three days before the Swan sailed,
there was a coolness between Roger and the girls, as well as
between Diggory Beggs and his wife.

At last the day came when everything was complete, the water casks
filled, and the last packet and bale stored away in the hold; and
even Reuben Hawkshaw admitted that there was nothing else that he
could think of, requisite either for the safety or navigation of
the ship, or the provisioning or health of the crew.

The order was passed round for all the old hands to be aboard
before sunset, that evening, together with those who had been
openly engaged to fill up the vacancies. As for the rest, the
twelve recruiters each received private orders. Three of them were
to bring down the men they had engaged to the wharf, abreast of the
Swan, at eight o'clock; and to go off in the boat which would be
awaiting them there, under charge of Master Standing. Three others
were to come half an hour later. The other six were to bring down
their men at daybreak--so that all would get on board unnoticed.

The last meal at Master Diggory's was but a dull one. The subject
of the Swan and her voyage had, by common consent, been dropped
altogether for the last day or two; and it was not until supper was
over that Mistress Mercy, and the girls, knew that the hour of
sailing was at hand. Then Reuben spoke up:

"We go on board tonight, Cousin Mercy, and shall get up our anchor
and loose our sails the first thing in the morning. I know that you
have been somewhat aggrieved, at not learning more about our
intentions; but it was not Cousin Diggory's fault that you have not
been told."

"I do not seek to pry into matters which my husband thinks fit to
conceal from me," she said, coldly.

"Nevertheless, cousin, you are hurt; and I cannot blame you, seeing
that it is natural that a woman should like to know what is passing
around her. But I wish, before I go, that you should see that
Diggory is not to blame in this matter. There is no harm in my
telling you, now, that he stands not alone in this venture, but
that others have joined with him. Now he himself, knowing you to be
a circumspect woman, who could be trusted to keep to yourself
anything that you might learn, would willingly have taken you into
our councils; but all women are not so discreet, and matters which
it is very important should be kept secret might have leaked out,
had it not been proposed that all concerned in the matter should
bind themselves solemnly to each other, to say no words about it,
even to their wives; and thus, you see, Diggory's lips have been
sealed, and that not by any mistrust of you.

"It may be some time before it will be prudent for the truth about
this voyage to be known, but in good time those concerned may think
fit to relieve each other of this agreement they have entered upon,
and to let their wives, and others who may be depended upon, into
the secret. I wanted to tell you this before we sailed, for I
should not like to go away feeling that you cherished aught of
malice against me; for I have seen for some time that you have held
me, as well as your husband, to blame. We are going on a long
voyage, Cousin Mercy, and one from which it may well be that none
of us will ever return to this good town of Plymouth. I am somewhat
breaking my promise in saying this, and I rely upon you, and the
girls, repeating it to no one. It is a long and venturous journey,
and one not without much peril; but if it succeeds, it will bring
much honor, as well as wealth, to all concerned.

"And now, Cousin Mercy, as I have told you so much as that, I trust
that we may part as we have always parted, in friendly and kindly
fashion. You and your husband have been good friends to me and my
boy, and have gone in that matter far beyond the ordinary bounds of
kinship; and I should not like to start upon this voyage knowing
that there was a cloud between us."

Mistress Mercy rose from her seat, walked round to Reuben Hawkshaw,
and kissed him.

"Forgive me, Cousin Reuben," she said, "for my cross looks and
shrewish ways. I see that I have acted altogether wrongly in the
matter, and that neither you nor Diggory are to blame. I knew not
that others were concerned, and thought that a mystery was being
made because it was considered that, did I know it, I should run
out and blab it in the streets of Plymouth. Now I know how it is, I
am well content as to that; but not so, at the thought of this
unknown peril into which you are about to run, and I wonder that
Diggory should adventure your life, and that of Roger, upon such an
expedition."

"It is my own proposal, Cousin Mercy, and Diggory has but yielded
to my wishes. Roger is as hot for the adventure as I am, and we are
both content to run what risks we may encounter, for the honor
which we shall gain if we return safely home.

"And now, Roger, let us be going. Leave takings are sad things, and
the shorter they are made, the better."

While these words had been said the girls, who sat on either side
of Roger, were silently making their peace with him, by furtive
squeezes of his hands below the table; and they burst into tears,
as Roger and his father rose.

"Goodbye, Agnes," Roger said.

"Goodbye, Dorothy," and as he kissed her he whispered, "if I
return, I will bring you the prettiest trinkets ever seen in
Plymouth."

"Bring back yourself, Roger, and I shall be more than content," she
replied.

In another minute they were gone, Diggory Beggs taking his hat and
starting with them; telling his wife that he should not return
until morning, as he should go on board the Swan with them, and
remain until she sailed.

"You will not go before daybreak, Cousin Reuben?" Mistress Mercy
asked.

"No; it will more likely be an hour after sunrise before we weigh
anchor."

"Then I and the girls will be down on the wharf, to see the last of
you and wave our kerchiefs, and wish you a pleasant voyage and a
safe return."



Chapter 3: The Voyage.


GREAT was the surprise of the original crew of the Swan, when boat
load after boat load of fresh hands arrived. They themselves had
been quietly told that the voyage was likely to be one of unusual
length, and that none save those willing and ready to stay away, as
long as might be required, were to sail in the Swan on her present
venture. There was, therefore, a general idea current among them
that Master Hawkshaw had some adventure quite out of the ordinary
in his mind; and the news that some heavy guns had arrived from
London for her, had confirmed their opinion as to the voyage.

"Let us have no loud talk, tonight," Reuben Hawkshaw ordered. "When
we get our sails spread tomorrow, and are well out of port, you can
talk to your hearts' content; but the night is still, and I want
not that attention of any on shore should be called to the ship.
There has been more foolish talk than enough about her already; so
turn in to rest, lads, without ado. The boatswain will serve you
each out a pottle of cider, such as you never drank on board ship
before, I warrant me, and which is a sample of what you will have,
all the voyage. When you have tossed that off, let each lie down as
he can find space. We will divide into watches, and settle as to
each man's place, tomorrow.

"Pengarvan, set four hands aside to go on shore, with the boat, an
hour before daybreak. Tell them off to sleep where you can lay
hands upon them, easily. Keep the boat alongside, and make off to
the wharf as noiselessly as you can; but I shall be on deck, then,
and will give you further orders."

The second mate only replied, "Ay, ay, Captain Hawkshaw," for he
was a man of but few words.

Reuben Hawkshaw was not fond of Cornishmen, but he made an
exception in the case of Pengarvan--indeed, although their borders
joined, there was little liking among Cornish and Devon men for
each other.

"They are black, ill-conditioned dogs," Reuben Hawkshaw would say;
"good sailors, I own; none better; but glum and surly in their
ways, and with nothing joyous in their natures. It seems to me that
working in the darkness--in those holes of theirs, underground--has
infected the spirits of the whole county; as it might well do,
seeing that, as everyone knows, there are little people who guard
the treasures of the mines; and who, if they cannot do bodily hurt
to those who delve for metals, can yet infect their spirits with a
black melancholy, and do them other grievous harm.

"So when Pengarvan came to me as a boy, on the quay here, and asked
me to take him with me to sea, I did not much like doing so; for I
saw at once, by his speech, that he was Cornish; but I did not like
to turn him away, for he said that he was willing, and accustomed
to the sea. So I gave him a trial, and he has turned out a
first-rate sailor. He is chary of speech, and not given to jest or
laughter; but he is always quick, and willing to obey orders;
taking whatever comes in good part, and bearing himself just the
same, in storm, as in sunshine.

"I know naught of his history. The Swan has been his home since he
first came on board, twelve years ago. As long as she is afloat, he
never leaves her. When she is laid down for repairs, he takes the
nearest lodging on hand, and abides there till she is afloat again.
I believe that he comes from Fowey, and guess that he got into some
trouble or other, and had to run for it. But that's nothing to me.
I want no better man; and know that, whatever comes, I can rely
upon Pengarvan to stand by me, and the ship, to the last."

If the men were astonished at the thirty new hands who came on
board on the previous evening, they were still more astonished when
as many more embarked in the morning. The newcomers were ordered to
keep in the forecastle, and in the quarters under it, until the
Swan was well away from land.

"There will be a good many eyes turned on the ship, as soon as we
are seen to be shaking out our canvas," Reuben said; "and there is
no need to set their tongues wagging, by showing more men on deck
than we usually carry."

The captain and Diggory Beggs talked late on into the night. They
went over all the ground again; and Reuben brought out the map of
the islands, and showed where he intended to touch.

"I think not to do much trading there," he said. "There is gold in
Hispaniola and Cuba; but the captain I got the chart from said
there was no very great store there, and that the natives had but
little of it when the Spaniards first arrived; seeing that it took
trouble and labor to obtain, and they are by nature altogether
averse to hard work, and moreover place but little value on the
gold. But there were rumors among them that, farther west, there
was a land where gold was in great plenty; and where there was a
powerful people, dressed in gay attire, and wearing great bracelets
and necklaces of gold.

"So far, the Spaniards have not found this land; though they have
sailed down the coast a long way to the south, and northward as far
as the point that Master Cabot reached, when he sailed down from
Newfoundland; but due west they have never sailed far, and have
found the sea ever stretching away in front of them; so that it is
clear that either the great mainland is split in two at this point,
or there is a vast bay. This I shall try to discover, and if we
find these people of whom the Indians speak, we may well return
loaded down with gold.

"My advice to you, Cousin Diggory, is that you and your partners
should continue to keep silent as to this voyage of ours. If we
come not back, and after a time there is a talk here that we have
gone to the Indies, the news may be carried to London; and you may
be questioned, and may be blamed mightily for undertaking such an
adventure, without the king's permission; and all sorts of harm may
fall upon you. Success would, in my mind, altogether excuse you;
and you will be able to offer so great a present to the king that
he will be mighty contented. But if you fail, it will be otherwise.
Therefore my advice is, till the Swan is anchored in the port say
nothing about her. It were best, from the moment we sail, to write
off all that has been spent upon her as money lost, just the same
as if you knew for certain that she had gone down as soon as she
was out of sight of land.

"Folks will ask you what has become of her, and you will truly say
that you have had no news; and when months pass on, and she comes
not, you will shake your head, and say that you begin to fear that
evil has befallen her. She may have gone down in a storm, or been
cast on some rocky coast and all perished, or been captured by
pirates.

"If the friends of the sailors make a stir, and go to the
magistrates, you have but to show the copy of the letter of
instructions which we drew up the other day, laying it down that I
was to make for the African Straits, and to put into no Portuguese
or Spanish port by the way; that I was then to shape my course for
the island of Malta, and to take in fresh stores of food and water
there; then that I was to pass round the southernmost point of
Greece, and sail upwards to Constantinople, and there to dispose of
such portion of my cargo as I could sell at good profit, buying
goods suited for our market with the monies I received; and if my
hold was full I was then to return straight to England; but if I
had still some of my cargo unsold, I could trade as best seemed to
me among the Eastern Islands, and with the ports of Asia.

"There would be your instructions to show, and as it is notorious
to all that you provisioned the ship in the best manner possible,
and laid in greater stores than ordinary of all things necessary
for the voyage, none can hold you to blame, in any way, if the
chances of the seas have proved too masterful for us, and the Swan
returns no more.

"Should we carry out our enterprise to the fullest, and gain great
store of gold, I shall, if it is possible, come not directly home, but
to some port--maybe in Ireland, maybe in the Low Countries--whence we
can send word to you. Upon hearing of our coming there, I should
advise you and your fellow adventurers to journey straight to London,
to gain audience with one of the ministers, and tell him you have a
matter of great importance to communicate to the king himself; and
that you should then lay before his majesty an account of what you
have done, and pray him to pardon your boldness, which was due to
your desire for the honor of the country as much as to wish for profit,
and beg him to accept such share of the gold as you may think fit. I
shall, of course, when I write let you know about what weight of the
metal I have on board. In that way, when the ship comes into port all
will be smooth sailing for you; whereas if I come unannounced, there
is no saying what share of your profits his majesty may think fit to
take."

"I think the plan is a very good one, indeed, Reuben; and I will
follow it to the letter. When think you may I begin to expect to
hear news of you?"

"It is difficult to say, seeing that we know neither the distance
we may have to sail, nor the difficulties we may have to meet with,
nor the winds and currents of those regions. I should say fifteen
months at the earliest; and if double that time passes, without
your hearing aught, then I should say you may give up all hope of
ever seeing us again."

"I am disposed even now, Reuben, to regret that I ever embarked in
this venture--not, as you surely know, from any fear of losing the
money that I have put into it, but from the risk that will be run
by you and the lad Roger, who are both very dear to me."

"Whatever comes, you must not blame yourself in that matter,
Diggory. You have only yielded to my solicitations, and if we go to
our death it is our choosing, and none of thine."

"Should the Swan come back without you, Reuben--as may possibly be,
for if there be any danger you are sure to expose yourself in the
front of it--Roger shall be as a son to me; and shall either in
time have a ship to command, and a share in her, as thou hast; and
he shall come in our business, when he has had enough of adventure
at sea, and is willing to settle down on land."

Reuben wrung his cousin's hand silently, and then said:

"Let us take one more glass of strong water, Diggory, and then get
a few hours' sleep before morning. It is past midnight now, and I
must be up by four; for at that hour the boat must go off for the
first batch of our new hands."

Day broke, just as the last batch of men were brought on board. As
soon as these had gone below the whistle was sounded, the old crew
came up on deck, and the preparations for making sail commenced.
The anchor was hove short, the lashings of the sails were loosened,
the flags run up to the mast heads, the last casks and bales
lowered into the hold, the hatches put on, and the decks washed
down.

Before these preparations were all complete, a little group was
seen, standing at the end of the wharf.

"There is your good wife, Diggory, and the girls. She has kept her
word to be up, betimes, to see the last of us."

At last all was ready, and Diggory shook hands with Reuben, and
turned to Roger, when the captain said:

"The lad can go in charge of the boat that takes you ashore,
Diggory, and just say another word of parting to them there."

In five minutes, Roger stood on the wharf.

"I cannot wait, Cousin Mercy," he said, "for all is ready for
hoisting the anchor; but my father said I might just come ashore,
for one more goodbye."

"May God protect you, Roger," Mistress Mercy said, as she folded
him in a motherly embrace. "We shall all pray for you, daily and
nightly, until you return. Goodbye, Roger! Don't imperil your life
needlessly, but be prudent and careful."

"For your sake, Dorothy," he whispered, as he kissed her.

"Yes, for my sake, Roger," she said softly.

Agnes hung round his neck, crying loudly, and her mother had to
unclasp the child's fingers.

"God bless you all," said Roger hoarsely, and then ran down the
steps, and leaped into the stern of the boat.

When he gained the deck of the Swan, the boat was hoisted in, and
the men began to heave round the windlass. As soon as the anchor
was up, the sails were sheeted home; and the Swan, yielding to the
light breeze off the land, began to make her way through the water.
Roger, from the poop, waved his cap in reply to the signals of
farewell from shore; and then, running down into the waist, busied
himself with the work of the ship, until they were too far away
from the land for the figures there to be any longer visible.

The rest of the crew now came on deck, and all were mustered in
watches. Reuben Hawkshaw, standing on the edge of the poop, then
said a few words to them.

"Men," he said, "I dare say there is some wonderment among you, in
finding yourselves so strong a crew, and at seeing the Swan so well
provided with guns, and with all other necessaries. You will learn,
in good time, all about it; but at present it is best, for many
reasons, that you should know nothing about the matter. We may be
overhauled by a king's ship; we may meet with foul weather, and
have to put back into port; and a loose tongue might do us grievous
damage. It is enough for you to know that where the ship is going
you are going; that she is stored with provisions of such quality
as was never put on board a trader before; that everything will be
done for your comfort. As to myself, I am content to know that I
have a crew of eighty-five stout Devonshire lads under me, and that
we can give an account of ourselves, whosoever may meet us. Those
who have sailed with me before know that I do my best for my men,
that there will be no harsh words or violence on board this ship,
save they are well merited. Discipline, order, and obedience I will
have, and that strictly. Above all, I will have no grumbling. A
grumbling crew is a useless crew, and a sick crew; while a cheerful
crew can meet, with confidence, whatever befalls them; but I think
not that I have any grumblers on board, since every man has been
carefully chosen. A merry heart goes all the way, as the saying has
it, and I want this crew to be a happy one.

"So far as the order of the ship permits it, you shall have every
indulgence. At first you will find yourselves pressed for space,
but you will soon eat and drink room for yourselves. The stores to
be first used are all down in the fore hold, and I reckon that, in
three weeks or a month, that will be cleared; and there will then
be room for all to lie in shelter, when we are in harbor; and the
present accommodation is sufficient for the watch below, providing
all sleep quietly, and have good conscience.

"And now, to work. While you get everything tidy and in good
shipshape, the cooks will get to work at the coppers; and I can
promise you a good breakfast, washed down by sound cider, such as
you had last night."

The men gave a cheer, and were soon at work, under the direction of
their officers. It mattered little to them where they were going,
or what was before them. They had guessed that it was no ordinary
voyage they were going to undertake; but the thought that, wherever
it was, they were to be well kept and well cared for, satisfied
them mightily; and if fighting were to come into their way, so much
the better. With such a crew, they could well take their part
against any enemy they were likely to meet.

In the poop of the Swan there was a small saloon, extending across
the stern, and two cabins on either side of the passage leading to
it. These were occupied by the captain, the two mates, and Roger;
and they took their meals together in the saloon. In a cabin
underneath this, the three petty officers and twenty of the sailors
lived together, the main body of the crew occupying the raised
forecastle and the cabin underneath it. The galley was forward,
built up against the forecastle, and thus sheltered from heavy seas
which might sweep the waist of the vessel. Four small cannon were
mounted on the poop, two on the forecastle, the six larger guns
were in the waist--three on either side.

The breeze freshened as the Swan drew out from under the shelter of
the land, and by midday the shore had faded from the sight. The
crew had by this time settled down in their places, and sat in
groups on deck, some overhauling the contents of their sea bags,
looking over their clothes, and setting to, with needle and thread,
to make such repairs as were needed. Some of the new hands were
leaning over the side, wishing heartily that they were on shore
again. Those who had made voyages were talking to their companions
about the various ports at which they might touch, and the sights
they would behold.

All, save those suffering from the effects of the sea, were in high
good temper. As much fresh beef as was like to keep good till eaten
had been brought on board. The wind set in, the next morning,
freshly from the northeast; and with all sail set, the Swan ran
gaily before it.

"Would that this wind would blow, without a break, for another
month," Reuben Hawkshaw said, as he sat at dinner with the two
mates and Roger.

Standing and Pengarvan looked up quickly; but the latter, without a
question, again betook himself to feeding. Standing, however, laid
down his jackknife in astonishment.

"A month, Captain Hawkshaw? I should have thought four or five days
of this would give us ample westing, and that after that a westerly
breeze, somewhat from the north, would suit us best."

"Ay, ay, you would think so, Standing; but then you see, you know
not to within a good many points where our journey tendeth. Wait
till I have finished my dinner, for man cannot talk and eat
together, with comfort. Then, when my boy has removed the
trenchers, I will tell you, over an extra mug of cider, what all
this is about."

The meal lasted for some time longer, for Reuben Hawkshaw was a
good trencherman, and one not given to hurrying himself, unless
there was need; and neither of the other men were far behind their
chief, in the matter of the stowage of victuals. But at last the
meal was done, and the trenchers were carried off. The earthenware
mugs were again filled with cider, and then Reuben Hawkshaw--sitting
at one end of the table, with Roger facing him, and the mates one
on either hand--threw himself back in his settle, which he used in
right of captaincy, while the others contented themselves with stools,
and began.

"I had not thought, comrades, to broach this matter until we were
down in the latitude of the African Straits; but seeing that the
wind has taken us in charge, I see no reason for longer keeping
silent. You, who have both sailed with me for years, must have
known right well that this was no ordinary voyage--the number of
men I have taken on board, the care I have had as to the stores,
and the great number of water casks, must have told you that. You
have asked no questions, and I did not expect that you would."

"Why should we?" James Standing growled. "It mattered naught to us
where we went, as we knew we should hear, in good time."

Pengarvan said nothing, but he nodded, to show that he agreed with
the first mate.

"Well, men, our intent is this: I see not why the Spaniards should
have all the good things to themselves, and I purpose to go
a-trading with the natives, down in these new islands of theirs."

An exclamation of surprise broke from James Standing, but Pengarvan
only nodded again.

"But this is not all," Reuben went on. "So far, the Spaniards have
not gained much store of gold from these islands; but I have
learned that, among the natives, there is talk of a rich nation
lying somewhere farther to the west, where gold and riches of all
sorts abound. So far the Spaniards have not found it, having their
hands pretty well full. They have sailed down the land to the south
and, as you know, Master Cabot sailed from the north, down almost
to the latitude of these islands; but due west no man has sailed
yet, or if he has, has never returned to tell of it."

"Well, Captain Reuben," James Standing said, "as I said before, it
makes no difference to me where we go. If the Spaniards catch us
there, they will cut our throats to a surety, if they can; but if
you are ready to take your chance of that, I have nothing against
it. I feel as if I am taken aback a bit, just now, as it comes new
to me--my own fancy being that you intended to trade with the
Turkish ports and islands, and had taken a strong crew on board to
beat off any pirates that they might meet."

"And you, Pengarvan?"

"It is as I expected, Captain. I thought that you did not bring the
Spaniard on board at Cadiz, and sit plying him with wine, and
talking to him by the hour, for nothing. So when I saw what was
being done on board the Swan, it came to me that you intended to
try a venture in the Spanish main."

"Here is a map which I got from the Spaniard," Reuben said, laying
it out upon the table. "Here, you see, all the great islands are
marked in their places, with their ports and the Spanish
settlements. There are besides these, the Spaniard said, numbers of
small ones not marked on the chart. In these large islands, Cuba
and Hispaniola, the Spaniards have made themselves masters of the
people, and reduced them to slavery; and there would be no touching
at these with either safety or profit. The small ones have been
only occasionally visited, and with these we may do trade.

"Here is the line of the mainland, to the south of the islands. You
see it runs along as far as the easternmost of them, and then turns
away to the south; while from the north the mainland comes down
well nigh to Cuba. One reason, the Spaniard said, why they have not
sailed west to find out this land of gold, is that there is a great
current, which runs in between the islands and the southern land,
and sweeps out again with great force between the Bahamas and this
northern land; and that they fear being swept away by it, and
getting driven into whirlpools; and moreover they say that there
are great storms to be encountered, in the waters to the west.

"Now the fact that there is a current into, and another current out
of, this western sea, seems to show that there is no exit to the
west; and that the water that comes in at the south finds itself in
a great bay, and so is forced to pass out to the north. How great
this bay may be I know not, but surely it cannot be too great to
search. At any rate it is clear to me that, somewhere to the west,
these two great lands that we see to the north and south join. Now
that men who have, with much toil and risk, made a discovery of a
new land should claim it, for their king, seems to me fair and
right; but not that they should claim sole traffic, with lands of
whose very existence they know nothing; and therefore, although it
is true that the pope has given these western islands to Spain, I
see not how he can give to them land not, as yet, discovered.

"If there is, as the natives in the islands say, a land lying
somewhere to the west, where gold is abundant, I see no reason why,
if we are first there, we should not gather great stores. The bales
and boxes, that were brought round from London, contain a great
quantity of all the things that are, as the Spaniard told me, most
prized by the natives. Glass beads of all sorts and kinds, vessels
of brass, iron hatchets and arrowheads, hawk bells, mirrors, and
trinkets. The venture is, I admit, a perilous one; but if we
succeed, every man on board will have a share in the profit."

Reuben then explained the arrangements he had made, with the
owners, for the division of such treasure as they might bring home.

"That is a fair proposal," the first mate said; "and I doubt not
that all on board will gladly fall in with it. If we succeed, we
shall set every tongue in England wagging; and there will be plenty
of others, I warrant, who will be ready to follow our example."

"I had intended," Reuben went on, "to sail as far as the straits;
then to head for the island of Madeira and, when within sight of
it, to head away west-sou'-west. But if we carry this wind with us,
we will make straight for the islands, and thereby shall escape the
risk of being seen by vessels coming and going, as they all follow
a track south of Madeira. We can make a good fight with any
Spaniard that falls foul of us, and are as likely to take him as he
is to capture us; but I would fain keep clear of them, if I can,
since we go to trade and not to fight.

"Now I think you had best give a hint of the matter in hand to our
old crew, all of whom we can depend upon; as indeed, I hope we can
upon all, though as yet their mettle has not been tried. Take them
aside singly, and open the matter to them. In a few days I shall
tell the rest; but the matter will go more fairly, and easily, if
we have a proportion of them ready to throw up their caps, and
shout."

"Aye, aye, Captain Reuben. One bellwether will carry a whole flock
after it, but I fear not that any will want to hold back. It is
just the adventure that will suit a brave man's spirit--plenty to
see, plenty to do, the chance of a fight, and the chance of a
fortune. I should like to know what one could want, better than
that. Besides, all are in high feather at the quality of the food,
which they say the like of was never known on shipboard before; and
that goes a long way. It is the fasting man who kicks. The full one
is content, however matters go."

Pengarvan had not again opened his lips. He nodded occasionally,
and that was all his captain expected of him; but the fact that he
had guessed the destination of the ship, added to the esteem which
Reuben Hawkshaw had for his second mate.

Three days later Reuben Hawkshaw called the crew together, and
informed them of their destination. He possessed the rough
eloquence best suited for the class he was addressing, and carried
his hearers with him. He spoke as if the idea, that any of them
could shrink from undertaking such an adventure, had not entered
his mind; but assumed that they were the most fortunate of men, in
having such a chance offered to them.

"You do not yet know," he said, "how great a piece of good fortune
has befallen you, by being chosen to sail with me on this voyage.
Had the news been as much as whispered, in Plymouth, I could have
gathered a thousand volunteers in an hour. You all know how careful
have been the preparations for the voyage, how strongly we are
manned, how well we are armed, what stores of excellent provisions
and what casks of good cider and ale are in the hold.

"Now I am going to tell you what all this is for. We are going,
lads, to get gold; and if we succeed, as I doubt not we shall, each
man on his return will, in addition to his wages, have a share in
the spoil--such a share as will, I hope, make him comfortable for
life."

A loud cheer broke from the men, as they pressed forward eagerly to
listen.

"I have learned, lads," he said, "from a Spaniard who has been out
there, of a land abounding with gold, lying to the west of the
Spanish Islands. As yet, none of them have ventured thither; and I
mean that we shall be the first to reap the harvest. Why should
these Spaniards keep every good thing to themselves? We are as good
sailors as they are, and better; as good men, and better.
Therefore, I say, we will have a share of the prizes.

"We shall touch on our way at some of the islands, for wood and
water and fruit and vegetables. There are plenty of them where we
can find these, without meeting with a Spaniard. If we do meet with
one, and he tries to interfere with us, so much the worse for him.

"Then, when we have taken in what we want, we will sail west; and
if we find this land, as I doubt not we shall, we will return home
with such treasures as were never brought before into an English
port.

"You must make up your minds, lads, that it is not to be all plain
sailing, and that we may have hardships and trials to meet with;
but no true sailor shrinks from these. It is a grand adventure,
lads--an adventure that nobles and princes would be glad to share
in. There is honor and glory in it, as well as booty. We shall be
the first Englishmen who ever sailed those seas, or dared to
dispute the right of the Spaniards to keep all the treasures of the
west in their hands; and in time to come your children's children
will be proud to say, 'My grandsire was one of those who sailed in
the Swan.'"

When the captain ceased speaking, there was a shout of enthusiasm
from his hearers; not one of whom but considered himself to be one
of the most fortunate of men, in being chosen as one of the crew of
the Swan. This was an adventure, indeed. It was no mere trading
voyage, but a grand expedition. There were new lands to be seen,
there was the satisfaction of outwitting the Spaniards, there were
glory and honor and gold to be obtained.

As for hardships and danger, they recked little of them. These
always formed part of their lot; and with so well found a ship, and
so good a crew, they felt confident of being able to face anything
that might befall them.

They speedily broke up into excited groups, eagerly discussing the
news they had heard. The new hands plied the older ones with
questions, as to the general strength of the Spanish ships, the
number of men they carried, and their armament. The guns were
examined with fresh attention and admiration, and men looked along
the sights as if already, in fancy, engaging in an encounter with
the Dons. A horn of strong ale was served out to each, by the
captain's orders, to celebrate the occasion; and the men drank
success to the enterprise, shaking each other by the hand, and each
vowing to do his share, bravely.

The wind continued favorable until they had passed Madeira, which
was seen like a cloud on the port side. Three days later the breeze
dropped, and there was a stark calm, in which the Swan lay
motionless on the sea for well nigh a fortnight. The captain,
knowing well that idleness is, of all things, the most harmful to a
crew, set them to work to get up the cases of arms, and polish
their swords and pikes until they shone. Then the crew were
exercised with boarding pike and cutlass. Singlesticks and staffs,
which the captain had provided for such an occasion, were brought
up; and men were matched against each other with these--small
prizes being given to those who showed themselves the most
proficient.

Squads were told off to the great guns, and instructed how these
should best be worked by the gunner, so that each man should do his
share without hurry or confusion. He would fain have practiced them
at a mark, but this the captain would not have as, with the air so
still, the guns would be heard at a long distance, and might even
bring up some Spanish or Portuguese vessel, to inquire into the
cause of the firing--for they were now far below the line which the
ships of other nations were forbidden to cross. Nor was there great
need for practice, for to each gun was appointed, as captain, one
of the old hands accustomed to the work, who could be trusted to
send the ball straight when the time should come.

With these and other exercises, and with such sports as the sailors
could devise, the time of the calm was got through well enough.
They had now been over a month at sea; but, thanks to the honest
food and sound cider, the men's health in no way suffered, and all
were as well and hearty as upon the day when they set sail.

When the wind came, it came with sudden fury; but Reuben Hawkshaw had
heard of the sudden gales that ships sailing west had to encounter,
and took precautions as soon as it began to rise--furling up all the
great sails; passing lifelines along the sides, to which the men could
cling, if the waves washed boisterously over her; and clearing the
decks and closing up all hatchways and openings. So, though for a week
she tossed and labored in the gale, she was none the worse when it
ceased; and indeed, the seas she encountered were by no means so heavy
as those with which she had battled, on her voyage home from Spain.

While the gale lasted, Reuben Hawkshaw took every precaution to
enable him to keep his reckoning, heaving the log every half hour,
and noting constantly each change in the direction of the wind; so
that, when all was over, he could tell within fifty miles the spot
where the gale left her--for in those days the instruments of
navigation were in their infancy, and sailors relied chiefly on the
compass, and dead reckoning, to bring them safe to port, however
long their voyage might be. Reuben Hawkshaw knew of no other plan,
but as far as these went he was an excellent navigator, and was
seldom many miles out in making a landfall.

As soon as the gale abated, sail was again made on the ship, and
she proceeded on her course. In another three weeks, the mates were
seen frequently to ascend into the tops, and the news spread among
the crew that the Spanish islands lay not far ahead. The justness
of the captain's reckoning was soon proved; for at daybreak, one
morning, land was perceived directly ahead; though still lying,
like a patch of low cloud, on the horizon.

A cheer broke from those on deck, as soon as the mate proclaimed
that to a certainty it was land they saw, and the watch below came
pouring up. Another cheer saluted the captain as he came out from
his cabin--a tribute to his seamanship, in thus bringing them
straight across the ocean, on a path that no Englishman had ever
before sailed.

He, with the two mates, at once ascended to the fore top From here,
as the morning brightened, two other points of land could be seen,
far away on either hand.

"We are evidently approaching small islands. This is just what we
hoped. My fear was that we might strike Hispaniola, or Porto Rico.
When we get nearer land we will lower our topsails, so as not to be
so easily made out from the land. Now we will go below, and try and
mark off our place on the chart."



Chapter 4: Among The Islands.


"Now, let us go through our calculations again," the captain said
when they entered his cabin.

"How long will you be, Captain?" the first mate asked.

"Half an hour, Standing."

"Then I will come again or, if you want me before that, send for
me," and the first mate went out on deck again, for though well
skilled to handle a ship in all weathers, and as brave and hardy a
seaman as sailed out of Plymouth, James Standing could neither read
nor write; and though in a rough sort of way he could reckon the
course a ship should lie, and make allowance for leeway and
currents and baffling winds, and could bring a ship into any port
in England or the Low Countries, he was of no use in a matter of
this kind.

Pengarvan was a good scholar, and Reuben had taught him what he
knew of navigation, and always made him keep a log from the time
when he first became a mate; at first comparing their calculations
every day, and then but once a week; arguing over the allowances
each had made for tide and leeway; and sometimes finding to his
surprise, on arriving in port, that Pengarvan's calculations were
even nearer to the truth than his own.

This was a great satisfaction to him, for he felt that, if aught
should happen to himself when on a voyage, Pengarvan could be
trusted to bring the Swan home, as safely and surely as he could
himself. Roger had, for the last two years, been going through the
same schooling; but as yet he was very far from attaining accuracy,
being unwilling to make sufficient allowance for the great leeway
that a vessel, in those days, made with the wind abeam.

"Now, Pengarvan," Reuben said in great glee, "bring out your log
book. We have not compared notes since we started, for till we
expected to reach land there was no occasion to do so, as our
general course was clear enough. Now let us see where you put her.

"And you, too, Roger; let us see what hand you have made of it.

"I went through my calculations yesterday, and I am sure that there
is no mistake in the figures. If I am right, this is the island
that we see ahead, the one called Samona; while that we see dimly
away on the port hand is Mariguana. I don't see, by this map, any
land marked that could be that which we see on the starboard hand.

"Now, what do you make of it?"

"I put it more than a degree to the southeast, Captain; and believe
that the three islands we see are those marked as the Caicos: the
Great Caicos in the center, North and East on either hand."

"And you, Roger, what do you make of it?"

"According to my calculation, father, we ought to be full two
hundred miles from land, and heading straight for Abaco, the
northernmost of these islands."

The captain laughed, and even Pengarvan smiled.

"I fear, Roger, it would be hardly safe to leave the ship in your
hands, at present. You are some six hundred miles away from
Pengarvan's islands, and but seventy less from mine.

"Well, Pengarvan, whether you or I be right, we may congratulate
ourselves; for we have made a near cast, indeed, seeing that it is
eight weeks since we left England, and more than six since we
sailed out of sight of Madeira; and that we traversed a sea
altogether strange to us, and of whose currents we know nothing. We
are both right, to a day, in our reckoning of distance; and neither
of us need feel hurt, if the other turns out right, at finding
himself but sixty miles out, on a voyage of such length as this.

"I headed for this point because, as I said, we must steer clear of
the great islands; which are, as you know, wholly in the possession
of the Spaniards, who have dispossessed the inhabitants, and use
them as slaves for working the plantations and mines. As you see by
the chart, they have no posts in all these islands, running from
here northwest, nearly up to the mainland; except a small post at
San Salvador. Now we will coast up through these islands, till we
get within sight of Columbus Point, at the southerly end of San
Salvador; for that was the island, you know, that was first
discovered by him in '92. Then we will strike westward to Andros,
and after that shape her course due west. This will take us north
of the west end of Cuba, and well out of sight of land; but we must
be careful of our navigation, for as you see it is written here:

"'Small islands, innumerable, scattered among those marked here;
these being the principal. Many of these islands are low, and show
but little above the water. Sailing is very perilous, and not to be
attempted at night.'

"You see, in this course we shall have the advantage of being well
out of the ordinary line of passage of the Spaniards, who shape
their course more to the southward, make Porto Rico their first
landfall, and then have the two great islands, Hispaniola and Cuba,
lying straight before them; free, as it seems, by the chart, from
any dangers to navigation.

"Roger, from this evening we will compare our log books day by day,
so that you may learn where it is that you have gone wrong. But I
can guess how it is. The wind is blowing chiefly from the east, and
you will never make allowance enough for drift; and I have told you
over and over again that, with a light wind on our beam, we drive a
mile to leeward for every two we go on our course. There are many
ships which will drift nigh a mile for every mile they sail, in
light winds. When the wind is brisk, and we are going fast through
the water, then we drift but little, not more perhaps than one mile
to six or seven."

"But why is that, father? How is it that a light wind blows us away
sideways; and that a strong wind, instead of blowing us more, blows
us less?"

"That I cannot tell you, Roger. You must leave those questions for
wiser heads to settle. I only know that it is so--of that there is
no doubt at all; but why, I have not the least idea.

"How does it strike you, Pengarvan?"

The Cornishman shook his head.

"I have thought it over, Captain, many times. It seems to me,
sometimes, that I have a sort of notion why it is; but it is not
clear, even to myself. I could not put it into words."

The first mate now looked into the cabin.

"Here we are, James. Pengarvan puts her here, opposite these three
little islands. I put her here some sixty miles away."

"It matters not at all, that I can see, which it is," Standing
said. "One island is as good as another, so that it has got water
and fruit. The tubs are getting low, and the men are beginning to
need a change of diet; so I hope, Captain, you will lay her to at
the first we come to, and get what we want, whether it is Spaniard
or native we have to fight for it."

"I hope we shall have to fight neither, Standing; but I don't think
we are likely to meet with Spaniards--for all the islands in these
groups are small ones, and the navigation dangerous. As for the
Indians, I fear we may not find them very friendly, seeing that
they will, of course, take us for Spaniards, whom they have little
reason to love. Still, when they see that our intentions are
peaceable, and that we wish only to trade, they may abate their
hostility."

In three hours they were close to the island that they had first
seen, which proved to be much nearer than they had supposed, at
first sight. It was low, and thickly covered with trees, and of
only a few miles' circumference.

"There is no chance of finding the natives hostile here," Reuben
Hawkshaw said. "Their numbers can be but scanty, and the only fear
is that they may hide themselves in the woods at our approach, and
refuse to have dealing with us.

"Get the lead ready to sound, James, and put some grease on the
bottom, that we may see what kind of holding ground it is."

As the sun had risen the wind had fallen, and the Swan was now
moving very slowly through the water. They were about a mile from
the land when the log was first hove.

"Eighteen fathoms, Captain," the mate reported, adding when the
lead was hauled up, "and a sandy bottom."

Casting the lead regularly, they sailed on until within little more
than a quarter of a mile of the shore, and there dropped anchor in
six fathoms of water.

"I shouldn't like to be caught in a gale here," the captain said;
"but if it did come on to blow, we could get up our anchor and sail
round to the other side of the island, where we should be in
shelter."

"There are some natives, father," Roger, who was watching the
shore, exclaimed. "They are waving green branches."

"Wave a white flag, Roger. Fasten anything white to a boat hook,
and wave it. They may understand that, as the white flag is in use
by all nations as a sign of peace, and they may have seen the
Spaniards use it.

"Get one of the boats lowered, James--the long boat will be the
best--let its crew take their arms with them, but lay them under
the seats, so as to land in peaceable guise. I myself will go
ashore in her, and see what are the intentions of the natives. Get
a couple of guns loaded, and if you see they attack us, fire a shot
over their heads into the woods. That will be enough to frighten
them. However, I think not that we shall have trouble."

A couple of boxes had already been got on deck by the captain's
orders, and some strings of glass beads, hawk bells, and other
articles of trade taken out.

"You can come with me, Roger," the captain said; and in a few
minutes the boat rowed towards the shore.

Eight men sat at the oars, and eight others were bestowed in the
bow and stern. She would have carried twice as many, but the
captain wished to avoid any show of force.

The group of natives had increased, by the time the boat reached
the shore; and the captain saw that they consisted of two men who
were apparently chiefs, and some thirty of inferior rank. They
continued to wave green branches, and their attitude was so
peaceful that the captain did not hesitate to leap ashore, as soon
as the boat touched the strand.

"You follow me, Roger; and you others keep your hands on your arms,
ready to use them. But sit quiet, and do not show your weapons
unless there be occasion."

The chiefs advanced with a timid air towards the newcomers; and, on
approaching, saluted in an attitude of deep humility, using the
Spanish word Amigos.

"Amigos--Friends," repeated the captain, in a cheerful tone.

Roger gazed with intense interest upon these strange beings. They
were, in color, but little darker than the Moors who had tried to
capture the Swan, on her last voyage. They were of good height, but
of slender figure. Their countenances were soft and almost
feminine, with large dark eyes and mild and gentle expression. They
had no hair upon their faces; that on their heads was long and
black. Round their heads were light gold bands, from which rose
plumes of colored feathers. They were naked above the waist, save
that over one shoulder cotton cloths, ornamented with fantastic
patterns wrought in bright feathers, were lightly thrown.

From the waist they wore cotton petticoats, reaching to the knees.
Both had belts decorated by shells, worked into intricate patterns;
and from similar belts, crossing the shoulder, hung quivers filled
with small arrows. They had necklaces and bracelets of bright
beads, of European manufacture; and both carried light spears,
their bows hanging from their shoulders.

Their followers were similarly dressed, save that the fillets round
their heads, instead of being gold, were strips of skin decorated
with shells and beads, and the mantles were of plain cotton.

The captain took from his pouch two necklaces of large blue beads,
and presented them to the chiefs, and also gave to each of them a
small hatchet. These they received with tokens of gratitude; being
specially pleased with the hatchets, which were articles vastly
prized by the natives, and rarely bestowed upon them by the
Spaniards, who were very chary of presenting the natives with
anything that could be used as a weapon.

The captain then made a sign to the natives to approach, and
bestowed a necklace of smaller beads upon each. He next called to
the sailors, and bade them come ashore, bringing with them only
their hangers; for there was no doubt that the natives were
friendly.

While they were doing so, four of the natives, at the order of
their chiefs, brought forward large baskets; beautifully plaited
and, as Roger judged, made of the tender bark of some tree. The
chiefs took these from their attendants and, opening them, placed
them before the captain with a gesture of humility. They were
filled with fruits, all of which were of kinds such as neither
Roger, nor his father, had seen before.

The sailors now brought forward an empty barrel, and the captain
signified that they required water. One or two billets of wood were
also shown, and the captain signified, by action, that he wished
his men should be allowed to cut wood, to carry on board ship. He
also pointed to the baskets of fruit, and then showed some more
strings of beads, and some hawk bells, intimating his desire to
trade.

The natives readily comprehended the gestures. Pointing to the keg,
they intimated, by signs, that the ship should be moved round to
the other side of the island; and that fruit would be taken to them
there.

The men would, gladly enough, have wandered at once into the woods
to look at the trees and flowers, which differed widely from
anything they had ever before seen; but the captain said:

"We shall have time enough for that, men. Let us get off with this
fruit. Our comrades on board will be thirsting for their share.
Then we will get the ship round on the other side; and all will
have an opportunity to go ashore."

As soon as they got on board, a portion of the fruit was set aside,
for the use of the officers, and the rest divided among the crew.
Although they were ignorant of the names, the men enjoyed hugely
the pineapples, guavas, and custard apples that formed the major
portion of the contents of the baskets; and cheerfully set about
the work of getting up their anchor, and setting the sails.

But the wind had now entirely dropped, and the Swan scarce moved
through the water. So anxious, however, were the men to land, that
they gladly obeyed the captain's orders to get out all the boats
and tow her--although the heat was so great that, at any other
time, they would have shrunk from such a labor.

As soon as they reached the other side of the island, the anchor
was dropped and, the men on board having already made everything
snug, Captain Reuben called those who had been towing out of the
boats.

"My lads," he said, "I wish to say a few words, before you land. In
the first place, you cannot all go. It would never do to leave the
ship without sufficient hands on board to fight her, seeing that at
any moment a Spaniard may come round one end of the island or the
other, and fall upon us. Consequently, half must remain on board,
and take their turn on shore tomorrow. I wish to give no advantage
to any; therefore the boatswain shall put two pieces of folded
paper in his hat, one being blank and the other having a cross upon
it. If the blank paper is drawn, the starboard watch shall go
ashore, and the larboard take their turn tomorrow. If the paper
with the cross comes out, it will be the other way.

"One more matter: I shall expect the discipline on shore to be as
good as it has been on board ship. The natives are to be treated
well, and all that we get from them shall be by fair barter, and it
shall be conducted for the advantage of all. The first mate and
boatswain will take ashore some of the goods we have brought for
the purpose of trade, and they will buy not only such things as we
require for the ship--fruit and vegetables--but whatever the
natives may have to sell.

"All these things will be brought on board, and then those of you
who wish for any of these articles, as a token from the first
island at which we touched, can take them; making an auction among
yourselves, the sums to be deducted from your wages. In this way
all will be on a fair footing, and the proceeds of the sale will go
into the general fund, to be divided at the end of the voyage.
Nevertheless, I should advise you not to purchase now, but to leave
it until we have finished all our business, and are on our homeward
way. Then we shall see what we have obtained, and each man can buy
according to his liking. I say this because, if you get things now,
they will litter up the ship, and will get broken, lost, or thrown
overboard; and it were far better that everything remained packed
in the hold, until we are on the homeward voyage.

"Another thing: Let each man behave himself decently on shore. Be
gentle and kind to the natives who, though but heathens, are a
harmless people, and friendly. Let there be no quarrels or
disputes; and above all, let none meddle with the women. I warn you
that any breach of these orders will be most severely punished; and
that, moreover, anyone who does so offend will never have leave to
go ashore again, not if we cruise for ten years among these
islands."

The second mate and Roger remained on board with the starboard
watch, the drawing giving the advantage to the others; and these,
with the captain and first mate, were soon rowing towards the
shore. Those on board, although disappointed that fate had decided
against them, had their share of amusement, for a good many canoes
afterwards came off to them, filled with goods for barter; and as
the captain, before leaving, had told the second mate that he could
buy and sell with those who came out, a brisk trade was soon
established.

They had no fear of treachery from the natives, who were in such
dread of the white men that they would not venture to lift a hand
against them, however great the odds might be; and they were,
therefore, allowed to come on board and mix freely with the
sailors. The contents of the canoes, chiefly fruit and vegetables,
were spread out on the deck, and the mate and Roger bargained with
them, giving them little looking glasses, and strings of beads, in
exchange for their wares.

"They are mighty reasonable in their demands," Roger said to
Pengarvan. "It seems almost a shame to take these great baskets of
fruit and vegetables, in return for such trifles."

"They are not trifles to them," the mate replied, "and there is
nothing unfair in the exchange. These things are to them what gold
and jewels are to us. We would give, gladly, a score of boatloads
of vegetables for a diamond the size of a pea; and these glass
beads are as valuable, in their eyes, as diamonds are in ours."

After buying up the main stock, they trafficked with the natives
for the little ornaments they wore, necklaces and bracelets
cunningly worked with bright shells and seeds, and weapons of
curiously carved wood. At nightfall the other boats returned, laden
down with fruit and vegetables.

"'We must buy no more of these commodities, at present," Captain
Reuben said, when he saw what had been purchased on board. "We have
got enough to last us as long as they will keep, eat we never so
heartily;" and indeed, the next day a number of the crew were ill,
from the quantity of fruit that they consumed.

This, however, soon passed off, and the change of diet did great
good. The scurvy disappeared, and in a short time all--even those
who had suffered most--were again fit for duty.

The following morning, Roger and Pengarvan went ashore with the
starboard watch. The captain again accompanied them, and for hours
they rambled about the island, wondering at the strange trees and
foliage and the bright flowers; and filled especially with
admiration at the tiny birds, with feathers like jewels, that
flitted about among the flowers, and concerning which there was
much dispute among the men--some asserting that they were a sort of
great bee, while others maintained that they were birds. So quickly
did they fly that the men, although they tried hard, failed to
catch any of them; but the dispute as to their nature was solved,
by the discovery that one of the chiefs had a robe fringed with the
skins of these little creatures; and examining these they saw,
surely enough, that they were birds, with feathers glistening in
the sun like jewels of many colors Captain Reuben persuaded the
chief to cut off the fringe and sell it to him, giving in exchange
for it the high price of four copper rings, and a tiny looking
glass.

In the afternoon the crew set to work to re-water the ship, and by
nightfall all the casks were filled up, and the vessel was ready to
proceed again on her way. The next morning sails were hoisted and
the anchor weighed. The natives came out in great numbers in their
canoes, and surrounded the Swan as she glided away from her anchorage,
waving their hands and raising cries of farewell--evidently greatly
satisfied at the treatment they had received at the hands of their
white visitors.

For a fortnight the Swan cruised from island to island; but beyond
giving the crew a run ashore at each, and so building up their
strength and getting them in fighting trim, should there be
occasion to call upon them for action, little advantage was
obtained from these visits. Fruit and vegetables were obtainable in
abundance; but beyond these, and little trinkets and feathers,
there was no trade to be done.

"It is clear," Captain Reuben said, as he and his officers were
gathered in the cabin, "that there is neither gain nor advantage to
be obtained from trade here. The natives have doubtless sufficient
for their wants, which are of the simplest; but of wealth such as
we prize in England there is none to be had. It is different with
the Spaniards--they make slaves of these poor creatures, and force
them to till their plantations, to raise crops for them, and to
work mines; but we, who cannot do these things, can get nothing
from a longer stay in these coasts.

"We touched here chiefly to get water and fruit, to keep us all in
health, and in that we have abundantly succeeded. We had best now
shape our course westward, and try to find this new land, rich in
gold, of which my friend the Spanish captain learned by report from
the natives. So far we have fallen in with no Spaniards, but we may
do so at any time; and although I have no fear of beating off any
that might meddle with us, it would do us great harm did the news
spread that a strange ship was in these waters; for they would
assuredly send out expeditions in search of us, from all their
ports, as soon as the news reached them."

The others quite agreed with Captain Reuben's views, and the next
morning the ship's head was pointed west. Two days later, when
passing an island they saw, on opening a headland, a port with many
houses, and a Spanish flag flying from a mast on shore. Two large
Spanish vessels were lying there. They were apparently on the point
of sailing, for the sails were already dropped.

An exclamation of surprise broke from all on the deck of the Swan,
and the men ran to the braces and sheets, in order to trim the
sails.

"Steady, men!" Captain Reuben shouted. "Touch not sheet or tack. We
must sail past as if bent on our own business. If we change our
course, now, they will suspect that something is wrong.

"Pengarvan, do you get out the Spanish flag from the locker, and
run it up to the peak."

This was done, though it was easy to see, by the looks the crew
cast towards the strange craft, that they would gladly go in and
fight them.

"Another time, lads," Captain Reuben said cheerfully, as he saw
their mood. "I doubt not we shall have enough fighting to satisfy
you, before we have done; but our object here is to trade, and get
rich. If thrashing the Dons comes in the way of business, we shall
do it contentedly; but there is no occasion for us to put ourselves
out of the way to meet them. Supposing we were to go in, and sink
those two ships; as I doubt not we are men enough to do, if we were
to try it. They would see it all from the shore; and no sooner did
we set sail again, than boats would carry the news to every Spanish
port in these quarters, and we should have a score of ships in
pursuit of us, in no time; and, whatever came of it, that would
interfere with the hopes of gain with which we have sailed to these
seas.

"This port must be a newly formed one," he went on, turning to
Roger, "for there is no Spanish station marked hereabout, in my
chart."

The course which the Swan was taking would have carried her half a
mile to seaward of the two Spanish vessels, but she now edged a
point or two farther out. Doubtless the Spaniards were surprised at
seeing that the vessel, instead of entering the port, continued her
course; and it may be that they very soon discovered such points in
her hull, and rigging, as set them wondering what she could be.

Presently a gun was fired from one of the ships--as a signal,
doubtless, for her to heave to. The Swan paid no attention to the
command, but kept on her course. In two minutes there was another
flash and a puff of white smoke from the Spaniard, and a shot
skipped across the water in front of the Swan. A growl of anger
broke from her crew.

"Put up the helm," Captain Reuben ordered; and the vessel, which
was running before the wind, came up till her head pointed straight
to sea.

Although the Spanish ships were still three-quarters of a mile
away, a bustle was at once observable on their decks. Men clustered
at the bows, and could be seen at work there.

"They are getting up the anchors," Pengarvan said, as he watched
them, shading his eyes with his hands.

Three or four minutes later the sails were sheeted home, and the
Spaniard began to move through the water, having set sail as soon
as the anchors were tripped. No sooner were they under weigh, and
the crews at their quarters, than they began to discharge their bow
guns after the Swan.

"Shall we answer them, Captain?" James Standing asked. "We can
bring a couple of guns aft, and fire over the rail."

"By no means," Captain Reuben replied. "At present they know
nothing about us, and though they may guess that we are not
licensed traders, with due authority to trade among the islands, I
do not suppose they suspect, for a moment, that we are foreigners;
but deem us a private venture, from one of their own ports. No
Spanish trader would dare to fire on their own flag and, as long as
we do not reply, they will suppose that we are only trying to
escape the payment of some heavy fine, or perhaps forfeiture, for
breach of their regulations.

"No, they can fire away. They are not likely to hurt us. They are
fully a mile behind us, and we shall soon leave them."

But in this respect the captain was mistaken. The Spaniards were
both fast vessels; and although the Swan kept her distance, those
on board presently saw that she gained nothing. The shot continued
to fall around them, but the Spaniards worked their guns slowly.
The pieces on their forecastles were light ones, and though two or
three shot passed through the sails of the Swan, they did but
little damage.

"As long as they don't knock away a spar we will hold on," Captain
Reuben said. "If they do, we will turn and fight them. But the wind
is dropping a little, and I think that, if anything, we are gaining
upon them now."

By the afternoon the Swan was fully two miles ahead, and the
Spaniards had discontinued firing. The Swan was heading now to pass
an island which had, for some hours, been visible ahead. Presently
the Spaniards again began firing, although their shot fell in the
water far astern of the Swan.

"What are the lubbers up to now?" James Standing said. "They cannot
think they are going to frighten us into stopping, now that we have
fairly got away from them."

Captain Reuben was anxiously gazing at the island ahead. They had
laid their course to pass it to windward, as they sailed better,
close-hauled, than did the Spaniard; who had not only fallen
behind, but had lagged to leeward nigh half a mile.

"They must be firing as a signal," he said. "There may either be a
Spanish port in the island, or they may know that there are some of
their ships lying there; though I can see no signs, either of a
port or ships."

"It would matter little if we could, Captain," Pengarvan said; "for
any ships along that shore would be to leeward of us, and we should
pass the end of the island long before they could beat up there;
but it would be awkward if there happened to be a port, with two or
three of their ships, just beyond that point. We should be caught
between two fires then, and have to fight the lot of them."

The captain nodded.

"You are right, Pengarvan. We should be in a fix, then; and four
Spaniards at once is more than we bargained for."

They were now within two miles of the point towards which they were
steering, and towards which the eyes of the two officers on the
poop were directed. Five minutes later an exclamation broke from
them, simultaneously, as the sails of a lofty ship made their
appearance over the extremity of the point, and a minute later a
great hull came into sight.

"Helm to larboard," Captain Reuben ordered sharply. "We must run
down the island. We can never weather that fellow that has just
appeared.

"Ah! There are two others coming out. We are in a hornets' nest."

The sails were squared off, and the Swan was soon running before
the wind; almost parallel with the coast, but edging in a little,
to keep her farther from the vessels that had first chased them.
These had also changed their course, and their position to leeward
now gave them an advantage.

Ere long the Swan was almost abreast her late pursuers, who were
about a mile and a quarter to seaward; while the other three
Spanish ships, with all sails set, were a mile and a half astern,
but a good deal nearer in shore.

"The sun will be down in another five minutes," Captain Reuben
said, "and in half an hour it will be dark. The Spaniards can run
quite as fast as we can--a bit faster, I think; but we can beat
them, close hauled. The wind is falling lighter and lighter. If it
was not for that, we would haul our wind and be off on the other
tack, and throw all of them out. But it will be a dead calm before
long, and they will be either lowering all their boats to attack
us, or towing their ships up to us. If we were close under the land
they might miss us, but they will be able to make us out, here. At
any rate, we must hold on as we are, until the wind drops
altogether."

After sunset the breeze died away rapidly and, by the time night
had fully set in, the sails dropped motionless, and the Swan ceased
to move through the water. The captain at once ordered all the
boats to be lowered, and the men swarmed into them, double banking
the oars. Hawsers were handed into them, and the vessel's head
swept round in the direction from which she had come, but somewhat
farther seaward.

"Now, lads," the captain said, "pull with a will. There will be a
good supper, and an allowance of strong ale, when you come on
board."

After rowing for half an hour, the captain ordered them to cease,
and to keep silence. Listening attentively, he could hear in the
still night air the sound of oars; but whether the boats were
towing the ships, or rowing independently, he could not tell. Again
the men set to work.

"I hope they are towing," he said to the first mate. "They would
have no chance whatever of catching us, for our strong crew can
take a vessel like the Swan through the water at twice the rate
they could row their big ships. I can't see the fellows in shore,
can you?"

"No, Captain. They are hid in the shadow of the land. I can make
out the others, but they are a long way farther off than when we
started."

"I expect we shall have the boats after us, Standing. Both lots can
make us out, and can see that we are gaining on them.

"Ah! I felt a breath of wind. I did not expect it for an hour or
two yet; but if the breeze springs up, we shall soon run away from
them."

Stopping and listening again, they could hear the sound of oars,
from two directions.

"They are coming," the captain said. "The beat is quicker than it
would be if they were towing; besides, it is a great deal more
distinct than it was. I don't think they are more than a mile
behind us.

"Ah! There is the wind again."

There was a deep flapping sound, and a rattling of blocks, as the
sails bellied out for a moment, and then fell against the masts
again. Captain Reuben went to the forecastle:

"Keep it up, lads. You won't have much longer to row, for the wind
is coming. The Spaniards are after us, but they won't be up for a
quarter of an hour, and I hope we shall get it before that.
Remember, every yard we can keep away from them is of importance.
Put your backs to it, lads."

The Swan carried four boats and, strongly manned as these were, she
was gliding through the water at a fair rate. It was five minutes
before another breath of wind came, but this lasted three or four
minutes, and greatly relieved the strain from the hawsers.

"She is going through the water now," the captain said. "They
cannot be gaining very much upon us, at present.

"Confound it!" he added, a minute later. "There is an end of it
again."

The boats were now but half a mile away, and the voices of the
officers, urging the rowers to exert themselves, could be plainly
heard, On the Swan the officers were all gazing in the direction
from which the wind was to come. The yards were all braced sharply
aft. Presently there was an exclamation of relief, as they felt the
wind in their faces, and the vessel heeled a little over. The boats
behind were but a quarter of a mile away now, while those from the
vessels inshore were perhaps twice that distance.

"If this is the true breeze we are safe," the captain said. "If
not, we shall have to fight for it."

The men had already, without orders, cast loose the guns, and armed
themselves with pike and cutlass.

"Now listen, lads," the captain said, as he went forward to the
poop rail, "if these fellows come up and try to board us, let no
man utter a word. Fight like bulldogs, and as silently. We shall
beat them off, never fear. No doubt they believe that we are their
countrymen, who have broken their trading regulations, and are
afraid of being overhauled. But if there is a word spoken they will
know that we are foreigners, and we shall be chased wherever we
go."

Then he went to the forecastle, and bade all the men in the boats
cast off the hawsers and come on board. They were, indeed, no
longer of any use, as the vessel was going through the water almost
as fast as they could row ahead of her. As they gained the deck he
repeated the orders he had given--that strict silence should be
observed, in case the Spaniards came alongside.

Everything now depended on continuance of breeze, and those on
board the boats saw that the vessel was now holding her own with
them. Orders to throw the ship up into the wind and heave to were
shouted and, as no attention was paid to these, several musket
shots were fired at her; but the wind held and, faster and faster,
the Swan made her way through the water. At last the boats fell
behind, and were lost to sight.

"We are safe now," Reuben said, exultantly. "We are to windward of
them all, and shall have them well out of sight, before morning."

When day broke, indeed, the topsails of three of the Spanish ships
could be seen on the horizon; but in two or three hours these sank
out of sight, and the Swan was headed on her course west.



Chapter 5: Shipwrecked.


For six days the Swan sailed westward before a gentle wind. Then
clouds were seen rising in the north, and spreading with great
rapidity across the horizon.

"We are in for a tempest," Captain Reuben said. "Never have I seen
the clouds rising more rapidly.

"Get her sail off her, Standing, as quickly as possible."

The crew fell to work, and in a very few minutes the Swan was
stripped of the greater part of her canvas. But quickly as the men
worked, the storm came up more rapidly, and the crew had but half
finished their work when, with a roar and turmoil that almost
bewildered them, the gale struck the vessel. Her head had been laid
to the south, so that the wind should take her astern; and it was
well that it was so, for had it struck her on the beam, she would
assuredly have been capsized, even had not a rag of canvas been
shown, for the wind would have caught her lofty forecastle and
poop. As it was she plunged heavily forward, quivering as if from a
blow. Then her bluff bows bore her up and, with a leap, she sprang
forward and sped along before the gale.

"I have seen as sudden a squall among the Greek islands," Captain
Reuben shouted in the mate's ear; "but never elsewhere. I hope that
this may prove as short as do the gales in that quarter."

"I hope so," the mate replied, "for we know not how far the land
may be distant."

But though the captain knew it not, they had been caught in one of
those furious gales that were, afterwards, the terror of the
Spaniards; blowing for a week or ten days without intermission, and
being the cause of the wreck of many a stout ship. The sea got up
rapidly, and the wind seemed to increase in fury as night fell, and
for three days the ship ran before it. The waist was frequently
deluged with water, and it required six men at the helm to keep her
straight before the wind.

The crew were worn out with fatigue and want of sleep, for running
as they were in this unknown sea, none could say what might happen,
or when land might be sighted ahead. The captain never left the
poop--he and the mates taking their places, by turn, with the men
at the helm; for the slightest error in steering might have caused
the vessel to broach to, in which case nothing could have saved
her. Sheltered as was the caboose, it was found impossible to keep
a fire alight, and officers and men, alike, had to content
themselves with biscuit and draughts of ale.

The vessel rolled till her bulwarks were under water, and the
yardarms at times dipped into the sea, and the men on deck were
forced to lash themselves to some standing object, to retain their
footing. The captain occasionally made his way forward to the
forecastle, where the men not on duty were huddled together, and
spoke cheeringly to them, saying that the gale could not last much
longer, and that as the Swan had weathered it so far, she would
hold on to the end.

At the commencement of the storm a tremendous rain had fallen, but
when this had ceased the sky had cleared up, and for the last two
days the sun had shone out brightly, and not a cloud had been seen.

When morning broke on the fourth day a cry of dismay broke from the
wearied men on deck, for ahead could be seen land, stretching away
on both bows. The news brought the crew from below, and they
clustered on the forecastle, gazing in the direction of this new
danger.

"We must try and get some sail on her mizzen, Standing," the
captain said. "Our only chance is to bring her head to wind."

"We can try, Captain, but I fear that you will never bring her
round."

"It is our only chance," the captain repeated, and with a loud
shout, he called for some hands to come aft.

The mizzen was shaken out and, as soon as the sheets were hauled
aft, the helm was put down. A cry burst from the crew as she came
round, for as the wind took her on the beam she lay farther and
farther over. A great wave struck her broadside, sweeping the
bulwarks away as if they had been paper, and carrying a number of
the crew off the forecastle into the sea. Still farther over she
went, and all thought that she would capsize; when there were a
series of reports, like musket shots, as the lashings of the
shrouds parted. This was followed instantly by a crash, as the
mizzen mast snapped off, two feet above the deck.

Relieved of the strain, the Swan righted somewhat. Another great
wave swept over her forecastle, still further diminishing the
number of the crew, but it carried her head round. She came up onto
an even keel, and again started on her mad course before the wind.

"Go forward, Pengarvan, and see how many hands we have lost," the
captain said. "Not that it makes much difference, for they have but
gone a short time before the rest of us, for nothing short of a
miracle can save us, now."

It could now be seen that the coast was steep and rocky, and that
the waves were breaking with tremendous force upon it. It was but
about four miles distant, and in less than half an hour they would
be upon it.

"We must try to anchor, Standing."

The first mate shook his head.

"We will try, Captain, but our anchors will never hold her in the
teeth of this gale. If they did, the hawsers would go like pack
thread."

"I am afraid so, Standing; but there is nothing else to do."

The first mate went forward, and he and Pengarvan saw the anchors
got in readiness, and the cables ranged along, so as to run out
with perfect freedom. Then Pengarvan made his way aft again to the
poop.

"Do you mean to cut away the mast, Captain?"

The captain nodded.

"I wouldn't, sir," the mate went on. "She will never hold, mast or
no mast; and if it stands, we make a shift to run her head foremost
on the rocks, and this will give us a better chance than if she
drifts broadside on."

"You are right, Pengarvan. Yes, it will be better to leave it
standing."

When within a quarter of a mile of the shore, the helm was again
put down and, as the vessel came partly round, the the anchors were
let go. The hawsers ran out rapidly, and the topsail, which was the
only sail on her, was let go, the wind catching it and tearing it
into ribbons as it was loosed. There was a jerk and a surge as the
anchors brought her up, but at the same moment a great wave struck
her head. The cables parted, and she again swung round towards the
shore.

"It is all over with us, my lad," the captain said to Roger, who
was standing quietly beside him. "God forgive me, I have brought
you all here to die."

"It is not your fault, father. It was all for the best, and we knew
when we started that there were perils before us."

"Goodbye, my lads! We will die as we have lived--brave men--and may
God have mercy on us all.

"Now, Roger, obey my last orders. Go forward, and climb up to the
end of the bowsprit. It may be that, if she strikes, you may be
able to leap forward onto the rocks. They are somewhat lower, just
ahead, than elsewhere."

"But I do not want to be saved, if no one else is, father," Roger
cried passionately.

"You have always obeyed me heretofore," the captain said, quietly,
"and you will do so now. Go forward at once, and do as I say. God
bless you, my boy."

He clasped Roger in his arms, in a moment's close embrace, and then
pointed forward.

Roger's eyes were blinded with tears as he obeyed the order. The
bowsprit in those days did not, as now, run out almost horizontally
from the ship's bow; but stood up like a mast, leaning somewhat
over the bow, and carried a yard and small square sail upon it.
Roger climbed up as far as the yard and then, aiding himself by the
halyards, swarmed up until he reached the cap. When he did so the
vessel was but little more than a hundred yards from the shore.

The water was deep up to the rocks, for the waves struck on these
unbroken, flying up in masses of spray which flew far over the
land. On his lofty post, thirty feet above the forecastle and
forty-five above the water, Roger was nearly level with the top of
the rock ahead; and as the vessel rose on the waves, could see a
flat land, extending far inland.

He looked down. Two or three of the sailors had followed him as
high as the yard, and many others were gathered on the forecastle.
Some were kneeling in prayer, others had thrown themselves down
despairingly on the deck, but most were standing, looking forward
with set faces at the rocky barrier so close at hand.

Roger looked aft. The men at the tiller had quitted it now, and
gone forward. Standing and Pengarvan were standing, one on each
side of the captain. The latter took off his cap and waved it to
his son, and the mates lifted their hands in token of adieu.

A cry from below caused Roger, as he returned the salute, to look
round. They were but a ship's length from the rocks. Another moment
a great wave lifted the vessel, and on its crest she went
thundering forward. The rocks seemed to leap up against the spar to
which Roger clung. It snapped off just below his feet, then a great
volume of water and spray shot up from below, and he was thrown
high into the air. The wind caught him and carried him away inland,
and he fell, with a crash that left him senseless.

It was long before he recovered consciousness. As soon as he did
so, he crawled on his hands and knees to the edge of the cliff, and
looked down. The Swan had disappeared. Not a sign of her remained,
not so much as a floating timber showed on the surface of the
water.

Roger crawled back again for some distance, and then threw himself
down, and wept despairingly. He lay there for hours, until the heat
of the sun, blazing almost vertically down, roused him. Then he got
on to his feet and looked round.

In front of him stretched a slightly undulating country. Patches of
maize, here and there, showed that it was cultivated; and in the
distance he saw a large village, with buildings of a size that
proved that the people had made some advance towards civilization.
Slowly and painfully, for he was greatly bruised by his fall, he
made his way to the nearest maize patch, and ate several heads of
green corn. Then he started for the village.

When within a few hundred yards of it, he came upon three women,
who were coming out with baskets on their heads. They paused as he
approached them, and then, with a cry of astonishment and fear,
turned and ran towards the village.

Their cries brought a number of people to the doors. Among these
were many men, who had caught up spears, and bows and arrows, at
the alarm. Seeing but one person approaching, in a garb altogether
strange to them, they stood in surprise. As he came up their wonder
heightened, at perceiving that his color was altogether different
from their own; and they dropped their threatening weapons, and
stood as if paralyzed by wonder.

Roger had not faltered in his step, as he saw them issue out. Death
had no terror for him, now his father and all his friends were
gone; and he was altogether reckless of what befell him. The
fearlessness of his demeanor added to the effect produced by his
appearance. His cap was gone, and the rays of the sun, falling upon
his fair hair, added to the effect produced by his white skin.

The natives, taking him for a supernatural being, bowed themselves
to the ground before him in an attitude of adoration. The cries and
uproar that but a minute before had sounded in the village suddenly
ceased, and were succeeded by the hush of deep awe.

Roger walked on between the prostrate natives, and seated himself
on a stone at the door of a hut. The natives gradually rose to
their feet and approached him timidly. He made signs that he wanted
to drink, for a raging thirst had been induced by the heat.

One of the natives ran into a hut and reappeared with a bowl,
filled with a liquid, which he humbly presented to Roger. The
latter patted his head in token of thanks, and then took a long
drink of the contents of the bowl. These were totally unlike
anything he had before tasted; being pulque, a slightly fermented
drink obtained from the juice of the agave, most useful of all the
vegetable productions of Central America.

A native, who was distinguished by his dress from the rest, now
gave an order; and in a short time two women approached, bearing a
tray with some flat cakes of fine bread, and fruits of different
kinds. More to please the natives than because he was hungry, for
he felt little inclination for food, Roger partook of some of
these.

The chief then harangued him at considerable length. When he had
finished, Roger, who had stood up while he was addressing him,
said:

"I do not know a single word of what you are saying to me, but I
thank you for your kindness."

He then shook hands with the chief, to whom that form of greeting
was evidently new, and patted him on the shoulder.

The chief then conducted him to a large house. It was no higher
than the rest, but was built of stone, well fitted together. The
roof was roughly thatched, and could, Roger thought, afford but a
poor shelter in time of rain. He did not know that, except at the
commencement of a storm, rain was of comparatively rare occurrence
upon the coast.

Inside the house showed signs of comfort. There were some seats
decorated with carving. A finely woven mat covered the floor. Arms
and utensils hung from the walls.

Several of the natives, evidently persons of consideration in the
village, followed the chief in. Some girls and women came in from
an interior room, and saluted the stranger with the greatest
respect. They examined him timidly, one of the younger girls
touching his hand gently, as if to make sure that it was skin, and
not some strange covering, that gave it its color.

Roger took off his jacket, which was by this time dry, and turned
up the sleeve of his shirt. As he did so, a general exclamation of
surprise and admiration broke from the natives at the whiteness of
the skin; which was far more striking, to them, than the bronzed
hue of his face and hands.

The chief made various signs, which Roger at last understood to be
a question as to whence he had come. He pointed in the direction of
the sea, and tried to signify that he had arrived from a very long
distance.

An hour passed, and Roger was beginning to wonder what the next
move would be, when a native entered and, saluting the chief, said
something to him. The women and children at once retired. A few
minutes afterwards the chief went to the door, and motioned Roger
to accompany him.

Coming down the street of the village was a procession. At its head
walked two persons, evidently of high rank. They wore mantles,
falling from their shoulders nearly to the ground, ornamented with
designs executed in brightly colored feathers. They had circlets of
gold round their heads, and heavy necklaces and bracelets of the
same metal. Beneath the mantles they wore short petticoats of soft
white material. Their spears and their arms were carried behind
them, by attendants. Behind these came a number of men and women,
walking in regular order, carrying bowls of fruit, trays of cooked
food, and other offerings.

Roger saw at once that they must have come from a place of
importance; which must be near at hand, as they had doubtless set
out upon the receipt of a message, dispatched by his present
entertainer. He guessed that the report must have been a favorable
one of him, and that the natives were impressed with the idea that
he was a superior being. It was, therefore, needful for him to
comport himself so that this impression should be confirmed.

The chiefs bowed profoundly as they approached him, stooping so far
forward that one hand touched the earth, and was then carried to
their forehead. Roger did not understand the meaning of this, but
he bowed graciously, as if accepting the homage that was offered.

The bearers then advanced, and placed the offerings on the ground.
Among these was a mantle similar to that worn by the chiefs, but
more richly embroidered. It struck Roger that, as his white skin
excited so much admiration, it would be as well to show it. He was,
too, somewhat ashamed of his garments; which were much worn, had
turned a dingy hue from the sun and salt water, and had, moreover,
shrunk much from their recent immersion. Taking up the robe,
therefore, he motioned to the chiefs to stay where they were and,
returning into the room, stripped to his waist; and then, throwing
the mantle over his shoulders, returned to the entrance.

Something like a shout of welcome saluted him. The whiteness of his
skin, as seen through the open mantle, astonished the natives; and
they accepted his assumption of the garment, with which he had been
presented, as a sign of the benevolent intentions of this
supernatural visitor towards them.

The ambassadors now made signs in the direction from which they had
come, and seemed to ask if he were willing to accompany them. He
nodded his assent, and in a few minutes the procession again
started, the chiefs taking their places one on either side of him,
and the villagers falling in behind. The women struck up a sort of
chant, in which all except the chiefs joined. For an hour they kept
on their way and then, on ascending a small hill, a large town was
seen.

"Tabasco," the chief said, pointing towards it.

Roger repeated the word, and in doing so evidently gave much
pleasure to the chiefs. As they approached the town he could see
many lofty buildings rising above it; and, as they passed through a
line of long palisades that surrounded the place, a body of men
issued out to meet him.

As they approached, they formed in order on each side of the road.
All were armed with spears tipped with sharp, shiny stones, and
carried bows and arrows. They were dressed in doublets of thickly
quilted cotton, capable of turning an arrow or resisting the thrust
of a native spear; although they would offer but poor protection
against English arrows, or English weapons.

As they entered the town the streets were lined with similarly
dressed soldiers; behind whom stood a crowd of natives, men and
women saluting their strange visitor with loud cries of welcome.
The procession continued its way until it stopped before a large
building, at the entrance to which stood an aged chief. His mantle
was completely composed of feather work, and plumes of feathers
sprang from the golden fillet that encircled his head. Behind him
were clustered a number of inferior chiefs.

He welcomed Roger courteously but gravely; and Roger guessed, at
once, that he was superior to the superstitions of his people, and
that he viewed him with a certain amount of suspicion. Roger bowed
and, taking off the jackknife, which hung in its sheath from a
string at his waist, drew it out and presented it to the chief.

The latter was evidently greatly struck by the gift. Gold and
silver he knew, but this bright and shining metal was altogether
new to him. He examined it closely, felt the edge and point, and
then handed it to the chiefs behind him, to be examined by them.
Roger saw by his manner that he had been favorably impressed, for
the weapon was as strange and mysterious, to him, as the visitant.

The chief undid a large gold necklace that he wore, and offered it
to Roger, who bowed and clasped it round his neck. The chief now
led him inside the house, which was similar, but on a much larger
scale, to that which he had before entered. Refreshments were
placed before him. These he did not need, but thought it better to
eat of them. While he was so doing, an animated conversation was
maintained between the chief and his followers.

After a time, the chief made signs to him to follow him, and
conducted him to a smaller house close by, which he made signs to
him that he was to consider as his own. Mats had been already
spread on the ground; rugs made of quilted cotton, for sleeping
upon, piled in a corner; vases of flowers placed about the room,
and all made ready for occupation. An old woman, followed by two
young girls, came forward and saluted to the ground. They were
slaves, whom the chief had appointed to wait upon the visitor.

No sooner had the chief left than a perfect levee commenced, and
went on for hours; until it seemed to Roger that every man, woman,
and child in the town must have called upon him. Most of them
brought little presents as tokens of goodwill. Garlands of flowers
were thrown round his neck, baskets of fruit, cakes made from maize
flour, dishes of meat of various kinds, little trinkets of gold,
baskets containing beans and many other eatable seeds, and a ground
powder of brownish hue, of whose uses Roger was ignorant, but which
he afterwards discovered to be cocoa, which furnished the most
popular beverage of the natives.

Not until it was quite dark did the stream of visitors cease. Then
the old slave dropped a hanging across the door, and one of the
young ones brought forward to Roger, who was utterly worn out with
the fatigues of the day, a bowl of steaming cocoa, and some cakes
of fruit. Roger found the cocoa extremely palatable, and wholly
unlike anything he had ever before tasted; and it seemed to
invigorate him greatly.

After drinking, he spread some of the quilted mats upon the floor,
and threw himself down upon them. The old woman had lighted a lamp,
and withdrawn with the younger ones to an apartment behind; which
served as their sleeping place, as well as kitchen.

Now that he was alone and had time to think, Roger broke down
entirely. Was it possible that it was but this morning he was on
board ship, with his father and friends; and that now all were
gone, gone forever, and he was in a strange land, cut off from all
hope of return, surrounded by people who, if they were friendly
today, might yet, for aught he knew, slay him on the morrow?

For the time, however, his own fate occupied him but little. His
thoughts turned almost exclusively upon his father. Upon their
voyages together, his kindness and care for him, the high hopes
they had cherished when they started upon their voyage, and above
all upon his parting words, and the last gesture of farewell, just
as the ship struck.

For hours Roger lay and sobbed. At last he heard a slight movement
in the room and, looking up, saw one of the young slave girls
regarding him with a look of deep pity. To her, as to everyone
else, Roger had appeared as a supernatural being, come from they
knew not whence; but the lad's sobs had touched her human feelings,
and shown her that he had sorrows, like herself. Her look brought a
feeling of comfort and companionship to Roger's heart; and as, on
seeing that she was observed, she turned timidly to retire, he held
out his hand to her.

She approached and knelt down beside him and, taking his hand,
pressed it to her forehead. She was a girl of some fourteen years
old, already, according to Mexican ideas, a woman.

"What is your name?" Roger asked.

The girl looked at him wonderingly, but shook her head. Roger
thought a moment, and then touched himself on the breast.

"Roger," he said.

He repeated the word several times. Then he touched her lips and
repeated "Roger," and, seeing what was expected, she repeated the
word in a soft voice.

He nodded again, touched himself and said "Roger," and then touched
her. She now saw what he meant. It was his own name he had spoken,
and he now asked for hers.

"Malinche," she said, in her soft Indian voice.

"Malinche," he repeated, "you are a kind-hearted girl. I can see
that, Malinche; and I hope we shall understand each other better,
one of these days. I suppose you are a servant or a slave, and are
not in a much better condition than myself. Now you had better go,
and sleep."

He patted her on the shoulder, pointed to the door by which she had
entered, closed his eyes as if in sleep, and then said, "Good
night, Malinche."

The girl uttered some words he did not understand; but as they
ended with Roger, and with a nod of her head she stole silently
away, he supposed that it was something equivalent to his own
"Goodnight."

Greatly comforted by this little incident, he rolled up one of the
rugs as a pillow, laid his head upon it, and was almost
instantaneously asleep. He woke with a feeling of surprise. The
events of the previous day seemed to him but a dream, and he looked
round, expecting to see the bulkhead of the little cabin he had
occupied, on board the Swan. But the first glance assured him of
the reality of the dream, and that he was alone, among a strange
people.

He sprang at once to his feet, pulled aside a cloth that hung
before an opening that served as a window, and let the rays of the
sun stream in.

"I want some water, old dame," he said, in a loud voice.

The old woman at once entered. Roger made signs, by rubbing his
hands together, and passing them over his face and head, that he
wanted water. This the old woman brought, in a basin formed of the
half of an immense gourd, and a soft cotton cloth with which to dry
himself. Then she brought in a small pot, filled with something
which looked to him like fat, but which he afterwards found was
extracted from a vegetable, and put it down by the side of the
water.

"I suppose that this is some sort of soap," Roger said to himself,
and found on trial, to his great satisfaction, that it made an
excellent lather.

After a good wash he felt greatly refreshed, and now attired
himself completely in Mexican costume, a pile of garments of all
sorts having been placed in one corner of the room. When he had
finished the two girls entered, with a tray containing cocoa,
fruits, and bread. He was about to address Malinche by her name;
but the girl kept her eyes fixed upon the ground, and it struck him
that she did not wish her late visit to him to be known, as it
might bring upon her a scolding from the old woman; whose voice he
had more than once heard, on the previous afternoon, raised in
shrill anger.

He therefore began afresh, first naming himself, and then touching
Malinche's companion.

She did not at first understand, but Malinche said something in a
low tone, and she then replied, "Nishka."

Roger repeated the name, and then touched Malinche, who at once
gave her name.

He next pointed to the contents of the bowl, and the girls replied
together, "Coca."

Roger repeated the word several times, and then, in the same
manner, learned the native names of the cakes and fruit.

The old woman, hearing the voices, now came into the room. The
girls spoke eagerly to her in their language, and when Roger
touched her, she at once answered, "Quizmoa."

"That is pretty well, for a first lesson," Roger said. "Now I will
eat my breakfast. I suppose that, if anyone in this place did not
have a stare at me yesterday, they will be coming today."

Visitors, indeed, soon began to arrive; and it was more than a week
before the curiosity of the crowd was at all satisfied. But even
this did not bring what Roger considered a terrible annoyance to an
end; for the news had spread rapidly, through all the country
round, of the strange white being who had come to Tabasco, and
parties of visitors kept on arriving, some of them from a great
distance.

Roger, however, had made a good use of his tongue. He kept one or
other of the girls always near him, and by touching the articles
brought to him as presents, the garments and arms of his visitors,
and the various objects in his room, he soon learned their names.

Almost every day the chief sent for him, for a talk; but as neither
party could understand the other, these conversations generally
ended by a sudden loss of temper, on the part of the cazique, at
being unable to obtain the information he required as to the origin
of his visitor, and the object with which he had come to his
country.

Having acquired a large number of the names of objects, Roger, for
a time, came to a standstill. Then it struck him that by listening
to what the old woman said to the girls, and by watching what they
did, he might make a step farther.

In this way he soon learned "bring me," "fetch me," and other
verbs. When the old woman was present, the two girls were silent
and shy; but as Quizmoa was fond of gossiping, and so was greatly
in request among the neighbors, who desired to learn something of
the habits of the white man, she was often out; and the girls were
then ready to talk as much as Roger wished. For a time it seemed to
him that he was making no progress whatever with the language and,
at the end of the first month, began almost to despair of ever
being able to converse in it; although by this time he had learned
the name of almost every object. Then he found that, perhaps as
much from their gestures as from their words, he began to
understand the girls; and in another month was able to make himself
understood, in turn. After this his progress was extremely rapid.

As soon as Malinche learned, from him, that he belonged to a great
nation of white people, living far away across the sea, and that he
had been wrecked in a ship upon the coast, she warned him against
telling these things to the chief.

"They hold you in high honor," she said, "because they think that
you have come down from the sky, and might do them grievous harm if
they displeased you. But if they knew that you were a man like
themselves, cast by chance upon their shores, they would perhaps
make you a slave, or might put you to death in one of the temples.
Therefore, on this subject be always silent. When the chief asks
you questions, shake your head, and say that these things cannot be
spoken of, and that it might bring down the anger of the gods, were
their secret told."

The advice seemed good to Roger, and he followed it. Now that he
was able to talk in his language, the chief soon plied him with
questions as to whence he had come. But Roger always shook his head
when the subject was approached, and said:

"It is not good to talk of these things. Evil might come to the
land. I am here, and that is enough. I will tell you many things
about other people, who live far over the sea, and who are very
great and powerful. When they go out they sit upon great animals,
which carry them easily, at a speed much exceeding that at which a
man can run. They live in lofty dwellings and, when they go to war,
are covered with an armor, made of a metal so strong that arrows
would not pierce it nor swords cut it. They traverse the sea in
floating castles; and when they want to convey their thought to
others, many days' journey away, they make marks upon a thin white
stuff they call paper, and send it by a messenger, and these marks
tell him who receives it what the writer's thoughts are, just the
same as if he had spoken in their ears."

The hearing of such wonders as these reconciled the chief to his
disappointment at not learning more about his visitor. The knife
Roger had given him was a never-ending source of wonder to the
cazique, and those whom he permitted to inspect it. Gold and silver
and copper they knew, and also tin, which they used for hardening
the copper. But this new metal was altogether strange to them. It
enormously exceeded copper in strength and hardness. Its edge did
not, like that of their own weapons, blunt with usage, and they
could well understand that, if armor could be formed of it, it
would be altogether unpierceable.

For a time Roger was every day at the chief's house, and his
narration afforded astonishment and wonder to the audiences that
gathered round him. At the same time, Roger perceived that a
difference of opinion existed, among the principal men, concerning
him. Some believed, as at first, in his supernatural origin, and
credited all that he told them; while others were of opinion that
he was a man, like themselves, only of different color, and that
these tales were simply inventions, designed to add to his
importance.

The fact that month after month passed without his exhibiting any
supernatural powers, or reproducing, in any way, the wonders of
which he told them, added gradually to the strength of the party
hostile to him. Why should this god, if he were a god, have come to
dwell at Tabasco only to learn the language, and behave as an
ordinary man? He had been kindly received--why did he not bestow
benefits in return? Were the fields more fruitful? Had any
extraordinary prosperity fallen upon the people since his arrival
among them? Had he taught them any of the arts of those people of
whom he spoke? The gods always bestowed benefits upon those among
whom they dwelt. He did not ever pay reverence to their gods, nor
had he entered a temple to worship or sacrifice. How then could he
be a god?

Gradually this opinion gained strength, and Roger perceived that
his popularity was decreasing. No longer were daily presents sent
in by the inhabitants of Tabasco. No longer did they prostrate
themselves, when he walked in the streets. His stories were
received with open expressions of doubt and derision, and he saw
that, ere long, some great change would take place in his
condition.

One morning, to his surprise, the chief with six men entered his
chamber, and ordered him to come out and accompany them, instantly.
Much surprised at the order, Roger at once went out.

"You must go away for a time," the cazique said; "but you shall
return, before long."

His guard conducted him eight or ten miles into the interior, and
established him in a hut, situated at a distance from any other
dwelling. Three of them, by turns, kept watch night and day over
him, refusing to answer any questions as to the cause of this
singular conduct. Beyond being kept a prisoner he had nothing to
complain of, being well fed and treated with all courtesy.

A fortnight later he was taken back to Tabasco, as suddenly as he
had left it. When he arrived there, he learned the reason of his
being carried inland. A great floating castle, filled with white
men, had arrived at the mouth of the river; and had opened a trade
with the natives, exchanging glass beads, looking glasses, and
trinkets, for gold ornaments and articles of Mexican workmanship.
Their leader, he heard, was called Grijalva. The cazique had been
afraid that, if Roger had heard that other white men were in the
river, he would make an effort to join them; or if they heard that
a man of their color was in the town, they would insist upon his
being handed over to them. He had therefore hurried him away
inland, and had issued the most stringent orders that none should,
by signs or otherwise, acquaint the newcomers that a white man was
in the town. A guard had been placed over the house in which Roger
had dwelt, and none of those within it had been allowed to go out,
while the strangers were in the river.

These had sailed away, the day before Roger was fetched back. He
was not altogether disappointed at having missed the strangers, who
were of course Spaniards; for he wanted, if possible, to see
something more of this beautiful country before he left; and he
was, moreover, more than doubtful as to the reception he should
meet with at the Spaniards' hands, when, by his ignorance of their
language, they discovered that he was a foreign intruder, in what
they considered their territory.



Chapter 6: Anahuac.


It was now six months since Roger was wrecked on the coast of
Tabasco, he spoke the native language with perfect fluency, and had
learned all that was known as to the nations round Tabasco.
Malinche was his chief source of information. She herself did not
belong to the country, but, as she told Roger, to a tribe that had
been conquered by far mightier people, called Aztecs, who lived
farther to the west.

It was from them, she said, that the people of Tabasco obtained
their gold; which was there very plentiful, and was thought but
little of, as being useful only for ornaments, drinking cups, and
similar purposes. They dwelt in a city named Mexico, standing in
the midst of a lake. There were kindred peoples near them, and the
country generally was called Anahuac. All were subject to the
Aztecs, and their armies had gradually conquered all the
surrounding peoples.

They possessed great temples, compared to which those of Tabasco
were as nothing. Their gods were very powerful, and all prisoners
taken in war were sacrificed to them. They had rich mantles and
clothing, and the Tabascans were but savages, in comparison.

Being asked how it was that she, who was a native of such a nation,
came to be a slave among the Tabascans, she replied with tears that
she had been sold. Her father had been a rich and powerful cazique,
of Painalla, on the southeastern borders of the Mexican kingdom. He
had died when she was very young, and her mother had married again,
and had a son. One night her mother had handed her over to some
traders, by whom she had been carried away. She had learned, from
their conversation, that her mother desired her son to inherit all
her possessions; and that she had, therefore, sold her to these
traders. The daughter of one of her slaves had died that evening,
and she intended to give out that Malinche was dead, and to
celebrate her funeral in the usual way. The traders had brought her
to Tabasco, and sold her to the cazique of that town.

"But this mother of yours must be an infamous woman, Malinche,"
Roger said indignantly, "thus to sell away her own daughter to be a
slave!"

"Girls are not much good," Malinche said, sadly. "They cannot
fight, and they cannot govern a people. It was natural that my
mother should prefer her son to me, and should wish to see him a
cazique, when he grew up."

Roger refused to see the matter in that light, at all, and was
indignant at Malinche for the forbearance that she showed, in
speaking of the author of her misfortunes.

This conversation had taken place at the time when Roger had first
learned to converse in the Tabascan language. The girl's
statements, with regard to the wealth of the country to which she
belonged, had fired his imagination. This was doubtless the country
concerning which rumors were current among the Spanish islands, and
with whom it had been the purpose of his father's expedition to
open trade.

Malinche told him that they spoke a language quite different from
that of the Tabascans. There were many dialects among the various
peoples under the sway of the Aztecs; but all could understand each
other, as they had all come down, from the far north, to settle in
the country.

Thinking the matter over he determined, if possible, that he would
someday make his way over to Malinche's country, which seemed so
far in advance of the Tabascans.

"The Spaniards will go there some day," he said; "and although they
would kill me without hesitation, if they found an Englishman there
before them; I might yet, in some way or other, manage to achieve
my escape."

Accordingly, he asked Malinche to teach him her language; and at
the end of the six months he could converse with her in it, almost
as readily as he could in Tabascan; for in learning it he had none
of the initial difficulties he had at first encountered, in
acquiring Tabascan--the latter language serving as a medium.

The year which had elapsed, since the Swan sailed from Plymouth,
had effected great alteration in Roger's figure. He had grown
several inches, and had widened out greatly; and was fulfilling the
promise of his earlier figure, by growing into an immensely large
and powerful man. He was, even now, half a head taller than the
very tallest of the natives of Tabasco; and in point of strength,
was still more their superior. Thus, although the belief in his
supernatural origin was rapidly dying out, a certain respect for
his size and strength prevented any of his opponents from any open
exhibition of hostility. The fact, too, of his perfect fearlessness
of demeanor added to this effect. Roger carried himself well, and
as, with head erect, he strolled through the streets of Tabasco,
with a step that contrasted strongly with the light and nimble one
of the slenderly built natives, men made way for him; while his
sunny hair, which fell in short waves back from his forehead, his
fearless gray eyes, and the pleasant expression of his mouth,
rendered him a source of admiration to the women; who, with scarce
an exception, still believed firmly that he was no ordinary human
being.

One day, when Roger was dressing in the morning, he heard excited
talking in the street, and the sound of hurrying feet.

"What has happened this morning, Malinche?" he called out.

"The merchants have come," she said. "The merchants from my
country."

As Roger had heard, from her, that a trade was carried on by Mexico
with the surrounding countries, by merchants who traveled in
parties, with strong bodies of armed men, and that they had been at
Tabasco but a few days only before he had first arrived there, and
might be expected again in about a year, he was not surprised at
the news. He had, indeed, been looking forward to this visit; for
he felt that his position was getting more and more unsafe, and
that the cazique would not be able, much longer, to support him
against the hostility of the majority of the men of importance in
the town. What he had heard from Malinche had greatly raised his
curiosity with regard to her country, and his longing to see these
people, whom she described as invincible in war, and so infinitely
superior in civilization to the Tabascans.

He had closely inquired, from Malinche, whether she thought he
would be well received, did he reach her country. Malinche's
opinion was not encouraging.

"I think," she said, "that they would sacrifice you in the temples.
All our gods love sacrifices, and every year countless persons are
offered up to them."

"It is a horrible custom, Malinche."

Malinche did not seem to be impressed, as he expected.

"Why?" she asked. "They would be killed in battle, were they not
kept for sacrifice. The Aztecs never kill if they can help it, but
take prisoners, so that death comes to them in one way instead of
another; and it is better to be killed in the service of the gods,
than to fall uselessly in battle."

"I don't think so at all, Malinche. In battle one's blood's up, and
one scarcely feels pain; and if one is killed one is killed, and
there is an end of it. That is quite different to being put to
death in cold blood. And do they sacrifice women, as well as men?"

"Sometimes, but not so many," she said; "and in dry weather they
offer up children to Talloc, the god of rain."

"But they cannot capture them in war," Roger said, horrified.

"No, they are sold by their parents, who have large families, and
can do without one or two."

To Malinche, brought up in the hideous religion of the Mexicans,
these things appeared as a matter of course; and she could scarcely
understand the horror, and disgust, which her description of the
sacrifices to her gods caused him.

"And you think that they would sacrifice me, Malinche?"

"I cannot say," she replied. "The priests are masters in these
things. If they said sacrifice, they would sacrifice you; but if
they thought you a god, you would be treated with great honor. How
can I tell? I think that they would pay you greater honor than
here, but of course I cannot tell."

"Why should they pay me greater honor, Malinche?"

"Because one of our gods was white. Quetzalcoatl was the kindest of
our gods. He taught us the use of metals, instructed us how to till
the ground, and laid down all the rules for good government. When
he lived in Anahuac everyone was happy. Every head of corn was so
big that a man could scarce carry one. The earth was full of
flowers and fruit. Cotton grew of many colors, so that there was no
need to dye it, and the very birds sang more sweetly than they have
ever sung since. Ah! If Quetzalcoatl had always stopped with us, we
should have been happy, indeed!"

"But why did he not, Malinche?"

Malinche shook her head.

"He was a god, but not one of the greatest, and one of these grew
angry with him--I cannot tell who. Perhaps it was the god of war,
who saw that the Anahuans were so happy that they no longer went
out to conquer other people, and to provide sacrifices for him.
Perhaps they were jealous, because the people worshiped
Quetzalcoatl more than them. Anyhow, they were angry with him, and
he was obliged to leave us.

"He came down to the sea, and took leave of the people, promising
that he or his descendants would some day revisit them. Then he
took his seat in his boat, which was formed of serpent skins, and
sailed away, and has never been seen again. But we all know that
one day, if he does not come himself, white people will come from
the sea to us.

"I think, Roger, that you are one of the descendants of
Quetzalcoatl; and I think my countrymen would think so, too, and
would hold you in great honor, if the priests, who are very
powerful, did not turn them against you."

"What was this god like?" asked Roger.

"He was tall in stature, and he had a white skin; and his hair was
not like yours, for it was long and dark, and flowed over his
shoulders, and he had a great beard. But as you are tall and white,
you are like him; and as he went towards the rising sun, it may be
that, afterwards, his hair changed from black to a color like
yours, which seems to me brown when you are sitting here, but gold
when the sun falls on it."

"So it seems, Malinche, that I may be sacrificed, or I may be taken
for a god! I would much rather that they would be content to treat
me for what I am--a man like themselves, only of a different race
and color."

Roger had many conversations of this kind with Malinche, and as he
felt his position becoming daily more precarious among the
Tabascans, had come to believe that he should have at least as good
a chance, among the Aztecs, as where he was.

In return for all the girl told him about her country, he told her
much about his own. He explained to her that there were many
peoples among the whites, as among the reds; and they fought
against each other in battle, having weapons which made a noise
like thunder, and killed at a great distance. He told her how one
of these peoples, named Spaniards, had conquered many islands not
very far distant from Tabasco; and how assuredly they would come,
in time, and try to conquer this country, too. He explained that,
while the nation to which he belonged was, at present, at peace
with the Spaniards, they were not allowed to come into this part of
the world; and that, had he and those who had sailed with him
fallen into their hands, they would have been all put to death.

The news, then, that the Aztec traders had arrived was a matter of
as much interest, to Roger, as to the people of the town. These
looked forward to purchasing many things which they could not
otherwise obtain; for the gold ornaments, the rich feather mantles,
and most of the other articles of superior manufacture which Roger
had seen, were not the work of the natives of Tabasco, but of their
powerful neighbors.

The traders would stay, Malinche said, for four or five days, at
least; and Roger, therefore, thought it better not to go out to see
them, until he learned what were the cazique's views concerning
him. He therefore remained quietly at home, all day.

Upon the following morning he received a summons from the cazique.

"White man," the chief said, "I have spoken to the Anahuac traders
concerning you, and they have a great desire to see you. Therefore
you will, this morning, accompany us to their camp."

An hour afterwards Roger started with the cazique, and a numerous
body of the latter's counselors and attendants. The encampment of
the Anahuans was a quarter of a mile from the town. In the center
rose a large tent, the abode of the merchants; and around, ranged
in regular order, were the rough huts erected by their escort.

These were assembled in military array. They were, like the
Tabascan soldiers, clad in thick quilted doublets. Their spears
were tipped with copper; or with obsidian, a stone resembling
flint, of great hardness, and capable of taking a very sharp edge.

In front of the tent were several banners, embroidered in different
devices in gold and feather work. Roger afterwards learned that
merchants were held in far higher consideration in Anahuac than in
Europe, that their business was considered as one of great honor,
and that they were permitted to assume what may be called heraldic
devices on their standards, to carry bright-feathered plumes, and
to wear gold ornaments--such decorations being only allowed to
warriors who had, by their deeds in battle, been admitted into an
institution which closely resembled that of knighthood; all others
dressing in plain white cloths, woven from thread obtained from the
aloe. Even members of the royal family were not exempted from this
law.

The whole trade of the country was in the hands of these merchants,
who traded not only to its utmost borders, but with neighboring
people. They were allowed to raise forces sufficient for their
protection; they furnished the government with descriptions of the
people they visited; and often afforded the State a pretext for
wars and annexations, by getting up quarrels with the natives. They
resembled, in fact, the East India Company during the last century,
mingling in their persons the military and mercantile character.

In addition to their soldier escort, they took with them on their
journeys a vast number of slaves. These carried the merchandise,
made up into packets weighing about eighty pounds. Many of these
slaves had been instructed in the arts of the Aztecs, and there
were among them musicians, singers, dancers, and workers in metal
and feather work; and these were sold, at high rates, to the people
with whom they traded.

The merchants, who were attired in rich feather mantles, with
plumes of bright feathers upon their heads, came to the entrance of
their tent when the cazique, with his company, approached. After
some talk between them and the chief, by means of an interpreter,
Roger was brought forward from the rear of the company.

The merchants inspected him with grave curiosity. They turned and
talked among themselves; then they invited the chief to enter their
tent. He remained there for some time, and when he came out again
returned to his companions and, ordering four of his soldiers to
accompany him back to the town, left the rest of his party to
traffic as they chose with the merchants.

He did not address Roger until they reached his house, and then
bade him enter with him.

"White man," he said, "the Anahuan merchants wish to carry you away
with them to their own country; and have offered, in exchange,
sundry slaves and articles of merchandise. I would not have parted
with you; and have told them, indeed, that you were no slave of
mine, to sell as I chose, but a stranger who had come to visit me
from I know not where; and have also told them that, if you go with
them, it must be of your own free choice, for that misfortune might
fall upon my people, did I treat you with aught but honor.

"It is, then, for you to decide. You know that I wish well to you,
and hold you in great esteem, deeming that your visit here will
give prosperity, as well as honor, to Tabasco. But there are those
among my people who are foolish and headstrong, and who view your
coming with suspicion. The priests, too, are unfavorably disposed
towards you, and have long urged that you would make a most
acceptable sacrifice to the gods. So far I have withstood them, but
I am old and cannot look to live long, and after I have gone your
enemies would assuredly have their way. Therefore I think it is for
your good that you should go with these merchants."

The cazique was speaking the truth, but not the whole truth. The
merchants had offered, in slaves and goods, an amount which had
excited his cupidity; and he was, moreover, glad to be rid of the
presence of one who was the cause of constant dispute and trouble
in his councils. At the same time, he still believed in the
supernatural powers of his visitor; and was afraid that, if the
latter went against his will, he might invoke all sorts of ills and
misfortunes upon Tabasco.

He was much relieved then, when Roger replied that he was willing
to go with the merchants.

"I have seen," he said, "that my presence here is unwelcome to
many, and that I was the cause of trouble. I know, too, cazique,
that you have befriended me to the utmost, while many others have
been against me. I am willing, then, to depart."

Great was the grief of Malinche when she learned, from Roger, that
he was to go with the Anahuans.

"Could not my lord take me with him?" she asked presently, as her
sobs lessened in violence.

"I shall be but a slave myself, Malinche."

"If you ask the cazique he will let me go with you. I am but of
little value to him."

Roger did not answer for some minutes. He would have been glad,
indeed, to have had Malinche--who had been his companion and
friend, and whom he regarded almost as a sister--with him, but
there were many things to be considered. He might be well received
in this new country, but he might be sacrificed to these gods of
theirs; and in that case Malinche might share his fate--as she said
that even women were offered up. Even if well received, he might
not be able to have Malinche with him.

Besides, of course he did not want her as an attendant, and in what
other capacity could she go? If he got into trouble, and had to try
to escape from their land, he might not be able to carry her off,
too. If they were separated, what was to become of her? She could
not go to the mother who had sold her as a slave. No; certainly, he
decided, he must go without her.

"Malinche," he said, after a long silence, "it cannot be. There is
no saying what my fate may be, among your people. I may be offered
up to those terrible gods you told me of. I may be treated as a
slave. There is no saying what might happen. At any rate, I shall
be unable to afford you any protection. Were we separated, as it is
almost certain we should be, where could you go, or what would
become of you? Besides, how in any case could we keep together? I
could not have you as a slave, even if I wanted to do so, in your
own country; and how else could you go with me? If you like, I will
ask the cazique for your freedom, so that you might travel back to
your own country with the merchants."

The girl shook her head.

"I have no friends there, now," she said. "Where should I go?"

"That is just what I am saying, Malinche. There is nowhere for you
to go except with me; and I do not see how you could go with me. If
you do not like this, I will promise you that, if things turn out
well with me in your country, I will send by the next merchants who
come here, and buy you from the cazique, and find friends for you
there, and place you with them."

"You would have wives there," the girl said passionately; "and you
would never think any more of me."

Roger burst into a loud laugh.

"Why, Malinche, I am only a boy! I am not yet eighteen; and in my
country we do not think of taking wives, until we are eight or ten
years older than that. It is a serious thing with us, for each man
has only one wife; and it behooves him, therefore, to be very
careful in making his choice. I hope, long before it comes to my
time for thinking of marriage, to be back in my own country and
among my own people. If I were to marry here, how could I ever
think of going away? I could not go and leave a wife behind me. I
could not take her away with me, because she would never be happy
among a strange people, any more than I should be happy if I lived
here.

"No, no, Malinche, there is no fear of my marrying, any more than
there is of my forgetting you. You can trust me. If I live, and do
well in your country, I will send for you; and I will tell your
people that you have been as a sister to me, and will see that this
mother of yours does you justice, and that you shall come to your
own again, and you shall marry some cazique of your own choice. If
you do not hear from me, you will know that things have gone badly
with me, and that either I have been sacrificed to your gods, or
that I am held as a slave and have no power, whatever, to help
you."

Malinche said no more. Her dark eyes were full of tears, but with
the habit of submission natural to Mexican women, she simply took
Roger's hand and placed it against her forehead.

"Malinche will wait," she said, and then hurried from the room.

Before leaving, Roger gave Malinche several of the handsomest of
the bracelets and necklaces that had been bestowed on him, in the
first flush of his popularity at Tabasco; and gave presents also to
the old woman. The two girls wept bitterly when he said goodbye to
them, and Roger, himself, had to fight hard to restrain his tears.

"It is as bad," he said to himself, "as it was saying goodbye to
Dorothy and Agnes. Color does not matter much, after all. Malinche
is just as good and kind as if she were white."

The cazique himself conducted Roger to the Anahuac encampment. He
had, that morning, made him various presents of robes and mantles,
for he was very desirous that his visitor should part in goodwill
from him; and he again impressed upon him the fact that he only
parted with him because he felt that he could not protect him from
the ill will of some of his people.

The merchants made no secret of their satisfaction, as soon as they
had handed to the cazique the goods and slaves they had agreed to
give, in exchange for Roger. They had, like the cazique, pretended
to be indifferent as to the bargain; and had haggled with him over
the terms of the purchase. But both parties were equally desirous
of concluding the agreement and, while the cazique considered that
he was making an excellent bargain for the visitor who had
voluntarily placed himself in his hands, the merchants were still
more delighted.

In the first place, the Mexicans were, as Malinche had told Roger,
looking for the arrival of Quetzalcoatl, or of a white descendant
of his from the sea; and if Roger were to turn out to be the
expected god, the honor which would fall upon them, as his
producer, would be great, indeed. But even should this not prove
so, they would gain great credit, to say nothing of profit, by
bringing home so singular a being, who would either be received in
high honor by the king, or would be one of the most acceptable
sacrifices ever offered to the gods.

As soon, therefore, as the cazique had left, they addressed Roger
in terms of high respect, and presented to him some of their most
handsome feather robes, tiaras with plumes, ornaments, and arms.

To their stupefaction, Roger replied in their own language, and as
they were in ignorance that the cazique possessed a countrywoman of
their own, among his slaves, they regarded this as a miracle of the
most singular kind, and as an indisputable proof of the
supernatural nature of their visitant. It was true that he did not
speak as a native, but Quetzalcoatl, himself, might well have
forgotten somewhat of his own language, in his hundreds of years of
absence from Mexico.

The large tent was at once placed at Roger's disposal, the
merchants contenting themselves with a smaller one, raised beside
it. A number of slaves were told off to attend upon him, and his
meals were served with the greatest ceremony and deference.

That night, as Roger lay upon the soft pile of quilted rugs
prepared for him, his mind was sorely troubled as to his position.
Was he right in allowing them to deceive themselves into a belief
that he was a supernatural being? Ought he not, rather, to tell
them that all these gods they worshiped were false, and that there
was but one true God--He who was worshiped by the White men?

Thinking it over in every way, he concluded at last that there was
no necessity for him, at present, to undeceive the Anahuans. He
would do no good by doing so, and would ensure his own destruction.
He resolved however, that nothing should induce him to pay honor to
their gods, or to take any part in their bloody sacrifices.

"They can kill me if they will," he said; "but I am not going to be
false to my religion. If they should not kill me I may be able, in
time, to persuade them that their gods are false; but for the
present it would be madness to try to do so. From what Malinche
said they are devoted to their religion, and the priests are all
powerful. If I am to do any good, therefore, it must be done
gradually.

"What should we think, at home, if an Indian were to arrive, and to
try and teach us that our God was a false one? Why, he would be
burnt at the stake, in no time. And one cannot expect that these
Indians would be more patient, in such a matter, than we should.
When the Spaniards come, they will doubtless overthrow their gods,
and force them to be Christians, just as they have the peoples in
the islands."

The next morning, early, the tents were pulled down, the slaves
loaded up with what merchandise remained unsold, with the tents and
provisions for the journey, and the caravan started for the west. A
party of the soldiers marched first. Then came the merchants, with
Roger and a small guard of armed men. They were followed by the
slaves, and another body of troops brought up the rear.

For six days they passed through a country more or less cultivated,
with villages scattered about. One of these was always chosen for
their stopping place, and Roger admired the regularity and order
with which the encampment was formed, and the good conduct observed
in the dealings with the people.

Provisions were obtained by barter, and the inhabitants mingled
fearlessly with the trading party. He remarked on this to the
merchants, who replied that it was always their custom to keep on
the most friendly terms with the people.

"Our caravans," they said, "visit all the countries round our own,
and did one of them ill treat the natives, the others would suffer
for it. Therefore, we are always particular to give them no cause
for dissatisfaction. The empire is extensive, and many parts of it
are but newly conquered; therefore we should be gravely blamed,
were we to embroil ourselves with its neighbors, until the king
desired to carry his arms in that direction.

"Sometimes we have trouble. We were with a party who, a few years
back, were attacked of the people of Ayotlan. We saw that trouble
was coming, and fortified our camp; and for four years carried on
war with the town, and in the end captured it. But this was forced
upon us, and we had the approval of the king. All those concerned
in the struggle were permitted to have banners of their own, and
military emblems."

"How did you supply yourselves with provisions all the time?"

"The country people were neutral. That was the advantage we had
from having always treated them well, while the cazique of Ayotlan
had been a tyrant, and had greatly oppressed them. So they brought
in provisions to us for sale, and we had less difficulty, in that
way, than the people of the town."

At last the villages of the Tabascans were left behind. For some
days the caravans traveled through a very sparsely populated
country, and then arrived at a large village, where the Anahuac
language was spoken.

"We are now in the country of the king," the principal merchant
said. "All over it you will find the same language spoken; for
although there are many people who lived under their own chiefs,
and many of whom have been but lately conquered, the language is
similar, though spoken with differences, for all the tribes came
down from the north and settled here."

"And who dwelt here before they came?"

"A people called the Toltecs. They were a great people, well
instructed in agriculture, great workers in metals and builders of
grand cities."

"And what became of them?"

"It is not known, but misfortunes came upon them, famine or
disease, and it is said that they went away to the south. Then came
a people called the Chichemecs, a barbarous people from the north,
whom we found here when we came. Of us, the greatest tribe were the
Aztecs, who settled on one side of the great lake and built a city
there, called Tenochtitlan, or sometimes Mexico, from the great war
god Mexitli.

"Another great tribe were the Tezcucans, to which we belong; and
our capital is Tezcuco, on the eastern side of the same lake.
Mexico and Tezcuco formed an alliance; and with us was Tlacopan, a
smaller kingdom, hard by. It was agreed that in all wars, one-fifth
of the spoil should go to the Tlacopans, and the rest be divided
between the Aztecs and the Tezcucans. This alliance has remained
unbroken, and together we have conquered all the countries round,
and from sea to sea."

"What sea?" Roger interrupted.

"There is, on the west, another great sea like this on the east,
which stretches away no man knows whither; and between these two
seas all the peoples, save one, acknowledge the dominion of
Mexico--for although we are in alliance, the Aztecs have of late
years taken the lead, for they have had very great monarchs, and
are more war loving than we of Tezcuco; and our kings, and those of
Tlacopan, acknowledge the Aztecs to be the leading power, and give
to their king the title of Emperor.

"We maintain our own laws and usages. Our king places the crown
upon the head of each new monarch of Mexico, but we own him to be
the chief of our Confederacy, and the more distant countries, that
have but recently been conquered, have been assigned entirely to
the Aztecs, although we have had our proper share in the slaves and
spoil taken in the war."

"And what is the one state that has not been conquered by your
Confederacy?"

"Tlascala. It lies high up among the mountains and, although but a
small state, has maintained its independence, and has several times
repulsed the attacks of our best soldiers."

Roger thought that Tlascala must be a sort of Mexican Switzerland.

"It is singular that a small state should have resisted so long,"
he said.

"They have not been very often attacked," the merchant replied.
"There is little to be got from them but hard knocks. The country
is not fertile, the cold is too great, and they have only the
necessities of life. Except for slaves, and for sacrifice to the
gods, there is nothing to be gained by their conquest."

"And you all worship the same gods?" Roger asked.

"Assuredly," he said, "although some are thought more highly of in
one kingdom, some in another. Mexitli--or as he is generally
called, Huitzilopotchli--is of course the greatest everywhere; but
he is worshiped most of all by the Aztecs. Quetzalcoatl is also
greatly worshiped."

As he spoke, the merchant glanced furtively up at Roger. The lad
saw that this was a favorable opportunity for creating an
impression. He smiled quietly.

"It is right that he should be," he said, "since he taught you all
the good things you know; and was, like myself, white."

This proof of the great knowledge possessed by the being before him
vastly impressed the Mexican. How could this strange being know the
Mexican tongue, and be acquainted with its gods, unless he were one
of them? It had pleased him to assume ignorance of other matters,
but doubtless he was well aware of everything that had passed in
the country since he left it. Henceforth the respect which he and
his companions paid to Roger was redoubled.

As soon as they had reached the borders of Mexico, a swift runner
had been dispatched to the nearest post with a message, to be sent
forward to the King of Tezcuco, with the tidings of the arrival of
a strange white being in the land; and asking for instructions as
to what was to be done with him. In the meantime, the merchants
told Roger that they wished him to abstain from going out into the
various villages and towns at which they stopped.

"Until we know what are the king's wishes concerning you, it were
better that you were not seen. In the first place, all this country
by the coast is under the Aztec rule, and as soon as you were seen,
messages would be sent forward to Mexico, and the Emperor might
desire that so great a wonder should be sent direct to him;
whereas, if our own King sends first for you, you would be his
property as it were, and even Montezuma would not interfere.

"It will not be long before an answer arrives, for along all the
roads there are post houses, two leagues apart from each other. At
each of these couriers are stationed, men trained to run at great
speed, and these carry the dispatches from post to post, at the
rate of eight or nine miles an hour."

"But the messages must get changed, where they have to be given so
often?"

"Not at all," he said. "The couriers know nothing of the dispatches
they carry."

"Oh, they are written dispatches?" Roger said. "Then you possess
the art of writing?"

"Writing, what is writing?" the merchant asked.

"Letters are inscribed on paper," Roger said, "so that the person
receiving them at a distance understands exactly what the one who
wrote wished to say."

The merchant shook his head.

"I know nothing of what you call letters," he said. "We draw
pictures, on a fabric formed of prepared skins, or of a composition
of silk and gum, but chiefly on a paper prepared from the leaves of
the aloe. Besides the pictures there are marks, which are
understood to represent certain things. These picture dispatches
are made in the form of rolls, or books. I myself have a slave who
is skilled in such work, and who has depicted you, and added all
particulars, and the roll has been forwarded to Tezcuco."



Chapter 7: A Wonderful Country.


So anxious were the merchants to avoid arriving at any town of
importance, where there would be an Aztec commander and garrison,
until they received an answer from Tezcuco, that they traveled by
very slow stages, camping in small villages where they could obtain
water and supplies. Roger asked many questions of them as to the
country, and learned that the hot and arid soil they were now
crossing extended only about one-third of the distance to be
traversed. Then that they would pass over a range of lofty
mountains, offering great difficulties to travel, that the cold was
extreme, and that snow lay almost continuously upon the highest
summits. After crossing this range they would journey across a rich
country, and descend at last into a most lovely and fertile valley,
in which lay the lake, upon which the capitals of the two countries
were situated.

The country they were now traversing varied considerably. In some
places it consisted of parched and sandy plains, almost free of
vegetation. In others, where the rains were less able to drain
quickly away, were districts of extraordinary fertility. Here grew
the cocoa, vanilla, indigo and aromatic shrubs innumerable, forming
thick and tangled jungles, impervious to the foot of man. Flowers
of gorgeous colors bordered these groves, and lofty trees of
foliage, altogether strange to Roger, reared their heads above
them.

The lad was delighted with the extraordinary richness of color, and
the variety of the foliage, but he would have enjoyed it more had
it not been for the intense heat of the sun, and the closeness of
the air.

They crossed several large streams. They cut down the great rushes
which bordered them and, tying these together in bundles, formed
rafts, upon which four or five at a time were ferried over. Roger
learned that the principal road from the coast ran from Cempoalla,
a large town near the sea, but that this lay a long distance to the
north, and that the route they were traveling ran nearly due west
to Tepeaca, and thence northwest to Pueblo, after which the towns
lay thickly, all the way to the lake. As far as Roger could learn
the distance, from the coast which they had lately been following
to Mexico, was by this route about three hundred miles.

On the fifth day after the messenger had been dispatched, a courier
ran into the camp, just as the caravan was about to start, and
handed to the chief merchant what looked to Roger like a portfolio.
This, indeed, was something of its character. It consisted of two
thin boards, within which was a sheet of paper. It contained a
number of paintings and signs, of which Roger could make nothing,
but the merchants informed him that it expressed the satisfaction
of the King of Tezcuco, at the news that had been sent him of the
arrival of a strange white personage in the land; that the priests
would consult the auguries, and decide whether it boded well or ill
for the country; and in the meantime that they were to journey on
to Tepeaca, where they would be met by an envoy, charged to receive
the white stranger and to conduct him to Tezcuco.

The merchants themselves were only able to gather the general
contents of this picture dispatch, but the slave who had drawn the
one sent forward interpreted every sign and color; for Roger found
that colors, as well as signs, had their meaning. He learned from
the merchants that this picture writing was a science in itself,
and that it needed years of instruction and labor to acquire it. In
every town and village there were certain persons skilled in the
art, so that messages of all kinds could be sent to the capital,
and orders and instructions received. The national archives were
entirely written in this manner, and in the temples were immense
stores of these documents, affording information of every event of
interest, however minute, in the history of the people.

The caravan now pushed on rapidly. After traveling, as Roger
calculated, nearly a hundred miles from the sea, the ground began
to rise rapidly, and in a single day the change in temperature was
very marked. Roger felt the sense of listlessness and oppression,
which had weighed upon him while crossing the low country, pass
away as if by magic; and it seemed to him that he was again
breathing the air of Devonshire.

The vegetation had greatly changed. The vanilla, cocoa, and indigo
had disappeared, and trees totally different from those of the
plain met his eye.

Another day's march, and they were four thousand feet above the
sea. Here everything was green and bright, showing that rain
constantly fell. Groves of a tree of rich foliage, which was, the
merchant told him, the liquid amber tree, grew near the road; while
on both sides lofty mountains rose precipitously to a great height,
their summits being clothed in snow. Some of these, he heard, had
in times past burnt with terrible fires, and vast quantities of
melted rock flowed over the country, carrying destruction in its
course. In many cases the road was a mere track winding along the
side of these mountains, with precipices yawning below.

A day's march through the mountains brought them into a lofty
plateau, some seven thousand feet above the sea. Here were
wide-spreading forests of trees, which Roger recognized as large
oaks and cypress. Around the villages were clearings, and whereas
in the plains below maize was chiefly cultivated, the largest
proportion of the fields, here, were devoted to plantations of the
aloe or maguey. Here, even at midday, the temperature was not too
hot to be pleasant; while at night the cold was great, and Roger
was glad to pile the thick quilted rugs over him.

After traversing this plateau for some distance, they came upon
another range of hills, far loftier than those they had before
crossed, and vastly higher than anything Roger had ever before
beheld in his travels. These mountains were, the merchant told him,
the Cordilleras; they extended from unknown regions in the north
through Anahuac to the south. The snow never melted upon the
summits, and several of the highest of these were terrible
volcanoes, whose eruptions were dreaded by the whole nation.

"Sometimes before these commenced," the merchant said, "the earth
trembled and shook, so that men could scarce stand upon it: Houses
were thrown down, and terrible destruction of life and property
took place. Fortunately, these are rare occurrences; but several of
them have taken place since the time when the Aztecs first
established themselves here."

The passage through this range was attended with real hardship.
Roger, accustomed to our English winter only in the mild climate of
South Devonshire, felt the cold to be severe; but the natives
suffered far more, and the merchants continued their march right
through one night, for the labor of carrying their burdens kept the
blood of the thinly clad slaves in motion; whereas, if they had
halted, many would have succumbed to the cold. At last the path
began to descend, and soon after daybreak, as the road crossed a
shoulder of the hill, they saw a plateau similar to that they had
left, stretching out below them as far as the eye could reach.

Even at the height at which they were standing, Roger could see
that it was densely populated. Villages were scattered thickly, and
the forest was restricted to patches, here and there, the greater
portion of the land being under cultivation.

Directly in front rose the lofty buildings and temples of a town of
considerable size. Seen through the clear mountain air it seemed
but three or four miles away, and Roger had difficulty in believing
the merchants, when they assured him that it was fully twenty. This
was Tepeaca.

The slaves, wearied as they were, quickened in their pace; and in
two hours they emerged from the mountain gorges onto the temperate
plateau. Here they halted for some hours near a post house, a
courier being sent on to Tepeaca, to inform the king's envoys that
they had arrived thus far; and to ask whether they should proceed
at noon, when the slaves had rested, or make their entry into the
town in the morning.

In a little over four hours the answer was received. The merchants
were directed to wait where they were until three hours after noon,
then to move forward until they arrived within eight miles of the
town, and then to halt for the night, and to start again at sunrise
next morning.

Roger was as glad as were the slaves that he had not another
fifteen miles' march before him, for the journey had been a most
fatiguing one. He thought that the absolute distance traversed did
not exceed thirty miles, but owing to the difficulties of the road,
and the care that had to be taken in traversing it at night, even
with the assistance of the torches carried by the soldiers of the
caravan, it had taken them twenty hours, including occasional
halts, to perform the journey. An abundance of food was brought in
by the neighboring villagers, and the merchants issued an extra
supply of cocoa to the slaves; and when the march was resumed, late
in the afternoon, the latter had completely recovered from their
fatigue.

After a march of little more than two hours' duration, the caravan
halted for the night, and resumed its journey at daybreak. The
merchants had presented Roger with a mantle, more highly decorated
than that which he had before worn, and with some rich plumes of
feathers for his head; and seeing that they wished him to make as
brave a show as possible, he put on some of the gold necklaces and
bracelets he had received, at Tabasco.

The caravan was formed up in military order, the standards of the
traders being displayed at the head of the column. The porters were
placed four abreast, and the soldiers who marched on either side
were ordered to see that they kept their ranks. The merchants had
put on their handsomest mantles, and everything was done to show
off the procession to the best.

As they approached Tepeaca the road was lined with people, the news
of the approach of the wonderful white man having spread rapidly.
As Roger passed they bowed to the ground, with the same respect
that they paid to their own chiefs. He fully came up to their
expectations, for not only was the whiteness of his skin and the
color of his hair wonderful to them, but he stood many inches
higher than the merchants who walked by his side; for Roger had now
attained his full height--although but a few months past
seventeen--and stood six feet two in the thin sandals that he wore.
He was, as yet, far from the width that he would attain in another
five or six years, but looked broad and massive as compared with
the slight frames of the Mexicans.

When within a quarter of a mile of the gates of the town, a
procession was seen approaching from it. At its head were two
nobles, whose appearance far exceeded anything Roger had hitherto
seen. They wore cuirasses formed of thin plates of gold, and over
these mantles of gorgeous feather work. On the head of one was a
helmet of wood, fashioned to represent the head of the puma, or
Mexican lion. The other wore a helmet of silver, above which was a
cluster of variegated feathers, sprinkled with precious stones.
They wore heavy collars, bracelets, and earrings of gold and
precious stones. Beside them were borne their banners, richly
embroidered with gold and feather work, while behind them were a
body of soldiers, in close vests of quilted cotton, and a train of
slaves.

The merchants bowed low as the nobles approached. The latter paused
for a moment as they came near to Roger, and then saluted him by
touching the ground with their hands, and then carrying them to
their heads. Roger did the same. In the meantime several attendants
round the nobles were filling the air with incense, from censers
which they bore.

"The King of Tezcuco has sent us to welcome you," one of the nobles
said. "He longs to see the white stranger who has arrived in our
land."

"I have heard of the greatness of the king," Roger replied, "and
desire to look upon him. I have come from a great distance beyond
the sea, to see for myself the greatness of the Anahuac kingdoms,
and am glad to meet two of its great nobles."

The Mexicans were not surprised at Roger understanding their
language and replying in it, for the dispatches had already
acquainted the king with the fact that the white stranger could
converse in their language.

There had been an animated debate, at the royal council at Tezcuco,
when the news of his coming had arrived. Some were of opinion that
it was an evil omen, for there was a prophecy existing among them
that white strangers would come from beyond the seas, and overthrow
the Aztec power; but upon the other hand, it was pointed out that
this could only refer to a large body of men, and that as this
stranger came alone, it was far more probable that he was either
Quetzalcoatl himself, or one of his descendants, and that he came
in a spirit of goodwill. If he were a man, one man could do nothing
to shake the Aztec power. If he were a god, he could work evil to
the whole country, whether he remained on the seashore or advanced
to the capital; and it was far better to propitiate him with gifts,
than to anger him with opposition.

Some slaves next brought forward some delicately wrought mats, and
laid upon them the various articles they had brought. A shield,
helmet, and a cuirass, all with embossed plates and ornaments of
gold; a collar and bracelets of the same metal; sandals and fans;
crests of variegated feathers, intermingled with gold and silk
thread, sprinkled with pearls and precious stones; imitations of
birds and animals in cast and wrought gold and silver, of exquisite
workmanship; curtains, coverlets, and robes of cotton as fine as
silk, of rich and various colors, interwoven with feather work so
finely wrought that it resembled the delicacy of painting.

Roger was astonished at the richness and variety of these goods,
and as he viewed them muttered to himself:

"If I were but back in Plymouth with these, my Cousin Mercy and
Dorothy and Agnes would open their eyes, indeed. I wish to goodness
I had something to send back to the king. One of the cannon from
the Swan, with a supply of ammunition and bullets, would have
astonished him. However, as it is, I suppose that I must make the
best of it."

When the goods were all displayed, Roger addressed the ambassadors,
saying how great was the pleasure that the gifts afforded him. Not,
he said, because he desired gold or jewels or articles of luxury,
but because they were proofs of the goodwill of the king, and of
the mightiness of his power.

"Will you convey my earnest thanks to him for these presents, and
say that I regret deeply that I have come to his country empty
handed, and have naught to send him in return; but that there are
reasons why I could not bring aught with me, from the place far
across the seas from which I came? There are many strange and
wonderful things there. People move across the water in floating
castles as big as your temples. They ride on great animals, which
carry them with the speed of the wind. When they fight they use
weapons which twenty men could not lift, which make a noise like
thunder, and destroy their foes at two or three miles' distance.
But I was not permitted to bring, at present, any of these wonders
from the far-distant country. I wanted to come myself, and I have
come; but as I have said, I had to come alone and empty handed. In
time these wonderful things will be brought to your shores, but the
time has not come yet."

The nobles listened with respectful attention. It seemed to them
probable enough that a supernatural personage might convoy himself
vast distances through the air, but that he could not burden
himself with mortal appliances--if, indeed, such things were the
work of merely mortal men.

"I could bring with me," Roger went on, "but one small specimen of
the metal most used in that distant country."

Then the merchants advanced, and handed to Roger his knife, which
they had purchased of the cazique of Tabasco in exchange for two
accomplished slaves, and he presented it to the nobles.

"You see it is a metal of extraordinary hardness. Swords made of it
will cut through a man's head to the chin. No arrows or spears will
penetrate armor made of it. It can be beaten into all shapes, when
hot. The weapons of which I spoke to you are constructed of it, and
it is now used in the arts, in manufacture, and for domestic
purposes, as well as for armor and weapons. So common is it that,
as you see, the handle is made only of rough horn; which shows you
that it is such a one as is commonly used, and is prized but
little. It may be that such a metal is found in your country,
though as yet you know it not; for in its natural state it is but a
stone like others, although greater in weight; and if so, I may be
permitted, some day, to instruct you in the methods of working it."

The nobles were greatly impressed with this speech. Quetzalcoatl
had instructed the Mexicans in all the arts that they possessed,
and this hint that their visitor might bestow upon them the
knowledge of this new, and most valuable metal, seemed a fresh
proof of his relationship to the White God, whose return had been
so long expected and longed for.

They now begged him to enter the city, and a party of their slaves
took up the gifts, and ranged themselves behind him. The Mexican
troops fell in on either side, and prevented the crowd from
pressing in upon them; and then, accompanied by the two nobles, and
followed immediately by the merchants, Roger headed the procession
as it again set forward.

As he entered the town, Roger saw that it was vastly in advance of
Tabasco. The walls were of stone, strong and massive. The streets
were wide and straight, bordered by well-built houses with flat
roofs, upon which great numbers of people were assembled. These
uttered cries of welcome as he came along, and threw down wreaths
of flowers.

The Aztec governor, with a strong guard of soldiers, met them in a
large square in the center of the town; and in the name of the
Emperor Montezuma welcomed Roger, and presented him with gifts of
even greater value than those sent by the King of Tezcuco, saying
that his master hoped that he would pay a visit to his capital, as
well as to that of the neighboring sovereign.

Roger replied suitably, and the procession then took its way to a
large house that had been assigned to the visitor. Here a banquet
was served in grand style, the governor and the two ambassadors,
alone, taking their seats with him. The meal was served up on
golden dishes, and pulque was handed round, in goblets of the same
metal, by white-robed slaves.

Strains of music rose in the air, the performers being stationed in
an adjoining apartment. The music was unlike anything Roger had
ever before heard, and seemed to him to be of a plaintive nature.

With the exception of the fruits, the dishes served were all
strange to him, and he was unable even to guess at their nature.
Among them was a large bird, which Roger judged to be either a swan
or a peacock; but which he was informed was a turkey, a bird common
in the country, but of which he had never before heard.

There were other sorts of game, and all these were prepared with
delicate sauces and seasonings. There were a large number of
various confections and pastry, and a great variety of vegetables
and fruits. Under the dishes of meats, small fires of charcoal were
burning in order to keep them hot. The table was ornamented with
vases of silver and gold, of delicate workmanship, and the
confections were eaten with spoons made of gold or silver, or of
tortoise shell. Several varieties of pulque, flavored with sweets
and acids, were handed, as also chocolate flavored with vanilla and
other spices.

When the viands were removed, slaves brought round, as they had
done before the meal began, basins of water and soft cotton towels;
and each of those present washed his hands and face. Then a
surprise even greater than those which had preceded it awaited
Roger. Two attendants brought round waiters, upon one of which was
placed a pile of a substance which looked to Roger as if it were
the leaves of some vegetable, broken into small pieces, and also a
gold box containing a brown dust. On the other tray were placed a
variety of instruments, of whose use Roger was ignorant. They were
small tubes, inserted into bowls of gold or silver; and in addition
to these were some things that looked like yellowish-brown sticks,
of two or three inches in length, with tubes into which they
fitted.

These trays were first handed to Roger, who, after examining their
contents, turned to the noble next to him and said:

"I know not what these may be, or how they are used. They are not
in use in the country from which I come."

The noble looked surprised.

"It is yetl," he said, "and is good for soothing the nerves and
preparing for the siesta, besides being very pleasant. All these
are made from the same leaf," and he touched the short sticks, the
heap of broken leaves, and the powder.

"This powder we apply to the nose," and he and his companions took
a pinch from the box, and thrust it into their nostrils.

Roger followed their example, but a pungent odor brought the tears
into his eyes, and in another moment he was seized with a violent
fit of sneezing, from which he was some time before he recovered.

"You will get over this, in time," the noble said gravely, but with
a slight smile. "This effect is only experienced when the herb is
first used."

Much as Roger had been astonished by the effect of the powder, he
was still more surprised at the use to which the broken leaf and
the little sticks were put. Two of the Mexicans filled the small
bowls with the leaf, while the other took one of the tubes holding
a small stick. An attendant then approached with a small piece of
wood, on fire. This was applied first to the stick, and then to the
small bowls; and, to Roger's stupefaction, great clouds of smoke at
once issued from the mouths of the three Mexicans. Had it not been
that, from the tranquil expression of their faces, he saw that this
was the regular course of events, he would have thought that some
accident had occurred, and that the Mexicans had, in some
mysterious way, taken fire in the interior.

He remained silent for a minute or two, and then asked:

"Do you like it? Is it really pleasant to you?"

"It is, indeed," the governor said. "This herb is largely used. Its
effect is to produce a feeling of repose and contentment. You will
get to like it, in time."

"Possibly I may," Roger replied; "although at present, that hardly
seems probable."

The music now struck up a more lively air. Presently a number of
young men and women, who had been feasting in another apartment,
came in and performed several graceful dances, to the accompaniment
of the music; singing, as they did so, a sort of chant, which
reminded Roger of those he had so often heard in the churches at
home.

When all was over the ambassadors withdrew, saying that, doubtless,
their guests would wish to enjoy a siesta during the heat of the
day. Some slaves led the way into another apartment, in which was a
couch heaped with soft rugs, and here Roger threw himself down.

"Was there ever an English boy in so strange a strait as mine?" he
said to himself. "What an extraordinary people! Gold seems as
plentiful with them as common pottery with us; and as to the
magnificence of their dresses, I verily believe that the court of
King Harry would make but a poor show beside them. If I could land
at Plymouth tomorrow, with all the presents I have received today,
I should be a rich man. Here they are valueless.

"I received presents at first at Tabasco, and yet, had I remained
there a month longer, I should have been sacrificed to those cruel
gods of theirs. These presents mean really nothing to me. They seem
magnificent, but gold is so common, here, that it is no more than
if, at home, one presented a man with necklaces of glass, and some
woolen cloths. It is a mark of civility, but that is all.

"When I get there, the priest will be inquiring into my religion,
and when they see that I pay no honor to their gods, they will be
sure to raise a cry against me.

"Malinche was telling me that, every year, some special prisoner is
chosen for sacrifice, and is treated with great honor, and has
every luxury until the time comes, and then they put him to death.
Brutes! I have no doubt they will consider that, from my very
rarity, I shall make a specially acceptable sacrifice.

"I wish I was back on the Hoe again. Cousin Diggory, and Mistress
Mercy, and the girls little think into what a horrible fix I have
fallen--alone among a strange people, who breathe smoke out of
their mouths, and load me with rich presents one day, and may kill
me on the next. Well, when the day comes I shall try not to
disgrace my country, and religion, and color; but it is very hard,
being all alone here. If I had but two or three of my companions of
the Swan with me, I should feel that I could face whatever came;
but it is hard to stand quite alone, and I am only a boy.

"Still, they shall find that I can strike a rough blow or two,
before I die. They shall not find that it is a lamb that they are
going to sacrifice, but a Devonshire lad, with such bone and muscle
as one gets from a life on the sea.

"It is strange that these people should be so cruel. They seem so
mild and so gentle, and yet Malinche says they sacrifice tens of
thousands of captives, every year, to their gods. They never kill
in battle if they can avoid it, striving only to take their enemies
prisoners, for this horrible service.

"I must try, if I can, to make friends among them. The old cazique
of Tabasco stood by me well, and it may be that here I may find
some like him; but it will need a powerful protector, indeed, to
stand against the priests, who, Malinche says, are far more
powerful here than in Tabasco."

Three hours later an attendant came in, and said that the governor
invited his guest to walk with him through the town, and survey the
temples and other edifices.

"Now for it," Roger said, clenching his fist. "Now, Roger Hawkshaw,
you have got to show yourself a true man, whatever comes of it."

He fastened the sword, which was one of the weapons with which he
had been presented, to his girdle; and then went out into the great
hall, from which all the other apartments opened. The governor and
the two nobles from Tezcuco were awaiting him.

Upon sallying out, Roger found that the streets were as crowded as
when he entered. He was received with a long quavering cry of
welcome by the women, and by a deeper hum of applause by the men.
All bent to the ground before him and his companions, before whom a
party of soldiers moved to clear the way.

"Now, we will go first to the Great Temple," the governor said. "It
is but small in comparison with those of the great cities of the
valley, but it is a very holy shrine; and numbers come, from all
the cities round, to pay their devotion there on the days of
festival. There are forty temples in the town, on all of which fire
burns night and day; but this is the largest and holiest of them."

After passing through several streets, Roger saw a great hill
rising in front of him. Whether it was the work of man, or had a
natural hill for its foundation, he knew not. It was four sided and
pyramidal in form. There were terraces rising, one above the other,
supported by stone walls. Steps at the angles led from one terrace
to another, but these were so placed that anyone mounting had to
pass right along the terrace round the pyramid, before he arrived
at the steps leading to that above. The top of the pyramid seemed
to be cut off, leaving an area of, as far as he could judge, some
fifty feet square. Smoke ascended from the summit, where, as
Malinche had told him, fire always burns before the altar in its
center.

Just before reaching the foot of the pyramid, the governor pointed
to a building of considerable size.

"Here you will see," he said, leading Roger towards a great
gateway, "how well the god has been honored."

As he neared the gateway, Roger saw that the building was well-nigh
filled with an immense pile, carefully built up, of what at first
appeared to him cannon balls, only of larger size than any he had
seen piled in the batteries of Plymouth, and of a white color. Then
the thought struck him they were great turnips, or some such root,
which might be held sacred to the god. But as he entered the
building the truth flashed across him--the great pile was composed
entirely of human skulls.

Roger had made up his mind that, although he would not give way in
the slightest in the matter of his faith, he would yet abstain from
shocking the religious feeling of the natives. After the first
involuntary start at the discovery, he silenced his feelings, and
asked how many skulls there were in the heap. He could not,
however, understand the reply, as he had not yet mastered the Aztec
method of enumeration, which was a very complicated one.

Roger walked along one side of the pile, counted the number of
skulls in a line, and the number of rows, and then tried to reckon
how many skulls there were. Roger was not quick at figures,
although his father had tried hard to teach him to calculate
rapidly, as it was necessary for one who traded, and bought and
sold goods of all descriptions, to be able to keep his own figures;
or he would otherwise be forced always to carry a supercargo, as
was indeed the custom in almost all trading ships, for there were
few masters who could read and write, far less keep accounts.
However, as he found there were a hundred skulls in each line, and
ten rows, and as the heap was nearly square, it was not a difficult
task to arrive at the conclusion that there must be a hundred
thousand skulls in the pile.

This seemed to him beyond belief, and yet he could arrive at no
other conclusion. If a hundred thousand victims had been offered
up, in one temple of this comparatively small city, what must be
the total of men killed throughout the country? The pile had, no
doubt, been a long time in growing, perhaps a hundred years; but
even then it would give a thousand victims, yearly, in this one
temple.

Although it seemed well-nigh impossible to Roger, it was yet by no
means excessive, for according to the accounts of all historians,
Mexican and Spanish, the number of victims slain, annually, on the
altars of Mexico amounted to from twenty-five to fifty thousand.

"The god has good reason to be pleased?" the Aztec ambassador, who
was watching Roger's face closely, remarked.

"If he is fond of blood and sacrifices, he should indeed be
pleased," Roger said quietly; "but all gods do not love slaughter.
Quetzalcoatl, your god of the air, he who loved men and taught them
what they know--such a god would abhor sacrifices of blood.
Offerings of fruit and flowers, which he taught men to grow, of the
arts in which he instructed them, would be vastly more pleasing to
him than human victims."

Roger spoke in a tone of authority, as if he were sure of what he
stated.

"When the white god left your shores, there were no human
sacrifices offered to the gods"--this fact Roger had learned from
Malinche, who had told him that the custom had been introduced in
comparatively late years. She said ten generations, which he
supposed would mean about two hundred years--"and such a custom
would be abhorrent to him."

The Aztec governor looked very grave. It was to the god of war that
these sacrifices were offered, but the idea that the kindly white
god, who stood next to him in public estimation, might not only
object to be so worshiped himself, but might object altogether to
human sacrifices being offered, was unpleasant to him; and yet this
white stranger clearly spoke as if he were acquainted with the mind
of Quetzalcoatl.

The Tezcucan envoys, on the other hand, looked pleased. Tezcuco had
maintained for a long time a milder form of worship. Her people
were more gentle than the Aztecs, and had only reluctantly, and in
part, adopted the terrible rites of their formidable neighbors.

"Will you ascend the temple?" the governor asked.

"No," Roger said firmly. "I say not aught against the god of
battles. Let those who will make offerings to him. The God of the
Air," and Roger raised his hand towards the sky, "loves flowers and
fruit and peace and goodwill. When He came down to earth He
preached peace, and would have had all men as brothers; and I, who
follow Him, will not bow down at altars where human beings have
been sacrificed."

The Mexican naturally thought that Roger was speaking of
Quetzalcoatl, and this strange knowledge he possessed of the god,
and his ways and wishes, struck him with deep awe. Without making
any further attempt to induce him to ascend the teocalli, which was
the name they gave to their pyramidal temples, the governor led the
way back to the palace.

The next morning Roger started with the Tezcucan envoys on his
journey. They informed him on the way that the Aztec governor had,
on the previous evening, dispatched an officer of high rank to
Mexico, to give the emperor the full details of the conversation
and sayings of the strange visitor; for the dispatches were
available only for sending news of facts and occurrences, but could
not be used as mediums for conveying thought.

"Montezuma is mild and gentle in his disposition, and quite unlike
his two predecessors, who were mighty warriors; and doubtless, in
his heart, he will welcome the words you said yesterday concerning
Quetzalcoatl. But he is swayed wholly by the priests, and such
sentiments will not be agreeable to them, for sacrifices are
forever going on at the teocalli. At the dedication of the great
temple for Huitzilopotchli, just thirty years ago, seventy thousand
captives were put to death."

"They must have been miserable creatures," Roger said indignantly,
"to have submitted tamely to such a fate. They might, at least,
have rushed upon their guards, however numerous, and died
fighting."

Roger said little more during that day's journey. The admiration he
had at first felt, for the arts and civilization of these people,
had been succeeded by a feeling of abhorrence. He had heard, from
Malinche, that all victims sacrificed to the gods were afterwards
cooked and eaten; and although he had scarcely believed the girl,
in spite of her solemn assurances, he could now, after seeing the
vast pile of human skulls, quite believe that it was true.



Chapter 8: At Tezcuco.


In each city through which they passed, and several of these were
of vastly greater size and importance than Tepeaca, Roger was
received with the same welcome and rejoicings that had greeted him
there. The houses were decorated with flowers and garlands, dense
crowds lined the streets, processions came out to meet him;
banquets were given in his honor, and everything seemed gay and
joyous. But Roger was low and depressed. To him the whole thing
appeared a mockery. He seemed to see blood everywhere, and the fact
that, as he learned from the casual remark of one of the envoys,
numbers of victims were offered upon the altars on the evening
before his arrival at each town, in order to please the gods and
bring about favorable omens, added to his depression; and he
thought that he had better, a thousand times, have been drowned
with his father and friends, than be the cause of men being thus
put to death.

It was true that, as he was told, these captives were reserved for
this purpose, and had they not been slain on that night might have
been sacrificed on the next; but this was a small consolation. It
seemed to him that above the joyful cries of greeting he could hear
the screams of agony of the victims, and to such a pitch was he
wrought up that, had he seen any whom he could have recognized as
priests, he would have fallen upon them with his sword.

But the priests held aloof from the gatherings. They knew not, as
yet, how their chiefs would regard this stranger, and it was not
their policy to join in welcoming one who might, afterwards, be
denounced and sacrificed as an enemy of their religion; nor, upon
the other hand, would they commit themselves to hostility to one
who might be held to be a god.

From the summits of the teocallis they looked down upon the great
gatherings; angry that instead of, as usual, figuring in the chief
places in the procession, they were forced to stand aloof. As in
Egypt, the Aztec priests embraced within their order all the
science and learning of the nation. They were skilled in the
sciences of astrology and divination, and were divided into
numerous ranks and classes. Those best instructed in music took the
management of the choirs, others arranged the festivals conformably
to the calendar, some superintended the education of the young of
both sexes, others had charge of the hieroglyphic paintings and
records and of the oral traditions, while the rites of sacrifice
were practiced by the chief dignitaries of the order. They were
each devoted to the service of some particular deity, and had
quarters provided within the spacious precincts of his temple.

Here a certain number were always on duty, and men living there
practiced the stern severity of conventual discipline. Thrice
during the day, and once at night, they were called to prayers.
They mortified the flesh by fasting and cruel penance, drawing
blood from their bodies by flagellation or by piercing themselves
with the thorns of the aloe. When their turn of duty was over, they
resided with their wives and families outside the temples.

The great cities were divided into districts, placed under the
charge of a sort of parochial clergy. These administered the rites
of baptism, confession, and absolution, each of which strongly
resembled that of the Christian religion. In baptism the lips and
bosom of the infant were sprinkled with water, and the Lord was
implored to permit the holy drops to wash away the sin that was
given to it, before the foundation of the world, so that the child
might be born anew. The secrets of confession were held inviolable,
and penances were laid upon the penitents. There was one
peculiarity in the Aztec ceremony of confession--namely, that the
repetition of an offense, once atoned for, was deemed inexpiable--and
confession was therefore made but once in a man's life, and generally
deferred until a late period of it.

One of the most important duties of the priesthood was that of
education, to which certain buildings were appropriated, within the
enclosure of the principal temple of each city. Here the youth of
both sexes, of the middle and higher classes, were placed when very
young; the girls being entrusted to the care of priestesses, for
women exercised all sacerdotal functions except those of sacrifice.
In these institutions the boys were drilled in monastic discipline.
They decorated the shrines of the gods with flowers, fed the sacred
fires, and took part in the religious chants and festivals. Those
in the higher schools were initiated in the traditionary law, the
mysteries of hieroglyphics, the principles of government, and in
astronomical and natural science. The girls were instructed in all
feminine employments, especially in weaving and embroidery. The
discipline, both in male and female schools, was stern and rigid.

The temples were supported by the revenue from lands bestowed upon
them by successive princes. These were managed by the priests, who
were considered as excellent masters, treating their tenants with
liberality and indulgence. Besides this they were entitled to the
first fruits of all produce, and were constantly receiving rich
offerings from the pious. The surplus, beyond what was required for
the support of the priests, was distributed in alms among the poor,
charity being strongly prescribed by the moral code of the nation.

Thus the Aztec religion was a strange mixture of good and evil. The
moral discipline enforced by it was excellent. Many of its precepts
resembled very closely those of Christianity, and yet the whole was
contaminated by the wholesale sacrifices. It is supposed that this
dual religion was the result of the mixture of two peoples, the
mild and gentle tenets of the Toltecs being adopted by the fierce
Aztec invaders, who added to them their own superstitious and
bloody rites.

All this, however, was unknown to Roger at the time. He saw the
dark side of their religion, only, and was ignorant that there
underlay it a system which, in point of morality, love of order and
method, and a broad charity, was in no way inferior to that
practiced among Christian nations.

For some reason, of which Roger was ignorant--but which was,
doubtless, in order to avoid the delays occasioned by stoppages at
large towns, and to push on the faster towards the capital, where
the king and his counselors were impatient to behold the white
stranger--a detour was made. The towns of Puebla and Cholula were
avoided, and the party pushed on rapidly across the plateau land
they were now ascending, where the air was again keen and piercing.
The road passed between two of the highest mountains in the North
American continent--the great volcano Popocatepetl, meaning "the
hill that smokes," and Iztaccihuatl, or "the white woman," so
called from the bright robe of snow which extended far down its
sides. The lower part of these mountains was covered with dense
forests, above which rock, lava, and ashes extended to the summit
of the crater of the volcano.

At night the party sheltered in one of the stone buildings, erected
by government at intervals along the road, for the accommodation of
travelers and couriers. Pushing on the next morning, they came upon
a view which caused an exclamation of surprise, and delight, to
burst from Roger. At their feet lay the valley of Mexico, with its
lakes glistening in the sunshine, its cultivated plains, and
numerous cities and villages. Stretching away, from the point at
which he was standing, were forests of oak, sycamore, and cedar;
beyond, fields of yellow maize and aloe, intermingled with orchards
and bright patches of many colors. These were flowers, which were
grown on a very large scale, as they were used in vast quantities
in the religious festivals, and almost universally worn by the
women.

In the center of the valley lay the great lakes, their borders
thickly studded with towns and hamlets. Rising from an island, in
the center of the largest of these, was the city of Mexico; its
great buildings and lofty teocallis being seen clearly through the
dry atmosphere. The envoys first pointed out the capital to Roger,
and then another great city, some distance to the right, as being
Tezcuco. Beyond the lakes, a barrier of dark hills rose, forming a
suitable background to the lovely prospect.

Upon the road, Roger learned much from the Tezcucan envoys of the
character of the king of their country, and of the Emperor
Montezuma.

The grandfather of the present king had been the greatest and most
powerful of the Tezcucan princes. In his youth he had gone through
a series of strange adventures. Tezcuco had been captured, the
people subjugated by the Tepanecs, and the king killed when the
young prince was but fifteen years old. The boy himself was thrown
into a dungeon, but escaped and fled to Mexico; and on the
intercession of the king of that city was allowed to return, and to
live for eight years, quietly, in a palace belonging to the family.
When the Tepanec usurper died, his son Maxtla, who succeeded him,
determined to kill the rightful heir to the throne; but being
warned in time Nezahualcoyotl escaped, and for a long time wandered
about the country, hotly pursued by his enemies; who were many
times on the edge of capturing him, but he was always sheltered by
the peasantry.

At last the neighboring powers, fearing the aggression of the
Tepanecs, united and routed them. Maxtla was put to death, and the
lawful prince placed upon the throne. He showed great magnanimity,
granting a general amnesty, and then set about to remodel the
government.

Three departments were formed: the Council of War, the Council of
Finance, and the Council of Justice; and in each of these bodies, a
certain number of citizens were allowed to have seats with the
nobles and state officers. The highest body was composed of
fourteen members, all belonging to the highest orders of nobles.
This was called the Council of State, which aided the king in the
dispatch of business, and advised him in all matters of importance.
Its members had seats provided for them at the royal table.

Lastly, there was a tribunal known as the Council of Music. This
was composed of the best instructed persons in the country, without
regard of rank, and was devoted to the encouragement of all
branches of science and art. All works on these subjects had to be
submitted to them, before they could be made public. They had the
supervision of all the productions of art, and the more delicate
fabrics. They decided on the qualifications of the teachers of the
various branches of science, inquired into the proper performance
of their duties, and instituted examinations of the pupils. The
Council gave prizes for historical composition, and poems treating
of moral or traditional topics. It was, in fact, at once a board of
education, and a council of science and art. The kings of the three
allied states had seats upon it, and deliberated with the other
members on the adjudication of the prizes.

Thus Tezcuco became the center of the education, science, and art
of Anahuac, and was at this time the head of the three allied
kingdoms. Nezahualcoyotl greatly encouraged agriculture, as well as
all the productive arts. The royal palace and the edifices of the
nobles were magnificent buildings, and were upon an enormous scale,
the Spaniards acknowledging that they surpassed any buildings in
their own country.

Not satisfied with receiving the reports of his numerous officers,
the monarch went frequently in disguise among his people, listening
to their complaints, and severely punishing wrongdoers. Being
filled with deep religious feeling, he openly confessed his faith
in a God far greater than the idols of wood and stone worshiped by
his subjects, and built a great temple which he dedicated to the
Unknown God.

After fifty years' reign this great monarch died, and was succeeded
by his son Nezahualpilli, who resembled his father in his tastes,
encouraging learning, especially astronomical studies, and building
magnificent public edifices. He was severe in his morals, and stern
in the execution of justice. In his youth he had been devoted to
war, and had extended the dominion of Tezcuco; but he afterwards
became indolent, and spent much of his time in retirement.

His Mexican rival took advantage of this, for as the rule of
Tezcuco became relaxed distant provinces revolted, the discipline
of the army became shaken, and Montezuma, partly by force, partly
by fraud, possessed himself of a considerable portion of its
dominions, and assumed the title, hitherto held by the Tezcucan
princes, of Emperor.

These misfortunes pressed heavily on the spirits of the king, and
their effect was increased by certain gloomy prognostics of a great
calamity, which was shortly to overwhelm the country. His health
rapidly gave way. He had died but two years before, and had been
succeeded by his son Cacama, the present king, a young prince who
was two-and-twenty years old when he ascended the throne, after a
sanguinary war with an ambitious younger brother. In Tezcuco, as in
Mexico, the office of king was elective and not hereditary. It was,
indeed, confined to the royal family; but the elective council,
composed of the nobles and of the kings of the other two great
confederate monarchies, selected the member of that family whom
they considered best qualified to rule.

Roger was greatly impressed with these accounts of the government
of this strange country. It appeared to him that art and learning
were there held of much higher account than they were in England;
and it seemed more strange to him than ever, that a people so
enlightened could be guilty of such wholesale human sacrifices as
those of which he had heard, and had indeed seen proof; still more
that they could absolutely feast upon the flesh of these victims of
their cruel superstitions.

Descending into the valley the party avoided, as before, the
numerous cities in the plain. The Tezcucans told him that they did
so simply because they were anxious to arrive as soon as possible
at the capital; but as Roger learned from them that the sway of
Montezuma was paramount in this part of the valley, he thought it
probable that they feared the Aztecs might take him from their
hands, and send him direct to the emperor.

After a long march across a richly cultivated country, they
approached the town of Tezcuco just as evening was closing in. A
messenger had gone on ahead, to announce the exact hour at which
they would arrive; and a party of soldiers were stationed a short
distance outside the town, to escort them through the city to the
royal palace. They formed up on either side of the party when they
arrived and, without a pause, the caravan kept on its way.

Roger had been astonished at the magnificence of the houses of the
wealthy, scattered for a long distance round the city, and at the
extraordinary beauty of the gardens with their shady groves, their
bright flowers, their fish ponds and fountains; but the splendor of
the buildings of the capital surpassed anything he had before
beheld. Not even in Genoa or Cadiz were there such stately
buildings, while those of London were insignificant in comparison.
The crowd in the streets were quiet and orderly and, although they
looked with curiosity and interest on the white stranger, of whose
coming they had heard, evinced none of the enthusiasm with which he
had been greeted at Tepeaca. This was natural enough. The
inhabitants of a capital, being accustomed to splendid fetes and
festivals, are less easily moved than those of a small provincial
town by any unaccustomed events, and are more restrained in the
expression of their feelings.

The dresses of the people were greatly superior to those he had
seen hitherto. They wore over their shoulders a cloak, made of
cottons of different degrees of fineness, according to the
condition of the wearer. These and the ample sashes worn round the
loins were wrought in rich and elegant figures, and edged with a
deep fringe, or tassels.

The women went about as freely as the men. Instead of the cloaks,
they wore mantles of fur or gorgeous feather work. Beneath these
were several skirts or petticoats of different lengths, with highly
ornamented borders. Sometimes loose flowing robes were worn over
these, reaching to the ankles--those of the upper classes being of
very fine textures, and prettily embroidered. Some of the women
wore veils made of fine thread of the aloe, or that spun from the
hair of rabbits and other animals. Others had their faces entirely
exposed, their dark tresses falling luxuriantly ever their
shoulders. These, Roger learned afterwards, were Aztecs, the rest
of the women of Anahuac mostly wearing the veil; which was,
however, extremely thin, and scarcely concealed the features.

The guards ahead with difficulty cleared the way through the crowd,
until they at last arrived at the king's palace, a building of
extraordinary splendor. A number of nobles, in gorgeous attire,
received the party at the entrance; and passing along a stately
corridor, they entered a vast hall. A cornice of carved stonework
covered with thin plates of gold ran round the walls, and from this
dropped hangings of the most delicately embroidered stuffs. The
roof was of carved cedar, the floor a mosaic of stone of different
colors, so delicately fitted together that they seemed one.

At the farther end of the hall, upon a raised dais, was a throne.
Upon this the young king was sitting, while a number of his
counselors and nobles, together with several princesses and ladies
of the court, were gathered around him.

When Roger approached, he bowed low, saluting in Mexican fashion.
The king rose as he approached, looking with lively curiosity and
interest at the strange visitor, of whom he had already received so
many reports.

Roger, on his part, regarded the king with no less interest. He saw
before him a young man of three or four and twenty, with a bright
intelligent face. His figure showed signs of considerable strength
as well as activity, and there was a certain martial air in his
carriage that spoke of the soldier rather than of the king. The
nobles had endeavored to impress upon Roger the necessity for him
to salute the king, by prostrating himself on the ground as they
themselves did. But Roger had refused to comply with their request.

"King Hal, himself, would not expect me to go before him like a
worm, if he gave me audience," he said to himself; "and I will not
demean myself, as an Englishman, to bow as a slave before any other
monarch. Besides, to do so would be to acknowledge that I was his
humble subject, and would at once show that I have no pretension,
whatever, to be the superior creature they seem to consider me. I
will salute him as his nobles saluted me--paying due deference to
his rank, and no more."

The king himself did not seem displeased at Roger's breach of the
usual etiquette. He looked with admiration at the tall figure of
this strange white man, and at the frank and honest expression of
his pleasant face, his blue eyes, and sunny hair.

"Whoever he may be, he comes not as an enemy," he said in a low
voice to his sister, who was standing next to him. "There is
neither deceit nor treachery in that face."

Then he said aloud to Roger:

"You are welcome, white stranger. We rejoice to see you in our
courts. We have heard wonderful stories concerning you, and about
the people in the distant lands from which you come; and shall
gladly hear them from your lips, for we are told that you speak our
tongue."

"I thank you, King Cacama, and I am glad, indeed, that it is my
good fortune to behold so great and magnificent a king. I have
come, as you have heard, from a far country, towards the rising
sun; so far that it takes many months to traverse the sea which
divides it from you; but had the distance been far greater than it
is, I should have been more than repaid for the journey by the
sight of you, and of this great city over which you rule."

"And is it true that your people move about the sea in floating
castles, and that they fight with weapons that make a noise like
thunder, and can batter down walls at a distance of two miles?"

"They can kill men at more than that distance, Sire, but for
battering down walls they are used at shorter distances. The ships
are, as you say, floating castles, and will carry hundreds of men,
with provisions and stores for many months, besides merchandise and
goods. These castles are armed with weapons such as you speak of,
some of them carrying twenty or more; besides which each man
carries a weapon of the same kind, but small and light in make, so
that it can be carried on the shoulders. These weapons also make a
great noise, though not comparable with that of the large pieces,
which are called cannon."

"And they have animals on which they sit, and which carry them at a
speed far greater than that at which a man can run?"

"That is so, Sire."

"Of what color are they, and of what form?"

"They are all colors: some are black, and some white, others brown,
or gray, or roan, or bay."

This answer seemed to surprise the king more than any other he had
heard. All the beasts and birds with which he was acquainted were
of the particular color which appertained to their species, and
that the animals of any one kind should thus differ in so
extraordinary degree from each other struck him as remarkable,
indeed.

Roger had always been fond of sketching, and had often whiled away
dull hours on board ship with pencil and paintbrush; and his
cousins at home had quite a collection of sketches that he made for
them in, foreign parts. He now said:

"If your Majesty will order that gentleman, who is at present
taking my likeness, to hand me a sheet of paper and his brushes, I
will endeavor to draw for your Majesty an outline of the animal I
speak of, and which we call a horse."

At the king's order the scribe at once handed the necessary
materials to Roger, who in three or four minutes dashed off a
spirited sketch of a horse, with a rider upon his back. The king
was greatly struck with the representation. The Aztecs possessed
the art of copying objects with a fair amount of accuracy, but the
figures were stiff and wooden, without the slightest life or
animation. To the king, then, this little sketch appeared almost
supernatural. Here was before him an animal which looked alive, as
if already in movement. He passed it to those next to him, and
continued the conversation.

"And the men fight on the backs of those animals?"

"The nobles and a certain portion of the troops fight on horseback,
the rest of the army on foot."

"And are not these animals frightened at the terrible noises made
by the weapons you speak of?"

"They speedily become accustomed to them, Your Majesty, just as men
do; and will carry their rider into the midst of the enemy, however
great the noise. Some other time I will draw for your Majesty a
representation of one of our knights, or captains, charging in full
armor; which is, as you have perhaps heard, made of a metal that is
not known here."

"And these weapons that you speak of are made of the same metal?"

"They are mostly made of that metal, Sire, though sometimes they
are made of a metal which we call brass, which is a compound of
copper, and of another metal called tin, which adds greatly to its
strength and hardness."

"But how do they work? What machinery can be used to hurl a missile
at so vast a distance?"

"There is no machinery, Sire. The weapon is a hollow tube of vast
strength, closed at one end, with only a small hole left there by
which fire can be applied. A black powder, composed of various
substances, is placed in the tube and pressed up to the end, a wad
of cotton or other material being forced down upon it. A large ball
made of this metal, which is called iron, and almost the same
diameter as the tube, is pushed down upon the wad; and the weapon
is pointed at the enemy, or at the wall to be knocked down. Then
fire is applied to the small hole, the powder at once explodes with
a noise like thunder, and the ball is sent through the air with so
great a speed that the eye cannot follow its flight, and all that
it strikes goes down before it."

"Even one of these captains on his horse?" the king asked.

"Fifty of them, Sire, were they ranged up in line, one behind the
other."

"Will you be able to teach us to make such weapons?"

"Your Majesty, I have had a share in the using of these weapons,
but not in the making of them; and they require great skill in
their manufacture. I know not whether iron stone exists in this
country, and were it found it would require a long experiment and
great knowledge to manufacture a cannon from it. As to the powder,
it is composed of three ingredients--one is charcoal, which can be
obtained wherever trees grow; another is called by us saltpeter;
and the third, sulphur; but I cannot say whether either is found in
this land. Nor, your Majesty, do I think that such knowledge, could
I impart it, would be a blessing to the land; on the contrary, the
battles would be far more terrible and bloody than they now are.
Vast numbers would be slain, and valor and bravery would avail but
little, against these terrible missiles."

"No," the king said, thoughtfully: "you would take few prisoners,
if you fought with such weapons as these. You take some prisoners,
I suppose?"

"Yes, your Majesty; we always take as prisoners those who ask for
mercy."

"And what do you do with them?"

"We treat them honorably and well, as is befitting men who have
fought bravely. We exchange them for men of our own side who have
been taken prisoners by the enemy, or if they are knights or nobles
they pay a ransom according to their rank to their captor, and so
return home."

"That is good," the young king said, with animation; "though it
differs altogether from our usages; but then, how are their altars
of the gods to be served?"

"I believe," Roger said, "that your Majesty's grandfather erected a
temple here to the Unknown God. It is the Unknown God--unknown to
you, but known to us--that the white peoples across the sea
worship. He is a good and gentle and loving God, and would abhor
sacrifices of blood."

The king did not reply for a minute. The introduction of human
sacrifices was a comparatively recent innovation in Tezcuco, and
although the Aztecs had, lately, almost forced their own hideous
rites upon their neighbors, there were many who were still, at
heart, opposed to them. He turned the subject by saying:

"There will be much for you to tell me, when we have leisure. At
present the banquet waits."

The eighteen months that had elapsed, since the wreck of the Swan,
had prepared Roger for taking part in such scenes as those in which
he was, at present, placed. From living so long among natives, and
in native costume, he had acquired something of their manner;
which, unless under strong excitement, was quiet and dignified. He
had done this the more because, whenever he went out, all eyes had
been upon him, and he had felt that it was necessary, so far as he
could, to support the mysterious reputation he possessed. He had
lost, alike, the sailor walk and carriage, the careless gaiety of a
boy, and the roughness of one brought up to life at sea. He himself
was only half conscious of this transformation, but to one who had
seen him last when he sailed from Plymouth, it would have appeared
absolutely marvelous. Undoubtedly it impressed both the king and
his nobles most favorably; and as the party followed the king and
Roger to the banqueting hall, there was a chorus of approval of the
manners, bearing, and appearance of the white stranger.

The banquet was similar, but on a vastly greater scale, to that of
which Roger had partaken at Tepeaca. Mexico contained, within
comparatively narrow limits, extreme diversities of climate; and by
means of the swift couriers, the kings and nobles could place upon
their tables the tropical fruits and vegetables from the zone of
the sea, the temperate fruits from the lofty plateau land, and the
products of the rich and highly cultivated valley of the capital.

The twenty counselors sat down at table with the king. Other tables
were spread at which the principal nobles feasted, while the king's
wife and sister and other ladies dined in the same hall, but had
tables apart. The king abstained from asking questions of Roger
about his country, during the meal, but conversed with him
concerning his journey, and his impressions of the country; and
inquired particularly whether he was perfectly satisfied with the
treatment he had received from the merchants. Roger assured him
that nobody could have been kinder or more courteous than they had
been, and that he hoped his Majesty would express his satisfaction
at their conduct.

"That has already been done," the king said. "The reports of my
envoys were sufficient for that. They have been raised in rank,
have received permission to carry specially decorated banners, with
other privileges and immunities."

After dinner was over, the king, without waiting as usual for the
smoking and entertainments of musicians, dancers, and acrobats,
rose, saying to Roger:

"I am too anxious to talk with you to take pleasure in these
amusements. Come with me now."

He led the way to the entrance to the private apartments. These
were enclosed by magnificent hangings, which were drawn aside by
two attendants as he approached them. The walls were here entirely
hidden by hangings, and the floor covered with a thick carpeting of
richly-dyed cotton stuff. The air was heavy with odors of perfumes.

The king led the way to an apartment of considerable size, although
small in comparison to the two great halls they had left. Couches
of quilted mats, covered with silken embroidery, extended round the
room; and a general air of comfort, as well as luxury, pervaded it.

From the open windows, a view extended over a lovely garden below,
and then across the lake to the walls and temples of Mexico,
shining in the moonlight and dotted with innumerable spots of fire
on the summits of the teocallis. The room itself was lighted with
open lamps, in which burned cotton wicks embedded in wax.

Cacama clapped his hands, and a young noble in attendance entered.
The king bade him summon six of his counselors, and tell the queen
and the princess that he awaited them.

In a short time these entered. The pomp and ceremony of royalty
were, to a considerable extent, laid aside in Tezcuco in the
interior of the palace--the custom there differing much from that
which prevailed at the court of Montezuma, where the emperor never
relaxed, in the slightest, in exacting the lowliest and most
profound homage from all who approached him.



Chapter 9: Life In A Palace.


"Now," the young king exclaimed joyously, as soon as the party he
had invited had assembled, and the silk hangings at the entrance of
the door had been closed: "Now we can talk at our ease. In the
first place, what can I call you?"

"My name is Roger Hawkshaw, your Majesty."

The king repeated the name.

"It is two words," Roger said. "With us, people have two names--the
one which is common to all the family, the other which is given
particularly to each person. The name of my family is Hawkshaw, my
own name is Roger. Your Majesty can call me by either one, or by
both."

Long names were common in Mexico, and Roger Hawkshaw seemed by no
means long to the king.

"Roger Hawkshaw shall be your name in public," he said. "It has a
strange grand sound, and will impress the people; but I will call you
Roger. This is my queen and first wife, Maclutha. This is my sister,
Amenche. These are two of my oldest and ablest counselors--both are
great nobles, and have led the armies of my father to victory. These
four young men are, as you see, my friends--they are the sons of four
of my chief nobles, and have been brought up with me since we were
children. Now, tell us more about yourself and your people."

The whole party took their seats upon the couches, half sitting,
half reclining. Attendants brought in cocoa of many different
flavors, confections, and tobacco. Roger took the cocoa, but
refused the tobacco.

"We do not know this herb in our country," he said.

"That is a grave misfortune for you," the king remarked. "It is
known and used by all peoples that we know of, here. It was used by
the people we found here, when we came from the far north, and all
the tribes there used it also.

"First, tell me what induced you to make this long journey across
the sea."

Roger had been expecting this question, and as he had already
determined that he would, in all matters, adhere to the truth, he
did not hesitate in his reply.

"Your Majesty will understand that all the white peoples who dwell
on the borders of the sea journey much in ships, which is the name
we give to the floating castles. We do trade with many peoples. For
example there is, far to the south of us, a great land wholly
inhabited by people who are quite black."

A general exclamation of astonishment broke from the party.

"They must be frightful!" the young queen exclaimed.

"They are very ugly," Roger said, "with very wide mouths and very
thick lips, and flat noses; and instead of having long soft hair,
they have only a short, curly sort of black wool on the top of
their heads."

"Have you seen them yourself?" asked Cacama, rather gravely.

"I have seen some of them, Sire," Roger replied. "I was in a ship
that was attacked by others, manned by a people who live on the
northern coast of this land, and who are themselves not black but
yellow; and they had with them several of these people of whom I
speak, who were frightful in their ugliness; but who, to do them
justice, fought bravely, though we managed at last to beat them
off.

"I pray your Majesty not to doubt any facts that I may tell you,
for in my country it is considered disgraceful to lie; and however
extraordinary some of the things I may say may appear to you, I can
assure you that they will all be absolutely true. They may seem to
you hard to believe, but you must remember that things which are
strange to us always seem wonderful. My own countrymen, for
example, would find it hard to believe that there could be a people
who took delight in drawing in the smoke of a burning vegetable,
and puffing it out again."

"I will not doubt what you say, in future," Cacama said. "Now,
continue what you were telling us."

"The white people are divided into nations, as are your people on
this side of the water. Some, however, are much more powerful than
others. While in times of peace all the ports of different
countries are open to the ships of the others, there are two
countries that claim the right over great seas, although as yet
untraveled and unknown."

"But how can they claim such a right as that?" one of the two chief
counselors asked.

"Partly by the right that they have been the first to try to make
discoveries in those seas; secondly because one of these countries
is the strongest, at the present time; and thirdly, because they
have been confirmed in their claim by the pope, who is the chief
priest of the religion that is held in common among all white
people. To the Spaniards was assigned that vast space of water
lying towards the setting sun."

"You do not belong to that nation?"

"No. My country is called England. It is a great island divided
into two kingdoms, of which ours is the larger."

"Are your people great fighters?"

"Yes. We have fought many obstinate wars with the nation lying on
the mainland opposite to us, and our men have beaten theirs when
they have outnumbered us many-fold; but at present we are at peace.
We found that, while we could beat them in battle, we could not
continue to hold a country that lay separated from us by the sea."

"And you are friends with the Spaniards also?"

"Yes. We have never warred with Spain, and our king has as his wife
a princess of that country. Trading at Spanish ports, we learned
that there was a rumor among the Spaniards that, far to the west,
lay a great people possessing vast stores of gold, and riches of
all kinds; and so my father, who was the captain of one of these
floating castles, determined to sail across the sea and, in despite
of the Spaniards and their rules, endeavor to perform the adventure
of discovering, if possible, this great nation."

"What would have happened if the Spaniards had met you, as you
passed through their waters?"

"Had they succeeded in taking our ship, they would have killed us
without mercy; but we had a strong crew, and would have matched
ourselves, willingly enough, against any Spanish ship, however big,
that interfered with us."

"And what became of your ship?"

"She struck during a gale on the coast of Tabasco, and was dashed
to pieces. My father and all on board were drowned. But God
protected me, and I was thrown ashore unhurt; it being doubtless
His intention that I should live to be the first white man to see
your great country, and to bring to you the news of the white
peoples beyond the sea."

"You know the story about our god, Quetzalcoatl," the king said,
after a long pause. "We had news that you knew all about him. We
believe that his descendants will return hither, to teach us many
things."

"I am aware of it, Sire."

"But do you know, also, that we of Tezcuco have reason to view the
arrival of the Whites with fear? My father, who was full of
learning and wisdom, predicted when on his deathbed that a white
people would shortly arrive, from the sea, and would overthrow the
Anahuac kingdoms. It is strange, indeed, that within three years of
his death you should appear."

"It is strange," Roger agreed. "Assuredly, your Majesty, your
father's prophecy did not allude to my people. We are a
comparatively small nation, and are not even masters of the whole
of our island. We have not one ship to fifty that the Spaniards
possess, and have no desire for foreign conquests. We are strong if
attacked, and even Spain would find it a hard matter, did she
endeavor to conquer us; but we should not dream of challenging the
rights she exercises over the seas to the west of her. Moreover,
our climate is a cold one, and we should not be able to support,
with comfort, the heat of a country like this. It is not from our
nation that danger can ever approach you."

"But from the Spaniards?" the king asked, gravely.

"I cannot think, Sire, that so great and powerful a nation as yours
has reason to dread conquest by the Spaniards. But they are a
mighty people. They have extended their rule over many peoples, on
the other side of the water; and they have captured many islands
which lie not so very far from your shores."

"How far away?" one of the old counselors asked.

"A vessel with a favoring wind would sail to your coast, thence, in
twelve or fourteen days," Roger replied.

There was a general exclamation of surprise and uneasiness from
Roger's hearers. Many questions were asked him, as to the number of
men the Spaniards could put in the field. His answer somewhat
reassured them.

"Perhaps two thousand would be the utmost they could send from
these islands," he said; "though I know not the strength of their
various garrisons. But from Spain they could, if they chose, send
across the seas in their ships ten times as many."

"We could put over two hundred thousand in the field," the king
said proudly.

Roger was silent.

"You do not think," the king went on after a pause, "that twenty
thousand of these men are to be feared by a host like ours?"

"With equal arms and armor, no, your Majesty; but with the
advantage of their weapons, the fact that they are clad in armor
which your spears and arrows and knives would be powerless to
pierce, and that many of them would be mounted soldiers, whose rush
and impetus in battle it is nigh impossible--even for white
infantry, who have no fear of the horses, and are themselves clad
in armor--to withstand; and that they have, in addition these,
terrible cannon of which I spoke to you, I think that should twenty
thousand of the Spaniards land here, they would be irresistible.

"However, I do not think that there is any chance of such an army
being brought against you. Rich and powerful as Spain is, the
expense of preparing such an expedition, and the ships required to
carry it, would be so vast that I do not think she would undertake
it. Moreover, she is always so occupied with wars at home that she
could not spare such a force for a distant expedition; and I do
not, therefore, think you have any ground for alarm, in the
present.

"I believe that in a very short time Spanish ships may arrive at
your ports, and will open trade with your people. I wonder that
they have not, long since, found their way here. Trade would be
beneficent to both. They have many commodities that would be most
useful to you. You have others that they would prize greatly."

"What are our products they would most value?" the king asked.

"First, and most of all, gold," Roger said. "It is with us the
scarcest and most valuable of metals, and all things are valued by
it. As with you bags of cocoa are your standard of value, so with
them are pieces of gold. A wide estate is worth so much gold; a
ship, or a horse, or a suit of armor, so many pieces of gold; and
so through everything. All your delicate embroidery work would be
valuable in their eyes, as being strange and different to anything
we possess; while on their side they could provide you with silks,
and satins, and velvets, and cloths, and other fabrics new to you;
to say nothing of arms and iron work vastly superior to any you
possess."

One of the old counselors whispered something in the king's ear,
and the latter said to the queen:

"Maclutha, I would talk these matters over with my counselors. I am
sure that you and my sister are longing to hear, from Roger
Hawkshaw, all about the ladies of his race, and their dresses and
fashions. Take him, therefore, into your room, while we discuss
this matter here."

The two ladies and Roger thereupon went into another apartment,
similar in style to that which they had left. The conversation here
took a light turn, unrestrained by the presence of the king and his
counselors. They plied him with questions, which Roger answered to
the best of his power. He was soon furnished with paper, pens,
brushes, and paint; and he drew them several sketches, showing
ladies in European fashions, which filled his companions with
surprise. It seemed to them impossible that a woman could move with
ease and comfort in so much clothing. Then he drew for them a noble
in the court dress of the period, and also the figure of a knight
in full armor.

The last astonished them most of all. How could a man move and
breathe, thus enclosed in metal? Roger admitted that, in a hot
climate like that of Mexico, the heat would be terrible. But he
pointed out that men so clad were carried on horses, and had no
occasion for movement; save of their arms, which, as there were
joints in the armor at the shoulder, could be moved in any way with
freedom.

"There cannot be much bravery required to fight, when protected in
this way by metal," the queen said.

"Numbers are killed, nevertheless," Roger replied. "The armor,
strong as it is, will not resist the missiles fired from cannon;
and the helmets--that is, the part that protects the head--can be
beaten in by blows with heavy maces. Moreover, when two parties
similarly armed charge, the shock is so terrible that horses and
riders are alike thrown to the ground, and when thrown down they
may be trampled to death by the horses, or killed by footmen before
they can recover their feet. Still, there are many who think that
some day armor will be given up altogether; for the guns are being
improved constantly, and when the balls sent by those carried by
footmen are able to pierce any armor, it will no longer be any
protection, whatever."

"And these ladies of yours," the Princess Amenche asked; "are they
very pretty? Because these matters are more to our taste than these
ugly arms."

"They differ much from each other, just as they do here," Roger
said. "Some are homely, and others are pretty."

"Are their eyes always blue, and their hair of a bright color, like
yours?"

"Oh no! There is a great difference. Some have hair almost as light
as flax; some almost as dark as yours, but not quite so dark. Some
have hair almost exactly the color of gold; some a red, like the
fringe of your garments; then there are many shades of brown,
between red and black. The eyes vary in the same way. People with
light hair, and golden, and red, have either gray or blue eyes.
Those with brown hair of different shades have brown eyes,
sometimes light and sometimes dark brown."

"How strange it must be," the girl laughed, "to see people with
hair of so many colors! And which do you like best, Roger
Hawkshaw?"

"At the present moment, Princess, I cannot imagine any color more
beautiful than a deep, glossy black."

The girl colored through her hazel skin.

"Ah, you know how to flatter in your country, also!"

Roger was about to reply, when a message was brought from the king,
desiring them to return to the next room.

"We have been taking all these things that you have told us into
grave consideration," the king said, when they were seated; "and
have concluded that it will be for the best that this matter of
these Spaniards should remain an absolute secret, and that no word
shall be spoken to a single person, however dear, by any of those
who have heard it. The country has long been in a disturbed state,
and constant expeditions are necessary, for ourselves and for
Mexico, to suppress risings, and put down outbreaks of discontent.
Were the news to be whispered about that there is a strange,
terrible white people within but a short distance of our shores,
the result would be disastrous.

"Men's minds would become unsettled, their ordinary employment
would be neglected, all sorts of dismal forebodings would seize
them, the very worship of the gods might be affected; and instead
of being able, should the time of danger ever come, to meet our
invaders boldly and fearlessly, they would find us disorganized and
disheartened, and our power of resistance greatly diminished.

"You, Roger Hawkshaw, have told us everything with frankness. We
feel that every word you have spoken is true, and that you have a
real feeling of friendliness towards us, and that your sympathies
are with us, rather than with the people of this other white
nation. But others would not see it so. Even as it is, there is
sure to be a party against you. Were it known that a nation,
possibly hostile, of your color were but a short distance away,
nothing could save you. You would be sacrificed at once to the
gods. Therefore as, for the sake of the nation, we have decided
that what you have told us shall remain a profound secret to
ourselves; so, for your own sake, we pray you henceforth to say
nothing to any of what you have told us. Let men think what they
like as to how you have reached our shores. Preserve a sort of
mystery as to yourself. There is no reason why you should not
speak, but even then guardedly, of the wonders of the land
inhabited by white men many months' sail across the seas; but it
were best that as little should be said as possible.

"Montezuma is sure to wish to see you, but before you visit him, we
will again take counsel together."

"I will, to the best of my power, carry out your Majesty's orders,"
Roger said. "I fully recognize their wisdom. Indeed, neither at
Tabasco nor upon the journey, either to the merchants or to your
envoys, have I said a word respecting the Spaniards; but I thought
that it was but right that you should know the truth of the matter,
especially when you told me of the prediction of your royal father.
In future, when I am asked questions, I can always fall back upon
silence and reply, truly, 'I am forbidden to tell this.'"

"That will do excellently," the king said. "There is but one point
connected with you now that puzzles us--a point which, before you
came, confirmed us in the belief that there was something
supernatural in your character: How is it that you have come to
understand and speak our tongue?"

Roger smiled.

"To anyone else, your Majesty, I should have replied, 'I am
forbidden to answer that question;' but I wish not to have any
mystery with you. During the time I was at Tabasco I was waited
upon by a Mexican slave girl, who taught me her tongue."

The king burst into a hearty laugh, in which even the grave
counselors joined, at this simple solution at what had appeared to
them so strange a mystery.

"Cuitcatl," the king said to one of the young nobles, "I hand over
Roger Hawkshaw to your charge. You see you need not be afraid of
him, and he will throw no spells over you. Show him all there is to
see in the city; but go not far away, for we shall have frequent
occasions to speak to him. He will have a seat in the council, and
at our own table. See that all know that we most highly esteem and
desire to honor him."

Bowing deeply to the king, queen, and princess, Roger followed the
young noble into whose charge he had been given. For a long time
they continued their way down passages and corridors, until it
seemed to Roger that it was a town, rather than a building, that he
was traversing. At last his conductor pushed aside a hanging, and
entered an apartment.

"These are my rooms," he said. "You are now master here. All the
nobles of the council, and those whom the king wishes to have about
his person, have suites of apartments in the palace. I hope some
day to have the pleasure of entertaining you on my own estate,
which lies a day's journey away to the northeast of the lake. Now,
you will doubtless be glad to retire to rest at once, for you have
had a long and weary time."

So saying, he led the way to a small chamber, leading out of the
larger one. Here a luxurious couch was arranged, and it was not
many minutes before Roger was asleep; for he was indeed completely
worn out, and was too much fatigued even to think over the strange
position in which he found himself.

He woke early, for upon his journeys the caravan had always started
at daybreak, so as to get as much as possible of the journey done
before the heat of the day set in. For a moment he wondered vaguely
where he was, and then, as recollection returned to him, he leaped
from his couch, threw back the hangings before the window, and
gazed out.

Glass was unknown in Mexico, nor was it a requisite in the balmy
climate of the valley. The prospect was a charming one. Before him
lay a garden, more beautiful than any he had ever beheld. It was
filled with shrubs and flowers, and a delightful perfume filled the
air. Fountains of bright water threw their jets high above the
sweet-scented groves and shrubberies. Several large ponds glistened
in the morning sun. On some of these were islands accessible by
light bridges, and on the islands were fanciful pavilions.
Waterfowl floated on the surface of the ponds, or stalked
fearlessly on the marble pavement that surrounded them. The songs
of innumerable birds filled the air. Roger was gazing in delight at
the scene, when Cuitcatl's voice saluted him.

"So you are up betimes; are you ready for your bath, or will you
take some chocolate first?"

"Bath first, please," Roger replied; and his guide led the way
across the large room and, drawing a hanging aside, showed Roger
into a bathroom.

The walls and floors were entirely covered with marble. In the
center was a bath, some seven feet square, with a stream of water
running into it from the mouth of a grotesque animal's head.

"Every apartment has its bathroom," Cuitcatl said. "The water runs
for an hour after sunrise only, but it can be turned on at any
hour. It seems a waste, but we are far above the lower portion of
the garden, and the water therefore runs into a tank and thence
works the fountains there. Would you like your attendant to rub you
in the bath, or when you come out of it? For both methods are in
use with us."

Roger declined both alternatives, and it was not very long before
he rejoined his companion in the central apartment. Chocolate,
light cakes, and fruit were at once served.

"We had best visit the gardens first, before the sun gains too much
power. There are charming arbors and pavilions, in shady spots, for
taking one's ease at the middle of the day; but for walking about,
the early hours are the best."

The gardens were of great extent, and Roger was surprised at the
extreme fearlessness of the innumerable birds, of all kinds, that
seemed to regard them as their natural home.

"Why should they not be fearless?" Cuitcatl said, when he expressed
his surprise. "They have never been frightened, and regard all who
come here as their friends, rather than as their enemies. They have
abundance of the food which they love best. They make their nests
among the plants, or in the trees which they would use, were they
wild. The ponds are full of fish, and the water birds can find a
far richer supply, here, than elsewhere. When the ladies come, the
birds flock around them and settle on their heads and shoulders,
and take crumbs of sweet cake from their hands.

"Many birds must, of course, be caged, and you will see that there
are large aviaries scattered here and there in the garden. In these
are the hawks and eagles, and many other birds which could not be
tamed so far as to remain in the garden, unconfined."

After wandering for nearly two hours in the garden, they returned
to the palace; and afterwards went down to the marketplace, which
was crowded, as it was the fifth day of the week. Cuitcatl had
taken with them six officials of the palace, to clear the way and
prevent the people from crowding in upon them.

Roger was struck with the orderly demeanor of the people. They
seemed merry and lively, but their mirth was of a quiet kind; and
there was, everywhere, an air of decorum and gentleness, in strong
contrast to that of a European crowd.

"Why," he said to himself, "there is more noise at home, when two
or three boats come in laden with pilchards, than is made by all
these thousands and thousands of people!"

There was no pressing or pushing, and the order of the officials,
"Make way for the king's guest, the great Roger Hawkshaw!" was at
once obeyed; and the people drew aside, gazing at him curiously but
respectfully, and saluting as if to one of their own great nobles.

The market was an extensive square, surrounded by deep porticoes,
and each description of merchandise had its allotted quarter. In
one was seen cotton piled up in bales, or manufactured into dresses
and articles of domestic use, such as tapestry, curtains and
coverings. The goldsmiths had a quarter assigned to them. There
Roger admired bracelets, necklaces and earrings, delicately chased
and carved, together with many curious toys made in imitation of
birds and fishes, with scales and feathers alternately of gold and
silver, and with movable heads and bodies.

In another quarter were the stores of the potters, with dishes and
plates, cups and basins of every degree of fineness, for the use of
poor and rich, vases of wood elaborately carved, varnished or gilt.
Near these Roger examined some hatchets made of copper, alloyed
with tin; and as he felt the hardness of the metal, thought to
himself that the natives, if informed as to the size and
proportions of cannon, would have no difficulty in founding those
weapons.

Then there were certain shops devoted to the sale of articles
needed by soldiers. The helmets, fashioned into the shape of the
head of some wild animal, with grinning teeth and bristling crest;
the quilted doublets of cotton; the rich surcoats of feather; mail
and weapons of all sorts; copper-headed lances and arrows; and the
broad Mexican sword, with its sharp blade of itztli, a hard
polished stone, which served many of the purposes of steel to the
Aztecs. Of this material were the razors made, with which barbers
were engaged in operating in their booths.

Many shops were well provided with drugs, roots, and different
medicinal preparations; for Mexico abounded in medicinal plants,
and the study of their uses was considered one of the most useful
of the sciences, and in this respect the Mexicans were considerably
in advance of the people of Europe. There were shops for the sale
of blank books, or rolls, for the hieroglyphic picture writing.
Under some of the porticoes were hides, raw and dressed; and
various articles for domestic or personal use, made of leather.

Animals, both wild and tame, were offered for sale; and near them
Roger saw a gang of slaves, with collars round their necks, and
these were also, Cuitcatl told him, for sale.

The portion of the market devoted to the sale of provisions was a
large one. Here were meats of all kinds, domestic poultry, game
from the neighboring mountains, and fish from the streams; together
with an immense variety of fruit, green vegetables, and maize. Here
were ready-cooked foods for immediate use--sold hot to passers by,
and eaten as they stood--with stalls of pastry of many kinds,
bread, cakes, and confectionery; chocolate, flavored with vanilla
and other spices, and pulque, prepared with many varying flavors,
tempted the passers by. All these commodities, and every stall and
portico, were set out and well-nigh covered with flowers.

After leaving the market, Roger proceeded with his companion to the
edge of the lake. It was dotted with countless canoes, traversing
it in all directions, filled with people passing to and fro between
the great capitals or neighboring cities, bent either upon pleasure
or trade. After feasting his eyes for a considerable time upon the
lovely and animated scene, Roger returned with his companion to the
palace.

In the afternoon there was a great gathering of nobles at the
palace, to enable a far wider circle than those assembled the
evening before to see and hear the king's white guest. One of the
old counselors, who had been present at the previous meeting, acted
as questioner, and this enabled Roger to escape certain queries to
which he would have had difficulty in replying; and while the
assembly heard much of the various wonders of the white people,
they learned nothing of the manner in which the stranger had
reached their shores, or the object of his coming; and at the end,
the general impression that remained upon them was that he was a
mysterious and supernatural being, who had come to teach the people
new arts and inventions.

When the meeting was over, Roger retired again to the private
apartments, and entertained the ladies there with many details of
European life and manners, and by sketching for them houses, and
ships, and other objects they demanded.

Two hours later, Cacama came in. He was evidently vexed and
anxious.

"I am sorry to say, Roger Hawkshaw," he said, "that tomorrow you
must accompany me across the lake to Mexico. I have had four
dispatches today from my Uncle Montezuma. He blames me for having
permitted you to enter the city before consulting the priests at
his capital. You know they are all powerful there. Montezuma, with
all his pride and haughtiness, is but their humble servant. He says
that sacrifices have been offered up, and that the auguries are
unfavorable, and that the priests proclaim your presence to be a
danger to Mexico.

"I have no doubt that, when they see you, this opinion will be
changed; and I shall do my best to prepare the way for you. I have
already sent a private messenger to the high priest, speaking in
the highest terms of you, and strengthening my recommendation by
some valuable presents, to which priests are not more than other
men inaccessible."

Roger saw, by the look of dismay upon the faces of the queen and
the princess, that they considered the news very grave.

"Must he go?" the queen asked, in a low voice.

"How can it be helped?" Cacama replied. "Montezuma is supreme; and
he and the priests, together, are all powerful. Roger is not like
other men. Were he so, I would tell him when night falls to fly,
and Cuitcatl would risk the consequences, I am sure, and act as his
guide; but being as he is, where could he go, or where could he
hide? Were it known in the morning that he was missing, a hundred
messengers from Mexico would carry the news to every town and
village in the country. Even if we colored his skin and his hair,
his height would attract attention; for he is taller by half a
head, and broader, by far, than any Mexican. But even did he, by
traveling by night and hiding by day, get at last beyond the
boundary of our kingdoms, what would then be his fate?--To die of
hunger or thirst, or to be slain by wild tribes.

"What say you, Roger Hawkshaw? Will you risk these unknown dangers,
or will you go to Montezuma tomorrow?"

"Were I sure that the priests would decide against me, and that I
should be sacrificed to their great idol, I would risk death in any
other form, rather than that," Roger replied. "But it may be that,
when they see I have no evil intentions, and neither thought nor
power of injuring Mexico, they may lay aside their animosity
against me."

"They do not believe that you will injure Mexico," Amenche said,
passionately. "They only want you for a sacrifice. They think that
a being so strange and rare as a white man would be, of all, the
most acceptable victim to their god.

"My brother, do not let him go," and the girl burst into tears.

"My little sister," Cacama said tenderly, "you know that I am
powerless in the matter. In my grandfather's time, he would have
answered a demand that a guest of his should be given up by a
message of defiance; but times have changed since then, and the
greater part of my kingdom no longer remains to me. My brother, who
disputed my right to the throne, reigns over a large portion of it.
Montezuma has seized fertile provinces. I am little more than the
lord of a city; and could offer no resistance, for a single day, to
the power of the Emperor.

"But you must remember that, as yet, we do not know that the
priests will decide against him. I myself shall go with him, and I
have already, as I have told you, taken some steps to incline the
priests in his favor. When I arrive there tomorrow, I will exert
myself personally. I have many friends among the highest at
Montezuma's court, and will also pray these to use their influence.

"Should I fail, all will not be lost. It is likely that, if they
decide upon sacrificing you, Roger, they will make you the victim
to the god Tezcatlepoca, 'the soul of the world.' For him is always
chosen the captive most distinguished for his appearance. For a
year he is treated as the representative of the god. He is nobly
cared for, he is attended by a train of royal pages, is worshiped
by the people as he passes through the street, and is feasted at
the tables of the nobles. Were you selected for this, as we
consider it, great honor, there would be at least a year before
you; and you might then, in some manner, make your escape beyond
our boundaries. At any rate, some time is sure to elapse before
your fate will be determined upon; and I can promise that I will do
all in my power to aid you to escape, should you determine upon
flight."

"I thank you most heartily," Roger said. "I have no fear of death
in battle, but to me it would be very horrible to be put to death
as a victim, on a festival; and I would rather escape and drown
myself in the lake, than that such should be my fate. Still, if it
must be so, it must; and I trust that I may behave as befits an
Englishman, in such an extremity."

Amenche here stepped forward to her brother, and spoke earnestly in
his ear.

"My sister reminds me," he said, "that we have sometimes another
form of sacrifice; and that if I can do naught else, I might be
able to persuade the priests to pronounce in favor of that. It is
only adopted in the case of a captive of distinction; who, instead
of being sacrificed, is sometimes matched against a number of
Mexicans. The combat takes place on a great circular stone, in the
sight of the whole city. The captive is provided with arms, and
meets his opponents one by one. If he defeat them all--which has
more than once happened in our history--he is allowed to go free."

"That would suit me best, by far," Roger said eagerly. "I have no
doubt but that I should be killed, still, I should die in fair
fighting against numbers; and it would be no worse than if I had
fallen fighting the Moorish pirates, on the deck of our ship."

"I should think that it could be managed," Cacama said. "I should
tell them that, at present, none could say whether you were a
superhuman being or no; and that it might bring some misfortune
upon the nation, were a messenger of the gods put to death. This
trial would prove that. If the gods protected you, you would
triumph. If they were not on your side, you would be defeated."

"I should do my best," Roger said quietly. "I have been well taught
the use of arms, and in our long voyage here we practiced daily. In
point of skill I could hold my own with any on board, though there
were many to whom I was but a child, in point of strength. In that
matter, however, I have doubtless gained much since then.

"I shall be thankful indeed, Prince, if you can persuade them to
fix on this mode of execution for me; and I thank you very
gratefully, Princess, for suggesting it."

They talked for some time longer, and then Roger retired to his
apartment. The next morning, soon after sunrise, he embarked with
Cacama in a canoe, paddled by six rowers.

"My wife and sister bade me say farewell to you," Cacama said.
"They are sorely grieved at your going, and hope that you may
return with me this afternoon. But if not, they bade me say that
they will do all that is in their power; and women can exert
influence, as well as men, on your behalf."

It was a long row across the lake to Mexico. Large as was the
population of Tezcuco, which was estimated by the Spaniards to
contain a hundred and twenty thousand inhabitants, that of Mexico
was fully three times as great. As Montezuma had not yet determined
upon the course which was to be pursued towards this mysterious
stranger, the people had not been informed of his coming. A strong
guard of soldiers, with several officers of the palace, met the
party upon its landing, surrounded them, and marched quickly
through the streets to the palace.

The buildings resembled those of Tezcuco, and were massive and
solid in character; but were not, Roger thought, grander or more
splendid than those in the rival capital. The town was intersected
by canals, and the bridges across these could be raised, adding
largely to the defensive power of the place.

Upon reaching the palace the soldiers drew back, and the palace
guard took charge of the party and led them into a large apartment,
where they waited until the emperor was ready to receive them.
Presently two court officials entered and, placing a mantle of
coarse cotton over Roger, signed to him to take off his sandals.
Cacama had already informed him that even the highest nobles of the
land, with the exception of those of royal blood, were obliged to
enter Montezuma's presence in this attire, as emblematic of their
humility. He also charged Roger that it was the etiquette that all
should keep their eyes fixed on the ground, until addressed by
Montezuma.

Accompanied by Cacama, Roger followed the officials. Passing
through several corridors they entered a vast hall. Roger was aware
that at the farther end the emperor was seated, surrounded by a
numerous body of nobles; but the instant he entered the room he
followed the instructions of Cacama, and saluted to the ground, and
then advanced with downcast eyes until the officials by his side
ordered him to pause.

Montezuma was a victim of superstition, and had been seriously
discomposed at the news of the arrival of this mysterious visitor;
the more so that the priests, themselves, were unable to decide
whether his visit was a good or evil augury. As he looked at the
tall figure before him, with its strange-colored skin and hair, and
the air of independence and fearlessness that was visible in the
pose, notwithstanding the downcast eyes, he could not but be
favorably impressed, despite his fears.

"You are welcome to our court," he said, "if you come in peace and
goodwill."

"I come in peace and goodwill to your Majesty and your empire,"
Roger said.

"We have heard that you come from far beyond the seas, where dwell
a people having strange ways, who live in floating castles, and who
fight with weapons making thunder."

Roger bowed.

"Your Majesty has been correctly informed."

"Do the people there worship the same gods that we do?"

"They do not, your Majesty. The people there worship the one Great
God--the God of the skies, the air, and the earth."

"And that God sent you hither?" Montezuma asked.

"Assuredly, Sire. He directs all things."

"Each country has its gods. The gods of Mexico have given us
victory over all the peoples from sea to sea."

Roger bowed. He did not feel called upon to contradict the emperor.

"How is it that you came alone to this land?"

"I wished to see it," Roger said, "reports of its greatness and
power having reached across the seas. Had I come with others, it
might have been thought that I came as an enemy; but coming alone,
and without arms, it could not be suspected that my intentions were
other than friendly."

Montezuma appeared impressed with this answer. The audience lasted
for upwards of half an hour, Montezuma asking many questions about
the ships, the arms, the mode of government, and other matters
among the white people, He then bowed his head.

The official signified that the audience was over, and that Roger
was to retire. As he had been instructed by Cacama he withdrew,
keeping his face to the emperor.

He was conducted to a different apartment. Here a table was laid,
and he was served by attendants of the court; who, however, made no
reply to any questions he asked them, and had evidently received
orders to hold no verbal communication with him.



Chapter 10: News From The Coast.


It was with a feeling of pleasure and relief that, after some
hours, Roger saw the hangings drawn aside, and Cacama enter.

"Come, my friend, the council is over, and you may return with me."

Cacama was evidently anxious to be off at once, and Roger followed
him without a question. One of the pages of the palace led the way
through a long series of passages, and at last Roger found himself
outside the palace, where a door opened into a canal. Here Cacama's
boat was lying. The young king and Roger took their seats, and the
canoe dashed off at once.

"It has been a hard fight in the council," Cacama said. "No two men
were of the same opinion. Even the priests were divided among
themselves; and Montezuma was as undecided, at the end, as he was
at the beginning; so that the decision is postponed. Then the
question arose, were you to be treated as a guest or as a prisoner?
And this I settled by saying that I would take you back with me to
Tezcuco, and produce you whenever required. So in order to avoid
excitement among the people, I sent word for the boat to be brought
round to that quiet entrance to the palace, by which means we
avoided passing through the streets, altogether.

"At one time it seemed to me that the decision would go against
you, on the ground that, had you been a supernatural being, you
would have had new arts to teach the people. Fortunately, I had
brought with me the pictures you made for my wife and sister, and
these I showed them. I pointed out that they were altogether
different from the work of our own scribes; that these drew stiff
images that looked like representations, not of men and animals,
but of wooden creatures, while in your drawings it seemed as if the
men and animals were moving across the paper; and that, were you to
teach our scribes thus to portray objects, it would make a profound
alteration in Mexican art.

"This made a great impression upon them. Many of the nobles belonging
to the Council of Education were present, and Montezuma himself is
fond of art. All were greatly struck with your paintings, and these
certainly went a long way towards strengthening my party. When we get
back, you shall do some pictures of things such as they see here, and
are accustomed to.  Perhaps you could do even better, still, if you
were to try."

"I could make much more finished pictures," Roger said. "These were
only sketched off in haste, and with such colors as came to hand;
but if I had pigments, and could mix the colors as I wanted them, I
could produce very much better effect."

Roger, as a child, had been placed by his father, during the
latter's long absences from home, at a school kept by some monks at
a monastery at Plymouth, in order that he might learn to read and
write--as these accomplishments would be of great use to him, as a
master mariner. His fondness for painting attracted the attention
of one of the old monks, who illuminated missals; and he had
permitted him to copy many of the manuscripts in the monastery, and
had given him instructions in the art. He had, indeed, been so
struck with the talent the boy showed, that he told Reuben Hawkshaw
that if he would let his son devote himself to art, he would make a
famous painter. The sailor had scoffed at the idea; and Roger
himself, fond as he was of painting, would have been reluctant to
abandon the idea of going to sea.

The instructions he had obtained, however, up to the age of twelve,
when he went on his first voyage with his father, had been of great
assistance to him. Thanks to his natural talent, his visits to the
churches at the various ports at which the ship touched, and to the
fact that he had plenty of time on board to practice the art, his
pictures were surprisingly good, and had excited a great deal of
attention on the part of the friends and acquaintances of Master
Diggory Beggs.

Upon his return to Tezcuco, Cacama ordered the scribes to furnish
him with large sheets of the best paper, brushes, and pigments. The
colors were all bright and glaring ones; but by mixing them, and
adding some sombre dyes he obtained in the market, Roger succeeded
in getting the required tints. Taking his place in the garden, at a
point where he commanded the lake, near at hand, dotted with
canoes; and the city of Mexico, with its background of hills, in
the distance, Roger set to work. To the surprise of the scribe who
had been ordered to assist him, he mixed the colors with oil
instead of water, and then began his picture. He worked as long as
there was sufficient light, and recommenced it the next morning,
directly after sunrise, and continued at work all day; and by
evening had finished the picture, three feet by two, which,
although it would not be considered remarkable in Europe, excited
the most lively admiration on the part of Cacama and the ladies.

He explained to the king that, as he had none of the spirit that
was used in conjunction with the oil to make it dry rapidly, it
would be some days before the picture would be sufficiently dry to
be touched. Cacama, however, sent it off the next morning under
charge of his principal scribe to Montezuma, who sent back word
that he was astonished, indeed, at this work of art, which seemed
to him to be almost magical; and he sent, in return, a large golden
goblet to Roger, in token of his satisfaction.

Cacama was summoned to a council on the following day; and
returned, saying that the picture had quite turned the scale in
Roger's favor; that it had been examined by the chief scribes and
the men of science, who all agreed that no such thing had been seen
before; and that a person who was thus able to turn, as it were, a
leaf of paper into a mirror, to fix upon it the representation of
scenes just as the eye beheld them, must be possessed of powers
altogether strange and supernatural. They desired to know whether
he would teach his methods to some of the chief scribes of the
emperor.

Cacama warmly congratulated Roger on the result.

"You are now safe, for the present, at any rate," he said, "and the
priests are silenced. You may have trouble in the future, but for
the time Montezuma's love of art has overcome his doubts and fears
as to good and evil omens."

"Shall I have to take up my residence in Mexico?"

"I hardly think so," Cacama replied. "Tezcuco is still acknowledged
the center of the arts and sciences of Anahuac. Here are the best
schools of the scribes, and they come here to be instructed in
hieroglyphic writing from all parts of the kingdom. Moreover, in
that way Montezuma will have less uneasiness concerning you. He
will think that, even if the omens be unfavorable, there will be no
danger so long as you are at a distance from his capital;
therefore, I think he is more likely to order some of the scribes
to take up their residence here, for a time, than he is to bid you
to cross to teach them there."

Such in fact was the purport of the message received from Montezuma
on the following day. Six of the most accomplished scribes of
Mexico were to proceed at once to Tezcuco, there to be instructed
in the new art; and the next day Roger found himself established in
a room in the palace, with the six Aztec scribes, and six of those
most celebrated for their skill in Tezcuco. Some attendants were
told off to mix colors under his directions, and to purchase for
him, in the market, all kinds of dyes and colors he might require.
A male and female slave were, at Roger's request, placed at his
service to act as models; and the attendants had orders to fetch,
from the cages and aviaries, any beasts and birds he might desire
to copy.

Roger had, at first, some difficulty in preserving his gravity at
thus undertaking charge of an art school. At first he confined
himself to sketching, from the models, with a burnt stick on the
white paper, and in seeing that his pupils did the same. Their
drawing had hitherto been purely conventional. They had always
drawn a man in a certain way, not because they saw him so, but
because that was the way in which they had been taught to draw him;
and he had great difficulty in getting them to depart altogether
from these lines, and to draw the model exactly as he stood before
them.

What he called his school hours lasted but four hours a day; and as
he did this work in the middle of the day, when it was too hot to
go out, but very pleasant in the rooms with their thick walls and
semi-shaded windows, it interfered but little with his daily life.
He had now a set of apartments next to those of Cuitcatl, with
attendants to wait upon him; but his time was spent as much in the
young noble's rooms as in his own. In the morning they walked
together, either in the town or beyond its walls. In the evening
they spent hours upon the lake, sometimes in large canoes with gay
parties, the boats decked with flowers; while at a short distance
another boat with musicians followed in their wake, the melody,
which was by no means agreeable to Roger when close, coming softly
across the water. With Cuitcatl as a guide, Roger visited the
schools where the young nobles were educated, and which reminded
him much of that at which he had, for five or six years, been
taught.

He also frequently witnessed the drilling of the soldiers. This was
of a very simple character, consisting principally in teaching them
to move together in masses, and to shoot with a bow. The bows were
light and the arrows small, and Roger thought that they could
scarcely be very formidable weapons, even against men clad in
quilted cotton; for although they might wound and annoy, they could
seldom kill.

One evening, about five months after his arrival, Roger had just
returned from an excursion upon the lake; and he and Cuitcatl were
seated in the latter's rooms, sipping chocolate, when the hangings
of the door were drawn aside suddenly, and Amenche entered. With an
exclamation of surprise, the two young men rose to their feet and
saluted deeply.

"You must fly," she exclaimed to Roger, "and at once. The royal
boat has just come from Mexico, with two nobles and a guard. They
have orders to carry you back with them. The news has arrived that
several floating castles, filled with white men with strange arms
and animals, have arrived on the coast. Secret council has been
held, and Montezuma is full of alarm. The priests have decided that
you are undoubtedly a spy, and must be sacrificed, at once, to the
gods. I happened to be behind the hanging, heard what was said, and
hurried away to warn you.

"There is not a moment to lose. Go round to the garden, and conceal
yourself in the shrubbery near the eagle house. I will tell Cacama
where you are, and he will come or send down to you, to say what
had best be done, and where you are to go. Do not delay an instant.
The orders were urgent, and they will be here in a minute or two to
seize you.

"Not a word, now. Go! I must not be found here. I will see you
again," and she was gone.

"Come, my friend," Cuitcatl said; "there is evidently not a moment
to be lost."

Roger ran into his room; emptied, from a drawer where they were
lying, the gold ornaments and presents he had received, and tied
them in a cloth; caught up his sword and then, with Cuitcatl,
hurried down the passage. Just as they reached the end, they saw a
party appear at the other extremity, preceded by an official
carrying torches.

"We are but just in time," the young noble said. "The princess has
saved your life."

In two or three minutes they were in the garden and keeping
carefully in the shade of the shrubs, so as to escape the view of
any who might be sitting at the windows, or on the flat roof of the
palace, enjoying the lovely evening and the bright moonlight. They
made their way cautiously down to the eagle house, which lay at the
other end of the garden, nearly half a mile from the palace. The
whole thing had come so suddenly upon Roger that he could scarcely
believe, even now, that his pleasant and tranquil time had come to
an end, and he was in danger of being dragged away and instantly
sacrificed.

Scarce a word was spoken until they reached the spot indicated.
Close to this grew a large patch of bamboos.

"We will take refuge here, for the present," Cuitcatl said. "It is
hardly likely they will search the gardens at night. It would need
an army to do so thoroughly. If we hear footsteps approaching, we
can take refuge inside; and meantime, let us seat ourselves here.

"These must be the people you told us of, the first night you
came."

"No doubt they are so; but, Cuitcatl, you had best return at once
to your chamber. You will be missed as well as I shall, and it
would be suspected that you had a share in my flight; and if I
should make my escape, the emperor's vengeance may fall on you.
Pray leave me at once. I should be most unhappy if my misfortunes
brought trouble upon you. You have been like a brother to me, since
I came here."

"I should not think of leaving you," the young noble said firmly.

"But you can do me more good by going, Cuitcatl. You will see what
is taking place there, and may throw them off the scent; while here
you can do me no good whatever, and indeed might do me harm. Were I
found here with you, I should be forced to surrender without
striking a blow; for I should be afraid to resist, lest I should
bring harm upon you; whereas, if I am alone, I would fight to the
death rather than surrender. Besides, you will be able to consult
the princess, and can bring down such things as you may consider
will aid me in my flight--though how I am to escape the search
there will be after me is more than I can guess. Pray go at once,
for the sooner you go the sooner you can bring me back news of what
is being done up there."

Cuitcatl saw the justice of Roger's reasoning.

"I may, at least, throw them off the scent," he said, "and see
about preparing for your flight. You promise to hide in the bamboos
there, if searchers should come in this direction?"

"Certainly I do. I will do all in my power to conceal myself, and
will only fight if there be no other way."

Cuitcatl at once glided noiselessly off, keeping as before in the
shadow of the bushes. For an hour and a half Roger remained alone.
He was sitting under the shadow of the bamboos, and could in a
moment withdraw himself among them.

At last he thought he heard a slight noise, and drew back towards
the thick canes. A moment later, however, he stepped forward, as a
figure he at once recognized advanced across a patch of moonlight
from the next clump of shrubs.

"All is well so far," Cuitcatl said. "Directly I entered the
palace, an attendant told me that I was being inquired for, and I
proceeded straight to the royal apartments. Montezuma's messengers
were there. They at once asked me if I had seen you. I said yes,
that we had been walking together, but that you had not returned
with me, as you said that the night was so lovely you should remain
out for some time longer. They asked me if I could lead them to
where you were; but I said that you had not told me which way you
should go, and you might, for aught I knew, have taken a canoe and
gone for a moonlight row on the lake, as was often your custom.

"Orders have been issued to the city guard to arrest you,
immediately, wherever you might be found; and the envoys themselves
started at once, with the guard they had brought with them, to the
waterside. Up to that time Cacama, who had not left them, was in
ignorance what had become of you; and I could see he was anxious,
and much troubled."

"'Do you know where he is?' he asked me, as soon as we were alone.

"'Would it not be better, your Majesty,' I said, 'that you should
remain in ignorance? Should he escape, Montezuma will be furious;
and it might be well that you should be able to affirm, on your
oath, that you knew nothing of him, and were in no way privy to his
escape.'

"'But is there a chance of his escaping?' he asked.

"'We will do what we can,' I said; 'and we can do no more. With a
disguise, a guide, and arms, Roger Hawkshaw may be able to make his
way through the country, in spite of Montezuma and his army. I
should think that the best thing will be to get him into a small
canoe, take him to the end of the lake, and land him near
Tepechpan. Then he can strike up north, take to the hills there,
and then journey east. All the roads direct from here will be so
guarded that it will be impossible to get through. The search will
be close everywhere; but there will be more chance of escape, on
that line, than from here.'

"'But how about the guide? Whom can we trust?'

"'I have one of my hunters in the town. He brought some game down
from my estate today, and was not to return until tomorrow. I know
where he lodges. He is a brave fellow, and carried my banner in the
last campaign.'

"'You will let me know before he starts?' the king asked.

"'I will, your Majesty. The moon will not be down for three hours,
yet, and he cannot attempt to fly until it has set.'

"As I left the royal apartment, one of the female attendants came
up and, putting her finger on her lip, signed to me to follow her.
I did so, and she led me to the apartment where the Queen and
Princess Amenche were awaiting me.

"'You have left your friend safe, Cuitcatl?' the queen said. 'The
princess has told me the part she has taken in the affair. It was
foolish, but I cannot blame her, though if Montezuma knew by whose
means the prey had slipped from his fingers, the least she could
expect would be to be ordered to retire, for life, to one of the
temples. Have you formed any plans?'

"I told her what I had thought of.

"'That seems as good a plan as any other,' she said. 'He will need
paints to disguise himself, the dress of a peasant, and arms.'

"'He has his sword,' I said.

"'He cannot take that. Its golden handle would betray him, at once.
A heavy woodman's ax, and a bow and spear, would be the most
suitable.'

"'He shall have them,' I said. 'My hunter shall take them, and
place them in the canoe, in readiness.'

"'What are you going to do now?'

"'I am going first into the town, to give my hunter his
instructions, and bid him be at the lake entrance to the gardens,
half an hour after the moon has set. I shall want the key of the
gate. Next I shall go down, and tell Roger what preparations have
been made; and then return here, for it is best I should be seen in
the palace. Then, just as the moon sets, I shall go down again to
him.'

"'Come here on your way, Cuitcatl. I shall go down with Amenche to
say goodbye to him. This obstinate girl has determined to go, and I
cannot let her go alone.'

"As soon as I left them, I went down to the town and found my
hunter, who has taken a vow to lay down his life to save you, if
necessary.

"Here are some peasant's clothes--a coarse cotton mantle, and a
short skirt. Here is a jar of dye. You had better strip at once,
and let me color you, and then put on these clothes. It will be too
dark to see to do it properly, when I return. Besides, time will be
short then.

"This small jar contains some dye from the juice of a plant which
will turn your hair black--at least, as they use it for dyeing the
skins of animals black, I suppose it will affect your hair."

Roger at once took off his gaudy attire, and was stained from head
to foot with the contents of the jug, and then rubbed his hair with
the liquid from the smaller vessel. Then he put on the peasant's
clothes.

"You will pass well, now," Cuitcatl said, heading him out in the
moonlight, so that he could obtain a good view of him. "It is only
your height that is against you. Still, some men are taller than
others; though I never saw one as tall as you, and you will
certainly be stared at.

"Is there anything else in the way of arms you would like, beside
the ax and spear?"

"I shall make myself a bow and arrows, when we get fairly away,"
Roger said.

"I did not know you could use them."

"I could not use such little things as those your people carry; but
we still use the bow in England, and every boy is obliged, by law,
to practice with it. With such a bow as I should make, I could send
an arrow three times as far as those puny weapons of yours, and
could keep my foes at a distance; whereas, otherwise, they could
shoot me down as they chose."

"They will not shoot you down," Cuitcatl said. "You may be quite
sure that the orders will be to take you alive, and this will give
you a great advantage, if you are attacked. But I must be going up
now to the palace again, to show myself, for a time, among our
friends. Just as the moon sets I will be here."

"Will you thank the queen and princess for their kindness," Roger
said, "and say that, much as I should like to say goodbye to them,
I would not that they should run any risks by coming to see me?"

"They will come," Cuitcatl said, "unless I am greatly mistaken. The
princess would come, even if her uncle Montezuma were, himself,
watching her."

Roger sat down again, and watched the moon going down. He felt a
certain sense of exhilaration at the thought that he was about to
enter upon a life of active adventure, again. It had seemed to him,
lately, that his life was to be spent in this strange country, cut
off from all chances of ever returning to England; and that, sooner
or later, he was assuredly destined to form a part of their hideous
sacrifices. The party against him had been silenced for a moment,
but would be sure to gather strength again; and he would be called
upon either to worship these bloodstained idols, or to die.

Life was pleasant enough as it was, at present, with the friendship
of the young king, and the kindness of the queen and princess; but
he would soon be tired of it, with its everlasting sunshine, and
its flowers, and its idleness.

At last the moon set, and in a few minutes he heard footsteps
approaching, and Cuitcatl and two veiled figures came up. The queen
came straight up to him.

"We are very sorry to lose you, Roger Hawkshaw," she said, gently;
"and were there a hope of doing so successfully, we would defy the
cruel orders from Montezuma. But it would bring ruin on our
people."

"I know that it cannot be done, Madam," Roger said. "I thank you
and the king, most heartily, for all your kindness to me. If I
escape to my own country, I shall remember it all my life; and I
will pray, to the God we worship, to give you happiness."

"Take this," the queen said, putting a small bag into his hand.
"You have told me that these gems are as much prized among your
people as they are here, and you can more easily conceal them than
gold. I have taken them, with the king's permission, from the royal
treasure; and should you reach your distant home in safety, they
ought to make you rich for the rest of your life.

"And now, farewell. Whatever the priests may say, Cacama and I know
that you came as a friend, and meant us no harm.

"Now, Amenche," she said, "come and say goodbye."

The girl came forward slowly. She took Roger's hand, and gazed up
into his face. She seemed to try to speak, and then Roger felt her
sway suddenly, and caught her just as she would have fallen.

"Give her to me," the queen said. "It is best so, by far.

"Hurry away, Roger. You have done harm enough, without meaning it.

"Cuitcatl, take him away, at once."

The young noble took Roger's hand, and hurried him away.

"What is the matter?" he asked, bewildered. "What did the queen
mean--that I had done harm enough?"

"Do you mean to say that you have not seen that Amenche loves you?"

"I never dreamed of such a thing," Roger exclaimed.

"Cacama and the queen, and all of us who have seen her with you,
knew it long ago; and had it not been for this unlucky news, today,
Cacama would, in a short time, have offered you her hand. There has
been a scene tonight between her and her brother; for she declared
that she would go with you, and share your dangers, whatever they
might be. She has for the last three hours been confined in her
chamber, and she was only allowed to come down to say goodbye to
you, on her swearing that she would return with the queen to her
room."

"I am awfully sorry," Roger said. "I never dreamed of such a thing.
The princess has always been very kind to me, but I should never
have thought of raising my eyes so high. Besides, as I have told
you, I am still scarce a man; and with us, one does not think of
marriage until he is five or six years older than I am."

"No one blames you at all," Cuitcatl said. "The king and queen both
told her that they were sure you had not thought of her in that
way; though they naturally supposed that, had you remained here,
you would have gladly formed such an alliance when it was offered
you. However, it is no use talking any more about it. You will have
difficulties enough before you, and would have had no chance
whatever of getting through them, if encumbered with her.

"Cacama told her so, but she scoffed at the idea of danger. Mexican
women, when they love, are ready for any sacrifice. Cacama did not
press that, but chiefly spoke of the terrible scandal it would be,
were she--his sister and the niece of Montezuma--to be brought back
with you, a captive."

They were now at the gate. Cuitcatl opened it, and locked it again
after him. A figure was standing outside.

"This is my follower. You may rely upon him to serve you, to the
last.

"Bathalda, this is my white friend. You will serve him as you would
me."

The man took Roger's hand, and carried it to his forehead.

"My life is yours, my lord," he said.

"Is everything ready, Bathalda?" asked Cuitcatl.

"Yes, my lord. I have the canoe hidden among the rocks, with the
arms and some food. It is but a few hundred yards away."

"Let us be off then, at once," Cuitcatl said.

The man led the way down to the lake, and then along the shore for
some little distance.

"There is the canoe," he said.

Cuitcatl embraced Roger.

"I wish that I could go with you, my white brother, and share your
dangers down to the coast," he said; "but I could aid you but
little, and my life would be forfeited on my return. May the gods
of Mexico, and the God you worship, protect you.

"It may be--who knows?--that some day you may return hither.
Cuitcatl's heart will be rejoiced to see you."

"Thank you for all your kindness," Roger said. "Whatever befalls
me, I shall never forget it. Thank Cacama for all he has done in my
favor, and say goodbye for me to the princess. Tell her that it is
better so, for that so soft a flower would soon droop, and pine
away, in my cold country."

Roger took his seat in the canoe, Bathalda seized the paddle, and
the little boat shot out from the shore. For some distance they
kept close in under the shadow of the land, Bathalda saying that
two or three royal canoes were rowing up and down, opposite the
town, and that every canoe putting off had been stopped and
questioned. Several times, when the sound of a paddle was heard out
on the lake, Bathalda stopped rowing for a time; but after keeping
close to the shore for an hour, he struck out more boldly and,
after two hours' further rowing, approached the shore again.

"This is the point where we must land," he said. "Four hours'
walking will take us among the hills; but before we leave the canoe
we will half fill it with stones, then knock a hole in her bottom
and push her out into the lake to sink. Were she found here in the
morning, it might afford a clue as to the way we had taken."

This was done, and then they started for the hills. Alone, Roger
would have had great difficulty in making his way along the paths
running between the cultivated fields; but his companion led the
way without hesitation, seeing, apparently, as well as if it had
been broad daylight. Roger carried the ax, which was a heavy one,
on one shoulder; and in the other hand the spear, which he used as
a walking stick.

Before daylight broke they were ascending the hills, which were
wild and rugged. They passed several villages lying high up on
rugged hilltops, and inaccessible, save by ladders, which could be
drawn up in case of attack.

"The tribes here have only recently been conquered," Bathalda said.
"They pay tribute to Mexico, but are a wild race; and as there is
nothing to be obtained from them but hard knocks, they are but
little interfered with."

Getting deeper among the hills, Bathalda, just as morning was
breaking, led the way up a ravine down which a little stream
trickled, and found a resting place among a number of great rocks
that had fallen from above.

"Here," he said, "we shall be perfectly safe for the day. It is not
likely that even a shepherd will enter this ravine, and if he does,
he is not likely to come upon us here. First, let us eat our
breakfast; and then we will lie down, and sleep till evening. I
will keep watch if you like, but I do not think there is any
occasion for it."

"Not the least," Roger agreed. "We had both better get what sleep
we can. We shall have a long tramp before us, tonight."

They were undisturbed during the day and, as soon as the sun set,
were again on their feet. The journey was a toilsome one. The
country was so broken that they were continually either climbing
the steep hills or descending into the valleys. After the moon had
set they were forced to come to a halt, for some hours, finding it
impossible to climb the steep hills in the darkness. With the first
light of day they were again in motion, and continued walking for
some hours.

"There," Bathalda said at last, as he gained the brow of the hill,
"that is the plateau land. The town you see there, away on our
right, is Otompan. Now we will keep due west. There are no large
towns now, till we reach Tlatlanquitepec and Perote. From that
point our danger will be the greatest, for all the roads across the
mountains are sure to be watched. The guards at the station houses
on these roads have, no doubt, by this time had orders to look for
you and arrest you; but by traveling at night, we may pass them
safely.

"We may as well enter that field of maize, and lie down until
evening. After that we will follow a path till we gain a main road,
and then travel straight on. We can go so much faster on a road
than through the fields; and I know where the post houses are
situated, so we can make a detour to avoid them."

That night they walked, as far as Roger could guess, fifty miles,
and again entered a very hilly country. In the morning they left
the road and encamped in a wood, far up the hillside. During the
day they saw several parties of troops following the road; and many
couriers passed along, at a swift run.

"The whole country is up," Bathalda said. "We shall have to be very
careful, in future."

The first night, while passing through the low, hot country near
the lake, Roger had cut a strong bamboo; together with a bundle of
smaller rods, suitable for arrows. Bathalda had brought with him a
bag of sharp obsidian arrowheads, and some feathers for winging
them, together with a bowstring of twice the ordinary strength. He
had looked on with amusement when Roger cut the bamboo, making it,
as was the custom of English archers, of his own height.

"My lord is not intending that, surely, for a bow?" he said.

"Yes, Bathalda, I think that will do well," Roger said, trying with
his knee the stiffness of the cane.

At the halt next day, Roger had cut the notches for the string.

"Now, Bathalda," he said, "can you string this?"

"No, my lord; nor can any other man."

"I think it is about the strength of the bows we use at home,"
Roger said. "The stringing them is a matter of knack, as well as of
strength."

And, to the amazement of the Aztec, he strung the bow.

"Now," said he, "let us make some arrows. They should be a cloth
yard in length--that is, from the middle of my chest to the end of
my middle finger."

A dozen of the light bamboos were cut to this length. The huntsman
fitted the obsidian points to them, and Roger stepped back a
hundred yards from the small tree, with a trunk some six inches in
diameter, under whose shade they had been sitting. Then he fitted
the arrow to the string, bent the bow to its head, and loosed the
arrow. It struck the trunk, but glanced off.

"I am out of practice, indeed," he said, "or I should have hit that
fair in the center."

To the huntsman, however, the shot seemed well-nigh miraculous, the
distance being twice as great as the Mexican bows would carry, with
anything like accuracy; while the speed with which the arrow flew,
and the distance it went after glancing from the tree, showed that
it would have been fatal at least fifty yards beyond the object
aimed at. Taking the bow from Roger, he fitted another arrow in and
tried to bend it; but with all his efforts could only draw the
arrow four or five inches.

"It is wonderful," he said, returning the weapon to Roger. "If I
had not seen it done, I could not have believed it."

"It is merely a matter of practice," Roger said. "My people are
famous for their dexterity with the bow, and I have seen men hit a
mark no bigger than the palm of my hand, ten times in succession,
at that distance."

The next time they halted, Bathalda made the rest of the bamboos
into arrows and, making a quiver of the bark of a tree, hung them
over his shoulder. Roger left his spear behind; using the bow,
which he had unstrung, as a walking staff. Bathalda offered to
carry the spear, in addition to his own weapon, but Roger told him
that he did not care about it.

"If it should come to a hand-to-hand fight," he said, "I would
rather rely on my ax. Besides, the bow, now it is unstrung, makes
an excellent quarterstaff, a weapon with which I have practiced a
great deal. With a spear your people would know quite as much as I
should; but I fancy that, with a quarterstaff, I should astonish
them. It has the advantage, too, that it disables without killing;
and as your soldiers would only be doing their duty in arresting
me, I should be sorry to do them more harm than I could help.

"There were a great many men on the road below there, today."

"A great many, my lord; and no doubt the garrisons of the two towns
we shall have to pass tonight will be all out, and on the watch.
This is the most dangerous part of the journey. The mountains are
rugged, and there are only certain passes by which we can travel,
and they are sure to be watched narrowly. They will guess that we
shall travel by night."

"I suppose it will not be possible to make a detour, either to the
south or north?"

The Aztec shook his head.

"To the north lie terrible mountains, of whose passes I know
nothing. Our provisions are exhausted, and we must, in future,
depend upon maize and other things we can pick by the way. Were we
to go there, we should find nothing.

"To the south lies Tlascala, whose people are independent of
Montezuma. They are fierce and warlike, and would seize and offer
you to the gods, without pity."

"Still, they would not be on the lookout for us; and we might,
therefore, pass through their country without being seen."

"We might do so, my lord," Bathalda agreed.

"At any rate," Roger said, "it seems to me that there would be more
chance, in that direction, than in going straight forward. From
what you say, it seems well-nigh impossible for us to get through
the passes ahead of us, without being captured."

Accordingly, when night fell they struck off to the south. The
journey was a very toilsome one, for they were now crossing the
spurs of the hills, running far down into the plateau. As before,
they had to halt when the moon set, but continued their way at
daybreak.

"There is a road down in the valley there," Roger said, after three
hours' more walking.

Bathalda stood looking down, for some time.

"I know it, now," he said. "It is the last road north of Tlascala,
and runs from Huejotlipan to Yxtacamaxtitlan. We are already east
of Tlascala, and about fifteen miles from Yxtacamaxtitlan. If we
get past that town without accident, we shall then have to cross
the Pass of Obispo, over the great range of mountains, and come
down near Naulinco. Once past that town our dangers will be over,
for there are few towns and villages in the Tierra Caliente. Our
great danger will lie in the pass. There are but two or three roads
across these mountains, and they will know that we must follow
them."

"Well, we must take our chance," Roger said. "So far we have met
with no difficulties, whatever, and provided we don't come across
too large a force, we ought to be able to manage to get through. I
noticed there were trees right through the pass I came over; and I
see the country ahead is thickly wooded. How far is the pass from
where we are now?"

"About thirty miles. It is where you see that cleft in the great
line of hills."

"Well, we can get near it before the moon sets, and will try to
pass through by daylight. It would be useless attempting to make
our way through the trees at night; and if we have to fight, I
would rather do so in the light. We will lie down now, for I own I
am completely tired out."



Chapter 11: Cortez.


The expedition, whose arrival had caused such excitement in Mexico,
was commanded by Hernando Cortez, a man who united in his person
all the gifts requisite for a great leader of men. He possessed a
handsome person, great strength and skill at arms, extraordinary
courage and daring, singular powers of conciliation and of bringing
others to his way of thinking, pleasing and courteous demeanor, a
careless and easy manner which concealed great sagacity and wisdom,
an inexhaustible flow of spirits, and an iron determination.

Born in Estremadura in 1485, of an ancient and respectable family,
he was--like many others who have distinguished themselves as great
soldiers--while at school and college remarkable rather for
mischievous freaks, and disregard of authority, than for love of
learning. At the age of seventeen he had exhausted his parents'
patience, and was on the point of starting with the expedition of
Ovando, the successor to Columbus, when he so injured himself by a
fall, incurred in one of his wild escapades, that he was unable to
sail with it. Two years later, however, he went out in a merchant
vessel to the Indies.

On reaching Hispaniola Ovando, who was governor of the island,
received him kindly, and gave him a grant of land and a number of
Indians to till it. The quiet life of the planter, however, little
suited the restless young fellow; and after taking part in several
military expeditions against insurgent natives, under the command
of Diego Velasquez, he sailed in 1511, with that officer, to
undertake the conquest of Cuba.

He displayed great courage and activity during the campaign, and
his cheerful manner and fund of high spirits made him a great
favorite with the soldiers. When the fighting was over, Cortez soon
became discontented with the quiet life in the island, and joined a
party of men who were disaffected to Velasquez, owing to their not
having received such rewards as they considered their services
merited. Cortez undertook to carry their complaints to the Governor
of Hispaniola, and was about starting when the matter came to the
ears of Velasquez, who seized him, put him in irons, and threw him
into prison. He was not long in making his escape, and sought
sanctuary in a church; but a few days later, when carelessly
strolling outside its walls, he was again seized and imprisoned.

He was put on board a ship to be sent to Hispaniola, there to be
tried for exciting disaffection and revolt; but at night, before
she set sail, he managed to free himself from his irons, gain the
deck, and swim ashore, where he again took refuge in the church.
Here several influential people interfered on his behalf--among
them the family of Catalina Xuares, a young lady to whom he was
engaged--and a reconciliation was brought about between him and the
governor. Cortez received a large estate, with an ample number of
Indians for its cultivation; married, and settled down, and for
some years devoted himself to agriculture and gold mining.

Success attended him, and he accumulated some three thousand
castalanos--a considerable sum. So he might have lived and died,
had not the news of discoveries made by Grijalva--who had sailed
west and discovered Yucatan, and traded with Tabasco, and had
returned with a good deal of gold and wonderful tales of fabulous
wealth, existing in a great nation farther to the north--caused an
excitement in the islands. The governor at once prepared to fit out
a large expedition, and among the many who offered to undertake its
command, and to contribute largely towards its expenses, he finally
selected Cortez, who had gained the ear and influence of the
governor's secretary, Duero, and the royal treasurer, Lares.

Cortez was appointed captain general of the expedition, and at once
set to work, with his accustomed energy, to gather material for it.
He not only contributed all the fortune he had made, but raised
funds by mortgaging his estates to their full value, and by
borrowing money from merchants and others, on security of the
wealth that was to be acquired by the expedition.

His personal popularity in the island enabled him to gather
numerous recruits, and many of his intimate friends, who joined
him, assisted him from their own resources or by raising money on
their estates. Velasquez himself contributed comparatively little
towards the expenses, which were almost entirely borne by Cortez
and his friends.

Six ships were fitted out, and three hundred recruits enrolled. The
instructions Cortez received were first to find Grijalva and,
joining company with him, to visit Yucatan, and endeavor to rescue
six Christians who were reported as still living there, the
survivors of a vessel wrecked, years before, on the coast. He was
to make a survey of the whole coastline, to acquaint himself with
the natural productions of the country, and with the character and
institutions of the native races. He was to barter with the
natives, and to treat them with kindness and humanity, and to
remember, above all things, that the object the emperor had most at
heart was the conversion of the Indians. He was to invite them to
give in their allegiance to the king, and to send such presents as
would ensure his favor and protection. The governor gave no
directions for colonizing or conquering, having received no warrant
from Spain that would enable him to invest his agent with such
powers.

But while Cortez was preparing to start, many of the leading men of
the island, who were jealous of his rapid rise, roused the
suspicions of Velasquez against him; saying that, when he had once
sailed, he would no longer recognize the governor's authority, and
would be thinking only of winning renown and wealth for himself.
Velasquez determined to appoint another commander, but Duero and
Lares, to whom he confided his intentions, at once informed Cortez
of them. With the same promptitude that always distinguished him in
moments of danger, Cortez went round to his officers after
nightfall, got them and his men on board, visited the contractor,
carried off all his stock of meat (giving him a massive gold chain
in security for payment), and before daybreak the fleet left its
moorings and the sails were hoisted.

As soon as the news was carried to Velasquez, he hurriedly dressed
and rowed down to the shore. Cortez, when he saw him, got into a
boat and rowed to within speaking distance.

"This is a courteous way of taking leave, indeed!" the angry
governor said.

"I was pressed for time," Cortez replied. "There are some things
that should be done even before they are thought of. Has your
Excellency any orders?"

Velasquez saw, by the innuendo in the words of Cortez, that the
latter was aware of his intention to deprive him of his command. He
had no orders to give, for it was evident that Cortez would not
obey them. The latter therefore returned to his vessel, and the
fleet instantly set sail for the port of Macaca. This was in
November, 1516.

The act of Cortez was doubtless one of insubordination; but, after
he had embarked the whole of his resources in the expedition, and
had received the command from the governor, this being ratified by
the authorities of Hispaniola, it could hardly be expected that he
would submit to disgrace and ruin being brought, not only upon
himself, but upon all the friends who had aided him in the
enterprise. At Macaca Cortez laid in some more stores, and then
sailed for Trinidad, an important town on the southern coast of
Cuba. Here he issued proclamations inviting recruits to join him.
These came in in considerable numbers, among them a hundred men
from Grijalva's ship, which had just before reached the port.

What was still more important, several cavaliers of high family and
standing joined him: among them the Alvarados, Olid, Avila,
Velasquez de Leon (a near relation of the governor), and Sandoval.
He purchased at Trinidad large military stores and provisions.
While he was taking these and other steps to strengthen his
position, Verdugo, the commander of the town, received letters from
Velasquez ordering him to seize Cortez; but upon his communicating
these orders to the principal officers of the expedition, they
pointed out to him that, if he attempted to take such a grave step,
the soldiers and sailors would certainly resist it, and the town
would not improbably be laid in ashes. The expedition then sailed
round the island to Havana, where Cortez completed his preparations;
and in spite of another ineffectual attempt of Velasquez to detain
him, set sail.

In the time that had intervened between the inception of the
expedition and its departure, the historians agree that a
remarkable change had come over Cortez. He was still frank and
pleasant in his manner, courteous and cheery with all; but he was
no longer the gay, careless character who had been liked, but
scarcely greatly respected, in the island. His whole actions were
marked by an air of resolute determination and authority. He
himself superintended every detail of work and exhibited a
thoughtfulness, prudence, and caution that seemed alien to his
former character. He was immensely popular both among his soldiers
and officers, but all felt that he was entitled to their respect as
well as their liking, and that he was not only commander, but
thoroughly master, of the expedition.

Although extremely careless himself as to food, comfort, or
appearance, he now assumed the state befitting his appointment and
authority. He dressed handsomely but quietly, appointed officers
and domestics for his household, and placed it on the footing of a
man of high station. Before sailing he dispatched a letter to
Velasquez, begging him to rely on his devotion to his interests.

On February 10th, 1519, the expedition started. It consisted of
eleven vessels, only one of which was as large as a hundred tons;
of a hundred and ten sailors, five hundred and fifty-three
soldiers, and two hundred Indians of the islands. There were ten
heavy guns and four light ones, and sixteen horses.

Before sailing, Cortez gave an address to his soldiers, and aroused
their enthusiasm to the utmost. He had the advantage of obtaining
the services, as chief pilot, of Alaminos, a veteran who had acted
as pilot to Columbus on his last voyage, and to Grijalva in his
late expedition. Soon after they started they met with a storm, and
put in at the island of Cozumal; and Cortez thence sent Ordaz to
Yucatan, to try to recover the captives said to be there. That
officer returned without tidings, but before the fleet sailed a
canoe arrived containing one of them, Aquilar, who had been wrecked
there eight years previously. He had been a priest, and had so won
the esteem and reverence of the barbarians among whom he lived,
that they had with great reluctance allowed him to depart, in
exchange for glass beads and other trinkets promised by Ordaz.

The fleet now sailed along the coast of Yucatan, until they reached
the mouth of the Tabasco River, where Grijalva had carried on so
profitable a trade. Leaving the ships at anchor they ascended the
river in boats; but instead of meeting with the friendly reception
that Grijalva had done, they found the banks lined with the
natives, whose menacing attitude showed that a landing would be
opposed.

After solemnly summoning them to surrender, Cortez landed. The
natives fought bravely, but were unable to resist the astounding
effect of the Spaniards' firearms; and the invaders, advancing,
drove them back and took possession of the town, which was found to
be deserted.

Two strong parties were sent out next morning to reconnoiter, but
were attacked and driven back to the town. They reported that the
whole country was under arms. Cortez was much vexed at finding
himself thus engaged in a war, from which no benefit was to be
gained; but he felt that it would impair the confidence of his
troops, were he now to draw back. He therefore landed six of the
guns and the horses, and the following day sallied out to the
attack. Ordaz commanded the infantry, while Cortez himself led the
little body of cavalry, the horses being mounted by the cavaliers
of the party.

After marching a league, the infantry came in sight of the enemy.
The natives attacked them as they were struggling through deeply
irrigated ground, poured volleys of missiles of all kinds upon
them, and wounded many before they could get across to solid
ground, where they could bring the guns into play. But even these,
and the discharges of musketry did not appall the natives, who
pressed forward with such fury that, after the engagement had
lasted an hour, the position of the Spaniards became perilous in
the extreme.

But at this moment Cortez and his companions, who had been
compelled to make a great detour, owing to the difficult nature of
the ground, fell suddenly upon the rear of the enemy. The latter,
who had never before seen horses, and who believed that horse and
rider were the same animal, were seized with a sudden panic at this
extraordinary apparition. The panic speedily communicated itself to
the whole army, and while the cavalry trampled down and slaughtered
many in the rear, the infantry charged, and the Indians fled in
wild confusion.

Great numbers had fallen, whilst on the Christian side a few only
were killed, and a hundred wounded. No pursuit was attempted.
Cortez released the prisoners taken in battle, among whom were two
chiefs, and sent them to their countrymen, with a message that he
would forgive the past if they would at once come in and tender
their submission; otherwise he would ride over the land, and put
every living creature to the sword. The Tabascans, cowed by the
dreadful thunder weapons, and by the astounding armed creatures
that had fallen upon them, had no wish for further fighting, and
the principal caziques soon came in with offerings to propitiate
the Spaniards.

Among these were twenty female slaves--one of whom turned out a
more valuable gift to the Spaniards than all the other presents,
put together. Among the gifts were only a few small gold ornaments,
and when asked where the metal was procured, they pointed to the
northwest and said Mexico. As there was nothing to be done here,
the Spaniards prepared to depart; but before doing so insisted on
the people consenting to become Christians. As they had but little
idea of what was required by them, and were in no mood for argument
with the Spaniards, a solemn mass was held, at which the whole
people became nominally Christians.

Re-embarking, the Spaniards sailed along the coast, until they
reached the island of San Juan de Uloa, and anchored in the strait
between it and the mainland. A canoe speedily came off from the
latter, with presents of fruit and flowers, and small gold
trinkets, which the natives willingly bartered with the Spaniards.
Cortez was, however, unable to converse with them; for Aquilar, who
had acted as interpreter with the Tabascans, was unable to
understand their dialect. Presently, however, the female slaves
informed him that one of their number, named Malinche, was a native
of Mexico, and spoke that language as well as the tongue of the
Tabascans. She was at once installed as interpreter--she informing
Aquilar what the Mexicans said, and he interpreting it to Cortez.
By this means he learned that the Indians were subjects of the
great Mexican Empire, which was ruled over by a monarch named
Montezuma, whose capital lay seventy leagues from the coast.

A strong force at once landed on the mainland, and threw up a
fortified camp. The Mexicans came in, in crowds, with fruit,
vegetables, flowers, and other articles, which they bartered with
the Spaniards. They brought news that the Mexican governor of the
province intended to visit them, the next day.

Before noon, he arrived with his numerous suite. A banquet was
served to them, and then, in answer to the cazique's inquiries as
to the objects of their visit, he was informed by Cortez that he
was the subject of a great monarch beyond the seas, who ruled over
a vast empire; and that, hearing of the greatness of the Mexican
Emperor, he had sent him as an envoy, with a present in token of
his goodwill, and a message which he must deliver in person. The
cazique said that he would send couriers with the royal gift to
Montezuma; and that, as soon as he had learned his will, he would
communicate it.

He then presented ten slave loads of fine cottons, mantles of rich
feather work, and a basket filled with gold ornaments to Cortez;
who then handed over the presents intended for Montezuma. These
consisted of a richly carved and painted armchair, a crimson cap
with a gold medal, and a quantity of collars, bracelets, and other
ornaments of cut glass.

Cortez observed one of the cazique's attendants busy sketching, and
found that he was drawing the Spaniards, their costumes, and arms.
This was the picture writing of the Aztecs, and the chief informed
him that the pictures would be sent to Montezuma. In order to
impress the monarch, Cortez ordered the cavalry to maneuver, and
the cannon to be fired; and these exhibitions, as well as the
ships, were faithfully depicted by the artist. The chief then took
his leave.

Eight days later an embassy arrived from Montezuma, with an
enormous quantity of extremely valuable presents--shields, helmets,
cuirasses, collars and bracelets of gold; crests of variegated
feathers sprinkled with pearls and precious stones; birds and
animals in excellent workmanship in gold and silver; curtains,
coverings, and robes of the finest cotton of rich colors,
interwoven with marvelous feather work. Among the presents were two
circular plates of gold and silver, as large as cartwheels--the
value of the silver wheel was estimated at five thousand pounds,
that of the gold one at fifty-five thousand.

The Spaniards were astounded at this display of treasure, and
delighted at the prospect it opened to them. The ambassadors,
however, brought a message from the emperor, saying that he
regretted much that he could not have a personal interview with
them, the distance from his capital being too great, and the
journey beset with difficulties and dangers; and that all that
could be done, therefore, was for them to return to their own land,
with the proofs thus afforded of his friendly disposition.

Cortez was much mortified by the refusal, but requested the envoys
to lay before the emperor his immense desire for a personal
interview with him, and that the dangers of a short land journey
were as nothing to one who had accomplished so long a voyage over
the sea to see him. The Mexicans repeated their assurance that his
application would be unavailing, and left with some coldness of
manner. The effect of their displeasure at the insistence of the
Spaniards was soon manifest, the natives ceasing to bring in
provisions.

While awaiting the emperor's reply, the soldiers suffered greatly
from the heat and the effluvia from the neighboring marshes. Thirty
died, and as the anchorage was exposed to the northern gales,
Cortez decided to sail north as soon as the answer to his last
application was received, and sent off two vessels to see where a
safe port could be found. Ten days after the departure of the
envoys they returned with a large quantity of fresh presents, but
with a positive refusal on the part of the emperor to allow them to
advance near the capital, and a request that, now they had obtained
what they most desired, they would at once return to their own
country.

Four days later the ships returned, with the news that they had
found but one sheltered port, and that the country round it was
well watered and favorable for a camp.

The soldiers, however, were now growing discontented. The treasure
already acquired was large, the unhealthiness of the climate had
alarmed them, and the proofs of the wealth and greatness of the
Mexican Empire had convinced them that it needed a vastly larger
force than that which Cortez had under his orders to undertake an
expedition against it; for the courage showed by the Tabascans had
proved conclusively that, ill armed as they were, the natives were
not to be despised.

Fortunately for Cortez, five Indians made their appearance in camp
one morning. Their dress and appearance were wholly different from
those of the Aztecs, and they spoke a different language, but
Malinche--who had been baptized, and christened Marina, by Father
Olmedo, the leading priest of the expedition--found that two of
them could converse in Aztec. They said that they were Totonacs,
and had come from Cempoalla, their capital. They had been but
recently conquered by the Aztecs, and were so oppressed by them
that they were anxious to throw off their yoke, and they came to
ask the wonderful strangers, of whom they had heard, to visit them.

Cortez at once saw the immense importance of the communication.
Hitherto he had regarded the Mexican Empire as a great and united
power, against which success with so small a force was impossible;
but now that he saw it was composed of subjugated peoples, many of
whom would gladly ally themselves with him against their
conquerors, the enterprise wore a far more hopeful aspect. He
dismissed the Indians with presents, and a promise to visit their
country, shortly.

He talked the matter over with his principal friends, who were as
reluctant as he was, himself, to abandon the enterprise and return
to Cuba, where the governor would appropriate the largest share of
the spoils they had taken. They accordingly went about among the
soldiery, urging them to persuade the general to establish a
permanent colony in the country. It was true that he had no
authority from Velasquez to do so, but the interests of the emperor
and of Spain--to say nothing of their own--were of more importance
than those of the Governor of Cuba.

This talk reached the ears of the special friends and adherents of
Velasquez; who, going to Cortez, remonstrated with him against such
proceedings. He said that nothing was farther from his desires than
to exceed his instructions, and on the following morning issued a
proclamation to the troops, ordering them to prepare for
embarkation. The sensation caused among the troops was great, and
his partisans thronged round his tent, calling upon him to
countermand his orders and form a settlement. Cortez, after due
hesitation, gave in to their wishes, nominated magistrates, and
proclaimed the territory a colony of Spain. As soon as the new
magistrates and officers came together, Cortez came before them and
tendered his resignation of his office as captain general, but was
re-nominated not only captain general, but Chief Justice of the
colony.

The partisans of Velasquez were most indignant at the whole
proceedings, and so violent were some of the leaders that Cortez
put them in irons, and sent them on board ship. Then he set to work
with the soldiers, and soon brought them round; and the prisoners
on board being also won over, the whole army, re-embarking, sailed
up the coast until they reached the port before discovered and,
landing, set out for Cempoalla.

They were delighted with the country, which was rich and fertile;
and as they neared the town, the natives poured out with lively
demonstrations of welcome, the women throwing garlands of flowers
round the necks of the soldiers. They were greatly struck with the
town, although it was but a small place in comparison with those
they were afterwards to see. Cortez lost no time in sending off a
vessel to Spain, with dispatches to the emperor; and his influence
over the soldiers was so great that they, as well as the officers,
relinquished all their shares of the treasure they had gained, in
order that a worthy present should be sent home to their monarch.

In his dispatches Cortez related all that had befallen them,
dilated on the prospect of annexing so rich a country to the
Spanish dominions, and asked for a confirmation of his acts, and
for an authorization for the magistrates of the new town, which was
called Villa Rica de Vera Cruz. The ship touched at Cuba, but
continued its voyage before Velasquez, who was furious at the news
of the important discoveries made by Cortez, could stop it.

Scarcely had the ship sailed when Cortez discovered that a
conspiracy was on foot, among the partisans of Velasquez, to seize
one of the vessels and to sail away to Cuba. The conspirators were
seized, two of them executed and others flogged; but the discovery
that there were a number of timid spirits in the camp, who might
seriously interfere with his plans, greatly annoyed Cortez, and he
took the extraordinary resolution of destroying all the ships.
Through some of his devoted friends he bribed the captains of the
vessels to fall in with his views; and they appeared before him,
and made a solemn report that the ships were worm eaten and unfit
for sea. Cortez pretended great surprise, and ordered everything
movable to be brought ashore, and the ships to be sunk.

Nine vessels were so destroyed, and but one small craft was left
afloat. When the news reached the troops at Cempoalla, they were
filled with consternation. It seemed to them that nothing but
destruction awaited them, and from murmurings they broke out into
mutiny.

Cortez however, as usual, speedily allayed the tumult. He pointed
out that his loss was the greatest, since the ships were his
property; and that the troops would in fact derive great advantage
by it, since it would swell their force by a hundred men, who must
otherwise have remained in charge of the vessels. He urged them to
place their confidence in him, and they might rely upon it that
success would attend their efforts. If there were any cowards
there, they might take the remaining ship and sail to Cuba with it,
and wait patiently there until the army returned, laden with the
spoils of the Aztecs.

The troops at once returned to their duty, and declared their
readiness to follow him, wheresoever he would. Without further
delay, Cortez, taking with him a number of natives to act as
carriers, set out on his march towards Mexico.



Chapter 12: The Fugitives.


At nightfall Roger and his guide continued their journey, but now
moved with great caution, keeping but a short distance from the
road. Several times they saw fires burning, and had to take long
detours to avoid them. Consequently the moon had set when they were
still more than ten miles from the pass. Next morning they
continued their journey, avoiding as much as possible crossing
tracts of cultivated land; and when forced to do so, lying down and
crawling between the rows of the maize or yuccas.

"They are sure to have scouts, high up on the mountainside,"
Bathalda said; "and they thence can look down upon all these
fields; and although, as we cross them we are perfectly hidden from
people standing on the same level, they can see us clearly enough
from there."

"The distance is very great to make out a man."

"The air is very clear, my lord, in these mountains; and a figure
can be seen a vast distance off. However, we can do nothing but
what we are doing, and must take our chance."

"If we are attacked," Roger said, "we must make straight up the
mountains. Steep as they may be, there are few places where active
men cannot climb, and numbers would avail nothing if we once got up
among those heights."

They were now mounting rapidly towards the pass. The country was
still thickly wooded, but Bathalda said that in the narrowest part
of the pass there were no trees, and it was here that the danger
would be greatest.

As they neared the mouth of the gorge they moved with the greatest
care, keeping their eyes in every direction. Presently Bathalda
stopped, and held up his hand. Roger listened.

"They are coming behind us," Bathalda said. "They must have made us
out in the distance, and have sent a party down the road to enter
the wood behind us, and so prevent us from retreating."

"Then we had better bear away to the left, Bathalda. They are sure
to be in force in the pass; and since they are behind us, also, our
only hope is to try and scale the hill to the left."

Bathalda, without a word, moved forward in the direction indicated.
The trees grew thinner in front, and through them they could see
rocky ground rising steeply up. They issued out and began to climb,
when the sound of a horn rose loudly in the air, and a moment
afterwards a number of men were seen, running from the right along
the edge of the trees.

"They will not shoot," Roger said. "They want to take me alive.
Never mind their arrows, it is a question of legs, at present."

The rocks were extremely steep, and in many places they had to use
their hands, as well as their feet, in making the ascent. The
Aztecs, who had on first seeing them broken into loud cries, were
now silent, and were toiling up the hillside in pursuit.

"Now," Roger said, after a very severe piece of climbing, "we must
stop them."

He strung his bow and, placing an arrow to the string, shouted to
the Aztecs that he should shoot unless they desisted from pursuit.
They paid no attention, their officer shouting to them to press on.
They were now less than a hundred yards behind.

Roger drew his bow to the fullest, and the arrow whizzed through
the air. It struck the officer in the throat, and he fell prone. A
cry of astonishment broke from the soldiers; however they did not
hesitate a moment, but pushed on with loud shouts. Roger discharged
six arrows in rapid succession, and five of them flew true to the
mark.

The Aztecs paused, the distance to which the arrows were sent, and
the accuracy of the shooting struck them with consternation; and it
was evident to them that before they could climb the steep ascent,
the greater portion of them would be shot down. Some took shelter
behind rocks, and began to discharge their arrows. Others fell back
in haste.

"Now we will be moving on again, Bathalda," Roger said. "We have
taught them a lesson of caution."

They proceeded on their way, until they reached a shoulder which
led straight up the mountain. Just as they stopped to draw breath
there was a shout, and a party of twenty men, who had evidently
climbed straight up from the pass to cut them off, rushed at them.
Roger rapidly discharged five arrows into the midst of them, and
then slipped the string from the notch, and seized the bamboo as a
quarterstaff.

At the order of their leader, the Aztecs threw down their spears
and flung themselves on him, with the intention of dragging him to
the ground; but making his quarterstaff swing round his head, he
brought the ends down upon them with tremendous force, striking
them to the ground as if they had been ninepins. Bathalda seconded
him well, by guarding him from attack behind.

Finding that, in spite of his efforts, he could not keep back his
assailants, Roger threw down the quarterstaff and seized his ax.
Four more of them fell, cleft through the head; and then four of
them sprang upon him together, but Roger's practice in Devonshire
wrestling now stood him in good service; and although in a moment
the four were hanging upon him, they could neither get him off his
legs, nor hold his arms; and he beat three of them down with heavy
blows on their faces, while Bathalda freed him from one on his
back, by a thrust with his spear.

Roger again caught up the ax, which he had let fall to have the use
of both of his fists, but the fight was over. The five Aztecs still
remaining on their feet, appalled at the, to them, supernatural
strength of their gigantic foe, fled to join their comrades, who
had now nearly reached the crest on which the combat had taken
place.

"Come on, Bathalda," Roger exclaimed. "We have not a moment to
lose. They will shoot now, seeing that they have little chance of
taking me alive."

And they accordingly started up the steep ascent, as rapidly as
their breathless condition would allow. Their pursuers paused a
moment on gaining the brow to get their wind, and then followed;
but as soon as the ground again became too steep to allow of rapid
movement, Roger turned and, betaking himself to his bow and arrows,
speedily checked the pursuit; the Aztecs being unable to stand
against these terrible weapons, whose force and accuracy seemed to
them supernatural.

The sight, too, of the heap of their comrades lying on the slope
had greatly cooled their courage. Their officers had all fallen
under Roger's arrows, together with most of their bravest comrades;
and although the rest still continued the pursuit, it was at a
distance that showed that they had no intention, whatever, of
closing again.

Paying no further heed to them, Roger and his companion now
directed their whole attention to the work of climbing. At times
they came on perpendicular precipices, and had to make long detours
to surmount them. After some hours' labor they reached the snow.
They were now near a shoulder between two lofty peaks, and after an
hour's climbing stood on its crest. The Aztecs were now mere spots,
far behind them.

"They will be an hour before they are here," Roger said. "We need
fear no more trouble with them. It was a sharp fight while it
lasted, Bathalda."

These were the first words they had spoken, beyond a momentary
consultation, now and then, as to the best mode of surmounting
difficulties.

"My lord is wonderful," the hunter said. "Never did I see such
strength and skill. It was like a mountain tiger attacked by
jackals."

"You did your share, too, Bathalda. Your spear rid me of several of
them."

"I did what I could, my lord; but that was little enough. A few men
like you would defeat an army."

"Well, Bathalda, now we will be moving on again. We will keep
straight down this slope, until we are off the snow; for they can
follow our footsteps. Beyond that we must press on until we get
into the woods again, and there we can turn right or left, as we
please, and throw them off the scent altogether. We shall then be
safe until we leave the forest, and begin to descend into the hot
country."

Another hour, and they had left the snow behind them; and after two
more hours on the rocky hillside, they again entered a forest. As
soon as they were well among the trees, they turned to the right
again, and after traveling through the wood for two or three miles
they halted, secure now against any search on the part of their
pursuers.

Just before halting they had the good luck to come across a small
bear, which Roger wounded with an arrow, and his companion
dispatched with his spear. Bathalda speedily made a fire by rubbing
two sticks together, and after skinning the bear, cut it up; and
while Roger was superintending the roasting of some pieces over the
fire, Bathalda searched in the wood, and speedily returned with
some roots, which he placed in the ashes, and which turned out
excellent eating with the bear's flesh.

As it was now far on in the afternoon, and as they had already
performed a very fatiguing day's work, they resolved to wait where
they were until the morning.

"What do you think would be our best course, now?" Roger asked,
after they had eaten their meal, and were stretched close to the
fire for warmth--for at this elevation the cold was great.

Bathalda did not reply, but sat pouring out volumes of smoke from
the pipe he had just filled. At last Roger repeated the question.

"I am ready to go where my lord wills."

"Yes, Bathalda; but that is no answer to my question. You know the
ways of your people, and I do not. We have had a sharp fight with
them today. What is likely to come of it?"

Bathalda shook his head.

"The news will, long before this, have been sent by swift runners
to every town and village on this slope of the mountains. The
garrisons of Perote, Tlatlanquitepec, Xalapa, and Naulinco will all
be in movement. Naulinco is but some eight or ten miles away down
the pass; and not only the soldiers, but every man in the town will
be ordered out. They will be posted as thick as blades of grass at
the mouth of every valley leading down from the mountains.

"You have resisted the emperor's officers, and have killed numbers
of his soldiers. They will know that the wrath of Montezuma will be
terrible, if they fail to arrest you."

"Then you think that it will almost be impossible to make our way
through them?"

Bathalda nodded his head.

"And in time, I suppose, they will search these woods?"

"Every foot of them, wide though they are, my lord."

"Then what is your advice, Bathalda?"

"It depends whether my lord's mind is altogether set upon joining
the white men of the sea, at once."

Roger, in turn, was silent for a time. The Spaniards would have
learned the wealth of the land. It was not likely they would
speedily depart; but if they did, it would only be to return again,
in far greater force than at present. Other opportunities would
occur for rejoining them, and it would be folly to throw away his
life, and that of his companion, in an attempt that the latter
evidently felt to be desperate. He had already had proof of the
vigilance of the Aztec scouts, and doubtless that vigilance would
now be redoubled.

"No, Bathalda," he replied at last; "I should be content to remain
in hiding for a time, and to risk the departure of the white men."

"Then, my lord, my advice is, that we retrace our steps across to
the other side of the mountains. Then we will head north, avoiding
the towns, and take refuge for a time in the forests, that stretch
for many leagues over the mountains. There we can build a hut and
hunt. There are turkeys and other game in abundance. From time to
time I can go down to a town and gather news, and bring back such
things as may be necessary for you. Then, when the search for you
abates, we can strike down thence to the seacoast, if the white men
are still there. At any rate, we can live by hunting as long as you
may find it necessary to remain in concealment."

"That will be by far the best plan, Bathalda. I have no objection
to a few weeks of life in the woods, and you can teach me your
craft of a hunter. What do you say: shall we start back this
evening?"

"If my lord is not too wearied, it would be well if we could get
across the crest before morning. They will have sentries at every
point whence they can command a view of the hills; and our figures
could be made out, on the snow, at a great distance away."

"I should have preferred a night's rest, Bathalda; but it would be
foolish to lose a day, and no doubt parties will be searching the
woods in the morning. We have still four hours before the sun goes
down, and that should be enough to fit us for starting again."

The hunter was pleased at Roger's decision.

"Let my lord sleep at once," he said. "I will watch. I am
accustomed to long journeys, and to pass my nights in search of
game. It is nothing to me. I used dry sticks for the fire, and but
little smoke will have made its way through the trees. Still it may
possibly be noticed, and it were best one of us should remain on
watch."

Roger felt that he should never be able to make the ascent over the
crest of the hill, unless he had some rest; and therefore, without
argument, he wrapped himself in his cotton mantle, and lay down
before the fire.

It seemed to him that he had but just closed his eyes, when his
companion touched him.

"It is time that we should be moving, my lord. The sun has just
set."

"Why, it appears to me to be night already, Bathalda."

"It has been dark here for the last hour, my lord; but on the other
side of the mountains the sun has but now gone down. See, the full
moon has just risen in the east."

"That is so, Bathalda; and we shall have her light till morning.
Well, I am ready, though I could have slept on comfortably until
sunrise. Have you heard anything?"

"I have heard the sound of horns, far down the hillside; but
nothing near us save animals, disturbed by the voices below, and
passing up towards the rocks. I have cooked some more flesh. It is
always best to make a good meal when one can. We have a rough
journey before us, and the cold will be great. Fortunately, the air
is still. Were it blowing, I should say that there was less danger
in waiting here than in crossing the mountain."

The meal was quickly eaten. Bathalda slung a large piece of bear's
flesh over his shoulder, and they started. So bright was the
moonlight that they had no more difficulty in climbing than if it
had been day, and after six hours of severe toil they again came
down upon the forest, on the other side of the mountains.

They proceeded among the trees for some little distance, till they
came to some very thick undergrowth, where Bathalda thought it
would be perfectly safe to light a fire. This he accordingly did,
as Roger said he would rather run any danger than go without a
fire.

In spite of the exertions they had made, they were chilled to the
bone. Their clothes were stiff with the frozen moisture from their
bodies, and the cotton mantles offered but small protection against
the cold. A pleasant glow stole over them, as the fire burnt up.

"I will watch now, Bathalda, and you shall sleep."

"I do not think that there is any danger, my lord. They believe us
among the woods on the other side of the mountains, and it is not
at all likely there will be any vigilant watch kept upon this side.
We can both sleep without fear."

Roger was glad to hear his companion's opinion, and in a few
minutes was fast asleep.

When he awoke it was day. Bathalda was cooking some flesh over the
embers of the fire.

"You have been asleep, I hope, Bathalda?" Roger said, as he rose to
his feet and shook himself.

"I have slept, my lord," the hunter said, although in fact it was
not until morning began to break that he had relaxed his
watchfulness. "We will be off as soon as we have eaten. It is
possible that parties may, as soon as it is daybreak, go along by
the edge of the snow line, to assure themselves that we are still
on the other side of the mountain; and if so, they will probably
come across our footsteps--therefore we had best be moving, at
once."

Two long days' marches took them deep into the woods lying north of
Tlatlanquitepec. Here they set to work to construct a rough hut of
boughs, near a mountain spring; and when this was completed, they
set to work hunting.

Turkeys abounded. These they generally obtained by shooting them at
night, as they roosted in the trees; but they sometimes hunted them
by day, Bathalda imitating their call so accurately that they came
up within easy shot of them, without the least suspicion of danger.
They killed several small bears, which were useful, not only for
their flesh, but for the warmth of their skins at night. Once or
twice they shot deer, and obtained other game in abundance.

At night they frequently heard the roar of the mountain tiger. Once
or twice, when the sounds approached too close to their hut, they
left it and took refuge in trees, as the hunter said that even
Roger's arrows would scarcely slay these fierce beasts at once; and
that, when wounded, they were terrible enemies.

Roger enjoyed the life much. The air was fresh and bracing, the
forest magnificent in its varied foliage, and the abundance of game
so great that it needed no special exertion to keep themselves well
supplied with food. Two or three times, at intervals of a week or
ten days, Bathalda went down to Tlatlanquitepec, with a load of
turkeys and other game slung on a pole over his shoulder, and
returned with maize, flour, chocolate, and pulque, and other
articles of food; and--which was of much greater importance to
Roger--news of the white strangers.

The first time he learned that they had arrived in several floating
castles, and had landed at once. The natives had received them with
kindness, and the chief of that district, Teuhtlile, had on the
following day had an interview with their chief. Presents had been
exchanged. Five days later an embassy, with many very rich gifts
from the emperor, arrived at the camp. They were the bearers of
friendly messages from Montezuma; who, however, had declined to
allow them to proceed into the country, and had requested them to
leave the coast at once. The white men had sent back a message to
Montezuma praying him to alter his determination, and showed no
signs of obeying his orders, and re-embarking on board their ships.
By the orders of Montezuma's envoys, the people had now abstained
from visiting the camp, or bringing in supplies.

Three weeks after, Bathalda returned from the town with the news
that another embassy from Montezuma had visited the white camp,
with another great store of valuable presents; but that Montezuma
positively prohibited them advancing towards the capital. Two days
later they were visited by envoys from Cempoalla, the chief town of
the Totonacs, who had been lately conquered by the Aztecs, and had
invited the white men to visit their city. They had accordingly
marched there, and were now dwelling in this town. It was said that
the Aztecs were extremely indignant at the action of the Totonacs,
and that dire vengeance would be taken upon them, for daring to act
in this manner without the permission of Montezuma.

The next news was, that the white men had marched farther north to
Chiahuitztla, that they were founding a city there, and that they
had actually seized and imprisoned a party of Aztec envoys. The
white men had visited other towns, and at Cempoalla had insulted
the gods, rolled the idols down from the tops of the temples, and
had erected altars to their own gods there.

This act had created a profound impression throughout the country;
and the greatest astonishment was felt that Montezuma did not, at
once, put his armies in motion to crush these profane and insolent
strangers. A still greater sensation had been caused by the news
that the Spaniards had destroyed all their floating castles, and
that it was therefore evident that they intended to remain,
permanently, in the land.

This news greatly surprised Roger. The reports were unanimous that
there were, at the utmost, but three or four hundred of the Whites;
and that the Spaniards should dream of matching themselves against
the whole force of Mexico, seemed almost incredible.

"How do the white men communicate with the natives?" Roger asked.

"They have with them some slaves, whom they obtained at Tabasco.
Among them was one who was a Mexican by race. They say that the
white men speak to another white man who understands the language
of Tabasco, and that he speaks to this young woman, who speaks in
Mexican what she is told. She is treated with great honor by the
white men."

"What is her name--did you hear?"

"The natives say she is called Malinche, but the white men call her
Marina."

"That is good news, indeed, Bathalda," Roger said; "for when I was
at Tabasco, I knew a Mexican slave girl of that name, and if it is
the same she will befriend us."

It was nearly three weeks before Roger again obtained news.
Bathalda had injured his leg in a fall down a precipice, while
stalking a deer; and was obliged to lie up in the hut for more than
a fortnight. As soon as he was well enough to get about again, he
joined Roger in a turkey hunt, and started the next day for the
city.

He returned with surprising news. The white men had marched from
the coast through Naulinco and the Pass of Obispo. They had been
everywhere well received by the natives, who all belonged to the
Totonac tribe. They had gone to Yxtacamaxtitlan, a great city,
where they had stayed three days. They had then marched on towards
Tlascala, the republic that had so long resisted the strength of
all Mexico.

They were said to number four hundred foot and fifteen strange
creatures, who were partly man and partly some fleet animal; and
they had seven great black tubes that made thunder. Thirteen
hundred Totonac fighting men accompanied them, and a thousand
porters to drag the tubes and carry their baggage. They had sent
embassies to the Tlascalans, but the latter had chosen war, and
there had been some terrible battles fought. But the white men were
invincible, and had defeated the Tlascalans with great slaughter;
and the news had arrived, only that morning, that they had captured
the city.

The sensation throughout the country was that of stupefaction. It
seemed absolutely incredible that a state which had successfully
defied the armies of Montezuma and his predecessors should, after
four or five days of fighting, be overthrown by this handful of
white strangers. There seemed but one comfort. It was said that
several of the Whites had been killed, and this showed, at least,
that they were not superhuman creatures, and that it might yet be
possible to destroy them.

No sooner did Roger hear the news than he determined to start, at
once, to join the Spaniards, who were already far to the west.
Accordingly, the next morning at daybreak, he started with
Bathalda, and late on the following afternoon arrived in sight of
Tlascala. They thought it better not to enter the city until the
following morning, and therefore passed the night in a clump of
bushes.

The next day they boldly entered the town. The city was a large
one, divided into four quarters separated by lofty walls, and each
ruled over by one of the four great chiefs of the republic. Its
population was very large, and the town was strongly and solidly
built.

At ordinary times the appearance of two seeming Aztecs in the
streets would have been the signal for their instant destruction,
but at the present time the people were solely occupied with the
presence of their white conquerors; with whom, as Roger soon
learned, they had made treaties of friendship, and whom they now
viewed as friends and allies.

The whole of the Spaniards were lodged in one of the palaces. The
crowd of people proceeding in that direction was a sufficient index
to its position; and Roger and his companion, joining the throng,
were soon in front of the palace. Some Spanish soldiers were
standing as sentries at its gate, but none came out or mixed with
the people--Cortez having given the strictest orders that they
should remain in their quarters, as he feared that, did they go
abroad, some brawl might arise between them and the inhabitants,
and so break the newly-formed alliance, which was of the most
extreme importance to them.

Presently some Spanish officers, and several richly dressed chiefs,
came out from the palace. The people raised a shout, and it was
evident to Roger that, in spite of the terrible losses suffered by
their troops in the attacks upon the white men, their admiration
for their visitors far outweighed any animosity for the defeats
inflicted upon them.

Near the officer, whom Roger judged to be the leader of the
expedition, were an elderly man and a young woman. The Spaniard
addressed the old man, who spoke to the girl, and she translated it
to the chiefs.

Roger recognized her at once--it was certainly his friend, the
slave girl of Tabasco. In the eight months since he had seen her,
she had grown to complete womanhood; and now--richly attired as she
was, and evidently regarded as a person of great importance, both
by the Spaniards and the native chiefs--carried herself with an air
of confidence and pride; and was, Roger thought, the most beautiful
woman he had seen in Mexico.

As the party moved down the steps of the palace, and along the
street, evidently discoursing on some important business, Roger
followed them closely. He waited until Malinche happened, for a
moment, to be at the outside of the party, then he pressed forward
and said to her:

"Malinche, do you remember your white friend?"

She looked up, and would have cried out with astonishment, had he
not touched his lips.

"I want to speak to you alone, first. Where can I meet you?"

"In an hour I shall be able to slip away from their meal," she
said; "be near the palace gate."

Roger at once fell back into the crowd, and soon took an
opportunity to extricate himself from it, and to go down a side
street. He and Bathalda then ascended to the top of the wall, where
they were likely to be undisturbed, and waited there for an hour.
They then went back to the palace.

The square in the front of it was almost deserted now; for the
Spaniards had retired, half an hour before, and were not likely to
appear again until the evening; especially as it was known that, at
noon, there was to be a great council held in the palace.

Ten minutes later Malinche appeared at the entrance. As soon as her
eyes fell on Roger she raised her hand and, leaving Bathalda, he at
once went up to her. The two sentinels looked with some surprise at
this tall native, but as they saw that he was known to Malinche,
they offered no opposition to his entering the palace with her.

She led him down some corridors and then out into a garden. As soon
as she saw that they were in a spot where they could not be
overlooked, she turned and seized his hands; and would have pressed
them to her forehead, had not Roger prevented her doing so, and put
her hands to his lips.

"Ah!" she exclaimed. "How happy you have made me, today! I have
wondered so much how it has fared with you, and have dreamed at
night, so often, that you were being sacrificed on the altars of
the gods."

"I have thought of you very often, also, Malinche; and I was
surprised, indeed, when I heard that you--for I felt sure that it
was you--were with the Spaniards, and were not only an interpreter,
but in high honor with them."

"But why do you not join them?" she asked. "Why do you come to me
first? What can I do for you? I will take you at once to Cortez,
and when I tell him that you were my friend, and were so kind and
good to the slave girl, he will welcome you most warmly."

"Yes, Malinche; but that is why I wanted to see you first alone.
You remember that I told you all about the Spaniards, and how they
owned the islands, and would some day surely come to Mexico; but
that I belong to another white people, who are forbidden by the
Spaniards, under pain of death, to come to these parts. They must
not know that I am not of their nation.

"You see, I cannot speak their tongue. I see that you have learned
it fast, for I saw Cortez speaking to you."

"What are we to do, then?" the girl asked, with a puzzled look.
"When they find that you cannot speak their language, they will, of
course, see that you are not of their people."

"Yes, Malinche; but they might think that I had forgotten it. That
is just where I want you to help me. If you take me to Cortez, and
tell him that, years ago, a ship was wrecked on the coast of
Tabasco, and that all were drowned except a little white boy; and
that he was brought up at Tabasco, and that you were great friends
with him, until he was sold to some Mexican traders--they will
think that I have altogether forgotten my native language. They are
not likely to ask you how many years ago it is, or how big I was
then, and will imagine that I was quite a child, and that I
belonged to a Spanish ship, for they will not dream of an English
vessel having been in these parts. When you introduce me to Cortez,
you must tell him that I have quite forgotten the language, save a
few words--for I picked up a few sentences when in their ports."

"They will easily believe that you may have been wrecked," said
Malinche; "for they rescued a man who had been living many years
among a tribe at Yucatan, to the west of Tabasco. There were other
white men living among them, though these they could not recover.
You saw him by me this morning--he is an old man, a priest; and he
translates from the Spanish into the Yucatan dialect, which is so
like that of Tabasco that I can understand it, and then I tell the
people in Mexican.

"There will be no difficulty at all. Cortez and the Spaniards know
that I love them, and they trust me altogether, and I am able to do
good to my country people, and to intercede with them sometimes
with Cortez. Now tell me what has happened since I last saw you."

Roger gave her a sketch of what had happened in Mexico, and how he
had escaped, by flight, from being sacrificed.

"It is terrible--these sacrifices," Malinche said, shuddering. "I
did not think so in the old days, but I have learned better from
the Spaniards and from their priests; and I rejoice that the white
men will destroy these horrible idols, and will teach the people to
worship the great God and His Son. They will suffer--my heart
bleeds to think how they will suffer--but it will be good for them
in the end, and put a stop to rivers of blood that flow, every
year, at their altars."

Although Roger was not imbued with the passion for conversion which
animated the Spaniards, and led them to believe that it was the
most glorious of all duties to force their religion upon the
natives, he had been so filled with horror at the wholesale
sacrifices of human victims, and the cannibal feasts that followed
them, that he was in no way disposed to question the methods which
the Spaniards adopted to put a stop to such abominations. But for
the friendship of Cacama he would himself, assuredly, have been a
victim to these sanguinary gods.

He and his father had--like the Beggs, and many other of his
friends at Plymouth--been secretly followers of Wycliffe, but they
were still Catholics. They believed that there were many and deep
abuses in the Church, but had no thought of abandoning it
altogether. The doings of the Inquisition in Spain were regarded by
all Englishmen with horror, but these excesses were as nothing to
the wholesale horrors of the Mexican religion.

He talked for some time with Malinche, and saw that she was
completely devoted to the Spaniards, and regarded Cortez as a hero,
almost more than mortal; and was in no slight degree relieved at
observing that, although ready to be friendly in every way, and
evidently still much attached to him, the warmer feeling which she
had testified at their parting no longer existed, but had been
transferred to her present friends and protectors.

"Come with me," she said at last. "The meal will be over, now. I
will take you to an apartment near the banqueting hall, and will
leave you there while I tell Cortez about you, and will then lead
you to him."

Seeing how confident Malinche was as to the reception she could
procure for him, Roger awaited her return, to the chamber where she
had placed him, with little anxiety. In a quarter of an hour she
returned, and beckoned him to follow.

"I have told him," she said. "It did not seem to him strange that
some vessel should have been driven by the storms and wrecked here.
He asked no questions as to how many years ago it was. I told him
you were a young boy at the time, and have forgotten all but a few
words of the language; and how, when you grew to be a man, you were
sold to some Mexican merchants, and would have been sacrificed to
the gods had you not made your escape. As I had told him, before,
that there had been a white man living at Tabasco, who had been
very good to me, he was not surprised at the story."

She took Roger to an apartment in which Cortez, and several of his
principal officers, were standing. As Malinche had told them that
he was painted, and disguised as a native, they were not surprised
at his appearance; although his height, which was far beyond that
attained by Spaniards, somewhat astonished them.

Roger approached the group, and at once fell on one knee before
Cortez, took his hand and kissed it. Cortez raised him, and
embraced him warmly.

"I am delighted to find another of my countrymen," he said; "and
all the more, since Marina tells me that she knows you well, and
that you were most kind and good to her."

"Senor," Roger said, in broken Spanish, "I do not understand. I
have forgotten."

"You will soon recover it," Cortez said.

"Tell him, Aquilar, that he will soon learn to speak his native
language again."

The interpreter repeated the words to Roger in the Yucatan dialect,
adding that he himself had been a prisoner for eight years among
the natives; and that, although a man when captured by them, had
with difficulty spoken Spanish when restored to his friends; but it
had now quite come back to him.

"You were but a boy when you were wrecked, Marina tells me?" Cortez
said.

"Only a boy," Roger repeated, when Marina translated this to him.

"Do you remember anything of Spain?" Cortez asked.

Roger shut his eyes, as if considering.

"I seem to have a remembrance," he said, "of a place with many
great ships. It was a city built on a rock rising from the sea. It
had high walls with great guns upon them, which fired sometimes,
with a terrible noise, when vessels came in and out."

When this was translated by Aquilar, Cortez said:

"It was Cadiz, of course. Doubtless the ship he was wrecked in
sailed from that port."

A murmur of assent passed round the other Spaniards.

"Show him a cross, Aquilar. See if he remembers his religion."

Aquilar took out a cross from under his doublet, and held it out
towards Roger, who, after looking at it for a moment, fell on his
knees and kissed it.

"He remembers much, you see," Cortez said. "Father Aquilar, you
will succeed soon in making a good Catholic of him, again.

"Well, gentlemen, I think we may congratulate ourselves upon this
new companion. Every arm is of assistance; and if he is as brave as
he is big and strong, he will prove a doughty comrade. Besides, he
will be able to tell us something of Mexico; although, as Marina
says, he was only once at the capital.

"Question him, Aquilar, and find out from him whether its
magnificence is as great as we hear."

Roger told all he knew of the capital, and said that, although he
himself could not say more than that it was a great city, he had
heard that its population was nearly three hundred thousand; and
that it certainly seemed to him fully three times as large as that
of Tezcuco, where he said there were one hundred thousand people.

"And it stands on an island in a lake?" Cortez asked.

"There are three causeways leading to the land, each wide enough
for six horsemen to ride abreast," Roger replied; "but it would be
a difficult thing to force an entrance, by these, in the face of
Montezuma's army."

"Well, gentlemen," Cortez said, "it is time for us to be going to
the council.

"Marina, do you take your friend to my private apartment, and bid
Juan furnish him with a suit of clothes; and with armor, from that
belonging to our friends who fell in the fights the other day. We
will soon make a true cavalier of him."

As soon as Roger was equipped, he went out to the steps of the
palace, and presently descried Bathalda in the crowd. He beckoned
to him and, taking him into the garden, had a long talk with him.
He would have rewarded him largely for his services, but Bathalda
refused to accept anything.

"I came at my lord's orders," he said; "and am rejoiced to have
been of service to one who is at once so kind, so strong, and so
valiant."

"As you will. We shall have further opportunities of meeting,
Bathalda. Do you now make your way back to Tezcuco. Tell your lord
all that has happened, and that I am with the Spaniards, and shall
accompany them if, as I believe, they go forward to Mexico; that I
hope to see all my friends again, before long; and that I always
think of their kindness to me."



Chapter 13: The Massacre Of Cholula.


The Tlascalans had, from the moment when they admitted themselves
beaten by the Spaniards, laid aside all hostility; and had, indeed,
accepted the alliance with enthusiasm. They had a right to be proud
of their own valor, for they had resisted all the attempts of the
great Aztec monarchy to conquer them, and had defeated, with
slaughter, greatly superior forces; and that a mere handful of
white men should be able to withstand their attacks, day after day,
and to defeat their best and hardiest troops, led by generals who
had hitherto been always successful, excited their surprise and
admiration in the highest degree. They were not gods, they knew,
for some had been killed in the conflict; but as men they seemed to
them infinitely superior, in strength and courage, to any that they
had before heard of; and they were proud to enter into an alliance
with such heroes. Moreover, they saw they would now have an
opportunity of turning the tables upon their enemies of the plains.

They did not believe, for a moment, that Montezuma would admit the
white men to his capital, and in that case there would be great
battles, and perhaps much plunder to be gained; and therefore, when
the Spaniards were again ready to advance, the whole fighting force
of Tlascala was placed at their disposal. Cortez, however, declined
to take with him so large an army. The appearance of such a force,
composed of the bitter foes of the Aztecs, would have combined
against him the whole strength of that empire, and would have
destroyed any hope that might remain of peaceful arrangements.
Moreover, the difficulty of feeding so large a body of men would be
great, indeed; and as his authority over them would be but feeble,
constant broils with the Aztecs would be the inevitable result. He
therefore, with many thanks, declined the offer; but said that he
would gladly take with him a force of six thousand volunteers.

The first march was to be to Cholula, whose people had sent a warm
invitation to Cortez to visit them; and Montezuma, by his last
envoys, also requested them to journey forward by way of that city.

The Tlascalans had strongly urged him to refuse the invitation. The
Cholulans were, they said, a treacherous people and not to be
trusted. They were bigoted beyond the people of other cities,
Cholula being the holy city of Anahuac. It was here the god
Quetzalcoatl had remained for twenty years on his way down to the
coast, instructing the people in the arts of civilization. Here was
the great temple of the god, a pyramid whose base covered
forty-four acres, and whose height was a hundred and eighty feet;
the platform on its summit, where the sacrifices took place, being
an acre in size.

Cortez, however, decided upon visiting Cholula. He deemed the
reports of the Tlascalans to be prejudiced, as there was a
long-standing animosity between the two peoples; and he thought
that, were he to avoid visiting this important town, which lay
almost on his road to Mexico, it might be set down by the Aztecs to
distrust or fear.

The departure from Tlascala was witnessed by the whole of the
population of the state, who assembled to bid the white men
farewell, and to wish them success upon their way. A day's march
took them to within a mile or two of Cholula. Here they were met by
many nobles from the city, who urged them to enter it that evening;
but Cortez, bearing in mind the warnings he had received, and
thinking it dangerous to enter the streets of an unknown and
possibly hostile city after dark, declined to move forward until
morning. Seeing the hostility and distrust excited in the minds of
his visitors at the sight of the Tlascalans in his camp, he ordered
his allies to remain in camp when he advanced in the morning, and
to join him only when he left the city on his way to Mexico.

The Spaniards, as they entered Cholula, were greatly struck with
the appearance of the city and its inhabitants, it being a very
much larger and more highly civilized place than any they had yet
met with. The buildings were large and handsome, the streets wide,
the population very large, and exhibiting in their dress every sign
of wealth and luxury. There was, too, a great variety among the
population; for, as it was the sacred city of the empire, people
from all other parts were in the habit of making pilgrimages there,
and most of the towns had their own temples and establishments. So
numerous were the temples that fully two hundred towers could be
counted, rising above the city, with the stupendous pyramid
towering above them all.

The Spaniards were quartered in the court of one of the temples,
and in the surrounding buildings. As soon as they were established
there, the principal nobles of the town paid them visits of
ceremony; and presents of everything necessary for their comfort
and accommodation, and stores of provisions of all kinds, poured
in.

Roger had, in the line of march, taken his place among the troops;
but Cortez directed that he should, at other times, be near at hand
to him, as he alone of those in the army had any personal knowledge
of the country they were to traverse, and could give information as
to the size of the towns, the nature of the roads, and the
advantages which these offered, respectively, in the supply of
provisions likely to be obtained, the facilities for getting water,
etc. Cortez therefore, Father Aquilar acting as interpreter,
enjoined him to ramble about the city, releasing him from all
guards and exercises.

"Now that you are dressed like the rest of us," he said, "none will
dream that you understand their language, and as you pass along
they will express freely before you the sentiments they may
entertain of us. I do not expect them to love us, and doubtless
though they may flatter us to our faces, they curse us heartily
behind our backs. But we care nothing for their curses, or for
their ill will, so long as they do not proceed to plots and
conspiracies against us.

"They seem courteous and friendly, and I think that the Tlascalans
have spoken far too strongly against them. Nevertheless we will be
on our guard. These men are not like our mountain friends, who were
rough fighters, but hearty and honest people. They are traders, or
nobles, or priests, accustomed to let their faces hide their
thoughts, but through you we may get nearer to them than we
otherwise should do.

"But go not alone. One man can easily be jostled into one of the
temples, and made away with, without any being the wiser. I will
choose two comrades for you; men of discretion, and courageous
without being quarrelsome. With them, too, you will, ere long,
begin to recover your mother tongue; which you will never do, so
long as you only talk these heathen languages with Marina and
Father Aquilar."

Cortez struck the table with his hand, and an attendant entered.

"Summon Juan Algones and Pedro de Gasconda."

In a minute two men entered. Juan was a weatherbeaten soldier,
whose face bore the marks of several deep scars, and who had fought
for Spain on most of the battlefields of Europe. Pedro was young
enough to be his son. Juan had saved his life in a fight with the
natives of Cuba, and since then they had been inseparable.

"Juan, I have sent for you to ask you and Pedro to take our new
comrade into your party. I know you are always together, and that
you are quiet and peaceable, and not given either to quarrel in
your cups or to spend your evenings in gambling and dicing. He has,
as you know, almost forgotten his own language; and it will be for
our advantage, as well as his own, that he should learn it as soon
as possible; for as he knows the country and people, it is well
that he should be able to communicate with the rest of us, without
having to hunt up an interpreter.

"But that is not the principal thing, just at the present moment.
We know not whether the people of this city mean treacherously
towards us, or not. They will not speak in the presence of Donna
Marina or of the good Father here, knowing that they are acquainted
with the language; but as they will not imagine that this tall
Spanish soldier can know aught of what they say, they will not mind
speaking out their thoughts before him. Therefore, while he is here
it will be his duty to wander about the streets, and learn what the
people are saying, and what they think of us. But here, as
elsewhere, I have ordered that not less than three men shall go out
together.

"I have chosen you to accompany him. You will be free from all
other duty."

"That we will do, right willingly," Juan said. "It is pleasanter to
walk about the streets, and look at these strange peoples, than it
is to be cooped up here. As to the other part of the business, we
will do what we can towards teaching him Spanish; but as to being
our comrade, that must depend upon himself. I like the young
fellow's looks much. He looks honest and straightforward, though
where he got that light wavy hair and that fair skin from I can't
guess--they are rare enough in Cadiz, where I heard one say that he
came from."

"We don't know that he came from there, Juan. He may have come from
the mountains of Biscaya, where fair skins are commoner than they
are in the south. It is only that he described to us a port, which
must have been Cadiz, as the last thing he recollected in Spain."

"Ah, well, his skin matters nothing!" the soldier said. "His face
is an honest one, and as to height and strength one could wish no
better comrade. He is young yet, not more than nineteen or twenty,
I should guess; but I will warrant that there is not a man in the
expedition he could not put on his back, if it came to a tussle. At
any rate, we will try him.

"What do you say, Pedro?"

"I like his looks," the young fellow said. "At any rate, we are not
like to quarrel with him. As to more than that, we can say better
when we know more of each other."

Father Aquilar, who had listened attentively to all that had been
said, explained to Roger the purport of the conversation between
Cortez and the men. When he had finished, Roger held out his hand
to the two soldiers, and gave them a hearty grasp, expressive of
his willingness to join in the arrangement that had been made.

"He will do, General," Juan said. "We will look after him, never
fear."

Cortez gave orders that the three men were to be allowed to leave
the quarters and go into the town at all times, without further
question; and they at once started for a turn through the streets.

"How are we to begin to teach this young chap to talk, Pedro? It is
out of the regular line of duty, altogether."

Pedro shook his head.

"I don't know, comrade. I have heard women teaching their babies to
talk, but I should hardly think that would be the way with him."

"No, no, that is quite different, Pedro. You see the little ones
have not got their tongues twisted rightly, and they can't talk
plain, do as much as they will; but this young fellow could say,
plain enough, what we told him. The question is, what are we to
tell him?

"Suppose I say to him, 'They are a curiously dressed lot of people
here.'

"Well, he might say it after me, but as he would not have an idea
what we meant, I don't see that we should be getting any
forwarder."

Roger, however, had already gone through the work of learning the
two native languages, and knew how to begin. He touched Juan's
sword, and gave the Mexican word for it.

"What does he mean by that, Pedro?"

Roger repeated the action.

"Perhaps he wants to know what you call your sword," Pedro
suggested.

"Perhaps it is that. I will try him, anyhow.

"'Spada.'"

Roger nodded, and repeated the word after him, and then touched his
own helmet.

"That is what he means," Juan said, with great satisfaction. "What
he has got to do is to touch things, and for us to tell him the
names."

"That is capital. I had no idea teaching a language was such easy
work."

However, after a few more words had been said, and a method
established, Roger asked no more questions; his companions being
now fully occupied in gazing at the houses, the temples, and the
crowd in the streets, while he himself was busy listening to the
remarks of the people.

It was curious to him, to hear everyone around freely discussing
them, assured that no word they said was understood. Had he been
vain, he would have felt gratified at the favorable comments passed
on his personal appearance by many of the women and girls; but he
put them down, entirely, to the fact that he differed more from
them than did the Spaniards, and it was simply the color of his
hair, and the fairness of his skin, that seemed wonderful to the
Mexicans.

"Ah!" he heard one woman say to another, "I marked that tall
soldier when they came into the town, this morning. They are all
grand men, and look wonderfully strong and brave with their arms
and armor. I know that such fighters as these were never heard of
before; for have they not, few as they are, beaten the Tlascalans?
Who, as we all know, are good fighters, though they are little
better than savages. But as to their faces, they were not what I
expected to see. They are lighter than ours, but they are not
white.

"But I noted this soldier. He is just like what I expected--just
like what they said the white man, who has been at Mexico for some
time, is like."

"I am sorry for them," the girl said. "They say that Montezuma will
offer them all up at the temples, when he gets them to Mexico."

"Perhaps they will never get there," a man standing next to her
said. "At least, unless they enter the town as captives.

"Perhaps some of them will stay here. Why should not our god have
his share of victims, as well as the war god of Mexico?"

The speaker was a priest, who was scowling angrily at the three
Spaniards; who, after stopping to look at the carving over the gate
of a temple, were now moving on again.

But although Roger heard occasional remarks that showed it was the
opinion of the inhabitants that Montezuma had only allowed these
strangers to enter his country for the purpose of destroying them,
there was no general feeling of hostility to them--the satisfaction
at the defeat they had inflicted upon Tlascala far outweighing any
other feeling.

After wandering about for some hours, the party returned to their
quarters, where Roger gave, through Malinche, to Cortez an account
of what he had noticed.

"There is nothing new in that," Cortez said. "We know that
Montezuma has done all in his power to prevent us from coming, and
that now he knows he has wasted his treasures in vain, he must feel
no goodwill towards us. However, we shall be prepared for him.

"But continue your search. There may be a change come. Montezuma
may, even now, be preparing to crush us. If so, as soon as the
people here know it, you will see a change in their demeanor. The
priests are all powerful here, and the devils whom they worship are
sure to set them on to do us mischief, if they can. Therefore,
relax not your watchfulness. Marina and yourself are the only two
among us who understand their language, and it is upon you both
that we have to depend, to shield us from treachery. Against an
open assault I have no fear, but in a crowded town like this, an
attack at night might be fatal."

Cortez had, indeed, taken the precaution upon his arrival of
stating to the nobles that, as it would be inconvenient for Marina
to reside in buildings occupied solely by men, he should be glad if
one of their wives would receive her as a guest; and she was
accordingly installed, at once, in the house of one of the
principal nobles.

Some days passed, as Cortez was waiting for the arrival of a fresh
embassy from Montezuma. During that time Roger was unable to detect
any change in the attitude of the population. The Spaniards were
greeted courteously when they went abroad, and their leaders were
entertained at fetes and banquets by the nobles.

Roger and his two comrades were well satisfied with each other.
Juan was a taciturn soldier, but he was amused at the efforts of
Pedro and Roger to converse.

"I am glad, Pedro," he said, on the third day of their making
acquaintance with Roger, "that this young fellow has joined. If I
had had my will, I should have said nay when Cortez proposed it;
but it is good for you, lad. It is well enough for an old soldier
like me to toil along all day without speaking, under a burning
sun; and to say but little, even over his cup of wine, at the end
of the march. But it is not good for a lad like you. You were
getting old before your time. I could sing a song, and dance a
measure with the best of them, when I was at your age; and you see
what has come of my campaigning for, like yourself, I took to an
old soldier for a comrade. This young fellow seems to have a
cheerful spirit, and when he can talk our language well will be a
gay companion, and will do you good.

"Yes, and do me good, too, Pedro. You are too apt to get into my
moods, and be silent when I am silent; and thus I make you dull,
while you do not make me bright. Only I want to see this young
fellow at work, before I quite give him my heart. I believe that he
will bear himself bravely. It were a shame, indeed, if there should
be faint heart in a body of such thews and muscle. Truly he is a
stately figure, and has the air of the great noble rather than a
rough soldier; but that, I take it, comes from his being brought up
among these Mexicans; who, though in most respects ignorant, carry
themselves with much dignity, and with a stately and gentlemanly
manner, such as one sees, in Europe, chiefly in men of good blood."

On the evening of the fourth day, the embassy arrived from
Montezuma. The emperor had apparently again changed his mind, for
he expressed his regret at their determination to visit the
capital, and begged them to relinquish the idea. Upon leaving
Cortez, the ambassadors had an interview with several of the chief
nobles of Cholula. They left for the capital again in the night.

The next morning a change was visible in the behavior of the
people. They no longer visited the Spanish quarters, but held aloof
from them. The nobles, upon being invited to come to see Cortez,
sent in excuses on the ground of illness, or that they were about
to undertake a journey, or other pretexts, and the supply of
provisions sent in fell off greatly.

Roger and his comrades also marked a great difference in the manner
of the people in the streets. The buzz of talking and laughing was
hushed, as they approached. People turned away, as if desirous of
avoiding the sight of them. The priests regarded them with an
insolent air. On one or two occasions they were roughly jostled,
and on arriving at the end of a street the people gathered round,
and by words and gesture told them to go no farther.

Cortez had particularly enjoined in Roger and his companions
against embroiling themselves, in any way, with the people; and
they therefore suffered themselves to be turned back, without
exhibiting any air of concern; but Juan muttered many oaths beneath
his mustache, and Roger and Pedro had difficulty in restraining
their anger.

Cortez looked very grave upon hearing Roger's report, on their
return.

"I fear that treachery is intended," he said, "and if I did but
know it, I would be beforehand with them. You had best not go
abroad again, for it may be their intention to provoke a quarrel,
by an affray in the streets. I will send some of the Cempoallans
who are with us out. They will be less observed, and may find out
what is going on."

"I think," Marina said, "that if we go up to the flat roof, we may
see something of what is going on. This house is more lofty than
most."

Cortez, with Roger and the girl, ascended to the roof. From it they
commanded a considerable prospect. On some of the roofs they could
make out bodies of men at work, but these were too far off to see
what they were doing.

In the evening the Cempoallans returned, and said that they had
come upon barricades erected across several of the streets, and
that on many of the roofs great stones and beams of timber were
piled; while they had discovered holes dug in the streets, and
covered with branches, and apparently intended to entrap cavalry.

A portion of the troops were ordered to remain under arms all
night, in case of attack, but the city remained quiet. In the
course of the following day some Tlascalans came in from their
camp, and informed Cortez they had heard that a great sacrifice of
children had been offered up, in one of the temples, a custom which
prevailed whenever an enterprise of a serious nature was about to
be undertaken. They said, too, that large numbers of the citizens,
with their wives and children, were leaving the town by the various
gates. The situation had now become very grave, and Cortez and his
officers were at a loss to know what had best be done, as they had
still no positive proof that treachery was intended.

This proof was, however, furnished by Marina next day. The wife of
the cazique had taken a great fancy to her, and urged her to take
up her abode altogether at her house, hinting that it would be
safer for her to do so. Marina at once pretended that she should be
glad to leave the white men, who held her in captivity in order
that they might use her as an interpreter. The Cholulan then gave
her a full account of the conspiracy.

It was, she said, the work of the emperor, who had sent rich
presents by the ambassadors to the great nobles, and had urged upon
them the necessity of making an end of the white intruders. Twenty
thousand troops had been marched down to within a short distance of
the city, and these were to enter and take part in the assault on
the Spaniards.

The attack was to be made as these left the city. The streets were
to be barricaded, and impediments to prevent the action of the
cavalry placed in the way; and the Spaniards were to be overwhelmed
with the missiles from the roofs, while the troops would pour out
from the houses to the attack. Some of the Spaniards were to be
sacrificed at the altars at Cholula, the rest to be marched in
chains to the capital, and there put to death.

This scheme was unfolded to Marina in her apartment in the Spanish
quarters, and she appeared to assent to the proposal that she
should, that night, leave the Spaniards altogether. Making an
excuse to leave the room for a few minutes, Marina hastened to
Cortez and informed him of what she had heard. The cazique's wife
was at once seized, and being in terror of her life, she repeated
the statements she had made to Marina.

The news was alarming, indeed. The position of the Spaniards in the
midst of a hostile city seemed well-nigh hopeless--the barricades
and pitfalls would paralyze the action of the cavalry and
artillery, every house would be a fortress, and under such
difficulties even the bravery of the handful of Spaniards would
avail but little against the overwhelming force by which they would
be attacked.

Before deciding as to the best course to be adopted, Cortez
determined to obtain further confirmation of the story of the
cazique's wife. He accordingly sent an invitation to two priests,
who resided in the temple close to his quarters, to visit him. When
they came he received them most courteously, but informed them
that, by the powers he possessed, he was perfectly aware that
treachery was intended. He bestowed upon them some very valuable
presents, from the gifts he had received from Montezuma, and
promised that none should be aware that he had received any
information from them. The rich bribes had their effect, and the
priests confirmed the report Marina had heard.

They said that the emperor had, since their arrival, been in a
state of vacillation, constantly consulting the oracles, and unable
to make up his mind whether to fight them, or to receive them with
honor. He had, when he heard that they were going to Cholula, first
issued orders that they should be well received; but since then the
oracles had again been consulted, and had declared that Cholula
would be the grave of the white men, for that the gods would
assuredly lend their aid in destroying the enemies who had dared to
violate the sanctity of the holy city. He had, therefore, ordered
the attack to take place in the manner described; and so certain
were the Aztecs of success that the manacles to secure the
prisoners had already been sent to the city.

Cortez dismissed the priests, telling them that he intended to
leave the city the following morning, and requested that they would
induce the principal nobles engaged in the plot to pay him a visit,
at once. As soon as the priests had left, he summoned his principal
officers, and disclosed to them the plot he had discovered. There
was much difference of opinion between them. Some were in favor of
returning at once to the friendly city of Tlascala. Others voted
for still advancing, but by the northerly route their allies had
recommended. But the majority agreed, with their general, that
their only chance of safety was in taking a bold course; for that
retreat would raise the whole country against them, and ensure
their destruction.

When the nobles arrived, Cortez rebuked them mildly for their
altered conduct and for the failure of supplies; and said that the
Spaniards would no longer be a burden upon the city, but would
march out on the following morning; and requested that they would
furnish a body of two thousand men, to transport his artillery and
baggage. As this suited admirably the designs of the natives, they
at once agreed to furnish the required force.

Upon their leaving, Cortez had an interview with Montezuma's
ambassadors, who had accompanied him from the coast, and told them
that he was aware of the treacherous plot to destroy him and his
army, and that he was grieved to find that this vile act of
treachery was instigated by Montezuma. The ambassadors, astounded
at what appeared to them the supernatural knowledge of Cortez, and
terrified at the position in which they found themselves, made
earnest protestations of their entire ignorance of the scheme; and
declared that they were convinced that the emperor was wholly
innocent of it, and that it was entirely the act of the Cholulans.
Cortez pretended to believe them, as he was desirous, as long as
possible, of keeping up a semblance of friendship with Montezuma;
and declared that he was willing to believe that, after the
friendly messages and gifts the emperor had sent, he could not be
guilty of such baseness and treachery. His anger therefore would be
directed chiefly against the Cholulans, who were guilty not only of
foul treachery to himself, but of dishonoring the emperor's name by
their conduct.

As soon, however, as the ambassadors had retired, a strong guard
was placed over them, to prevent them from communicating with the
citizens. Every precaution was taken, in case the plans of the
enemy should be altered, and an attack made during the night. The
guns were placed so as to command the approaches. The horses were
kept saddled, and ready for action. Strong guards were placed, and
the troops lay down in their armor. Orders were dispatched, to the
Tlascalans, to hold themselves ready to march into the city in the
morning, and join the Spaniards.

As soon as daylight broke, the troops were under arms. A portion of
those, with the guns, were posted outside the building, so as to
sweep the streets. A strong body were told off to guard the three
gates of entrance. The rest were drawn up in the great court, which
was surrounded partly by buildings, partly by high walls.

Soon after the arrangements were completed the caziques arrived,
having with them a body of men even larger than they had agreed to
bring. As soon as they entered, Cortez called them to him, and
informed him that he was acquainted with all the particulars of the
conspiracy. He had come to that city upon the invitation of the
emperor, had given them no cause of complaint, and had left his
allies outside the walls. Under the guise of kindness and
hospitality, they had prepared a snare to cut off and destroy them.

The Cholulans were astounded. It seemed to them useless to deny
anything to men who could thus read their thoughts, and they
confessed that the accusation was true.

Cortez raised his hand. A gun gave the signal, a terrible volley
was poured into the Cholulans, and the Spaniards then fell upon
them with pikes and swords. The unfortunate natives, thus taken by
surprise, and penned up like sheep in the enclosure, scarcely
offered any resistance; some tried to escape through the gateways,
but were repulsed by the troops stationed there. Others strove, but
in vain, to scale the walls, and the only survivors of the massacre
owed their lives to hiding under the great piles of dead.

In the meantime, the Mexicans without, being made aware by the
heavy firing of the failure of their plan of surprise, rushed from
the buildings in which they had been stationed, and poured up to
the assault. They were swept down by the discharges of the guns,
but the places of the slain were rapidly filled, and with reckless
bravery they pressed up to the Spaniards; although Cortez, at the
head of his cavalry, charged them again and again, so as to give
the gunners time to reload.

The struggle was still proceeding when the Tlascalans entered the
gates of the city and, coming up at a run to the scene of conflict,
fell upon the rear of the Mexicans. These could no longer resist
their terrible opponents and, breaking their ranks, took refuge in
the houses, or fled to the temples.

One large body, headed by the priests, made a stand upon the great
central teocalli. There was a tradition among them that, if its
stones were removed, the god would pour out an inundation of water
to overwhelm his enemies. The Cholulans tore down some of the
stones, and when the expected miracle did not take place, were
seized with despair. Many shut themselves up in the wooden towers
on the platform of the summit, and poured down missiles on their
foes as they climbed the great staircase; but the darts and arrows
fell harmless upon the armor of the Spaniards, and when these
gained the platform, they snatched up the blazing arrows shot at
them, and fired the turrets. The Cholulans fought to the last, and
either threw themselves over the parapet, or perished in the
flames.

In the meantime, many of the wooden houses in the town had caught
fire, and the flames spread rapidly. The Spanish cavalry charging
through the street trampled the Mexicans under foot, while the
Tlascalan allies gratified their long enmity against the Cholulans
by slaying them without mercy.

When all resistance had ceased, the victors burst into the houses
and temples, and plundered them of their valuables. The sack
continued for some hours, and then Cortez, at the entreaties of
some Cholulan caziques who had been spared at the massacre, and of
the Mexican ambassadors, consented to call off his troops; and two
of the nobles were allowed to go into the town, and to assure the
surviving inhabitants that no further harm would be done to them,
if they would return to their homes.

The Spaniards and Tlascalans were drawn up under their respective
leaders. The division of the booty offered no difficulties. The
mountaineers attached no value to gold or jewels, and were well
content with wearing apparel and provisions; while to the share of
the Spaniards fell the valuables taken. Cortez had given strict
orders that no violence should be offered to the women or children,
and his orders had been respected; but many of these and numbers of
men had been made prisoners by the Tlascalans, to carry away into
slavery.

Cortez, however, now persuaded them to liberate their captives; and
so great was his influence that they acceded to his request. The
dead bodies were now collected, and carried outside the city by the
inhabitants.

Cortez, in his letter to the Emperor Charles, says that three
thousand were slain; but most contemporary writers put down the
number of victims at six thousand, and some at even a higher
figure. Order was promptly restored. The inhabitants who had left
the town speedily returned, and the people of the neighborhood
flocked in with supplies. The markets were re-opened, and only the
lines of blackened ruins told of the recent strife.

The massacre was a terrible one, and is a stain upon the memory of
Cortez; who otherwise throughout the campaign acted mercifully,
strictly prohibiting any plundering or ill treatment of the
natives, and punishing all breaches of his orders with great
severity. The best excuse that can be offered is, that in desperate
positions desperate measures must be taken; that the plot, if
successful, would have resulted in the extermination of the
Spaniards; and that the terrible lesson taught was necessary, to
ensure the safety of the expedition. Moreover, a considerable
portion of those who fell, fell in fair fight; and after the action
was over, the inhabitants were well treated. It must, too, be taken
into consideration that the Spaniards were crusaders as well as
discoverers; and that it was their doctrine that all heretics must
be treated as enemies of God, and destroyed accordingly.

Such was not the doctrine of their Church, for as the great
historian Bede writes of King Ethelbert:

"He had learned, from the teachers and authors of his salvation,
that men are to be drawn, not dragged, to heaven."

Roger, with his two companions, had formed part of the force
stationed outside the gates to resist the attack of the citizens;
and he had taken his share in the fierce fighting that went on
there. He was not free from the prejudices of his times, and the
horrible sacrifices of the temples, and the narrow escape he
himself had had in being offered up as a victim, had inspired him
with a deep hatred of the religion of the people; although against
them, personally, he had no feeling of hostility. Even in the
height of the conflict he felt pity for the men who, in their
cotton armor, rushed so fearlessly to the attack of the iron-clad
Spaniards, armed with their terrible weapons. But at the same time,
he knew that if they were successful, the most horrible fate
awaited him and his companions; and the treacherous plot, of which
they had so nearly been the victims, excited the same feelings in
his mind as in that of the Spaniards.



Chapter 14: In Mexico.


The terrible vengeance taken by the Spaniards at Cholula struck
terror into the minds of the Mexicans. The white men had shown, in
their conflict with the Tlascalans, how terrible they were in
battle, and it now seemed that treachery was of no avail against
them. The cities in the neighborhood of Cholula hastened to send
messages expressive of submission to the terrible white warriors,
accompanied by presents of all kinds. Montezuma saw, with awe and
affright, that even the oracles of the gods could not be depended
upon against these strangers; and that bribes, force, and treachery
had alike failed to arrest their march towards his capital. Vast
numbers of victims were again offered up on the altars, but no
favorable responses were returned--for the priests, seeing how
complete had been the failure of their predictions as to events at
Cholula, were unwilling again to commit themselves. The emperor
consequently sent fresh ambassadors laden with presents to Cortez,
with assurances that he was in no way responsible for the attack
upon them, and that he considered they had done well in punishing
its authors.

Cortez endeavored to induce the inhabitants of the city to embrace
Christianity; and would have resorted to force here, as at
Cempoalla, but he was dissuaded by Father Olmedo; who, as on former
occasions, urged that conversions effected by force were of little
use, and that the cause would be injured, rather than benefited by
such measures. Christianity would, as a matter of course, result
from the success of the Spaniards; and that success would be
imperiled, by exciting the animosity of the whole people by
violence to their gods. As the great teocalli had been captured in
fair fight, and a large portion of its buildings burnt, Cortez
converted a massive stone edifice that had escaped the flames into
a church, and erected a gigantic crucifix on the summit of the
teocalli, visible from all points of the city.

A fortnight after his entrance to Cholula, Cortez again began to
move forward. His Cempoallan allies, who had fought with great
bravery against the Tlascalans, and had rendered him immense
assistance upon the march, now asked to be allowed to return home;
for much as they believed in the prowess of the whites, the dread
of Montezuma's name was too great for them to dare trust themselves
in his capital. Cortez dismissed them with many presents and, with
his Tlascalan army, set forward towards the capital.

As they proceeded on their way, parties came in from various towns
on the plateau with friendly messages. The enormous taxation,
imposed to keep up the luxurious court of the emperor, pressed
heavily upon the land; and the greater portion of the inhabitants
hailed, with real satisfaction, the coming of a power that appeared
likely to overthrow the Aztec tyranny. Had it not been for this
widespread disaffection, the little army of Cortez would, in spite
of its bravery and superior weapons, have been powerless against
the vast hosts which could have been hurled against it. But the
people of the empire, in general, regarded Mexico as its oppressor
and tyrant, and hailed the opportunity of freeing themselves from
its dominations. Cortez, except when the question of religion was
concerned, was politic in the highest degree; and inspired all the
natives who came to him with the full belief that, in him, they
would have a kind and generous protector against Montezuma.

Warm as were the assurances of friendship sent by that monarch, the
Spaniards were well aware that no confidence could be placed in
them. Their new friends, indeed, informed them that he was already
preparing for an attack upon the Spaniards; and that the straight
and level road had been blocked up, in order that they might be
forced to take their passage through the mountains, where they
could be attacked and overwhelmed at points at which their cavalry
and artillery would be unable to act.

On arriving, therefore, at the place where the roads had been
blocked, Cortez caused the piled-up obstacles to be removed; and
the army proceeded by the level road, where they felt confident in
their power to defend themselves, if attacked.

Upon the march Roger sometimes kept with Juan and Pedro, at other
times walked beside Malinche, who, although wholly devoted to
Cortez, had yet a warm and kindly feeling for her former friend.
Cortez himself often consulted Roger as to the roads and places
ahead, for he always received the native descriptions with some
doubt, as he could not be sure whether they were honestly given.

After passing across the plateau, the little army ascended the
steep range of hills separating it from the table land of Mexico.
The cold was sufficient to affect them seriously, after the heat of
the plains; and the difficulties of taking up the guns and their
ammunition were great. This work was principally performed by the
native allies, the Spaniards holding themselves in readiness to
repel any attack that might be made upon them, in the forest-clad
hills or in the deep defiles; but no foes showed themselves, and
they at last gained the western slopes, whence the plains of Mexico
burst into sight.

The Spaniards stood astonished--as Roger had done, on his first
journey--at the beauty of the prospect; but the sight of the
numerous cities, telling of an immense population, filled them with
uneasiness; and a clamor presently arose, that to march onward
against such overwhelming odds was nothing short of madness; and
that, having accomplished such vast things, they had done
sufficient for honor, and should now return with the spoils they
had captured to the coast.

But, as before, the enthusiasm and influence of Cortez soon
reanimated their courage. He and the other leaders went among them,
and by argument and entreaty persuaded them again to form their
ranks and press forward; and in a short time the army wound down
from the heights into the valley.

Happily for them, the ruler of Mexico was altogether dominated by
superstitious fears. Against native enemies he had shown himself a
resolute and valiant leader, had carried on numerous successful
wars, and had by force of arms greatly extended his dominions; but
against these strange white enemies, his faculties seemed
altogether to fail him. He had, for years, given himself up to the
priesthood; and in this crisis, instead of consulting with his
trusted generals, he was swayed wholly by the advice of the
priests; and sought protection, not from the armies at his command,
but from the gods, whom he strove to influence in his favor by
hecatombs of human victims, sacrificed upon their altars.

In the month that had elapsed since he joined Cortez at Tlascala,
Roger had made considerable progress in Spanish; and although
incapable of supporting a long conversation with his comrades,
could make himself understood in simple matters. His behavior at
the fight in Cholula had gained him the respect of the old soldier;
who, however, was not wholly satisfied with him.

"The young fellow is no coward," he said to Pedro. "When the
Mexicans were pressing us sorely, he fought as stoutly and well as
any in our ranks. He is well skilled in the use of the sword, which
is wonderful, seeing that the Mexicans among whom he has been
brought up are but poor hands with that weapon; and both with
thrust and point he showed himself perfectly at home with the heavy
blade the general gave him. I saw him pressed at one time by four
Mexicans together, and was making to his assistance. But there was
no need for it. He ran one through the body, and with heavy
downright blows, well-nigh cleft the heads of two others; and the
fourth, with a cry of astonishment and fear, sprang back into the
crowd.

"But though he fought so stoutly when attacked, he showed less
ardor in the assault, and lagged behind when we were pursuing the
enemy."

"I like him none the worse for that, Juan," Pedro said. "He has
lived among these people, and though I hear that, when they heard
of our landing, they would have sacrificed him, and he had to fly
for his life and fight hard to make his escape, he must in other
respects look upon them without animosity; and doubtless he felt
some pity for the poor wretches."

"I felt some pity myself," Juan said; "but as they had intended so
treacherously towards us, and proposed to put us all to a cruel
death, I did not let my pity interfere with my sword arm."

"Ah, but you have been accustomed to battles and bloodshed all your
life, Juan. One does not take to the trade of killing all at once,
and I like him none the worse that he was disinclined for the
slaughter of the people among whom he had been brought up."

"Well, we shall see," the old soldier grumbled. "It seems to me
that when two or three hundred men are fighting against a whole
nation, and that nation proposes to cut all their throats on the
altars of their gods, it is not a time for scruples. I approve of
the orders the general gave, that no one was to injure women and
children, and I heartily wish that such were always the orders; but
when it comes to men who have set their minds upon killing me, I
don't draw nice distinctions, and I just smite where I see a
chance."

The news that the Spaniards had crossed the mountains, and had
entered the valley, completed the dejection and despair of
Montezuma; and after shutting himself up in his palace, and
refusing food, he at last turned from the gods, from whom he could
obtain no assistance, and summoned a meeting of his counselors.

These were divided in opinion. Cacama was at the head of the peace
party. He pointed out that, had they intended to oppose the advance
of the white men by force of arms, the whole strength of the empire
should have been dispatched to dispute the passage of the
mountains. As that had not been done, they should now be received
in friendly fashion, as the ambassadors of the great king whom
Cortez claimed to represent. Some of the other counselors, led by
Cuitlahua, Montezuma's brother, were in favor of turning out all
the forces and repelling the invasion; but Cacama's counsel
prevailed, and an embassy was dispatched, under his leadership, to
greet the Spaniards and conduct them to the capital.

The Spanish army advanced slowly. They halted for two days at
Amaquemecan, where they were well received and hospitably
entertained, and presented with a considerable sum in gold. They
then marched forward to Ajotzinco, a town standing at the southern
extremity of Lake Chalco, and partly erected on piles rising from
the lake itself. Here, as at Venice, canals took the place of
roads, and all traffic was carried on in boats.

Upon the following morning, a messenger arrived with the news that
the King of Tezcuco was approaching, as an ambassador from the
emperor, and in a short time the royal procession approached the
city. Cacama was borne in a magnificent litter, shaded by a
gorgeous canopy, and was attended by a number of nobles and
officials. As the palanquin neared the spot where Cortez was
standing, Cacama left his litter and advanced towards him; saluting
by touching the ground with his hand, and raising it in the air.
Cortez also advanced and embraced the young prince, who told him
that he came as the ambassador of the emperor, to welcome him to
his capital. An exchange of presents took place, and Cortez assured
the prince of the friendliness of his intentions, and of the
respect he entertained for the emperor. Cacama then withdrew, and
returned at once to Mexico, while the army resumed its march.

Roger did not make any attempt to approach the prince, after his
interview with Cortez. He knew that he would have received, from
Cuitcatl, the news that he had surmounted the dangers of his
journey and joined the Spaniards at Tlascala, and thought that it
would be better to defer presenting himself to the prince until he
could do so more privately at Tezcuco. He considered it possible
that Montezuma might have blamed Cacama for his escape; and that,
if he were to greet him, it would be reported to the emperor, who
might regard it as a proof that there had been a secret
understanding between them, and that Cacama had aided his flight.

Crossing the causeway that divided the Lake of Chalco from that of
Xochical, the army marched to Iztapalapan, a large town with a
royal residence, governed by the emperor's brother Cuitlahua. The
prince had assembled a number of the great nobles, and Cortez was
received with great state and ceremony; and after the usual
presentation of gifts, a banquet was served to the Spaniards in one
of the great halls of the palace.

After this Cortez was conducted over the gardens, which were the
finest in Mexico. They contained all the vegetable productions of
the empire, with magnificent aviaries, and a fish pond built of
stone, nearly a mile in circumference.

At daybreak next morning, that of November 8th, 1519, the Spaniards
were mustered and again set forward. The four hundred white troops
led the way. They were followed by the baggage, after which came
what was numerically the main portion of the army, six thousand
five hundred Tlascalan soldiers. Keeping on by the shore of the
lake, and crossing the narrow strip of hand dividing the Lake of
Xochical from that of Tezcuco, they arrived at the head of the
great causeway running across the lake to the island on which the
capital was built. The causeway was a massive construction, built
of large stones laid in cement, and was wide enough to permit of
ten horsemen riding abreast.

The shores of the lake on either side were closely dotted with
towns and villages, and the lake itself was well-nigh covered with
the canoes and rafts of the natives. The Spaniards saw, too, with
surprise and admiration, floating gardens--some of them of
considerable extent--on the surface of the lake, covered with
flowers and shrubs. The scene was the most beautiful that had ever
met their eyes, and they were filled with delight and admiration.

Halfway across the causeway they came upon the fort of Xoloc. Here
a massive stone wall, twelve feet high, crossed the dike, and
stretched out on to the lake on either side. Towers were erected at
its angles and, properly defended, it could have resisted the
attack of an army.

An archway gave passage through the wall. Here a great number of
nobles were assembled, who welcomed the Spaniards with formal
ceremony; and the army then marched forward along the dike, till it
reached a wooden drawbridge near the gate of the city.

As they crossed this a splendid procession was seen approaching. It
was preceded by three great officers of state, bearing golden
wands; behind them the emperor himself lay in his palanquin, borne
on the shoulders of nobles, with a canopy of rich feather work
sparkling with jewels above his head. Montezuma alighted when
within a short distance, and with the canopy still carried over his
head, and leaning upon his brother and nephew, he advanced towards
Cortez.

The general, dismounting, went forward with a few of his principal
officers to meet him. The emperor received his guest with courtesy,
and expressed his pleasure at seeing him in his capital; while
Cortez replied with expressions of profound respect, accompanied by
thanks for the superb presents that Montezuma had sent him. The
emperor re-entered his litter, and the Spaniards followed, with
music playing and colors flying.

Although already familiar with Mexican architecture, they were
astonished by the magnificence of the buildings that bordered the
great streets along which they marched. Here were the mansions of
the nobles, built of a red porous stone and covering a large space
of ground. The flat roofs were protected by stone parapets, and
many of them were laid out as gardens. Between these mansions were
broad terraces, which presented a mass of flowers. Here and there
were great marketplaces, surrounded by porticoes of stone; and
above all the temples, with their towering pyramids, rose high in
the air.

Along the whole line, crowds of people watched the procession of
the troops; gazing with surprise and admiration at the cavaliers on
horseback, and at the flashing armor and arms of the Spaniards; and
with wrath and indignation at the Tlascalan army, which followed in
their rear.

The street was in many places intersected by canals. Passing over
these on light bridges, they at last reached a great square near
the center of the city, on one side of which rose the huge temple
of the war god of the Aztecs. Facing this was a palace of
Montezuma's father, which had been appropriated, by the emperor, as
quarters for the Spaniards. The emperor himself received them in
the courtyard, presented Cortez with a magnificent necklace, and
then, saying he would visit them later on, withdrew.

The palace was large enough to afford accommodation for the whole
army; and as it was surrounded by a massive stone wall, flanked
with towers, Cortez saw, with satisfaction, that it could without
difficulty resist any sudden attack. He placed sentries on the
walls, and planted his cannon to command the approaches; and in
order to prevent any chance of a quarrel arising, he forbade any
soldiers to leave the palace, without orders. A large number of
Mexican slaves had been appointed to attend upon the strangers, and
a meal was speedily served by them to the troops, who were then
permitted to take a sleep, for some hours, during the heat of the
day.

The emperor paid another visit in the evening, and had a long
conversation with Cortez, distributing a large number of rich
presents among the Spaniards before leaving. After he had left they
celebrated their arrival in the city by a salute with their cannon,
whose thunder added to the impression produced upon the natives by
the tales they had heard of the prowess of their visitors, and
heightened their belief in the supernatural powers of the
Spaniards.

The next day Cortez returned the emperor's visit. He was
accompanied by a few of his principal officers, and five or six
soldiers. The palace was of immense size, built, like the rest of
the houses, of red stone, and ornamented with marble. Fountains
sparkled in the courts through which the Spaniards passed, and
crowds of Aztec nobles thronged the squares and great halls. The
walls of these apartments were hung with richly dyed cotton, or
with draperies of gorgeous feather work, while the fumes of incense
rose up in clouds from censors.

Montezuma, surrounded by a few of his nobles, received them; and
Cortez at once opened to him what he considered to be the chief
object of his enterprise, and through the medium of Marina
expounded the doctrines of Christianity, and besought the emperor
to turn from his false gods. As Montezuma had himself been a
priest, and was an ardent devotee of his religion, it was scarcely
to be expected that he would favorably entertain the proposal to
change his religion. He answered courteously that, no doubt, the
god of Cortez was good to the Spaniards, just as his own gods were
good to him. What his visitors said of the creation of the world
was similar to what he himself believed. His people had occupied
the land but for a few years, having been led there by a great
being who, after giving them laws, had withdrawn to the regions of
the east. When he left he had promised that he or his descendants
would again visit them, and resume his empire. The wonderful deeds
of the Spaniards, their complexion, the fact that they came from
the east--all showed that they were the descendants of this god.

"Your sovereign beyond the waters is, I know, the rightful lord of
all. I rule in his name. You, Malinzin, are his ambassador, and you
and your brethren shall share what I have."

He then dismissed his visitors with fresh presents.

Malinzin was the name by which Cortez was universally known by the
natives. Malinche was ever with him, and they connected him with
her, and called him by the masculine form of her name.

But gratified as the Spaniards were at the kindness of their
reception, and within the munificent gifts showered upon them, they
could not but feel that their position was a precarious one. They
were in the center of a great city, with a warlike population. It
was broken up, by its canals with their movable bridges, into a
series of fortresses; and it would be well-nigh hopeless to
endeavor, by force, to make their way out of it. At present all
seemed fair, but they were well aware that Montezuma had endeavored
in every way, save by open war, to prevent their coming; and that,
influenced as he was by the oracles of the gods, he might at any
moment exchange his apparent friendship for open enmity.

Two days after arriving at the capital, Roger asked Malinche if she
could obtain permission from the general for him to cross the lake
to Tezcuco, in order that he might pay his friends there a visit.
Presently she returned, saying that the general himself would speak
to him.

Roger had been named Sancho by the Spaniards, as he had not
ventured to give his own name; and it was supposed that he had
forgotten that which he had borne as a child.

"Sancho," the general said; "I know, from what Marina says, that
you have great intelligence, though you have so long been cut off
from your own people. You see that our position here is a strange
one. We are guests and yet, to some extent, we are prisoners. The
Tlascalans with us are hated by the Mexicans, and either between
them and the natives, or maybe between some of my own soldiers and
the citizens, a brawl might arise which would be used as a pretext
for an attack upon us.

"As I feel that I can rely upon your discretion, I will tell you of
some news that I received at Cholula, but which I have kept to
myself. The natives on the coast have shown themselves hostile to
the garrison of a hundred and fifty men, whom I left there under
Juan de Escalante. A chief near there sent in to tender his
allegiance, and asked that four white men should be sent to escort
him to the town. As soon as they got to him two of them were
murdered, but the other two managed to escape and made their way
back. Don Juan marched, with fifty of his men and several thousand
Indian allies, to attack the treacherous chief. There was a
desperate battle, our allies fled, but the soldiers stood their
ground and--thanks to the aid of the Blessed Virgin--resisted all
the attacks made upon them. But eight of the men were slain, and
Juan himself was mortally wounded. The Indian prisoners taken said
that the attack, like that at Cholula, had been made by the orders
of Montezuma.

"You may do us good service by finding out what are the intentions
of the Mexicans. Therefore, by all means, carry out your intention
of going across to Tezcuco. The young king is a nephew of the
emperor, but he has suffered much at Montezuma's hands, and has
been stripped of the greater part of his father's dominions. He
can, therefore, hardly be friendly to him at heart. At any rate you
may be able to learn, in conversation with him, what are his
sentiments towards us. Tezcuco was long the rival of Mexico, and as
the alliance of the Tlascalans has proved of the greatest advantage
to us, still more should we benefit if the Tezcucans were our
friends. If we have to retire from Mexico, we might take refuge
there.

"At any rate, if nothing else comes of it, you might learn from the
king whether he is aware of any treachery meditated against us. He
saved you, Malinche says, from Montezuma and the priests, once; and
would be likely, therefore, to warn you, did he know that danger
was impending."

When Marina had translated this, Roger at once agreed to do his
best to discover if any treachery were meant.

"You had best go in disguise," Cortez said. "Donna Marina will make
arrangements for a canoe to be here, after nightfall; and by
staining your face, and putting on the attire of an Aztec
noble--for which we have ample materials at hand--would not be
noticed as you pass through the throng of yon boats on the lake. It
would be best that you did not go as a Spanish soldier. You might
be arrested on the road, and perhaps carried away and sacrificed at
one of the altars. Once at Tezcuco you must, of course, act in the
matter as you think best."

Marina--who was not, like the Spaniards, confined to the
palace--had no difficulty in arranging for a canoe; and as soon as
it became dark, Roger, dressed as an Aztec cazique, and with his
face slightly stained, took his place in it. The lake was thronged
with canoes, but the craft in which he was seated passed without
notice through them, and after two hours' paddling reached Tezcuco.

Telling the natives that they were to wait for his return, however
long that might be, Roger proceeded to the palace. Avoiding the
principal streets and squares, where his unusual height would
attract attention, he passed unquestioned into the palace amid the
throng of chiefs and nobles who were entering or leaving it, and
made his way to the apartment of Cuitcatl. It was empty but,
clapping his hand, the attendant who had before waited upon him
entered. As Roger's attire was similar to the one he had worn while
at Tezcuco, the man recognized him at once.

Roger bade him go in search of Cuitcatl, and tell him privately
that he was there, and beg him to come. In a few minutes Cuitcatl
entered the room, and greeted Roger most heartily.

"I am glad, indeed, to see you, my friend; and Cacama and the queen
and the princess will rejoice, also. There was great anxiety for
you after your first escape, for the emperor was furious when he
heard that you had slipped off. The priests had assured him that
the sacrifice of a white man, to the god of war, would ensure his
aid and protection against the white invaders. Runners were
dispatched in scores to every town and village, and although I knew
that Bathalda was familiar with every foot of the country, and
would give his life for you if needs be, it seemed impossible that
you should be able to make your way through.

"Then came the news of your fight in the hills; how you had a bow
that carried arrows to an unheard-of distance; and how, in a
hand-to-hand fight, you had prevailed against a score of our
soldiers. After that, you seemed lost. The officers commanding the
troops were convinced that you had not descended the eastern slopes
of the mountains; and the spies, which were watching every movement
of the white men on the coast, reported that no white man had
joined them. Therefore, it was supposed that you must have returned
west of the range of hills, and every town and village was
searched, and every grove and plantation examined.

"We were all very anxious for you, and it was not until a week
after we had the news of the wonderful defeat of the Tlascalans, by
the white men, that Bathalda returned with the message you sent us,
and the news that you had joined the white men there.

"Since then we have, of course, heard nothing of you. Cacama said
that he did not see you when he met Malinzin; but of course he did
not examine the faces of the white soldiers, being occupied solely
with their chief and the officers round him. But we all felt
assured that we should hear from you, shortly.

"So, you have resumed your Aztec dress?"

"I thought it better to do so, for the purpose of coming here,"
Roger replied; "for if the priests want a victim so sorely, it
seemed to me that, if I ventured to leave the palace dressed in my
Spanish garb, I might be seized and carried off."

"You are quite right," Cuitcatl agreed. "The priests are furious
against you all, and I cannot altogether blame them. Your general
may, as he says, come as an ambassador from his king to Montezuma;
and if he had orders to come to his court, at all costs, he was not
to blame if he fought his way whenever he was opposed; but this
does not justify him in insulting our religion, and even assaulting
and hurling down our gods, at every opportunity. He even tried to
persuade the emperor that our gods were false; and spoke insolently
of them, yesterday, when Montezuma conducted him, at his request,
into the holy shrines. Cacama was one of the strongest advisors
that a peaceful reception should be accorded to the white visitors,
but even he is being greatly turned against them, by their conduct
towards our gods.

"Come, I will take you to the royal apartments, and leave you in a
room where no one will enter, until I inform Cacama that you are
here."

A few minutes later the young king entered the apartment where
Cuitcatl had placed Roger, and embraced him with real affection.

"Truly, I am glad to see you again, Roger Hawkshaw. I am glad to
see you for yourself, and I hail you as a counselor, in the strange
pass to which we have come. Here are Maclutha, and my sister,
Amenche."

The queen and the princess entered as he spoke, and each gave Roger
their hand; which, bowing deeply, he raised to his lips, having
before told them that this was the salutation, among his own
people, to ladies of high rank.

"We did not think, Roger Hawkshaw, when we last parted, that we
should meet again so soon. Who could have believed then that the
little band of white men, of whose arrival upon the coast we had
heard, would have made their way on to the capital, when the
emperor was bent upon preventing their coming? We have trembled for
you, and have prayed the gods to protect you; and greatly did we
rejoice when we heard, from Cuitcatl's follower, that you had
surmounted all your dangers safely, and joined the whites.

"It has been a strange time here, since you left. I have been, for
the most part, at the capital. The news that came, from day to day,
of the progress of the whites filled everyone with surprise, and
consternation.

"We of the council met daily, but Montezuma passed his time at the
shrines and among the priests. He was a brave warrior and a great
general, once, but he is no longer himself. My father's prophecy
seems to have unmanned him, and he has given himself up wholly to
superstition. I believe in our gods, and pay them due honor; but I
do not hold that a man should not think for himself, or that he
should trust wholly in the priests, who are but men like ourselves;
and who are, methinks, but poor judges of worldly affairs, though
wise and learned in matters concerning religion. Montezuma thinks
otherwise, and the result is that no orders have been issued, no
determination arrived at, and we have the disgrace of seeing a
handful of strangers installed in the capital.

"Mind, my counsels have always been that they should be conducted
honorably from the coast, and treated as ambassadors; but we have
done neither one thing nor the other. They have been loaded with
gifts, but forbidden to come here. Yet since they came, in spite of
orders, we have seemed as if we feared to meet them; and I blush at
the thought of the treacherous plan to destroy them, at Cholula.

"The gods had prophesied that they would find their grave there.
But the gods were wrong; and it may be that the God of the whites
is more powerful than ours. If not, how is it that they did not
avenge the indignities offered to them by the whites, at Cempoalla,
where their images were hurled down from their altars? And at
Cholula, where the most sacred of all the temples was attacked and
captured, and the emblem of the White God set up on its summit?

"You yourself, Roger Hawkshaw, warned us against these Spaniards.
You said that they were cruel masters to the people they had
conquered, and above all things cruel in the matter of religion,
forcing all who came under their sway to accept their God, under
pain of death; and that they would slay even you, a white man like
themselves, did they know that you did not belong to their people.
Tell us what is to be done. Why are these men in our capital? What
are their objects? Brave and strong as they are, they cannot hope
to overcome a nation, or to force all Anahuac to forsake their own
gods and to accept the God of the whites."

"I know not what are the designs of Cortez, the leader whom you
call Malinzin. I should say the Spaniards are here with several
motives. In the first place, there is the desire for wealth and
spoil; in the second, religious ardor--the desire to bring all
within the pale of their Church; in the third place, the love of
adventure; and, lastly, the honor they will receive, at the hands
of their sovereign, for opening so rich an empire to his arms."

"You do not think, then, they intend to conquer us?"

"Cortez cannot think of doing so, with the means at his disposal,
Cacama; but doubtless he has sent home reports of the richness of
the country, and forces many times more numerous than those under
his command may be sent out to his assistance."

"Does he know that you have come hither?" Cacama asked suddenly.

"He does," Roger replied. "I could not leave the palace without
permission, and Malinche told him of the kindness I had experienced
at your hands. He himself is uneasy at the position in which he
finds himself, uncertain of Montezuma's intentions, and fearful of
an assault; and he bade me try to find out, as far as might be,
what was the general opinion respecting the Spaniards."

"The opinion of the ignorant," Cacama said, with a contemptuous
wave of the hand, "is worth nothing. They go where they are led.
They believe what they are last told. They shout when they are told
to shout. They have no opinion of their own, upon aught but what
relates to themselves.

"Among the nobles, the priests, and the learned there is much
division of opinion. At present we wait; but frankly, at any moment
a storm may follow the calm. The priests, who of course are
bitterly hostile to the strangers, are without doubt working, and
they have great power with all. But I should say that, on the
whole, you are safer here with me than you would be across the
water there. I do not mean that there is any immediate danger, but
you must remember that Montezuma has been insulted and humiliated,
and made to appear small in the sight of the people. He is one of
the proudest of men, and although at present he feigns friendship
with the Spaniards, a moment will come when he will revolt against
being thus bearded in his capital; and he has but to wave his hand
for these invaders to be wiped out.

"However, let us talk of other matters, at present. Of course, you
are not thinking of returning tonight?"

"I intended to do so, and the canoe in which I came is waiting for
me."

"We cannot think of letting you go," Cacama said, decidedly. "I
will send an official back, with a message from you saying that you
think you can do more, here, than by returning; and that you crave
leave to stay for the present, but that you will come over, in the
morning, and report to him all that you have learned here. You can
leave here soon after daybreak, see your general, and be back again
before the full heat of the day."

As Roger was in no hurry to return, Cuitcatl went out to dispatch
an official with the message to Cortez; or rather to Malinche, as
the message would then be delivered privately to him; whereas if
Cortez were asked for, the man might be brought into his presence
when engaged with some of his officers. Roger did not know whether
the fact of his being away from the palace had been made public,
for Cortez might consider it would cause discontent among some of
his followers, were it known that their last-joined recruit was
permitted to leave the town, whereas no one else was allowed to
stir beyond the limits of their quarters.



Chapter 15: Again At Tezcuco.


Until a late hour in the night, Roger sat talking to Cacama and his
family. Although they had heard, from Bathalda, all that had
happened from the time of their leaving Tezcuco to their arrival at
Tlascala, he had to go over it again. Bathalda had told them that
Roger had found a former acquaintance in Malinche, who was all
powerful with the white leaders; and Amenche asked many questions
concerning her--how Roger had known her before, and for how long;
what she was like, and why he applied to her, instead of going
straight to the white general.

"You have heard me speak of her before," Roger said, in answer to
the first question. "I told you that I had learned your language
from a Mexican slave girl, who was one of my attendants during the
time I was at Tabasco. She was with me the whole time I was there,
and if it had not been for learning the language from her, and
conversing with her, I do not know how I should have got through
the time. I was sorry to leave her behind, and promised her that,
if ever I got rich enough here, I would send and purchase her
freedom."

"You seem to have taken a strange interest in a slave girl!"
Amenche said.

"It was natural that it should be so, Princess. I was little better
than a slave, myself. At any rate I was a prisoner, and naturally
took to the one person who was kind to me. We were companions and
friends, rather than master and attendant; and directly I heard
that she was with Cortez, and had gained great influence with him,
I naturally went to her."

"Is she very beautiful?"

"I used not to think her beautiful at all, when we were at Tabasco
together; but she has changed greatly during the months that have
passed since I saw her. Yes, I think she is certainly beautiful
now. But not so beautiful as others I have seen."

"But why did you go to her?" the girl again persisted.

"Because I cannot speak the language of the Spaniards; and it was
necessary, for my safety, for them to believe that I am one of
themselves, rescued from some Spanish ship cast, by a gale, on
their shores when I was a little lad. Had I gone to Cortez direct,
he would probably have guessed, from my dress and from my speaking
the language, that this was how I came to be here; but had I not
seen Malinche before I saw him, she would have recognized me, and
would no doubt have told Cortez that she had known me from the time
I was cast ashore, near Tabasco, somewhat over two years ago. He
would then have known that I could not be a Spaniard, for if so, I
could not in so short a time have lost my own language."

Cacama now interposed, and asked many questions about Tlascala and
its people.

"Some of the Tlascalan princes and caziques gave their daughters as
wives to the Spaniards, did they not?"

"Six of them did so," Roger replied. "The ladies were first
baptized into the Christian religion, and then married by the
priests to as many of the chief leaders of the Spaniards."

"And what did you think of that?" Cacama asked.

"I did not think much about it," Roger said; "for it was no
business of mine, but that of the ladies and their friends. It was
certainly a politic course, on the part both of Cortez and the
Tlascalans, and bound the alliance more closely together.

"But methinks that, upon such work as the Spaniards are engaged in,
a man were better without a wife, both for his sake and her own. A
man who goes into battle with no one but himself to think of may
take joy in the strife; for he knows that, if he falls, it makes no
very great matter to anyone. But if he has a wife hard by, who will
be left a widow if he is slain, it must be ever present to him
while he is fighting; and though he may not fight less stoutly, it
must cause him grievous anxiety, and take away the pleasure of
fighting."

"You have already told us that the white men are good husbands,"
the queen said.

"I do not know that they are in any way better, in that respect,
than your own people, Queen Maclutha. There are good and bad--men
who treat their wives well, and men who neglect them."

"But you told us that they only had one wife, each," she said; "and
that even kings are kept to this rule, as well as their humblest
subjects."

"That is so," Roger said. "One man one wife, whatever his rank.
There is no occasion for the palaces of our king to be as extensive
as those of Montezuma."

"And if these officers who have married here were to return home,
and leave their wives behind them, could they not marry again?"

"No," Roger said; "as the ladies have become Christians, and been
married according to the rites of the Church, they could not be
lawfully set aside."

"And you have no wife in England, Roger Hawkshaw?" Cacama asked.

Roger laughed merrily.

"Why, I was but a boy when I left home; and as far as marriage
goes, I am but a boy still. We consider it young enough, if we take
a wife at five and twenty; and I lack six years of that, yet."

"You are a man," Cacama said gravely. "You are a man in size and
strength, and a man in courage; as you well showed, the other day,
when you were attacked by numbers of our best soldiers. You are
thoughtful and prudent. Years go for nothing. You are a man, and
even in years you are not, according to our customs, too young to
marry.

"Now, tell me--we have heard much of that bad business at
Cholula--tell me, do you think that there was treachery on the part
of the people, or was it a mere pretext of the Spaniards to fall
upon the inhabitants, and sack the town?"

"I am sure that treachery was intended," Roger said. "We learned it
from three people, a lady and two priests; and the Cholula nobles,
themselves, when taxed by Cortez with their intention to fall upon
us, admitted that the accusation was true. Besides, the whole
people were under arms and ready to attack, and poured out under
their leaders to the assault, the moment the first gun told that
their intentions were discovered. No, there is no doubt, whatever,
that a general destruction of the white men was intended; and
although the punishment inflicted was terrible, I cannot say that
it was not justified, under the circumstances.

"Moreover, we knew that there was a Mexican army, lying but a short
distance away, in readiness to enter the town and join in the
attack against us."

"It was a terrible error, as well as a crime on the part of the
emperor, if it be true that he was concerned in it," Cacama said.
"If so, he took no one here into his counsel, but acted wholly on
the advice of the priests."

"That is where the general considers the danger lies. He would
trust the caziques, for men of rank in whatever country are
faithful to their word, and do not pretend friendship when they
mean hostility. Were Montezuma guided by them, there would be no
fear of treachery; but as he has given himself to the priests, and
they can, by means of the oracles, persuade him to almost anything,
Cortez feels that the danger is great."

"Well now, we had better to rest," Cacama said, rising. "You are to
start with the first streak of light, so as to be back before the
sun is high, and it is long past midnight now.

"Cuitcatl, it would, I think, be well for you to accompany our
friend. A rumor may have got abroad that he is again our guest, and
those who longed for his blood, before, may long for it again. I
would not that he should cross the lake unattended."

"I was about to propose doing so," the young noble said. "I know
the priests, and can guess that, at present, a white victim is what
they most of all desire. Therefore, I will certainly accompany him
to Mexico."

Roger and his Mexican friend were taken across the lake in a canoe,
rowed by four strong men. It was one of the private canoes of the
palace, without the royal insignia; used for the conveyance of
messengers, and built for speed. She took them across to the
capital in a very short time and, entering one of the canals,
landed them close to the palace occupied by the Spaniards.

The sentry at the gate was surprised at the height of the young
Aztec chief who approached, and did not recognize him until he
spoke. Even then he would not let him pass, until he called an
officer.

"I have been absent by the order of the general," Roger said.

"I have no doubt it is all right," the officer replied, "but I must
take you to him."

Cortez had only just risen, for the hour was still very early, and
the sun was but now showing himself over the mountains to the east.
He was taking a cup of chocolate.

"That is all right," he said to the officer, as soon as he saw
Roger. "Sancho has been absent upon my orders."

He then called Malinche from an adjoining room.

"You are back earlier than I expected," he said, as soon as the
interpreter entered. "Have you any serious news?"

"No, General. Cacama is himself friendly. He is unaware of any
treacherous designs on the part of the emperor, but admits that the
situation is a critical one, and that it is possible the influence
of the priests may again induce Montezuma to take a hostile
action."

"Do you think we could count upon him as an ally?"

"I think not, sir; although I have not as yet sounded him. Cacama
has been very badly treated by Montezuma, and he by no means
approves of the emperor's conduct throughout this matter, but I
think that his patriotism would overcome his sense of private
wrong. I can tell you more farther on. Cacama has invited me to
stay with him, for the present, and I think I might be of more use
to you there than here."

"I think so, too," Cortez said; "and indeed, you have not yet
entered my band regularly, like the rest. It is right that you
should have freedom of action, especially as you are the only man
among us who knows anything of the Mexicans; for even Marina knows
nothing of this side of the mountains."

"Don't you think that you will run great risk in staying there
alone?" Marina asked, on her own account.

"Some danger, no doubt, Malinche; but I shall be on my guard, and
Cacama will take precautions for my safety. Even the priests would
not venture to seize me in his palace, and the Tezcucans are far
less bigoted than the people of this city."

"I do not think he will be in much greater danger there than he
would be here," Cortez said, when these remarks were translated to
him. "We are all in danger. We are sitting on a mine that may
explode any minute. The young fellow is sharp witted, and with his
knowledge of the language and the people can be trusted to take
care of himself.

"Sancho, if anything should happen to us, and you should hear that
we have been destroyed, I charge you to carry the news to the
coast, and to order in my name that all shall embark on board ship
and sail to Cuba. It would be useless to try to maintain a foothold
here. Spain would avenge it, and with ampler means than mine carry
out the conquest of this country."

A few minutes later, Roger, having said goodbye to Juan and Pedro,
and told them that he might be absent for some time, started to
Tezcuco. They had scarcely left the town, when a canoe with six
rowers issued from one of the canals and followed in their wake.

"See, they are after us!" Cuitcatl said, looking back. "Doubtless
the Spanish quarters are closely watched, to see who enter and
leave them; and the news that a tall young noble had entered was
carried at once to the authorities, and the boat was got in
readiness to follow when you left, and see who you were and where
you were going. However, they will not overhaul us. I bade the
officer in charge of the canoes last night to pick me out four of
his best men, and in so light a boat we shall travel as fast as
that behind us, although they have two extra hands."

"Yes, and they have four sitters," Roger said, looking back.

"No doubt they had orders to arrest you, and bring you back. They
did not reckon on our speed. The two extra men destroy their
chances of coming up to us, altogether.

"Row hard, men. I don't want that boat to overtake us."

The paddlers redoubled their exertions, and the light boat almost
flew along over the water. For a few minutes those in the canoe
behind also did their utmost; but it was plain that they were
falling behind, rather than gaining. Then one of the officials
stood up, and shouted an order for them to stop. They were some
distance behind, but the words could be plainly heard.

The Tezcucans looked scared as they heard the words, "In the name
of the Emperor."

"Never mind them," Cuitcatl said. "We are acting under the orders
of our king. Besides, we are so far away that they cannot be sure
their words are heard. If they have any complaint to make they can
make it to Cacama, and he will answer them."

The boat was soon out of hearing of its pursuer, who fell farther
and farther behind, and was a good mile away when they landed at
Tezcuco.

"Run the boat up and lay her by the side of the others," Cuitcatl
said to the rowers. "Then go at once to your homes, and say naught
to anyone about the journey you have made. The officials will find
out what they want to know as to whom we are, and will care nothing
as to who were the individual boatmen who rowed us. Still, it is as
well to keep silent.

"Of course, Roger," for the lad had asked him to drop the second
part of his name, "it will soon be known that you have returned
here. With such numbers of persons in the palace, it cannot be
hidden; besides, you are well known, by sight, to most people in
the town."

"I quite see that, Cuitcatl, and perceive no good in trying in any
way to conceal myself. These long legs of mine cannot be got rid
of, and tell their story too plainly. However, it makes no
difference. I shall be safe in the palace, and shall only go abroad
in the daytime. They will not venture to try to carry off, openly,
one known to be under Cacama's protection."

Cacama, on their return, agreed with Roger that it was of no use to
try to conceal his identity; and the lad, after washing the stains
from his face and hands, took his accustomed place at the banquet,
and was greeted by many of his former acquaintances.

After the meal Cacama told him that, having heard from Bathalda of
the wonderful shooting he had made with his great bow, he was
desirous of seeing it; and that by his orders the forester, who had
been sent for the evening before by Cuitcatl, had been directing
some of the artisans to manufacture a weapon of similar strength.

"We will go and see how it is getting on," he said.

Proceeding to the workshops attached to the palace, they found that
the bow was finished. It was constructed of a very tough, but
elastic, wood. Three slips of this had been placed together and
bound with sinews. Bathalda ran forward when he saw Roger, and
taking his hand carried it to his forehead. Roger shook the stout
fellow's hand, heartily.

"He is a brave fellow," he said to Cuitcatl, who had accompanied
them, "and fought manfully and well. Had he not guarded my back
during the fight, I should not be here to tell the tale, now."

"We have made the bow according to our instructions," the head of
the artisans said respectfully to the king; "but it does not seem
to us possible that anyone can use it. Three of us have tried
together to string it, but in vain."

"It is a good bow," Roger said, examining it.

"Do they shoot with weapons like that, over there?" Cacama asked,
nodding in the direction of Mexico.

"No," Roger said, "for the most part they use crossbows, and their
bows are much smaller than this. The English are the only people
who use bows like this. They are our national weapons, and outside
our island there are few, indeed, who can even bend them. As to the
stringing, it is knack rather than strength. See here," and taking
the bow, which was just his own height, he placed his knee against
it, bent it and slipped the string into the notch, with ease. Then
holding it at arms length, he drew it till the string touched his
ear.

"It is a great deal stiffer than that I made before, Bathalda; and
is about the strength of those we use at home. Now for the arrows."

These had been made by another set of men, and were an inch or two
over a yard in length, with copper tips.

While he was examining them Cacama had taken up the bow, but though
a strong and vigorous man for his race, he could bend it but a very
short distance.

"It is a wonderful weapon," he said, "and I should not have thought
that mortal man, whatever his color, could have used it. Now, let
us go down into the practice yard.

"Cuitcatl, do you fetch the queen and her ladies, to look on."

"I am no great marksman, Prince," Roger said. "I am perhaps
somewhat better than an average shot, but I have seen marksmen who
could do feats that I would not even attempt."

They descended to the piece of ground, where many of the young
nobles were engaged in shooting, and in practice with arms. Roger
had often been there before, but had carefully abstained from
taking any part in the mimic contests; for he knew that men who are
beaten sometimes feel malice, and he was anxious to keep on the
best terms with all. Cuitcatl had often urged him to try a bout
with himself, or others, with the sword; but this, too, he had
always declined, and his friend had supposed that he was aware his
skill was by no means equal to his strength. But now the Spaniards
had proved to the Mexicans the fighting powers of white men, Roger
had no longer any reasons for hanging back.

As soon as he was seen approaching with Cacama, the Mexicans
abandoned their sport, and gathered round. The story of the defeat
of a band of Montezuma's soldiers by the white man had been
whispered abroad, and Cuitcatl had mentioned to his friends what he
had heard, from Bathalda, of the mighty bow Roger had used; but
when they saw the weapon with which he was now provided, their
wonder was to a large extent mingled with incredulity. They passed
it from hand to hand, tried but in vain to bend it, and murmured
among themselves that the thing was impossible.

"What will you have for your mark," Cacama asked.

"One of these targets will do well enough," he said, pointing to
those at which the Mexicans had been shooting.

These were boards about five feet six in height, and some fourteen
inches in width, presenting the size of a man. They were painted
white and supported by a leg hinged behind them. The distance at
which the Mexicans had been shooting was about forty yards.

Roger stepped a hundred from one of them, and made a mark upon the
ground.

"An English archer would laugh at a target like that," he said to
Cacama, "but it is nigh three years since I practiced. I have seen
men who could with certainty, at this distance, hit a bird the size
of a pigeon sitting on the top of that target, twenty times in
succession, and think it by no means extraordinary shooting."

The queen and some of her ladies now appeared upon a terrace
looking down into the courtyard. Roger took the bow, fitted an
arrow to the string, and drew it to his ear--a murmur of
astonishment rising from the Aztecs. There was a pause for a
moment, and then the arrow sped. There was a sharp tap as it struck
the target, and stood quivering in it just in the center line about
four feet from the ground.

"The bow is an excellent one," Roger said, and quickly discharged
two more arrows, both of which struck within two or three inches of
the first. As it was the power of the bow, rather than his own
shooting, that Roger wished to exhibit, he now had the target
removed a hundred yards farther back, and others placed one on each
side of it. At this distance he discharged three more arrows,
shooting more carefully than before. All three struck the boards,
although at varying heights; and a shout of surprise arose from the
lookers on.

"How far will it carry?" Cacama asked.

"It might carry another hundred yards, but the aim cannot be
depended upon at over two hundred yards, even by good shots," Roger
said. "Of course, the longer ranges are useful for firing at a body
of men. I should say that large tree would be about the extreme
range. If you will send two men down to it, I will see whether I
can shoot as far. We should not see the arrow from here. Will you
tell them to stand one on each side of the tree, but well away from
it? There is no saying where the arrow may go, at this distance."

When two of the attendants had taken their places, twenty or thirty
yards from the tree, Roger drew the bow to the fullest and, giving
to the arrow the elevation he had been taught, as most suitable for
an extreme range, unloosed the string. The arrow, which was of dark
wood, glanced through the air. The eye could follow it only a short
distance. No sound was heard this time, but in a few seconds the
Mexicans were seen running towards the tree.

"Do not touch the arrow," Cacama shouted; and then, followed by the
crowd, for the numbers had greatly increased, as the news of what
was going on had spread through the palace, he walked forward to
the tree.

The massive stem was more than four feet in diameter, and within a
few inches of the center, and at a height of three feet from the
ground, the arrow was sticking. The Mexicans were silent with
astonishment, mingled with a certain amount of awe, for shooting
like this seemed to them to be supernatural.

"And you said you were not a good shot!" the king said.

"It was a pure accident," Roger asserted. "I might shoot twenty
arrows, and not hit the tree again. I had not the least idea that I
should do so. I only wished to show you how far a well-made bow
would send an arrow, when drawn by an Englishman."

Cacama ordered the arrow to be left in the tree, and a large stone
to be placed at the spot from which Roger had fired.

"They shall remain," he said, "as a memento of this shot. I will
introduce, among my people, the custom which you say prevails in
your country; and every child shall be bound to practice, daily,
with bows and arrows. I do not think that any of our race will ever
come to use such a weapon as that, but they may at least learn to
bend bows greatly stronger than those we are accustomed to use."

"They will doubtless do so," Roger said. "It is a matter of
practice, and of strengthening certain muscles of the right arm;
for a man far stronger than I am would be unable to bend that bow,
had he not been trained to its use from the earliest age.

"I should recommend, Prince, that you not only give the order you
have spoken of, but institute a monthly gathering, with prizes for
skill, and honors to the best marksmen. In this way all would take
an interest in the sport, and it would become as popular, among
your youth, as it is with us."

Again Roger's bow was passed round. It had seemed to bend so
easily, in his hands, that those who had not tried it before could
scarce credit its strength, until they had handled it; but even the
most powerful men found that they could only draw the arrow a few
inches.

As they walked towards the terrace, upon which the queen and her
ladies were standing, Cuitcatl said:

"I had intended to ask you, Roger, to try a bout of sword play with
some of us; but I will not do so now. After what we have seen of
the strength of your arm, I should be sorry, indeed, to stand up
against you, even with blunted weapons or with sticks; for there
would be no resisting a downright blow. The news came to us of the
terrible blows struck by the Spaniards, and how they clove through
sword, helmet, and head. I scarce credited them before, but now I
can well believe them to be true."

"Well, Maclutha," Cacama said; "what think you of what you have
seen? No wonder those who met with the white men, in battle, said
that they had supernatural strength; and that even the sturdy
Tlascalans could not resist them. We will have the bow hung up in
the armory, with a great gold chain; which shall be the reward of
the first man who can, like our friend, draw the arrow to the
head."

"It is wonderful," the queen said; "and it would be well indeed if,
as you say, the youth of Tezcuco could shoot like that."

Amenche said nothing, but her cheeks were flushed with excitement
and pleasure.

That evening, when Cacama was conversing alone with Roger, he said:

"My friend, you know that the Tlascalan caziques have given their
daughters as wives to some of the Spaniards. I was talking to you
of marriage, last night, and what you said about your age was
ridiculous. You are a man, and a warrior. I now offer you the hand
of my sister Amenche. She loves you, as Maclutha and I have seen
for some time. From what you said, I gather that your religion
would not regard the ceremony as binding, did she not accept your
God; but I do not think she would raise any objection on that
score, seeing, as we all do, that your God has proved more powerful
than ours."

Roger was struck with astonishment at the offer. He had regarded
marriage as a matter not to be thought of, for many years; and
until lately he would have said that, if he ever did marry, it
would be the little cousin who had, three years before, said
goodbye to him at Plymouth. But of late he had felt the charm of
this beautiful little princess; and since the night when she had
come down to say farewell to him, in the garden, and he had felt
her hand tremble in his, and had seen a tear glisten on her cheek
in the moonlight, he had thought a good deal of her.

The chances of his ever returning to England were comparatively
slight. Dangers of all kinds surrounded him. The Spaniards might be
attacked and massacred at any moment, and if so, he would probably
share their fate. If, however, he was married to this Mexican
princess, and a brother-in-law of the King of Tezcuco, he would be
regarded as one of the people. His position would be a high and
honorable one, and although his life would be far different from
that to which he had hitherto looked forward, it might be a very
happy one.

He sat in silence for two or three minutes after Cacama had ceased
speaking, and then said:

"Forgive me, Prince, for not responding, at once, to an offer so
far above my deserts, and of the honor of which I am most deeply
sensible. There could be no greater happiness, for a man, than to
be the husband of one so fair, and in every way charming, as the
Princess Amenche; but your offer came upon me altogether as a
surprise. As I have told you, I have hitherto regarded myself as
still a lad, and marriage as an event not to be thought of for
years; but as you do not regard my youth as an objection, there is
no reason why I should do so.

"It is of the future that I rather think. It seems to me, now, that
I could be content to settle down for life here, with so charming a
wife; but I cannot say that I might always be of that mind. The
love of country is strong in every man, and the time might come
when, if opportunity offered, I might long to return home to
England."

"That I have talked over with the queen, and with Amenche,
herself," Cacama said. "My sister naturally would be sorry to leave
her own country, but if the time came that you should wish to
return home, she would not hesitate to make the sacrifice, and to
accompany you. A Mexican woman, when she loves, is ready to give up
everything."

For a moment Roger turned the matter rapidly over in his mind, and
saw that, even were he disposed to refuse Amenche's hand, which
indeed he was not, it would be almost impossible for him to do so.
It would be a deep offense to this friendly prince. It would be a
cruel blow to the girl, who had confessed her devotion for him. As
to Dorothy, she would have deemed him dead years ago; and should he
ever return, he would find that she had long since been married;
for the daughters of the wealthy merchant, Diggory Beggs, would not
want for suitors.

He held out his hand to the prince.

"I accept most gratefully your offer, Cacama, and promise that, so
far as in me lies, I will do my best to render your sister happy,
and to prove myself worthy of her choice."

"I am heartily glad," the prince said warmly. "I love my sister,
and I have watched you closely. I believe you to be worthy of her,
and I am sure that in you I shall find, not only a friend and a
brother, but a wise counselor and a valiant leader of my troops;
and that, with your advice, I shall be able to advance my people in
the arts of peace as well as war, and perhaps to win back my
father's possessions.

"As to the question of religion, of which you spoke, there is
indeed no difficulty. My grandfather, the great Nezahualcoyotl, the
wisest and most powerful of our monarchs, did not believe in the
Aztec gods. He built a great temple which he dedicated to the
Unknown God. Here he worshiped, himself, and did his utmost to
induce his subjects to abandon the cruel worship of the Aztec gods.
He forbade all sacrifices, even of animals, and permitted only
flowers and sweet-scented perfumes to be offered up on the altars.
When, after his death, the Aztec power increased, and that of
Tezcuco diminished, the people again embraced the cruel faith of
the Aztecs. Neither my father nor myself have been strong enough to
set ourselves against the priests; but he, as well as I, believed
that my grandfather was right, and that the Unknown God is the
ruler of the world. My sister has of course, been educated by the
priests; but she knows my father's opinions, and my own. She has a
horror of the human sacrifices, and believes that there must be a
greater and better God than those who are said to delight in blood.
So you need not fear that she will make any difficulty as to
accepting what you tell her of the white man's God.

"Now I will fetch her in to you. I think it will be better to allow
a short time to pass, and to see how matters go in Mexico, before
announcing to others your approaching marriage. If any misfortune
should happen to the Spaniards, I should at once publish the news,
and have the ceremony performed without loss of time; proclaiming
to the people that, although white, you are not of the same race as
the Spaniards. If matters go on well, Montezuma himself will
doubtless be present at his niece's marriage; and I shall, of
course, invite Malinzin and all his officers."

The prince left the room, and in a few minutes returned with his
wife, the latter leading Amenche by the hand.

"My friend, Roger Hawkshaw," the young king said, gravely; "I
hereby promise to bestow upon you the hand of my sister Amenche.
May you find in her a good, loving, and obedient wife."

"I, on my part," Roger said, taking the girl's hand, which the
queen held out to him, "promise to be a true and loving husband to
her."

The girl, who had not raised her eyes since she entered the room,
looked up at the tall figure with an expression of perfect
confidence.

"I will be true and obedient," she said softly; "and will love you
all my life."

"What do you do next, in your country?" Cacama asked, with a smile.

"This is how an engagement is sealed, with us," Roger said; and
drawing the girl up to him, he stooped and kissed her lips.

Three days later, as Roger was sitting with Cuitcatl, an attendant
entered and said that the king wished to see them, immediately.
They hastened to the royal apartment. Cacama was walking up and
down, with an angry frown upon his face; while the queen and
princess were sitting on the couch, pale and agitated.

"Strange news has come from Mexico," Cacama said. "The white men
have seized Montezuma, and are holding him prisoner in their
quarters. Did anyone ever hear of such an outrage? Mexico is in a
state of consternation, but at present none know what to do."

"It seems incredible," Roger exclaimed. "Are you sure of your
news?"

"Quite certain," the prince replied.

The news was indeed true. Cortez had found his position unbearable.
He believed that the attack upon the Spaniards, on the coast, as
well as the meditated treachery at Cholula, were the outcome of the
emperor's orders. His native allies had heard rumors, in the town,
that the bridges across the canals were all to be raised; in which
case the Spaniards would be prisoners in their palace. He was in
the Mexican capital, but he had as yet effected nothing towards the
conquest of the country. At any moment he might hear of the landing
of an expedition from Cuba, that his authority was revoked, and
that another was to reap the benefit of all he had done.

He therefore called a council of his most trusted officers, and
discussed the situation with them. All agreed that some step must,
at once, be taken. Some were in favor of starting that night, and
making their way out of the city before a sufficient force could be
collected to oppose their retreat; while others were of opinion
that it were better to retire openly, with the consent of
Montezuma, whose conduct since they had reached the city appeared
to be most friendly.

Cortez pointed out that both these methods would be retreats, and
the whole country would probably rise against them. Moreover, even
if they reached the coast, they would have sacrificed all they had
won by their valor and sufferings. He proposed a measure which
astonished even his boldest companions; namely, that they should go
to the royal palace, and bring the emperor--by persuasion if
possible, by force if necessary--to their quarters, and there hold
him as a hostage for their safety.

The proposal was agreed to, and on the following morning Cortez
asked for an interview with the emperor, which was at once granted.
He proceeded to the palace with his principal officers, ordering
the soldiers to follow in groups of twos and threes, so as not to
attract particular attention.

Montezuma began to converse with his usual courtesy, but Cortez
roughly cut him short, and charged him with being the author of the
attack upon the garrison at the port. Montezuma indignantly denied
this, and said that he would send at once, and arrest the author of
the attack. Cortez replied that it was necessary, for their safety,
that Montezuma should come and reside among them.

The emperor was thunderstruck at the proposal; but the soldiers
crowded in, loud and threatening words were used, and Montezuma, in
fear of his life, gave way. Had he possessed any of the courage
with which he was credited, in his youth, he would have called his
guards and nobles around him, and died fighting. Having once given
in, he assumed the air of having done so voluntarily, and ordered
his litter to be brought.

In the meantime his attendants, and the nobles who had been
present, had spread the news through the city. The Mexicans,
catching up their arms, ran to the rescue of their monarch; but the
Spaniards closed round the litter and, had a blow been struck, the
emperor would doubtless have been murdered. Montezuma exhorted the
people to be tranquil, assuring them that he was going willingly;
and the Mexicans, accustomed to implicit obedience, and fearing
that harm would come to the emperor if a struggle began, drew back
and allowed the Spaniards to pass; and Montezuma was conveyed, a
prisoner, into the palace occupied by the Spaniards.

The act was one of almost unparalleled boldness; but as performed
upon a monarch who was the host of his assailants, and with whom
they were previously on the most friendly relations, it was an act
of treachery, and reflects dishonor upon the fame of Cortez. At the
same time, the position occupied by the Spaniards was so strange,
and even desperate, as to palliate, though it cannot excuse, such a
course of action.

There is no reason to believe that Montezuma intended to act
treacherously. But he was under the domination of the priests, and
had he again changed his mind, as he had already several times
done, nothing could have saved the Spaniards from absolute
destruction. No honorable man would have acted as Cortez did; but
Cortez was a rough soldier, and moreover, firmly held the doctrine,
at that time and long afterwards held by the Spaniards in their
dealing with those of other religions, that faith need not be kept
with heretics and heathen.



Chapter 16: A Treasure Room.


"'Tis infamous," Cacama said, as he paced up and down the room;
"but what is to be done? They hold him in their hands as a hostage,
in the heart of his own capital, and among his own people; and are
capable of hanging him from the walls, should a hostile movement be
made against them.

"You were right, Roger Hawkshaw, in warning us against these men.
They are without faith and honor, thus to seize a host who has
loaded them with presents, who has emptied his treasuries to
appease their greed, and who has treated them with the most
extraordinary condescension. It is a crime unheard of, an act of
base ingratitude, without a parallel. What is to be done?"

Roger was silent. Such a situation, so strange and unlooked for,
confounded him.

"I should say," Cuitcatl burst out passionately, "that every
Mexican should take up arms, and annihilate this handful of
invaders. What though Montezuma fall? Better that a monarch should
perish than a nation. Besides, Montezuma has shown himself unfit to
govern. It is his weakness that has brought things to this pass.
Think you that the white men could ever have advanced beyond the
plateau of Tlascala, had all the forces of Mexico barred the way?
Think you that they could ever have entered the capital, had it
been defended with resolution? One moment he flattered the
strangers and loaded them with gifts; the next he was ready to send
his forces against them. The Cholulans had good reason for
believing that he designed the annihilation of the Whites, if he
did not actually order the attack upon them.

"So on the seacoast. Had the chiefs believed that Montezuma was
really friendly to the whites, would they ever have attacked them?
There were two courses open: he might from the first have received
the Spaniards frankly, and sent a mission to escort them honorably
to the capital; or he might have called upon every man in his
dominion to take up arms, and drive them into the sea. He took
neither. It is he who has brought them here; and it is better, a
thousand times, that he should die than that ruin should fall upon
the country.

"My advice is, that the troops be called out; that messengers be
sent to every city in the valley, bidding them send in their
contingent; and that we march to aid the people of Mexico to
annihilate this handful of treacherous white men."

Cacama was silent. The advice was in accordance with his own
feelings and temperament; but the extreme reverence with which the
Aztecs regarded their emperor paralyzed him.

"We shall see," he said, gloomily. "In a short time we shall know
why Montezuma thus tamely suhmitted to be made a prisoner. He may
have some motives which we cannot fathom. I cannot believe him to
be a coward. No Aztec monarch, yet, has ever shown want of
courage."

Three or four days later, another event occurred which heightened
the fury of the Mexicans against the Spaniards. The cazique who had
attacked the Spaniards on the coast arrived at Mexico, accompanied
by his son and fifteen other chiefs who had acted with them.
Montezuma referred the matter to the examination of Cortez. The
cazique admitted the part he had taken in the attack on the
Spaniards, and did not seek to shelter himself under royal
authority; until sentence of death was passed on him and the other
chiefs, when they all declared that they had acted on the authority
of Montezuma. They were condemned to be burnt alive, in the space
in front of the palace, and this sentence was carried out.

Not content with this, Cortez placed irons upon Montezuma himself,
saying there could now be no longer a doubt as to his guilt. After
the execution was carried out, Montezuma was released from his
fetters.

The news of this insult to their monarch created a profound
impression upon the Mexicans. Although they despised the weakness
of a sovereign who appeared ready to suffer every indignity, and
yet to claim an appearance of courtesy and goodwill towards his
oppressors, the bolder spirits determined that the nation should be
no longer humiliated in the person of its sovereign, and that even
should it cost Montezuma his life, an effort should be made to
overthrow his oppressors.

As soon as the news of the execution of the seventeen nobles, and
of the indignity to Montezuma was received; Cacama said to Roger:

"My friend, I can no longer retain you here. You have told me why
you cannot have it proclaimed that you are of different blood to
the Spaniards, and I quite understand your motives; but there are
two reasons why, in that case, you must for a time return to the
capital. My people would look upon me with scorn, did I retain here
as my friend one whom they regard as the countryman of the men who
have so outraged us. Moreover, you yourself cannot wish to stay.
You have told me that Cortez has charged you to acquaint him with
the state of feeling in this city; and were you to remain here, you
would be placed in the painful position of either giving
information which would ruin my plans, or of deceiving the man whom
you nominally serve. I know that you would say nothing against me,
but should I fail and the Spaniards triumph, Cortez would accuse
you of being a traitor, and you would be put to death by him.

"Therefore, I think it in all ways best that you should return
there, for the present. You will, of course, inform Cortez that I
have sent you back because the feeling against the white men, on
account of their treatment of the emperor, is so great that I felt
that I could not protect you against their fury."

"I quite agree with you, Cacama. My position here has become a very
painful one. I abhor, as much as you do, the doings of the
Spaniards; and am perfectly ready to avow that I belong to another
nation, and to join you in an enterprise against them."

"But that, as you have told me," Cacama said, "would cut off any
chance of your ever being able to return to your own country."

"I am ready to accept that," Roger said firmly. "In marrying your
sister, I shall become one of yourselves, and am ready to cast in
my lot with you, altogether."

The prince was silent for a minute or two.

"No, Roger, I think that my plan is the best. Were you to do as you
say, the Spaniards would be at once placed on their guard; while,
save by the strength of your arm, you could aid but little in any
enterprise against them. Moreover, if you return to the Spaniards,
I shall have the satisfaction that, if I fall and ruin comes upon
my house, you will take care of my sister, and that my wife will
also have a protector. For all reasons, therefore, it is better you
should go. But if aught is to be attempted against the Spaniards, I
will take care to give you notice, so that you can leave them in
disguise and come here, and so avoid their fate."

Although Roger's own feelings would have led him to throw in his
lot openly against the Spaniards, he saw that Cacama's plan was the
best. The boat was ordered to be at once got in readiness; and
after a painful parting with Amenche, who wept bitterly, Roger left
the palace; and again accompanied by Cuitcatl, in order to ensure
his safety across the lake, was taken over to Mexico.

He at once sought the presence of Cortez, and through Marina
explained to him that Cacama had sent him back, fearing that in the
excited state of the population harm might come to him. He had,
since he had been in Tezcuco, sent a letter across each day to
Cortez, saying that all was tranquil there; that the young king was
pursuing his ordinary round of court ceremonial, and was certainly,
as far as he could learn, taking no steps whatever towards
interfering with the affairs of the capital, although the
imprisonment of Montezuma had evidently made a painful impression
upon him.

Cortez asked him a few questions, and when he left the room said to
Marina:

"That young fellow must be watched, Marina. He has been brought up
with these people, and must to some extent feel with them. I know
that he is a friend of yours, but see that you say nothing to him
on public affairs. Let him be kept wholly in the dark, as to our
plans and intentions. This Cacama is, next to Montezuma, the most
powerful and important of the Aztec chiefs. He is young and
energetic, and although he has been so badly treated by Montezuma,
he resents our treatment of him. Had it been otherwise he would
probably, ere this, have made some propositions to us, through
Sancho, for a closer alliance with us, on the understanding that
the territories Montezuma has taken from him shall be returned.

"We must have Cacama's actions closely watched. There are other
Aztecs who are willing enough to act as our spies, and who will
keep us informed of what is going on. Hitherto their reports have
agreed with Sancho's, but from his sending the young fellow back
here, Cacama may now be intending to act against us."

Cacama, indeed, lost no time in setting to work, and began to form
a league with many of the leading nobles, to rescue the emperor and
destroy the Spaniards. Montezuma's brother Cuitlahua and many
others agreed, at once, to join him; but the greater part of the
Aztec nobles hung back, upon the ground that they did not like to
move in the matter, without the orders of their emperor. Their
refusal prevented any general rising taking place, and thus
destroyed the last chance of Mexico retaining its independence.

Cortez learned from his spies what was going on, and would have
marched against Tezcuco, had not Montezuma dissuaded him; telling
him that Cacama was a powerful prince, and would certainly be aided
by many other chiefs, and that the enterprise would be hazardous in
the extreme. Cortez then endeavored to negotiate, but received a
haughty answer from Cacama. He then tried threats, asserting the
supremacy of the Spanish emperor.

Cacama replied "that he acknowledged no such authority, he knew
nothing of the Spanish sovereign or his people, nor did he wish to
know anything of them."

Cortez then invited Cacama to come to Mexico to discuss their
differences; but Cacama had no faith in Spanish loyalty, and he
replied "that when he did visit the capital, it would be to rescue
it, as well as the emperor himself, and their common gods, from
bondage. He should come, not with his hand upon his breast but on
his sword, to drive out the Spaniards, who had brought such
disgrace upon the country."

While this had been going on, Montezuma had still further forfeited
all claim to sympathy, by the willingness with which he accepted
the attentions of those who were, in fact, his gaolers. They paid
him all the outward marks of respect, pretending still to regard
him as a powerful sovereign; and he, in return, was present at
their exercises and sports, took the greatest interest in two ships
they were building for navigation on the lake, and in all respects
behaved to them as if they were his best friends. He now carried
his baseness still further, and informed Cortez that several of the
Tezcucan nobles were regularly in his pay, and that it would be
easy, through them, to capture Cacama and thus break up the
confederacy.

Cortez at once took means to carry out the suggestion. The traitors
invited Cacama to a conference, at a house overhanging the lake
near Tezcuco. Upon going there he was seized by them, bound, placed
in a boat, and carried to Mexico. He was there brought before
Montezuma.

In spite of the perils of his position, Cacama bore himself nobly.
He boldly accused his uncle of foul treachery, and with the
cowardice which he had betrayed since the Spaniards had entered his
kingdom. Montezuma handed him over to Cortez, who ordered him to be
loaded with fetters and thrown into a dungeon. The emperor then
issued an order, declaring that Cacama had forfeited his
sovereignty by his rebellion, and that he therefore deposed him,
and appointed a younger brother named Cuicuitzca in his place. The
other leaders of the confederacy were all seized by the orders of
Montezuma in their own cities, and brought in chains to the
capital, where they were imprisoned with Cacama.

Upon Roger, the news of Cacama's arrest and imprisonment came like
a thunderclap. He was in the habit of frequently seeing Malinche,
who still retained the warm feeling of friendship for him that had
originated at Tabasco, and with whom he often had long talks of
their life in those days; but she had let no word drop as to the
doings of Cacama. She had questioned him somewhat closely as to his
relations with that prince; and he had made no secret to her of the
fact that Cacama had promised him his sister's hand in marriage. As
many of the Spaniards had already married the daughters of great
caziques, this appeared to her natural; and she had congratulated
him upon the prospect of an alliance which would bring him wealth
and land, but had said that, for the present, it would not do to
think of marriage, as it would be unsafe for him to leave the
capital.

When therefore Roger heard of the misfortune that had befallen
Cacama, he was filled alike with surprise and consternation, and
hurrying to Malinche, begged her to use her influence with Cortez
to spare the young prince's life.

"I have already done so," she said; "and he has promised that no
blood shall be shed, though the chiefs who have leagued themselves
with Cacama must all be imprisoned. The safety of the army requires
it. No harm, however, shall befall Cacama, of that be assured. I
may tell you, now, that it has been settled that his brother
Cuicuitzca shall be appointed Lord of Tezcuco in his place. This
will be done by a decree, tomorrow."

"Malinche, I must go at whatever hazard to warn Cacama's wife and
sister, in order to give them the opportunity of leaving the palace
before this young prince arrives. Pray obtain for me leave from
Cortez to go away for twenty-four hours. You can tell him of the
interest I have in the matter."

"I will manage it for you," Malinche said; "but as your princess is
also sister to the new king, I see no reason for uneasiness."

"She is devoted to Cacama," Roger replied; "and would not, I feel
sure, consent to remain in the palace with the usurper."

"You had best advise her," Malinche said, with a little nod of the
head, "to disguise her sentiments, and make the best of the matter.
It may make, you know, a good deal of difference in the amount of
dowry you will get with her."

"I am not greedy, Malinche," Roger said; "but the present is, at
any rate, no time for talking of marriage."

"Most of the officers have married," Malinche said.

"They may have done so, but they are officers, and can maintain
their wives in all honor and respect, and have apartments allotted
to them here. I have neither rank nor station, and shall certainly
not ask my princess to share my rough quarters as a soldier. There
is no hurry. As I told you but a year ago, Malinche, I am scarcely
out of my boyhood; and there will be plenty of time when matters
settle down, and we see what is going to happen, to think of
marrying."

"I will go and speak to Cortez at once, and get leave for you. But
you had best disguise yourself well--Tezcuco will be in an uproar
tonight; for the capture of Cacama will be known there ere many
hours, if it is not known already."

She soon returned with the required permission. This time Roger
dressed himself in the attire of a trader, as being less likely to
attract attention. Malinche again secured a boat for him, and
having dyed his face and hands, he started at once, as it would be
dark before he reached Tezcuco. Since Montezuma had been captive in
their hands, there was no longer any fear of an attack being made
upon the Spaniards; and the soldiers were now able to come and go
through the town, at pleasure.

Upon landing, Roger at once made his way to the palace. There was
great excitement in the town. The people were assembled in crowds,
discussing the news that had reached them; and even at the palace
gate the guards were careless of their duty, and Roger entered
without question.

He hurried direct to the royal apartments. An official who would
have barred his way allowed him to pass at once, when he recognized
his identity.

When he entered, he found a scene of grief and confusion. The queen
was extended upon a couch, weeping bitterly; while Amenche and some
of her ladies, although themselves weeping, were trying to console
her.

The princess gave a cry of joy when she saw him and, running
forward, threw herself into his arms.

"You have heard the news?" she exclaimed. "Cacama is lost. These
monsters will put him to death."

"I can reassure you as to that," Roger said. "He is a captive, but
his life is not in danger. Malinche has interceded for him, and
Cortez has promised that his life shall be spared."

A cry of gladness burst from all present.

"I have other and less pleasant news to give you, Amenche," Roger
whispered in her ear. "Get rid of all these ladies. My news must be
for you, only."

A minute or two later, the queen dismissed her ladies.

"The news I have to tell you," Roger went on, "is that tomorrow
Montezuma will issue a decree deposing Cacama, and appointing
Cuicuitzca Lord of Tezcuco."

An exclamation of anger and indignation broke from the queen and
Amenche.

"He cannot do it," the latter exclaimed, passionately. "It is
beyond his power. The emperor has a voice in the council, but
beyond that he has no power to make or unmake the Lords of
Tezcuco."

"At the present moment," Roger said gravely; "he has got the
Spanish power at his back; or rather, he is but the mouthpiece of
the Spaniards. They are the masters, and care nothing for the law
or usages of your country."

"The Tezcucans will not receive Cuicuitzca," Amenche said.
"Everyone knows that he is weak and cowardly, and of late he has
been at Mexico, dancing attendance on the Spaniards. They will
never receive him."

The queen raised her head from the couch.

"We must not build on that, Amenche. He comes, sent here by the
whites; and when Mexico dares not rise against them, you may be
sure that the people here will not dare to provoke their anger.
Besides, who have they to lead them? Was not Cacama betrayed by his
own nobles? Let us send for Cuitcatl, and hear what he advises us."

Cuitcatl, on his arrival, was so thunderstruck on hearing that
Montezuma had so debased himself, to the Spaniards, as to depose
his own nephew, whose only fault was patriotism, and who had been
endeavoring to effect his rescue, that he was for a minute or two
speechless with indignation.

"The gods have, indeed, deserted us," he said; "when they have
turned a monarch who was considered brave and honorable into a base
slave. May their vengeance fall upon him! May the curse of our
ruined country descend upon the man who is the real author of our
misfortunes!"

"Do you think, Cuitcatl," Amenche asked, "that the people will
receive this usurper?"

"I fear, indeed, that they will do so," he replied. "Montezuma has
appointed him, and Montezuma's name still has power. At any rate,
it will afford them an excuse for submission. Besides, how could
they fight when so many of our own nobles are treacherous?
Doubtless Cacama will not be the only victim, and Montezuma will,
at the orders of the Spaniards, disgrace all who have acted with
him."

"Then what would you advise us to do? We are both resolved that we
will not await the coming of this usurper."

"My house is at your service," Cuitcatl said. "It lies, as you
know, near the foot of the hills; and whatever strife may go on
here, its quiet is little likely to be invaded. Cuicuitzca will not
concern himself at present with you, nor would he venture to take
any hostile steps against you; for did he do so, it would excite a
storm of indignation.

"As to you, Princess, as his own sister, and of the royal blood,
you could if you liked stay here, as at present; and indeed, were
it not that I am sure you would not leave the queen, I should
advise you to do so; for you might then act in the interests of
Cacama, should you see an opportunity."

Amenche shook her head.

"No," she said, "brother though he is, I would not bend my head
before a usurper, while Cacama lives. When do you think we had
better leave here?"

"I should say it were best to leave at once," Cuitcatl replied. "I
will order three or four litters to be prepared; for yourselves
and, say, two of your most trusted attendants. Bathalda will find,
in the town, men on whom he can rely to take you. In this way none
here will know where you have gone. I will have the litters in
readiness at a short distance from the palace, and you can then
issue out by the garden gate, unobserved. I shall, of course,
myself escort you."

"What shall we take with us, Cuitcatl?"

"I will get, in addition to those who carry the litters, five or
six porters. These I will bring up through the gardens to the
private door, and Roger and I will carry down to them such parcels
of your clothes as you may make up. I should then make up two large
caskets with your own jewels, those of Cacama, and some of the most
valuable stones and jewels from the royal treasury--leaving all the
royal ornaments worn on state occasions, so that the usurper will
not know that any have been abstracted."

"I would rather take nothing but my own and Cacama's personal
jewels," the queen said.

"The contents of the whole treasury are his, by rights; and you
must remember, Madam, that jewels may be very useful to you. You
will have to work for Cacama, and unhappily there are many who are
not insensible to bribes; and the possession of valuable jewels may
enable you to be of great assistance to the king."

"I did not think of that," the queen said. "Yes, you are right.
There is a hoard stowed away by the late king, and by his father
before him. Its existence is only known to my husband and myself. I
have never seen it, but Cacama tells me that it is of immense
value; and was to be used only in case of an extreme emergency, and
danger to the state. We can take what we choose from this separate
hoard, and Cuicuitzca will find, from the list in the hands of the
chief of the treasury, that the royal store is untouched."

"That will be vastly better, indeed," Cuitcatl said. "It is well
that he should have no possible cause of complaint against you.
Where is this hidden receptacle?"

"Before I show it you, I will send all our attendants to bed, save
the two we will take with us--my own maid, and Amenche's."

"I will be going. Roger Hawkshaw will help you," Cuitcatl said. "It
will take some time for Bathalda to get the litters and the men.

"It is now ten o'clock. In three hours the litters shall be outside
the little gate of the garden, and I will bring six porters to the
private door at the foot of the stairs."

"That will be enough," the queen said. "Two will be ample for our
garments, and you and Roger Hawkshaw can take the jewels; which,
when we start, can go in the litters with us."

Cuitcatl left. The two ladies who were to accompany the party were
then called in, and informed of what had taken place, and that they
had been chosen to accompany the queen and princess in their
flight.

"Tell all the others," the queen said, "that we are overcome with
the news we have received, and will dispense with all further
attendance, except your own, for the night. When all is quiet, make
up your jewels and such clothes as you may wish to bring in
bundles. Then go to the wardrobe room and make up two bundles, each
as much as a man can carry, of my garments; and two of the same
size, of those of the princess. Take all our jewels out of the
caskets, and put them in with our clothes."

When the two waiting ladies had retired, the queen said to Roger:

"Now come with me, and we will open the treasure closet."

The palace was by this time hushed and quiet, the greater part of
the courtiers had long since left, having hurried away to their
homes when the news came of Cacama's arrest; and the remainder had
gone to friends in the town or neighborhood, as it was thought
probable that the Spaniards might, at once, send a force to take
possession of the palace, and arrest all found there.

Taking some keys from a strong coffer in Cacama's room, and bidding
Roger take a torch from the wall, the queen led the way to the
royal treasury. A massive door was first unlocked, and in a large
room were seen ranged vessels of gold and silver; strong boxes
containing gold necklaces, armlets, and other ornaments; while on
lower shelves were bars of gold and silver, ready to be worked up.

They passed through this room into another the same size. Around it
ran deep shelves, in which were piled the treasury papers; with the
accounts of the royal revenues, and the tributes paid by the
various cities and villages and land owners of the kingdom. In one
corner stood a small cupboard of about four feet high, also filled
with papers. The queen put her hand inside, and touched a small
spring at the back.

"Now," she said to Roger; "pull at that corner of the cupboard."

He obeyed her instructions, and at a vigorous pull the cupboard,
which had appeared solidly embedded in the wall, swung round on one
of its angles. Nothing, however, was to be seen save a bare wall
behind it.

"Now, Roger Hawkshaw, take your dagger and cut away that
plaster--for it is but plaster, though it looks like stone."

Roger obeyed. The task was an easy one, for the plaster was but
half an inch thick, and came off in flakes; showing a massive
copper door, three feet six in height, and three feet in width,
behind it. No keyhole was visible.

"Press upwards against the lintel," the queen said. "That will
release the catch of the door."

Roger did so, and at the same moment pushed with his shoulder
against the door, and it swung round with ease.

"Do you enter first, with the torch, and we will follow," the queen
said.

Roger found himself in a room about twelve feet square. At the
farther end was a pile of gold bars, four feet deep and as much
high, extending right across the room. On the floor, along the
other two sides, were ranged a number of large chests.

"Open these," the queen said. "The gold is of no use to us."

The chests were full of manufactured gold ornaments, many of them
studded with jewels. Roger was astounded at the amount of wealth
thus stored away.

"Cacama told me," the queen said, "that even the treasure houses of
Montezuma are poor, in comparison to the treasure his grandfather
and father stowed away here; and I can well believe it. You have
not opened that small chest, yet."

This was opened, and was found to contain a number of bags which
were full of pearls, turquoise, and other precious stones, of large
size and immense value.

"We will take this chest away, as it stands," the queen said.

"It would be awkward to carry," Roger objected. "It is very heavy,
and its shape would tell at once that it contained valuables. The
contents do not weigh many pounds, and could easily be wrapped up
in a cloth and put into one of the litters, without exciting
observation. If you will allow me, I will go back to one of the
sleeping rooms and fetch two or three thick rugs."

He hurried away, and in a few minutes returned. The bags were
transferred from the chest to one of the rugs he had brought, which
was then wrapped round and tied into a bundle. On two other rugs
were placed heaps of necklaces and other ornaments from the larger
chests, until each contained, as nearly as Roger could guess by
lifting them, some sixty pounds' weight of gold ornaments. These
were similarly tied up, and the three bundles were then carried out
from the hidden room, and conveyed to the apartment they had before
left.

Roger then went back to the treasury, closed the copper door, swept
up and placed in a rug every particle of plaster, and then swung
the cabinet back into its position, where it fastened with a loud
click. So firmly was it fixed that, although Roger tried with his
whole strength, it did not shake in the slightest; and the work was
so admirably done that, from the closest inspection, he was unable
to discern aught that would have shown that the cabinet was not
built into the wall. He then returned to where the ladies were
waiting him.

The queen urged him to take two or three of the bags of jewels, but
this he absolutely refused to do.

"I am acting as Cacama's friend," he said; "and as the promised
husband of his sister; and I should feel myself degraded, indeed,
were I to receive even one of those jewels."

"But there is no saying when we shall meet again," the queen said.
"There is no knowing what terrible events may occur."

"Whatever occurs, lady, I shall see you again, if I live," Roger
said. "If not, of what use are the jewels to me?"

At the appointed hour, Cuitcatl returned.

"All is in readiness," he said.

The two attendants were summoned from the apartments where they had
been waiting. Roger and his friend first carried down the bundles
of clothing, and then took up the rugs containing the heavy gold
ornaments; Roger taking, in addition, the small parcel with the
jewels. The attendants then took up their own bundles, and the
whole party proceeded downstairs, and out into the garden.

Cuitcatl led the way with the queen. Roger followed with Amenche,
the two ladies with the porters came behind.

"How strange," Roger said. "Last time I came at night through this
garden I was a fugitive, and you came down to bid me farewell. Now
it is you who have to fly!"

"When shall we meet again?" the girl sobbed.

"I cannot tell you, dear; but if I live, we will meet again. Things
may right themselves, yet; and at least, whatever happens to this
unfortunate country, we may be happy together. I have a good friend
in Malinche, and if the Spaniards conquer, Cortez will certainly
give me leave to marry you. It is his policy to marry his soldiers
to the daughters of Mexicans. If Cortez fails, and the Spaniards
are finally driven out, Cacama will recover his own again, and can
then proclaim that I am not of Spanish birth, and can give you to
me. So you see that, whatever comes, there is hope that things will
go happily with us."

"I am afraid, Roger. I fear there is to be no happiness in this
unfortunate country."

"Then we must leave it together," Roger said cheerfully. "You are
naturally depressed now, and see things in their darkest light; but
you will grow more hopeful again, when you are once established in
Cuitcatl's home. Arrange with him for Bathalda to act as messenger
between us. He is faithful and brave, and will manage to reach me,
whatever comes of it."

A few minutes later they were beyond the gardens. The four litters
stood ready. The queen and princess and the two ladies took their
seats in them, and the three bundles of valuables were also placed
inside.

"I shall love you--I shall love you until death," Amenche sobbed
out, and then the procession moved away, leaving Roger standing by
himself.

Skirting the outside wall of the garden, he made his way to the
shore of the lake. He found the boatmen asleep in their canoe. As
soon as he aroused them, they seized their paddles and, on his
taking his seat, pushed off.

"There is no occasion for speed," he said. "It is but two o'clock
now, and it is of no use our reaching Mexico until daybreak; for
the gates of the palace will be closed, and there will be no
getting in, dressed as I am, until sunrise."

They therefore paddled quietly across the lake, often resting for a
considerable time, and so arranging that they approached the city
at the same time as a number of market boats, from the villages on
the lake.

"Well," Malinche asked with a smile, as he met her in one of the
courts, as he entered, "and where is your lady love?"

"I have not brought her here," he said, rather indignantly. "You
did not suppose that I was going to bring her back to a barrack
room? I am not an officer, to have a suite of apartments to myself.
Besides, if I could have had the whole palace to myself, I should
not have asked her to forsake her sister-in-law, in her distress.
The two have fled together, and when the usurper arrives there
today, he will find that no one knows where they have gone.

"However, I hope he will not trouble himself about them. After
having taken Cacama's place, he could hardly wish to have Cacama's
wife there; and I think he will be very glad when he hears that she
has left.

"Can I see Cacama? I should like to tell him that his wife is in
safety."

"I will take you with me," Malinche said. "I saw him yesterday,
when he was brought before Montezuma. He is a gallant prince, and I
grieve that misfortune has befallen him."

Malinche led the way to the prison room where Cacama was confined.
The sentries at the door passed her and her companion without
hesitation, for they knew that her influence was supreme with
Cortez, and that orders did not apply to her.

"I will come again for you, in half an hour," she said, as the
sentry unbolted the door.

Cacama was lying on a couch, covered with rough mats. He sat up as
the door opened; and leaped to his feet, with an exclamation of
satisfaction, when he saw who his visitor was.

"I have been longing to see you, Roger," he said. "I knew that you
would come to me, as soon as you could. Have you heard that
Montezuma has deposed me, and appointed Cuicuitzca Lord of
Tezcuco?"

"I heard it yesterday afternoon, Cacama; and crossed at nightfall
to Tezcuco, with the news."

"You saw my wife?" Cacama asked eagerly. "How is she? How does she
bear the blow?"

"She was lost in grief when I first arrived there, but the
necessity for action aroused her. She and Amenche agreed that they
would not await the coming of the usurper today. They left the
palace secretly, under the charge of Cuitcatl, who had litters in
readiness for them; and started for his house, which he placed at
their disposal. None save two attendants, whom they took with them,
knew that they had left; and should the usurper seek for
them--which, Cuitcatl agreed with me, is not likely to be the case,
as he will have enough to occupy his time and thoughts--it will be
long before he can find whither they have gone.

"I must tell you, Prince, that the queen last night opened the
secret treasury, and took with her a considerable amount of the
gold ornaments and the precious stones; so that she should have the
means, if opportunity occur, of offering bribes either to the
nobles of Tezcuco, or to your guards here."

"I would I were free but for an hour," Cacama said passionately. "I
would make an example of the treacherous nobles who betrayed us.
The queen has done well, in going to the secret chamber. It was to
be kept for an emergency, and never was there a greater emergency
for Tezcuco than now. Still, there were a large number of jewels in
the public treasury, which she might have taken without breaking in
upon the hoard."

"She thought that Cuicuitzca would, on his arrival, inquire from
the chief of the treasury if everything was untouched. If he had
found that a large number of valuables had been taken, he would
connect it with the flight, and would at once send in all
directions to overtake them; whereas, if he found that everything
were untouched, he would think no more of her."

"Quite right," Cacama agreed. "Yes, it was certainly better to open
the secret chamber. It was closed up again, I hope; for I would not
that all the treasure which my father and grandfather stored away
should be wasted by Cuicuitzca, or fall into the hands of his
greedy friends, the Spaniards."

Roger informed him of the steps that had been taken; and that, with
the exception of the fact that the plaster had been removed, all
was exactly as before; and that the entrance could never be
discovered, unless the cupboard was torn from its place.

"There is little fear of that being done. All the shelves and
fittings of the treasury are of the plainest wood, and offer no
inducement to anyone to take the trouble to break them down. The
treasury might be sacked a dozen times, without its occurring to
anyone to break down that small cupboard in the corner."

Roger now told Cacama of the arrangement that had been made, that
Bathalda should act as messenger between himself and Amenche; and
said he doubted not that, on the following day, the man would
present himself.

"Have you any message to send to the queen?" he asked.

"Tell her that I am well, and that I am delighted to hear she has
left the palace before Cuicuitzca arrives. Bid her on no account to
try to stir up the false nobles in my favor. They would only betray
her to Montezuma. And so long as the Spaniards are masters here, it
is useless to think of revolt elsewhere.

"I do not believe that this will last long. The Mexicans are
patient and submissive, but there is a limit, and Montezuma has
almost reached it. The time cannot be far off when the people will
no longer endure the present state of things, here; and when they
rise, they will overwhelm these Spanish tyrants, and then I shall
be freed. I can wait for a few weeks, and I shall doubtless have
companions here, ere long."

The door now opened, and Malinche, looking in, told Roger that he
must leave, as she was required by Cortez. Saying goodbye to
Cacama, therefore, he returned to his quarters.



Chapter 17: The Insurrection.


Cacama's prognostication was speedily verified; for in the course
of the next two or three days, all the nobles who had joined him in
preparations for a rising were, by Montezuma's orders, arrested and
sent in, in chains, and were placed with him in prison.

Bathalda came on the day after Roger's return, with the news that
the two ladies had reached Cuitcatl's house in safety and, as they
believed, without exciting observation. The queen was anxious to
know if he had seen Cacama, and whether her husband had any
instructions for her. Amenche simply sent him some flowers,
gathered by her own hand.

Roger gave Bathalda Cacama's message to the queen. While out in the
market, he purchased a large packet of choice and delicate
sweetmeats, of which he knew Amenche was particularly fond, and
gave them to Bathalda; with the message that he would someday teach
her to read and write, and then, when they were away from each
other, they could talk at a distance.

For some little time things went on quietly, but the Spanish greed
and bigotry gradually worked the Mexicans up to a point of fury. At
the suggestion of Cortez, Montezuma sent collectors to all the
principal cities and provinces, accompanied by Spaniards, and these
brought back immense quantities of gold and silver plate and other
valuables; and to these Montezuma added an enormous treasure that
had been accumulated and hidden by his father, amounting to a sum
which astounded even the Spaniards. The value of the gold alone was
equal to nearly a million and a half pounds sterling, in the
present day, besides a vast amount of gold ornaments and jewelry,
and feather work of excellent manufacture. A fifth of this was set
aside for the King of Spain, the rest divided among the officers
and soldiers.

Even the extortion of this vast sum from the people might have been
passed over in quiet, had the Spaniards been content to abstain
from interference with their religion; but during the weeks that
had elapsed since Montezuma had been a prisoner in their hands,
they had vainly endeavored to convert the emperor, and the nobles
and attendants on him, to Christianity.

They had listened attentively to the preaching and exhortations of
Father Olmedo; but their faith in their own gods was unshaken, the
bloody sacrifices were carried on as usual in the temples, and
these horrible spectacles naturally excited the wrath and
indignation of the Spaniards to the utmost; although they
themselves had, in Cuba and the islands, put to death great numbers
of the natives in pursuance of their own religious views.

Cortez with many of his leaders went to the emperor, and told him
that they would no longer consent to have the services of their
religion conducted in the palace, but wished to celebrate them
publicly; and therefore requested that the great temple should be
handed over to them, for their services. Montezuma was much
agitated. He was a devout believer in his gods; and his conduct
towards the Spaniards had been, in no slight degree, influenced by
the belief that their coming had been foretold by Quetzalcoatl, and
that they were the descendants of that god. However, after a
conference with the priests, he consented that they should occupy
one of the sanctuaries on the summit of the temple.

Great joy was caused among the Spaniards at this permission. They
at once took possession of the sanctuary, and thoroughly cleansed
it. They then decorated its walls with flowers, and raised an
altar, surmounted by a crucifix and an image of the Virgin. When
all was ready, the whole army moved up the winding ascent to the
summit, and a solemn mass was celebrated.

The result of this occupation of the temple of their god was soon
visible in the conduct of the Mexicans. Montezuma himself became
grave and distant towards the Spaniards; and a few days later sent
for Cortez, and informed them that they were in great danger, and
that they had best leave the country, at once. Cortez replied that
he should regret to leave the capital so suddenly, when he had no
ship to take him from the country; but that if he should be driven
to take such a step, he should feel compelled to carry the emperor
along with him.

Montezuma then agreed to send, at once, a number of workmen to the
coast, to build vessels under the instructions of the Spaniards;
and promised to use his authority to restrain his people, assuring
them that the Spaniards would leave, as soon as means were
provided. A large number of artisans were accordingly sent off at
once, with some of the Spaniards most skilled in ship building; and
on their arrival at the coast they began to fell trees, and to make
all preparations for building the vessels.

In the meantime, at Mexico, every precaution was taken by the
Spaniards. Since Montezuma had been in their hands, they had felt
in perfect security, had wandered about the city and neighboring
country as they chose, fished upon the lake, and hunted in the
royal preserves. Now the utmost vigilance was observed, strong
guards were mounted, the soldiers slept in their armor with their
arms beside them, and were no longer permitted to leave the palace.

At this moment news arrived that filled the mind even of Cortez
with consternation. The expedition that he felt sure Velasquez, the
Governor of Cuba, would dispatch against him, had arrived on the
coast, and had landed. It consisted of eighteen vessels, carrying
nine hundred men, of whom eighty were cavalry. So large a fleet had
never before been collected in the Indies. It was commanded by a
Castilian noble, named Panfilo de Narvaez.

Until they arrived at the coast, they had learned very little of
what was happening in Mexico, as the vessels which Cortez had
dispatched had avoided touching at the islands. They now learned,
from the Spaniards left on the coast, all that had taken place; and
Narvaez found, with indignation, that Cortez was the conqueror of a
great empire, and that the honor and wealth had been reaped by a
man whom he considered as an insolent adventurer, instead of by
Velasquez. He therefore at once proclaimed his intention to march
against Cortez, and to punish him for his rebellion; and the
natives who had flocked to his camp soon comprehended that the new
army had arrived as enemies, and not as friends, of the white men
who had preceded them.

A small body of the troops of Cortez, commanded by Sandoval, were
in garrison at Villa Rica; and he at once dispatched a messenger
with the news to Cortez, and prepared for a vigorous defense. A
priest, a noble, and four Spaniards who arrived from Narvaez,
ordering him to surrender, were bound, placed on the backs of
Indian porters, and sent off to Mexico under a strong guard.

When the news of the arrival of the force of Narvaez reached
Mexico, the soldiers were delighted, believing that means were now
at their disposal for their return home; but when they heard, from
their officers, that the newcomers were sent by the Governor of
Cuba, and had assuredly arrived as enemies, the troops declared
that, come what might, they would remain true to their leader.

On the arrival of the prisoners, Cortez received them with the
greatest courtesy, apologized for the rough conduct of Sandoval
and, loading them with presents, converted them into allies. He
learned from the priest that the soldiers of Narvaez had no
hostility towards them, and that the arrogance of their leader
caused much discontent among them.

When he was sure of the good offices of the priest, Cortez sent him
back with a friendly letter to Narvaez, whom he adjured to lay
aside his hostile designs which, if persisted in, might cause the
loss of all the conquests he had made. He was ready, he said, to
greet him as a brother, and to share with him the fruits of his
successes. The priest fulfilled his mission, and added his own
advice that the offers of Cortez should be accepted.

Narvaez rejected the counsel with scorn, but the accounts of the
priest of the splendor of the country, the rich spoils won by the
soldiers, and also of the generosity and popularity of Cortez,
exercised a great influence over the soldiers.

The priest was followed by Father Olmedo, with some more letters.
These were similarly rejected by Narvaez; but Olmedo, during his
stay at the camp, contrived largely to add to the feeling in favor
of Cortez, by his eloquence and the numerous presents he
distributed among the officers and soldiers.

Cortez had, some time before, dispatched Don Velasquez de Leon, one
of his trusted officers, with a hundred and fifty men, to plant a
colony near the mouth of one of the great rivers. He was a kinsman
of the Governor of Cuba, and Narvaez had, on landing, sent to him
begging him to quit the service of Cortez, and march with his
troops to join him. Velasquez, instead of doing so, set out at once
for Mexico; but on his way was met by a messenger from Cortez, who
ordered him to stop at Cholula for further orders.

Cortez summoned a force of two thousand natives from the distant
province of Chinantla and, leaving Pedro d'Alvarado in command of a
hundred and fifty Spaniards in Mexico, marched with the remainder
of his force, consisting of some seventy men only, for Cholula.
Here he was joined by Velasquez, with his hundred and fifty men.
Thus reinforced, they marched to Tlascala, where six hundred native
troops joined him.

But his allies soon fell off. They had had too severe an experience
of the fighting powers of the white men to care about taking part
in a battle with them, and so many deserted on the way that Cortez
dismissed the rest, saying that he would rather part with them,
then, than in the hour of trial. On reaching Perote they were
joined by Sandoval with fifty Spaniards, which brought their number
up to two hundred and sixty-six, only five of whom were mounted.

On their march towards Cempoalla, where Narvaez had now established
his headquarters, they were met by an embassy from him, requiring
the acknowledgment by Cortez of his authority, offering at the same
time that all who wished to leave should be transported in his
vessels. By liberal presents Cortez won over the members of the
embassy, who returned to Cempoalla to inform the soldiers there of
the liberality of Cortez, and of the wonderful array of gold
ornaments and chains worn by his soldiers.

Narvaez advanced to meet Cortez but, the weather proving bad, again
fell back on Cempoalla. Cortez, on the other hand, took advantage
of the weather, and in the night fell upon the garrison, and took
them completely by surprise.

Sandoval, with a small band, had been told off to attack the temple
occupied by Narvaez, and to take him prisoner. The general, with
the troops in the temple, defended himself bravely, until seriously
wounded by one of the long spears with which Cortez had armed his
men. The thatched roof of the temple was set on fire, the defenders
were driven out by the smoke, and Narvaez was seized and made
prisoner.

Another division, under Olid, fell upon the guns, captured them,
and turned them upon the temples in which the troops were
quartered; when the soldiers, whose loyalty to their commander had
already been sapped, accepted the offer of Cortez of an amnesty for
the past, and a full participation in the advantages of the
conquest of the country. Having sworn allegiance to Cortez as
captain general, they were incorporated in his little army.

In the morning, when they saw how small had been the body of men
who had defeated them, many regretted the course they had taken,
but in the course of the day the two thousand native allies from
Chinantla arrived, and their military appearance, and the proof
afforded by their presence of the influence of Cortez with the
inhabitants of the country, put a stop to the murmuring; especially
as Cortez ordered all the spoils taken from them to be returned,
and distributed among them considerable sums of money--exciting,
indeed, murmurs of discontent among his own veterans, who
considered that they had been deprived of the spoil they had
rightfully won.

The eloquence of their general, however, as usual, was successful
in pacifying them; but to prevent further difficulties, he broke up
his force, and sent off two hundred men under Diego de Ordaz, and a
similar number under Velasquez de Leon, to form settlements on the
coasts and rivers; and two hundred men to Vera Cruz, to dismantle
the fleet of Narvaez.

Scarcely had these parties left when a messenger arrived with
letters from Alvarado, saying that the Mexicans had risen and
assaulted the Spaniards in their quarters, and had partly
undermined the walls; and that, in the fighting, several of the
garrison had been killed, and a great number wounded.

Cortez at once dispatched messengers after Velasquez and Ordaz, and
ordered them to march to join him at Tlascala; recalled a hundred
men from Vera Cruz, and then set forward. The troops suffered much
in their march across the low country to the foot of the hills,
beneath a sun of terrible power. However, they reached Tlascala,
and were there joined by Ordaz and Velasquez. They were most
hospitably entertained by their allies, and a number of levies
joined them; and with these and eleven hundred Spaniards, of whom a
hundred were cavalry, they marched towards Mexico.

They took a more northern route than before and, crossing the
mountains, held their way on to Tezcuco. Upon their route through
the plains the peasantry held aloof, and the greater portion of the
population of Tezcuco withdrew before their arrival; and even its
new lord, although appointed at the instigation of Cortez, was
absent from the city. Dispatches arrived from Alvarado saying that
the Mexicans had, for the last fortnight, ceased their attacks; but
were blockading him in the palace.

Cortez marched down the lake shore on the following day, and
crossed the causeway to the city. Not a native was to be seen near
the line of march, not a boat was visible on the lake, and an air
of gloom and solitude hung over everything; showing but too plainly
the altered feelings with which the natives regarded the whites.
The streets were similarly deserted. When the head of the column
reached the palace, the gates were thrown open and the garrison
rushed out to greet the newcomers, with joyful shouts.

Cortez now learned the reason of the rising of the Mexicans. It was
the result of a hideous act of treachery, on the part of Alvarado.
In the month of May was the great festival of the war god, which
was held in his great temple; and the caziques asked permission of
Alvarado to use, for the day, that portion which had been handed
over to the Spaniards. He agreed to the request, on the condition
that the Aztecs should celebrate no human sacrifices, and should
come unarmed.

At least six hundred nobles attended, in their most gorgeous robes,
and Alvarado and his soldiers were present as spectators. While the
Aztecs were employed in a religious dance, Alvarado gave the
signal, his men rushed upon them with their arms, and every one of
them was massacred unresistingly, not a single soul escaping.

Various motives were assigned for this most foul massacre. Some
writers have ascribed it solely to the desire for plunder; others
to the desire of Alvarado to strike a blow that would intimidate
the Mexicans from making any insurrectionary movement. Alvarado
himself declared that he had information that the Mexicans intended
to rise, but he gave no proofs, whatever, to justify his
suspicions. The affair, indeed, seems to have been utterly
indefensible, and must ever remain a foul blot upon Spanish honor.

Cortez was extremely angry at hearing what had taken place and,
after listening to Alvarado's explanation, said:

"You have done badly. You have been false to your trust! Your
conduct has been that of a madman!"

It was, however, no time for quarrels; and as it was the impolicy
of the deed, rather than its treachery, that angered Cortez, he
speedily forgave the offender, who was one of the most popular
officers in his army.

The blow Alvarado had struck had a contrary effect to that which he
had expected of it. No sooner had the news of the massacre spread
through the city than the whole population rose, and at dawn next
morning they attacked the palace, with desperate fury. Volumes of
missiles were poured upon the defenders. The walls were assaulted,
and the works set on fire, and the palace might have been taken had
not Montezuma, yielding to the entreaties--and perhaps threats--of
the garrison, mounted the walls, and urged the people to desist
from the attack, as his own safety would be imperiled did they
continue it.

They obeyed him as usual, and withdrew from the assault; but threw
up works round the place, and proceeded to starve the Spaniards
out. The latter had considerable stores of food, but suffered
severely from thirst until they were fortunate enough to discover a
spring, and were thus enabled to hold out until the arrival of
Cortez.

The latter refused to comply with the request of Montezuma to see
him. He had some reason to doubt the good faith of the emperor, for
he had discovered that the latter had sent envoys to Narvaez; and
he had, upon his arrival at Tlascala, been informed that the rising
at Mexico had been, to a great extent, prepared beforehand by the
orders of Montezuma; and even the assurances of the officers of the
garrison, that they owed their safety to the emperor's intervention,
did not pacify him.

The real reason, no doubt, of his anger was that he found he had
overrated the advantages he would gain from Montezuma being in his
hands; but for this he himself, and not the emperor, was to blame.
At first the capture had all the success that he had expected from
it. The people had obeyed their emperor as implicitly, when a
captive, as when his power had been supreme. They had sent in their
nobles, prisoners and bound, at his orders. They had built ships
for these strangers. They had suffered them to go unmolested
through the country.

But there was an end even to Aztec patience. The avarice of the
white men had drained the country of its wealth. Their arrogance
had humiliated their pride. Their occupation of their holiest
temple and the insults to their gods had aroused them to fury; and
the massacre, in cold blood, of six hundred of their nobles, while
engaged in religious devotions, had been the signal for an
explosion. Their emperor, formerly so venerated, they now regarded
with contempt as the creature of the Spaniards; as the betrayer of
his country; and the thought of his safety no longer restrained
their thirst for vengeance.

Cortez, however, was in no mood to reflect.

"What have I to do with this dog of a king," he exclaimed, "who
suffers us to starve before his eyes?

"Go, tell your master and his people," he said fiercely to the
Mexicans, "to open the markets, or we will do it for them, at their
cost!"

The chiefs, who were the bearers of Montezuma's message, left his
presence in deep resentment; and reported to the emperor, and to
the people outside, the manner in which Montezuma's request for an
interview had been refused. Cortez, however, thought it politic to
release Cuitlahua, Montezuma's brother, who had been among those
imprisoned for taking share in Cacama's league; and allowed him to
go into the city, thinking that he would allay the tumult.

But Cuitlahua was a man of different spirit from his brother. He
was heir presumptive to the throne, and a bold and daring prince.
The people welcomed him, at once, as Montezuma's representative;
and chose him to represent the emperor during his confinement.
Cuitlahua accepted the post, and immediately set to work to
organize the fighting men, and to arrange a plan of attack.

Roger had not been with the party that accompanied Cortez on his
expedition against Narvaez; but, with his two companions, remained
to form part of the garrison of the palace.

"You are out of spirits, young fellow," Juan said, on the day after
Cortez had marched away. "You are changed, very much, since you
first joined us."

"I have much to make me so, Juan," Roger replied, in his broken
Spanish. "You see, I am white by blood, but I have dear friends
among the natives. What do I see? As a white, I perceive that our
position here is one of the gravest danger, and that destruction
may fall upon us all. As a friend of the natives, I see the country
plundered, the people trodden down and, sooner or later, the ruin
and misery of the whole people."

"You mean we are in danger from Narvaez' people," Juan said. "I
have faith in Cortez. He will either fight them or bring them over.
He is a wonderful man, and will find some way out of the
difficulty."

"I do not mean that, entirely," Roger replied. "I mean that there
is danger from the natives."

"Pooh!" the old soldier said, disdainfully. "The natives are no
better than so many women."

"But even women may be serious opponents, when they are fifty to
one, Juan; and you mistake these Mexicans. They have been friendly
and submissive, because it has been the order of the emperor; but
although physically not strong, they are brave. The Aztec army has
spread the dominion of Mexico over a wide extent of country. They
have conquered many peoples, and are by no means to be despised. It
is true you beat the Tlascalans, but that was not because you were
braver than they were, but because of your superior arms and armor,
and above all by the terror inspired by your horses--but this will
not last. The Mexicans now know that you are but men, like
themselves; and when they fight, inspired both by national spirit
and the memory of their wrongs, I tell you that you will have hard
work to hold your own."

"Ah well," Juan grumbled. "If it must come, it must. It will not
disturb my appetite."

When Roger learned that orders had been given for the massacre at
the temple, he determined firmly that he would take no part in the
deed, whatever it might cost him to refuse. Fortunately, he found
no difficulty in persuading one of the soldiers, told off to act as
a guard at the palace during the absence of the rest, to change
places with him, as the man wanted to have his share in the
expected plunder. Had Cacama been at liberty, Roger would not have
hesitated a moment, but would have left the Spaniards and thrown in
his lot with the Mexicans; but now it was impossible to do so. The
frenzied population would have seized any white man they came upon,
outside the walls of the palace, and would have carried him to the
altars of their gods. It would be hopeless to endeavor to explain
that he was of another race. All white men would be alike, in their
eyes.

He bitterly regretted, now, that he had returned from Tezcuco. Had
he, at that time, gone with the queen and princess to the house of
his friend Cuitcatl, he could have remained there in quiet; and the
natives would have seen that he, at least, had no part or share in
this horrible massacre. Now it seemed to him that there was nothing
to be done, save to share the lot of the Spaniards, whatever that
might be.

He believed that the Mexicans would storm the palace, and slaughter
all within it, long before the return of Cortez; and he by no means
shared the confident anticipation of the soldiers, that the
general, on his arrival, would very speedily put down any
insurrection that might occur; and would, with the assistance of
the soldiers of Narvaez, soon bring all Mexico into subjection.

It had happened that both Juan and Pedro had also been on guard,
during the massacre. This was a great satisfaction to him, for he
felt he could no longer have remained in intimate communion with
them, had their hands been drenched with innocent blood. When, upon
their being relieved at their posts, they joined each other in the
chamber they shared in common, the old soldier held up his hand and
said gruffly:

"Do you hold your tongue, Sancho. I know what you are thinking,
lad, as well as if you said it; and maybe I do not disagree with
you; but least said, soonest mended. These rooms without doors are
not places for a man to relieve his mind by strong language, if he
happens to differ from his superiors. It is a bad business, and a
shameful one. At Cholula there was some excuse for it. Here there
is none. I am an old soldier, and have taken many a life in my
time, but never in cold blood like this. Say nothing, lad, at any
rate until you get a chance of being outside this city; or on the
lake, where none can get near you--then pour it out, as much as you
like."

"It is like enough," Roger said, "that none of us will ever go out
of the city alive; and it will serve us thoroughly right. If this
is to be a Spaniard and a Catholic, let me be a Mexican and a
heathen."

"There, there, that is enough," Juan interrupted. "Now let us have
our supper."

"I can eat nothing," Roger said, throwing himself down on the
couch, where he remained in silence until a sudden outburst of wild
shouts and cries, followed instantly by the trumpet, calling every
man to his allotted place on the walls, aroused him.

"The work of vengeance has begun," he said gravely, as he put on
his thick padded jerkin and helmet, and took up his pike. "I only
hope I may see Alvarado, the author of this massacre, killed before
I am."

Juan shook his head as Roger left the room, and he followed with
Pedro.

"In faith, I do not blame him. He has been brought up among these
people."

"He is quite right," the young soldier said. "It is a shameful
business. Had I known that we were coming here to be butchers, I
would never have taken service under Cortez. What should we have
said if, on our first arrival here, when Montezuma entertained
Cortez and all the cavaliers, his people had slain them at the
feast?"

"Hold your tongue, you young fool!" Juan muttered angrily. "The
thing is done, and you cannot undo it. What we have to do now is to
fight for our lives. Even if these poor devils have right on their
side, it is not a matter to stop and discuss, now. So keep your
breath for fighting. I doubt not that we shall soon scatter them
like chaff."

But this was by no means the case, and it was only the intervention
of Montezuma that saved the garrison from destruction.

The time until the arrival of Cortez had passed slowly. The
soldiers, weakened by hunger and thirst, muttered angrily against
the officer who had so rashly brought them into this strait. Few of
them regretted the deed for its own sake, but simply because it had
brought on them peril and misfortune.

Roger had borne his share of the fighting on the walls. He was
defending his life, and although at first he had fought with little
ardor, the pain given by two arrows which pierced his cotton armor
heated his blood; and he afterwards fought as stoutly as the rest.

During the period of inaction he had, more than once, tried to
obtain an interview with Cacama; but the prisoners were jealously
watched, and no one was allowed access to them on any pretext, and
two officers always accompanied the men who took in their daily
rations. They were regarded as hostages, only less important than
Montezuma himself; and as most of them were very rich and powerful
caziques, they might offer bribes which might well shake the
fidelity of any private soldier.

When the news arrived that Cortez, with the whole of the army of
Narvaez, was at hand, the depression that had reigned gave way to
exultation; and the soldiers believed that they would now take the
offensive, and without loss of time put an end to the insurrection.

Marina had accompanied Cortez on his expedition, for she was still
necessary to him as an interpreter, and her influence with the
natives was great. Roger obtained an interview with her, a few
hours after her return. She had evidently been crying passionately.

"My heart is broken, Roger," she said. "I had hoped that the white
men would have done great things for my country. They know so much,
and although I thought there might be trouble at first, for great
changes can never be introduced without trouble, I never dreamed of
anything like this. Cholula was bad enough, but there the people
brought it on themselves; and the Spaniards would have been slain,
had they not first begun to kill. But here it is altogether
different. It was an unprovoked massacre, and after this, who can
hope that the whites and Mexicans can ever be friendly together?

"I love Cortez. He is great and generous, and had he been here this
would have never happened; but many of his people are cruel, and
they are all greedy of wealth; and he, general though he is, has to
give way to them.

"I remember that, in the old days at Tabasco, you told me how
cruelly the Spaniards had treated the people of the islands; but
when I saw them first, I thought that you, being of a different
nation, had spoken too hardly of them. I see, now, that you were
right. I have, all along, done what I could for my people; and
though I am with the invaders, I am sure they recognize this, and
that they feel no ill will against me. But now I fear that they
will curse me, as they will curse them; and that, through all time,
my name will be abhorred in Mexico," and she again burst into
tears.

"I do not think so, Malinche. At Tezcuco it was always said that
you stood between the natives and the whites, and it was owing to
you that they were not more harsh than they were.

"As to this massacre, God forbid that I should say a single word in
defense of it! As a white man and a Christian, I feel it is an act
of horrible atrocity; but it should not make such an impression
upon your people, who make wars solely to obtain victims, whom they
may sacrifice at the altars of their gods; and who, every year,
slay in cold blood fully twenty-five thousand people who have done
them no wrong. By the side of such horrible slaughter as this, the
murder of six hundred, the other day, was but a drop in the ocean
of blood annually shed here."

"Had it been in battle, it would have been nothing," Malinche said.
"Had they offered them up at the altars of the gods, the people
would have understood it, for they do it themselves; but this was a
foul act of treachery. Who, after this, can believe in the promises
of the whites?

"I know the people. You whites despise them, because they have
hitherto allowed themselves to be subdued without resistance; but
now that their first awe of the Spaniards has died away, and they
have nerved themselves to take up arms, you will find that they are
brave. I see nothing but trouble before us. Cortez feels confident
that he can easily repulse any attack, and subdue the city and the
country round; but I do not think so."

"Nor do I, Malinche. No men could have fought more bravely than the
Mexicans, the other day. It is true that we were but in small
numbers, and that we are now many times stronger, and have Cortez
to command us; but on the other hand, the attack was but a hasty
one, and the next time we shall have the whole Mexican force upon
us."

"What will you do, Roger?"

"I must fight for the Spaniards," Roger said gloomily. "They are
not my countrymen, but they are white men as I am, and surrounded
by foes. Besides, I have no option. The Mexicans cannot distinguish
between Spaniards and Englishmen, and I should be seized and
sacrificed, were I to set foot beyond the walls. Were it not for
that I would leave the city, join Amenche, and leave the Spaniards
and Mexicans to fight out their quarrel as they might; but now,
whichever won, the result would be fatal to me. If the Mexicans
were victorious, I, like all other whites, would be sacrificed to
their gods. If the Spaniards won, I should be executed as a
traitor. Therefore, there is nothing for me to do but to remain
with the Spaniards, and share their fate, whatever it may be."

The next morning silence reigned over the city. Not a Mexican was
to be seen anywhere near the palace, within which the Spaniards
were virtually prisoners. Cortez hoped, however, that Cuitlahua
would soon persuade the people to return to their usual habits, and
to open the markets for provisions; but in any case, he felt so
confident of his power to overawe the city, that he sent off a
messenger with dispatches to the coast, saying that he had arrived
safely, and should soon overcome all opposition.

In half an hour, however, the messenger returned at a gallop,
wounded in a score of places. He reported that the city was up in
arms, the drawbridges were raised, and the Mexicans were marching
towards the palace. Scarcely had he arrived, when the sentinels on
the towers shouted that masses of men were approaching, by all the
streets leading to the palace; and immediately afterwards the
terraces and flat roofs of the houses near were darkened by throngs
of natives, shouting and brandishing their weapons.

The trumpet instantly sounded to arms, and so strict was the
discipline that prevailed that, in an incredibly short time, every
soldier was at his post. The position was capable of being defended
against a very numerous enemy, unprovided with artillery; for the
wall round the great one-storied building, though low, was strong;
and the turrets, placed at intervals upon it, enabled the defenders
to command its face, and to pour missiles upon any who might be
bold enough to endeavor to effect a breach, by undermining it with
crowbars and levers. The garrison, too, were sufficient for its
defense; for there were not only some twelve hundred Spaniards, but
the eight thousand Tlascalan allies.

The Aztecs rushed forward, with the shrill whistle used as a battle
cry by the people of Anahuac; and, as they advanced, poured a rain
of missiles of all kinds upon the palace, to which were added those
shot from the terraces and flat roofs.

The Spaniards had pierced the walls with embrasures for their
cannon, and these commanded all the avenues. The gunners waited
until the columns were close at hand, and then their terrible
discharge swept lanes through the crowded masses in the streets.
For a moment the Mexicans paused, paralyzed by the terrible
slaughter; and then, rallying, rushed forward again. Three times
the cannon were discharged into their midst; but though broken and
disordered, they still pressed on until they swept up to the very
foot of the walls, pouring in a hail of arrows.

They were well seconded by those on the housetops who, from their
elevated position, were on a level with the Spaniards; and whose
missiles, arrows, javelins, and stones thrown with great force from
slings, galled the defenders greatly, and wounded great numbers of
them.

In vain did the Aztecs strive to climb the walls. These were of no
great height but, as they showed their heads above the parapet,
they were shot down by the Spanish arquebus men, or struck
backwards by the weapons of the Tlascalans. Failing to scale the
walls, they tried to batter down the parapet with heavy pieces of
timber. But the stonework was too strong, and they then shot
burning arrows into the palace, and hurled blazing torches over the
wall.

The palace itself was of stone, but some of the exterior works
which had been constructed were of wood, and these were soon on
fire. The defenders had no water with which to extinguish the
flames and, at the point where the new works joined the wall, the
fire was so fierce that they were afraid it would spread to the
palace; and, to extinguish it, were forced to adopt the desperate
expedient of overthrowing the wall upon the burning mass. The
breach thus made was guarded by a battery of heavy guns and a party
of arquebusiers, and these repelled every attempt of the Mexicans
to take advantage of the breach which had been thus formed.

The fight continued until night fell, and the Mexicans then drew
off. Cortez and his followers were astonished at the obstinacy with
which they had fought, and the contempt of death they had
displayed. They had obtained such easy victories, with forces but a
fourth of those which Cortez now commanded, that he had formed the
lowest opinion of the fighting powers of the Aztecs. But he now
found that a nation was not to be trampled upon with impunity.

However, he consoled himself with the thought that this was but a
temporary outbreak of fury; and he determined to sally out with all
his force, on the following morning, and to inflict a terrible
chastisement upon his assailants.

As soon as the morning broke, the Spaniards were under arms. Cortez
was speedily undeceived in his hopes that the slaughter of the
previous day would have cowed the Mexicans. The great square and
the streets leading to it were seen to be crowded with foes, who
appeared better organized than on the previous day, being divided
into regiments, each with its banners. These, the Mexican
attendants on Montezuma told them, were the cognizances of the many
cities of the plain, showing that the whole people were joining in
the movement commenced by those of the capital. Towering above the
rest was the royal standard of Mexico.

Among the crowd were numerous priests who, with excited gestures,
called upon them to avenge the insulted gods, and to destroy the
handful of invaders who had brought disgrace upon the nation, had
trampled it under foot, had made their sovereign a captive, and
murdered their nobles in cold blood. It was evident that, fierce as
had been the fighting on the previous day, the renewed assault
would be even more formidable.



Chapter 18: The Rising In Mexico.


The appearance of the vast crowd that surrounded the palace
differed much from that which they had presented on the previous
day, when the Mexicans had fought in their usual garments, or in
their padded cuirasses. Today they had laid aside all their
garments save their loincloths, having found by experience that
their cotton armor was absolutely useless against the missiles of
the Spaniards. The chiefs were now conspicuous, as they moved to
and fro among the dark masses, by their gay dresses and the metal
breastplates worn over the bright feather work. They wore helmets
made to resemble the heads of ferocious wild beasts, crested with
bristly hair or surmounted by bright feather plumes. Some wore only
a red fillet round their head, having tufts of cotton hanging from
it; each tuft denoting some victory in which they had taken part,
and their own rank in the army. Noble and citizen, priest and
soldier, had all united in the common cause.

The assault was about to commence, when the Spaniards' artillery
and musketry poured death into the crowded ranks. The gates were at
once thrown open, and Cortez at the head of his cavalry dashed out,
followed by the infantry and the Tlascalan allies. Confused by the
slaughter made by the firearms, the Aztecs could offer no
resistance to the onslaught. The cavalry trampled them underfoot,
and mowed them down with sword and lance. The Spanish foot and
Tlascalans following close behind carried on the work of
destruction, and it seemed to the Spaniards that the fight was
already over, when the Aztecs fled before them.

The movement of retreat, however, ceased the moment the Mexicans
reached the barricades which they had thrown up across the streets;
and forming behind these they made a gallant stand, while those
upon the housetops poured showers of arrows, darts, and great
stones down upon the advancing Spaniards. In vain the Spanish
artillery were brought up, and their fire swept away the
barricades; there were still others behind, and at each the
desperate fight was renewed.

Coming down from the side streets, the Aztecs fell upon the Spanish
flanks; and clouds of missiles were shot from the boats, which
crowded the canals everywhere intersecting the streets.

Cortez and his cavaliers continued to make desperate charges
through the Aztecs, who, although unable to withstand the weight
and impetus of the horses, closed round them, striving to throw the
riders from their backs and to stab the horses themselves--throwing
away their lives without hesitation, on the chance of getting one
blow at the Spaniards. The moment the horsemen drew back, the
Aztecs followed them; and although their loss was immense, their
ranks were instantly filled up again, while the Spaniards could ill
spare the comparatively small number who fell on their side.

At last, after hours of carnage, the Spaniards, exhausted by their
exertions and having eaten nothing since the night before, fell
back to the palace. Diaz, one of the historians of the events, who
was present at the combat, expressed the astonishment felt by the
Spaniards at the desperation with which the despised Mexicans had
fought.

"The Mexicans," he said; "fought with such ferocity that if we had
had the assistance of ten thousand Hectors, and as many Orlandos,
we should have made no impression on them. There were several of
our troops who had served in the Italian wars; but neither there,
nor in the battles with the Turk, have they ever seen anything like
the desperation shown by these Indians."

As the Spaniards fell back the Aztecs followed them, pouring in
volleys of stones and arrows; and as soon as they had entered the
palace encamped around it, showing that their spirit was wholly
unbroken. Although--as it was contrary to their custom to fight at
night--they did not renew the attack, they shouted insulting
threats as to the Spaniards' fate, when they should fall into their
hands; and were evidently well satisfied with the events of the
day, and looked for victory on the morrow.

Cortez had received a severe wound in the hand during the fight,
and he and his companions felt how grievously they had mistaken the
character of the Aztecs. They had sallied out that morning,
confident in their power to crush out the insurrection. They
returned, feeling that their situation was well-nigh desperate, and
that henceforth they must fight, not for dominion, but for life.

As soon as day broke the fight was renewed, but this time it was
the Aztecs and not the Spaniards who began it. There was no idea of
a fresh sortie. All that the garrison could hope was to defend
their position. So furiously did the natives attack that, for a
time, they forced their way into the entrenchments; but the
Spaniards, whose turn it was to fight with the bravery of despair,
fell upon them with such fury that none of those who had gained an
entry returned.

Cortez now sent to Montezuma, to request him to interpose, as he
had done before, between them and his people. The emperor refused
to interfere. He had viewed the desperate fighting of the last two
days with bitter humiliation. He had seen his brother Cuitlahua
leading on his troops, with the greatest gallantry; while he
himself, thanks to his own conduct, was a helpless prisoner. He
mourned over the terrible losses his people were suffering; and the
fact that his kindness to the Spaniards had brought upon him
nothing but ill treatment and insult at their hands, had earned him
the contempt of his people, and had involved his country in
misfortune and ruin, cut him to the heart.

"What have I to do with Malinzin?" he said coldly. "I desire only
to die."

When still further urged, he added:

"It is useless. They will neither believe me, nor the false words
and promises of Malinzin. You will never leave these walls alive."

On being assured that the Spaniards would willingly depart, and
leave the country, if their assailants would open a way to them, he
at last consented to address the people. Clothing himself in his
richest robes of state, he ascended the central turret of the
palace; surrounded by a guard of Spaniards, and accompanied by
several Aztec nobles. When he was seen, the din of war ceased as if
by magic. A dead silence fell upon the multitude, and they knelt
and prostrated themselves before the sovereign they had so long
held in the deepest reverence.

But when he addressed them, assuring them that he was a guest, and
not a prisoner, of the Spaniards; and ordered them to lay down
their arms, and to allow the Spaniards to march to the coast,
indignation at his cowardice overpowered their feelings of
reverence and respect. They burst into taunts and execrations, and
a moment later a storm of missiles were hurled at the man who had
betrayed them.

The Spanish guards, seeing the effect his presence had produced,
had stood aside, to enable him the better to be seen; and before
they could close around him, and cover him with their shields,
three missiles struck him; one, a stone hurled from a sling,
smiting him on the head with such violence that he fell insensible.
When the Aztecs saw him fall, their brief outburst of indignation
was succeeded by one of sorrow; and with a cry of grief the whole
multitude dispersed, and in a minute or two the crowded square was
wholly deserted.

Montezuma was carried to his chamber. When he recovered
sensibility, he refused absolutely to allow his wounds to be
dressed, and tore off the bandages. Not a word passed his lips. He
sat in an attitude of the deepest dejection. His own people
despised him, and had raised their hands against him. He had drunk
deeply of the cup of humiliation, at the hands of the Spaniards;
but this last drop filled it to overflowing. There was nothing for
him but to die.

The Spanish leaders tried, but in vain, to persuade him to submit
to surgical treatment. He paid no attention to their words, and
they were soon called away by fresh danger from without.

The Aztecs had speedily recovered from their emotion at seeing the
fall of the emperor, and a body of five or six hundred of them,
including many nobles and military leaders of high rank, had taken
possession of the great temple; and now from its summit, a hundred
and fifty feet high, opened a rain of missiles upon the palace. The
Spaniards could not effectually return their fire, for the Aztecs
were sheltered by the sanctuaries on the summit of the pyramids.

It was absolutely necessary, for the safety of the defenders, to
dislodge them from this position; and Cortez ordered his
chamberlain, Don Escobar, with a hundred men, to storm the teocalli
and set fire to the sanctuaries. But the little force were three
times repulsed, and forced to fall back with considerable loss.
Cortez then, though suffering much from the wound in his left hand,
determined himself to lead the assault. As he was incapable of
holding his shield, he had it strapped to his left arm; and with
three hundred picked men, and some thousands of the Tlascalans,
sallied out from the palace, and attacked the Aztecs in the temple
at the foot of the pyramid.

The Spaniards made their way through these without much difficulty,
and then commenced the ascent of the pyramid. This offered great
facilities for defense. There were five terraces connected by
steps, so placed that those mounting the pyramid had to make the
whole circuit, on each terrace, before reaching the steps leading
to the next. It was thus necessary to pass round the pyramid four
times, or nearly two miles, exposed to the missiles of those upon
the summit.

Leaving a strong body of Spaniards and Tlascalans at the bottom, to
prevent the natives ascending and attacking him in the rear, Cortez
led the way up the staircase, followed closely by his principal
officers. In spite of the heavy stones and beams of wood which,
with a storm of arrows, were hurled down upon them, the Spaniards
won their way from terrace to terrace, supported by the fire of
their musketeers below, until at last they reached the great
platform on the summit of the pyramid.

Here a terrible conflict commenced. The Aztecs, brought to bay, and
fighting not only for life, but in the presence of their country's
gods, displayed a valor at least equal to that of the Spaniards.
Numbers were slightly in their favor, but this was far more than
counter-balanced by the superior arms of the Spaniards; and by the
armor, which rendered them almost invulnerable to the comparatively
puny weapons of the Mexicans. And yet, for three hours the fight
continued. At the end of that time, all the Mexicans, save two or
three priests, were killed; while forty-five of the Spaniards had
fallen, and almost all the others were wounded.

While this fight had been raging the combat had ceased, elsewhere;
the combatants on both sides being absorbed in the struggle taking
place at the summit of the temple. They could not, of course, judge
how it was going; though they caught sight of the combatants as
they neared the edges of the platform, which was unprotected by
wall or fence; and many in the course of the struggle fell, or were
hurled, over it.

The moment the struggle was over, the Spaniards rushed with
exulting shouts into the sanctuary of the Mexican god, reeking with
the blood of fresh-killed victims; cast the image from its
pedestal; rolled it across the platform to the head of the steps;
and then, amid shouts that were echoed by their comrades below,
sent it bounding down, while a cry of anguish and dismay rose from
the Mexicans.

The image dethroned, fire was applied to the sanctuary; and the
smoke and flames, rising up, must have told countless thousands,
watching the capital from the housetops of the neighboring cities,
that the white men had triumphed over the gods of Mexico; and that,
as at Cholula so at the capital, these had proved impotent to
protect their votaries from the dread invaders. So dismayed were
the Mexicans, at the misfortune, that they offered no resistance to
the return of the Spaniards from the temple, and retired to their
houses without further fighting.

At night the Spaniards sallied out again, relying upon the habit of
the Mexicans to abstain from fighting at night, and burnt several
hundred houses.

Believing that the spirit of the Mexicans would be broken now,
Cortez, on the following morning, mounted the turret from which
Montezuma had addressed them. Malinche was by his side; and when he
held up his hands, to show that he wished to address them, a
silence fell upon the multitude; and Malinche's voice was heard
plainly by them, as she translated the words of Cortez. He told
them they must now feel that they could not struggle against the
Spaniards. Their gods had been cast down, their dwellings burnt,
their warriors slaughtered. And all this they had brought on
themselves, by their rebellion. Yet if they would lay down their
arms, and return to the obedience of their sovereign, he would stay
his hand. If not, he would make their city a heap of ruins, and
leave not a soul alive to mourn over it.

But Cortez learned, at once, that the spirit he had roused in the
Mexicans was in no way lowered by their reverses. One of the great
chiefs answered him that it was true he had hurled down their gods,
and massacred their countrymen; but they were content to lose a
thousand lives for every one that they took.

"Our streets," he said, "are still thronged with warriors. Our
numbers are scarcely diminished. Yours are lessening every day. You
are dying with hunger and sickness. Your provisions and water are
failing. You must soon fall into our hands. The bridges are broken
down, and you cannot escape. There will be too few of you left to
satisfy the vengeance of the gods."

When he had finished, a shower of arrows showed that hostilities
had recommenced.

The garrison were now completely disheartened. Of what use the
tremendous exertions they had made, and the lives that had been
lost? They were still, as they had been on the first day of their
arrival, hemmed in in their fortress, surrounded by foes thirsting
for their blood. Great numbers were wounded, more or less severely.
Their provisions were well-nigh gone. The enemy were bolder than
ever. They had been promised wealth and honor--they were starving,
and death stared them in the face. They loudly exclaimed that they
had been deceived, and betrayed.

But the men who had served all along with Cortez stood firm. They
had still every confidence in their leader. It was not his fault
that they had been brought to this pass, but by the misconduct of
others, during his absence. At any rate, as they pointed out to
their comrades, the only chance of escape was unity and obedience.

Cortez himself was, as always in a moment of great danger, calm and
collected. The thought of having to leave the city, to abandon all
the treasures they had taken, was even more painful to him than to
the soldiers. It was not the loss of his own share of the booty,
but of that of the emperor, that he regretted; for he felt that
this, together with the downfall of all his plans, and the loss of
the kingdom he had already counted won, would bring upon him the
displeasure of his emperor, would give strength to his enemies at
court, and would probably ensure his being recalled in disgrace.

Nevertheless, he saw that retreat was necessary, for the position
could not be maintained. Every day the defenses became weaker, the
men more exhausted by fighting, and there would soon be no longer a
morsel of bread to serve out to them. A retreat must therefore be
made.

The question was, which route should be chosen? In any case, one of
the narrow dikes connecting the island city with the shore must be
traversed; and on these causeways the Spaniards would fight under
great disadvantage. Finally, he settled upon that leading to
Tlacopan, which was much the shortest, being only two miles in
length.

For some days a large party of men had been at work constructing
movable towers, similar to those used, centuries before, in sieges.
They moved on rollers, and were to be dragged by the Tlascalan
allies. From their summits the soldiers could shoot down upon the
housetops, from which they had been hitherto so annoyed. The towers
were also provided with bridges, which could be let down on to the
roofs, and so enable the soldiers to meet their opponents hand to
hand.

When the structures were completed, the Spaniards again took the
offensive. The gates were opened, and the three towers, dragged by
the Tlascalans, moved out. The Mexicans, astonished at the sight of
these machines, from whose summits a heavy fire of musketry were
kept up, fell back for a time. The towers were moved up close to
the terraces, and the soldiers, after partly clearing them by their
fire, lowered the light bridges and, crossing, engaged in a
hand-to-hand fight with the Mexicans, and drove them from their
positions.

But from the lofty houses of the nobles, the Mexicans still
maintained their resistance. The towers were not high enough to
overlook these and, as they came up, beams of wood and huge stones
were cast down upon them; striking with such force that it soon
became evident, to those within them, that the towers would not
hold together.

They were dragged on, however, until a canal crossed the road. The
bridge had been removed, and both the cavalry and the towers were
brought to a standstill. The latter were abandoned, and Cortez
ordered his troops to make a road forward, by filling up the canal
with stones and wood from the houses near.

While engaged in this operation, they were exposed to an incessant
fire from every point of advantage in the neighborhood, and from
the opposite bank of the canal. The work was, however, completed;
and the cavalry, crossing, drove the Mexicans headlong down the
great street; until they came to another canal, where the same work
had again to be performed. No less than seven canals crossed the
street, and it took two days of constant fighting before the last
of these was crossed, and the whole street in their hands.

Just as the last canal had been captured, Cortez, who was ever at
the head of his men, received news that the Mexicans desired to
open a parley with him, and that some of their nobles had arrived
at the palace for that purpose. Delighted at the news, he rode back
with his officers. The Mexicans requested that the two priests who
had been captured in the great temple should be released, and
should be the bearers of his terms, and discuss the negotiations.

Cortez at once consented, and the priests left with the envoys;
with instructions that, if the Mexicans would lay down their arms,
the past should be forgiven. The mission was, however, a mere
trick. The Mexicans were most anxious to rescue the priests, one of
whom was the high priest, and therefore most sacred in their eyes.
Cortez had scarcely sat down to a meal, which he sorely needed
after his fatigues, when the news was brought that the Mexicans had
again attacked, with greater fury than ever; and, at three points,
had driven off the detachments placed to guard the newly-made
causeways across the canal.

Cortez and his companions leaped on their horses and, riding down
the great street, again cleared it. But no sooner had he reached
the other end than the Mexicans, gathering in the lanes and side
streets, poured in again, and overpowered the guard at one of the
principal canals.

Swarms of warriors poured in on all sides, and a storm of arrows
and other missiles was poured down upon Cortez and his cavaliers.
The confusion at the broken bridge was tremendous. The cavalry and
infantry struggled fiercely with the crowds of foes, while others
strove again to repair the bridge which the Mexicans had again torn
down.

Cortez himself performed prodigies of valor in covering the retreat
of his men, dashing alone into the midst of the ranks of the enemy,
shouting his battle cry, and dealing death with every blow of his
sword. So far did he penetrate among his foes, that reports spread
that he was killed; and when at last he fought his way back, and
leaped his horse over a chasm still remaining in the bridge, his
escape was regarded by his troops as absolutely miraculous; and it
was said that he had been saved by the national Apostle, Saint
James, and the Virgin Mary, who had fought by his side. At night
the Mexicans, as usual, drew off; and the Spaniards, dispirited and
exhausted, fell back to their citadel.

That evening Montezuma died. He had refused all nourishment, as
well as medicine, from the time he had been wounded. Father Olmedo
did his best to persuade him to embrace the Christian faith, but
Montezuma stoutly refused. Just before he died he sent for Cortez,
and recommended his three daughters by his principal wife to his
charge; begging him to interest his master, the emperor, on their
behalf, and to see that they had some portion of their rightful
inheritance.

"Your lord will do this," he said, "if only for the friendly
offices I have rendered the Spaniards; and for the love that I have
shown them, though it has brought me to this condition; but for
this I bear them no ill will."

This Cortez promised and, after the conquest, took the three ladies
into his own family. They were instructed in the doctrines of
Christianity, and were married to Spanish nobles, and handsome
dowries assigned to them.

The news of Montezuma's death was received with real grief by the
Spaniards, to whom his generosity, and constant kindness, and
gentleness of manner had endeared him. There can be but little
doubt that, in spite of the accusations against him of meditating
treachery, Montezuma was, from the time they entered the capital,
sincere in his goodwill towards the Spaniards. He was devoted to
his own gods, and believed implicitly in the prophecy that
Quetzalcoatl, or his descendants, would return to rule Mexico.
Their superior science and attainments confirmed him in his belief
that the Spaniards fulfilled the prophecy, and he was willing to
resign alike his power, his possessions, and himself to their
hands. In his early days he had shown great personal bravery; and
the cowardice he displayed, throughout the whole of his dealing
with the Spaniards, was the result of superstition, and not that of
personal fear.

Cortez paid all respect to the remains of his late unhappy captive.
The body was arrayed in royal robes, and laid on a bier; and was
carried, by the nobles who had remained faithful to him during his
imprisonment, into the city. It is uncertain where Montezuma was
finally buried.

With the death of the emperor, the last hope of the Spaniards of
making terms with their assailants vanished. There was nothing,
now, but retreat. After some debate, it was settled that this
should take place at night, when they would find the Mexicans
unprepared. The difficulties of passage would be greater; but these
would, it was thought, be counterbalanced by the advantage of being
able to make at least a portion of their retreat unobserved.

It was determined that no time should be lost. The Mexicans would
doubtless be mourning over the body of Montezuma, and would be
unprepared for such prompt action on the part of the Spaniards.

The first question was the disposal of the treasure. The soldiers
had, for the most part, converted their share of the gold into
chains; which they wore round their necks. But there was a vast
amount in bars and ornaments, constituting the one-fifth which had
been set aside for the crown, the one-fifth for Cortez himself, and
the shares of his principal officers.

One of the strongest horses was laden with the richest portion of
the crown treasure, but all the rest was abandoned. The gold lay in
great heaps.

"Take what you like of it!" Cortez said to his men, "but be careful
not to overload yourselves. 'He travels safest, in the dark, who
travels lightest.'"

His own veterans took his advice, and contented themselves with
picking out a few of the most valuable ornaments; but the soldiers
of Narvaez could not bring themselves to leave such treasures
behind them, and loaded themselves up with as much gold as they
could carry.

Cortez now arranged the order of march. The van was composed of two
hundred Spanish foot, and twenty horsemen, under the orders of
Gonzalo de Sandoval. The rearguard, with the main body of the
infantry and the greater portion of the guns, was commanded by
Alvarado and Velasquez de Leon. Cortez himself led the center,
which was in charge of the baggage, some of the heavy guns, and the
prisoners; among whom were a son and two daughters of Montezuma,
Cacama, and the other nobles who had been in prison with him. The
Tlascalans were divided among the three corps.

A portable bridge had been prepared for crossing the canals which
intersected the causeway; the intention being that it should be
laid across a canal, that the army should pass over it, and that it
should then be carried forward to the next gap in the causeway.
This was a most faulty arrangement, necessitating frequent and long
delays, and entailing almost certain disaster. Had three such
portable bridges been constructed, the column could have crossed
the causeway with comparatively little risk; and there was no
reason why these bridges should not have been constructed, as they
could have been carried, without difficulty, by the Tlascalans.

At midnight the troops were in readiness for the march. Mass was
performed by Father Olmedo; and at one o'clock on July 1st, 1520,
the Spaniards sallied out from the fortress that they had so
stoutly defended.

Silence reigned in the city. As noiselessly as possible, the troops
made their way down the broad street, expecting every moment to be
attacked; but even the tramping of the horses, and the rumbling of
the baggage wagons and artillery did not awake the sleeping
Mexicans, and the head of the column arrived at the head of the
causeway before they were discovered. Then, as the advanced guard
were preparing to lay the portable bridge across the first opening,
some Aztec sentinels gave the alarm.

The priests on the summits of the temples heard their cries, and at
once sounded their horns and the huge war drum. Instantly the city
awoke, and the silence was succeeded by a roar of sound. The
vanguard had scarcely got upon the causeway when canoes shot out
upon the lake, and soon a storm of stones and arrows burst upon the
column. More and more terrible did it become, as fresh canoes,
crowded with the warriors, came up. Many of these pushed up to the
causeway itself; and the natives, landing, fell upon the Spaniards
with fury.

The latter made no stay. Fighting their way through their foes they
pressed on until they reached the next opening in the causeway, and
there waited for the bridge to come up. But a column many thousands
strong, with baggage and artillery, takes a long time to cross a
bridge; and the advanced guard had reached the opening long before
the rear had passed the bridge, and there stood helpless, exposed
to the terrible storm of missiles, until at last the column were
all across the bridge.

Then forty picked men, who had been specially told off for the
task, tried to raise it so that it might be carried to the front;
but the weight of the baggage wagons and artillery had so wedged it
into the earth, that they were unable to move it. They persevered
in their efforts until most of them had fallen. The rest bore the
terrible news to the army that the bridge was immovable.

A terrible cry of despair arose, as the news spread. All hope
seemed lost and, regardless of order or discipline, all pressed
forward to endeavor, in some way or other, to cross the obstacle
that barred their way.

Pressed on by those behind them, Sandoval and his cavaliers dashed
into the water. The distance was short, but the horses were weak
from hunger, and burdened by their own heavy armor and that of
their riders. Some succeeded in swimming across. Others sank; while
some reached the opposite side, only to fall back again, as they
tried to climb the steep bank.

The infantry followed them, throwing away their armor to enable
them to swim. Some succeeded, others were pressed down by their
comrades. Many were killed by the war clubs or spears of the
Mexicans in their canoes. Others again, half stunned by the clubs,
were dragged into the canoes and carried off to the city to be
sacrificed.

All along the causeway the fight raged unceasingly; the Aztecs in
the boats alongside leaping ashore, and grappling with their foes,
and rolling with them down the causeway into the water; while those
in the distance kept up their rain of missiles. The opening in the
causeway was at last filled--choked up with ammunition wagons and
guns, bales of rich goods, chests of gold, and the bodies of men
and horses--and over these the Spaniards made their way.

Cortez had swum or waded across on his horse, and he rode on until
he joined Sandoval and the remains of the advanced guard, who were
checked at the third and last opening. The cavaliers set the
example to their followers by plunging into the water. The rest
followed as best they could. Many were drowned by the weight of the
gold they carried. Others got across by clinging to the tails and
manes of the horses.

Cortez, with Sandoval and other cavaliers, led the retreat until
they reached the end of the causeway. The din of battle was now far
behind, but those who came up brought the news that the rear guard
were so sorely pressed, that they would be destroyed unless aid
reached them.

Cortez and his companions did not hesitate. They dashed along the
causeway, again swam the canal, and made their way through the
crowd until they reached the rear guard. Morning was breaking now,
and it showed the lake covered with canoes filled with warriors.
Along the whole length of the causeway a desperate fight was
raging.

Cortez found Alvarado on foot, his horse had been killed under him.
With a handful of followers, he was still desperately defending the
rear against the Mexicans, who had poured out from the city in
pursuit. The artillery had at first done good service, sweeping the
causeway and mowing down hundreds of their assailants; but the
Aztecs were careless of life, and rushed on so furiously that they
swept over the guns, killing those who served them, and fell upon
the infantry.

The charge of Cortez and his companions for a moment bore back the
foe; but, pressed by those behind, they swept aside resistance, and
bore back the Spaniards to the edge of the canal. Cortez and his
companions plunged in and swam across. Alvarado stood on the brink,
hesitating. Unhorsed and defenseless, he could not make his way
across the gap, which was now crowded with the canoes of the enemy.
He set his strong lance on the bottom of the canal and, using it as
a leaping pole, sprang across. The feat was an extraordinary one,
for although the width is not given, it was declared, by those who
witnessed it, to be impossible for any mortal. It filled friends
and foes alike with astonishment; and the spot is, to this day,
known by the Mexicans as "Alvarado's Leap."

The Aztecs followed no farther. They were occupied, now, in
securing the enormous wealth the Spaniards had left behind them;
and the remnants of the army marched along the causeway unmolested,
and took possession of the village at its end.

Cortez, iron hearted as he was, sat down and burst into tears as he
viewed the broken remnant of his army. He was consoled, however, by
finding that many of his most trusted companions had escaped.
Sandoval, Alvarado, Olid, Ordaz and Avila were safe; and so, to his
great joy, was Marina. She had, with a daughter of a Tlascalan
chief, been placed under the escort of a party of Tlascalan
warriors, in the van of the column, and had passed unharmed through
the dangers of the night.

The loss of the Spaniards in their retreat is variously estimated;
but the balance of authority, among contemporary writers, places it
at four hundred and fifty Spaniards, and four thousand Tlascalans.
This, with the loss sustained in the previous conflicts, reduced
the Spaniards to about a third, and the Tlascalans to a fifth of
the force which had entered the capital. The greater part of the
soldiers of Narvaez had been killed. They had formed the rear
guard, and had not only borne the brunt of the battle, but had
suffered from the effect of their cupidity. Of the cavalry but
twenty-three remained mounted, all the artillery had been lost, and
every musket thrown away in the flight.

Velasquez de Leon had fallen in the early part of the retreat,
bravely defending the rear; and several others among the leaders
had also fallen, together with all the prisoners whom they had
brought out from the capital.

The remains of the army straggled on into the town of Tlacopan, but
Cortez would allow of no halt there. At any moment the exultant
Aztecs from the capital might arrive and, in a battle in the
streets, the Spaniards would stand no chance, whatever, with their
foes. He therefore hurried the soldiers through and, when outside,
endeavored to form them into some sort of order.

It was necessary to give them a few hours of repose, and he led
them towards an eminence, crowned by a temple, which commanded the
plain. It was held by a party of natives; and the troops,
dispirited and exhausted, refused at first to advance against them;
but the influence of Cortez, backed by the example of his officers,
had its usual effect. The column moved forward against the temple,
and the natives, after a few discharges of missiles, abandoned the
place.

It was a large building, affording ample shelter for the Spaniards
and their allies. Provisions were found there, and a large supply
of fuel intended for the service of the temple. Here, lighting
great fires, they dried their clothing, bound up their wounds and,
after partaking of food, threw themselves down to sleep.

Fortunate it was for the Spaniards that the Mexicans, contented
with the slaughter they had inflicted, the plunder they had
captured, and most of all with the prisoners whom they had carried
off to be sacrificed on their altars, retired to the capital, and
allowed the invaders twenty-four hours' breathing time. Had they
pressed them hotly and relentlessly, from the moment when they
emerged from the causeway, they would have annihilated them; for at
that time the Spaniards were too worn out, and dispirited, to be
capable of any effectual resistance. Food and rest, however, did
wonders for them. They were hardy veterans, and with Cortez and the
leaders they most trusted with them, they soon came to look at
matters in a more cheerful light.

They were still stronger than they were when they first marched
upon Mexico. Why, then, should they despair of making their way
back to Tlascala, where they would have rest and friends? They knew
there was a long and painful march before them, and probably
desperate battles to fight; but in a fair field, they felt
themselves a match for any number of the enemy; and when, late in
the evening, their officers bade them form up and prepare for a
night's march, they fell in steadily and willingly; and Cortez felt
that they could again be relied upon, under every emergency.



Chapter 19: The Passage Of The Causeway.


On marching out from the city, Roger and his two comrades formed
part of a picked band, to whom was entrusted the charge of the
prisoners. Roger had been specially selected, as he could translate
to them any order given by the officer of the party; and he was
ordered to march next to them.

He had once or twice in the past few days been enabled, by the
intervention of Marina, to visit the prisoners. Cacama's spirit was
in no way shaken by captivity.

"Your general has made a fatal mistake," he said, "in sending
Cuitlahua out to pacify the populace. He is of very different stuff
from Montezuma, who has become a woman in the hands of the Spanish.
You will see that he will never return, but will lead the people on
to the attack.

"It matters little to us. I know that we shall never escape. The
Spaniards will slay us all, rather than that we should rejoin our
people. But for that I care not. One would rather die in battle
than be slain as a captive; but in either case we shall be dying
for our country, and what can we wish for more? It is the duty of
all to risk their lives, whenever they be needed for their country.
Some here have fought in fifty battles for Mexico. I am younger,
but not too young to have shared in many a battle. I fear death in
no way, my friend, and should welcome it, as a change from
captivity.

"I am well content, now. I should have grieved to have died,
believing that the Mexicans had lost all their ancient spirit and
courage, and were content to be slaves beneath the yoke of a
handful of strangers; but now I see that they were asleep, and not
dead; and that these boasting strangers will find that the despised
Mexican is a match for them; I shall die happy."

The news of the wounding of Montezuma, and the desperate fighting
in the streets and round the palace, excited the prisoners to the
utmost. In their place of confinement they heard the thunder of the
guns, the perpetual rattle of the musketry, and the shouts and
yells of the combatants; but it was only when Roger visited them
that they obtained any details as to the combat that was going on.
They were filled with enthusiasm, as they heard how desperately
their countrymen were fighting; and their only regret was that they
could not join in the struggle, and die leading the assault against
the Spaniards.

Roger did not see them, upon the last day, until he took his place
by their side, when the column formed up in the courtyard.

"I am to keep near you, Cacama," he said, "in order to translate
anything the officer may have to say to you."

"We are going to leave the city?" Cacama asked, eagerly.

"Yes, we are going to cross the causeway."

The officer in charge here came up, and gave an order which Roger
interpreted:

"He asks whether you will all give a pledge to remain silent, as we
march out. If you will do so, he will accept your promise; but if
not, he will be forced to gag you, as the safety of the army
depends upon our getting beyond the streets, before our march is
discovered."

"I wonder that they are ready to take our promise," Cacama said
disdainfully, "after their own treachery. However, an Aztec noble
is not like a Spaniard. Our faith may be depended upon. We will
give our word to be silent."

The other prisoners also promised, and were allowed to take their
places in the column, ungagged.

The alarm was given long before the rear of the column had got out
from the street. Cacama gave an exclamation of joy, when he heard
the silence broken by loud cries at the end of the street; and
immediately afterwards by the shouts of the priests on the lofty
temples, by the blowing of horns, and the beating of the great war
drum.

"The game has begun," he said. "We shall see how many Spaniards
remain alive, when the sun rises. Long before they can get across
the causeway, our people will be upon them. We shall not see the
triumph, for without defensive armor we shall fall, in the
darkness, beneath the missiles of our own people. That matters not.
Better to die at the hands of a Mexican, struggling to be free,
than at those of these treacherous invaders."

The missiles showered down thickly upon the column, from the
houses, till they emerged from the street and made their way out on
to the causeway. Then they became exposed to the storm of arrows,
darts, and stones from the canoes on the lake. By their officer's
orders, the soldiers immediately in charge of the prisoners drew
their swords and formed a circle round them; with orders to fall
upon and kill them, at once, did they make the slightest movement
to escape. Roger translated to the captives the officer's assurance
that, although he was most anxious for their safety, he had no
resource but to order the soldiers to slay them, at once, if they
made any movement to escape.

"We shall not try to escape," Cacama said. "How can we do so, with
our hands bound?"

During the long pause that ensued, before the rear of the column
passed over the bridge on to the causeway, the impatience among the
soldiers was great. Many had already fallen beneath the missiles of
the enemy. Scarce one but had received wounds, more or less severe.
Several of the prisoners, too, had fallen.

"What is it?" Cacama asked, as the cry of despair went up; when it
became known that the bridge was immovable, and that there were no
means of crossing the breaks in the causeway, ahead.

He muttered an exclamation of triumph, when Roger repeated to him
the news he had just learned.

"That settles it," he said. "Their fate is now sealed. The gods are
at last fighting again for Mexico.

"Roger, I am sorry for you, I am sorry for my wife, and for
Amenche; but I rejoice for my country. If you should escape this
night, Roger--and you have more chance than most, since you speak
our language--do all you can for them."

"You may be sure that I shall do that, Cacama; but the chance of
any escaping seems, to me, a small one. Still, it may be that some
will get over alive. The Spaniards have their faults, Cacama, but
they are grand soldiers; and at any rate, now that they see they
must win their way or perish, they will perform wonders."

"Ah!" the exclamation was caused by an arrow striking the young
prince in the chest.

At this time a terrible fight was raging all around them. The
natives had gained a footing on the causeway, and the Spaniards
were fighting hand to hand with them.

"I am mortally wounded, Roger," Cacama said. "Most of the others
have already fallen. It is better so. I have lived long enough to
see vengeance taken on our oppressors.

"Roger, there is one chance for you. Wrap round you one of our
mantles. In the darkness, none will see that you are not a Mexican,
and they will not shoot at you.

"Listen, there is Cuitcatl's war cry. I know his voice; and
doubtless they have discerned our white dresses, in the darkness,
and he is trying to rescue us."

The crowd, pressing along the causeway, had swept the guards away
from the prisoners--indeed, there were now scarcely any prisoners
left to guard. Unprotected by any defensive armor, most of them had
fallen very early in the conflict. Roger was supporting Cacama, and
another prisoner lay dead at their feet.

Roger stooped and snatched off his mantle; then, lifting Cacama in
his arms, forced his way through the press to the edge of the
causeway, just as a canoe ran up alongside, and a number of Aztecs
sprang ashore.

"Cuitcatl!" Roger shouted, at the top of his voice.

"Here," the young noble exclaimed, as he sprang forward.

"Here is Cacama," Roger cried.

At the same moment, he received a stunning blow on the back of his
helmet from one of the Spaniards, who took him for a Mexican; and
fell down the side of the causeway, into the water, with his burden
in his arms.

When Roger recovered his senses, he was lying in a canoe, which was
being paddled rapidly. He had been insensible but a few minutes,
for the cries of the combatants still sounded close at hand.
Cuitcatl was bending over him.

"How is Cacama?" he asked, as soon as he could speak.

"Alas! He is dead," Cuitcatl replied. "You did your best to save
him, Roger.

"He spoke but once, after we had got him into the canoe. He said
'Protect my wife, Cuitcatl; and save our friend.'"

"Where are you taking us?" Roger asked next.

"We will land some distance up the lake. There I will obtain
bearers, and carry Cacama home, that he may be buried as one of his
rank should be. As to you, we must think what had best be done.
None of those with me know who you are; believing, in the darkness,
that you are one of ourselves. They are my own men, and I can rely
upon them when their blood is cooled; but it were best that, at
present, they remained in ignorance. Bathalda is in the bow, and
his influence and mine will be sufficient to control them, when we
are once out of hearing of the conflict. Nothing, save my duty to
Cacama, would have withdrawn me from it; but they must do without
me. Not a Spaniard will see tomorrow's sun.

"Are you badly hurt, Roger? It is too dark to see anything."

"Not badly. I have several arrow points sticking in me, in one
place or another; but they have not gone deep. My armor kept them
out. It was a blow on the head that felled me. There were many
Mexicans on the causeway, fighting with the Spaniards; and I was,
of course, mistaken for one of them. My helmet broke the blow, and
I was stunned rather than injured, I think.

"How came you to be just at that spot?"

"I was on the lookout for the prisoners, being determined to rescue
Cacama, if possible; and as I was fighting, farther back, I heard
it said that there were several white dresses among the Spaniards
ahead. So I made to that point and, just as I was springing ashore,
heard your shout; and saw you roll down, you and another. I guessed
it might be Cacama, for I knew that you would do your best to save
him; and so sprang back again to the water's edge, and found that
it was so.

"And found, alas! that Cacama was mortally wounded. How about the
other prisoners?"

"I think that all had fallen, before he did. You see, they had no
protection; and even we who had armor were suffering, terribly,
from the missiles poured in among us. I know that two ladies,
Montezuma's daughters, were among the first to fall. More than that
I cannot say, for I kept close to Cacama, hoping that in some way I
might find an opportunity to aid his escape; and had he not been
struck, just when he was, I might have done so; for after the news
came that the bridge could not be removed, all was confusion, and
each man thought only of saving his own life."

After rowing for three hours the canoe, having made a circuit of
the city and crossed the lake, reached the shore at a distance of a
few miles from Tezcuco. Cacama's body was lifted ashore, then
Cuitcatl said to Bathalda:

"Bathalda, you will be glad to know that we have saved Cacama's
friend, and mine, Roger Hawkshaw."

The forester gave an exclamation of pleasure.

"I am glad, indeed," he exclaimed. "I wondered what had become of
him, in the fight."

Bathalda's exclamation silenced the murmur with which the others
had heard that one of the white men had been saved, by them, from
the general destruction which, as they believed, had fallen upon
their oppressors.

"He is a friend of our people," Cuitcatl went on, "and is of
another race to these Spaniards. As you see, men, he speaks our
language well, and is like one of ourselves. Cacama held him as a
dear friend; and as you know, Cacama hated the Spaniards, and had
it not been for treason would have attacked them, long ago.

"Now, form a litter with the paddles and lay Cacama upon it.
Morning is breaking, and we have far to go. The new Lord of Tezcuco
is a friend of the Spaniards. We must get well away, as soon as we
can."

Roger threw aside the Spanish helmet. Cuitcatl took some of the
plumes from his own headdress, and bound them round his head and,
as soon as the bier was constructed, the little party started. In
the afternoon they arrived at Cuitcatl's house, the chief having
himself gone forward, to inform the queen of Cacama's fate, and of
the near approach of the party, with his body.

It was a mournful scene, when they arrived. The whole of the male
and female retainers were assembled outside the house, the women
filling the air with cries and lamentations, the men weeping and
wailing. The bearers of the bier passed into the house, where
Maclutha awaited it.

Roger, unwilling to intrude upon the grief of the unhappy queen,
remained without, talking to Bathalda; the natives viewing him with
hostility and wonder, being unable to understand how it was that
their lord had brought one of the white men to his house.

In a minute or two, however, Amenche's attendant ran down the steps
to Roger and, telling him to follow her, led the way to the
apartment where the princess was waiting him. She fell, crying,
into his arms.

"It is terrible, Roger," she sobbed. "As long as my brother was but
a captive, we had hoped that he might be restored to us; and now he
is brought home dead--slain, too, by a Mexican arrow."

"Cacama was ready for death, Amenche. I was beside him, from the
time he left his prison. He was sure that we should be attacked;
and saw that, as he and those with him were unprotected by any
armor, they would be the first to fall when the fighting began as,
in the darkness, the Mexicans would not be able to distinguish them
from their enemies. But he said that he was quite content to die,
seeing that the people had now recovered their ancient spirit, and
were battling with heroes against their oppressors."

"And they are all destroyed," Amenche exclaimed, passionately.

"We do not know that," Roger replied. "Their position was a
terrible one and seemed well-nigh hopeless. I know that Cuitcatl
regarded it as quite hopeless, and deems that all have fallen; but
I do not think so. The passages to be crossed were of no great
width; and though numbers may have fallen, I believe that some will
have made their way across. They will have lost their guns, and if
the Aztecs continue to press them as hotly as they did upon the
causeway, they may slay them all; but if they give them time to
rally, they may yet fight their way back to Tlascala."

"And you will stop here with us, Roger. Is it not so?"

"If your people will allow me to do so, I will, Amenche. I ask for
nothing better; but remember that even Cacama, himself, felt
doubtful whether he could protect me from the power of the
priests--and at that time their reason for hating the Spaniards was
small to what it now is, and Cacama himself has gone. Cuitcatl,
though a powerful cazique, has but small influence in comparison
with that which Cacama, as King of Tezcuco and nephew of Montezuma,
possessed."

"How is Montezuma? What has become of him? We heard that he was
wounded; but it scarce seems possible that his own subjects should
raise a hand against him."

"He died yesterday afternoon, and Cortez delivered his body to the
people of the city."

The girl uttered an exclamation of horror.

"This is dreadful, indeed," she said, bursting again into tears.
"To think of the great emperor being dead! What horrors and
misfortunes have befallen us!

"It is bad for us, too, Roger. I was one of his favorite nieces,
and I thought of going to him and obtaining his permission to marry
you, in order that you should be received into the nation. Now that
hope is gone.

"But I must leave you for a while, and go to Maclutha. I must not
leave her longer, alone in her grief."

Soon afterwards, Cuitcatl entered the room.

"Come, Roger," he said; "a meal has been prepared, and we both
sorely need food and rest. Tomorrow we shall have time to talk over
the future, and by that time I shall have news whether any of the
Spaniards have escaped. If they have, I must hurry off again; for
Cuitlahua has sworn that not one shall leave the country, alive,
and every man who can bear arms must take the field against them.
But it will be an easy task for, at any rate, few can have got off
that causeway alive."

Roger was glad, as soon as he had finished his meal, to throw
himself down on a couch. He had been on guard, the greater part of
the night before the sortie to clear the street leading to the
causeway, and had slept but an hour or two, the following evening.
He had lost a good deal of blood, from the blow he had received on
the head; and from the arrow wounds, of which he had several,
although none were serious; and he was now completely done up.

Amenche stole away from Maclutha, for a few minutes' talk with him
and Cuitcatl, while they had their meal; and after hearing an
outline of the later events of the siege of the palace, and of the
fight on the causeway, she had herself insisted that Roger should
instantly seek repose.

"I shall be occupied with Maclutha, and there is much to see about,
in such times as these. There can be no pomp and ceremonial of
burial. That must come when peace is restored, and we carry
Cacama's ashes to be laid with his father's, at Tezcuco. Bathalda
and some of the slaves have already started to bring in wood for
the funeral pile. All will be ready by sunrise, tomorrow."

Roger's wounds were dressed, by one of the slaves who was skilled
in all operations connected with wounds; and he slept, without once
waking, until Cuitcatl came to him in the morning and bade him
arise, as all was ready for the ceremony of Cacama's cremation.

The rule in Mexico was that, on the death of anyone, the body was
attired in the garments peculiar to his tutelary deity; but Cacama
was dressed, simply, in the robe indicating his rank.

"You see," Amenche said, when Roger joined them; "we have dressed
him in a warrior's robes, not in those of a Lord of Tezcuco; for we
have none such here. Nor have we attired him in the garments of our
god. For Cacama, as you know, worshiped chiefly the great Unknown
God, in whom his grandfather believed; who is Lord of all the gods,
and of all peoples; and who must be the same, Roger, that you white
people worship."

"No doubt He is the same," Roger said; "and I am glad, Amenche,
that you and your brother have already come to love Him. He is not
Lord of all gods, for He is the only God. There are none others.

"Some day, dear, when you come to England with me, a priest shall
instruct you in all we know of Him.

"But I see they are going to light the pile. What are all those
pieces of paper that cover his body?"

"They are charms, Roger, against the dangers of the unknown road he
has to travel. It is the custom of the country, and we did not
think it worth while to depart from it. It is also the custom to
sacrifice numbers of slaves, and send them to be his attendants
upon the road. But the Unknown God hates all sacrifices of blood;
and Cacama, although forced to yield to the power of the priests,
would have had none, could he have helped it, in Tezcuco."

Cuitcatl, as the oldest friend of the dead prince, applied a torch
to the pile, which was composed for the most part of aromatic wood.
Maclutha and Amenche broke into a plaintive hymn, in which their
attendants, and the females who had collected, in considerable
numbers, from the neighboring villages, joined. Higher and higher
rose the flames, the voices rising with them; until the dirge
culminated in a loud wailing cry, as the flames reached the corpse,
and hid it from view. Then the hymn recommenced, and continued
until the pile had been burnt down.

The mourners then re-entered the house, leaving the two or three
priests who were present to collect the ashes, and to place them in
a large gold vase; of which they would act as guardians, until the
time came for its removal, in solemn procession, to Tezcuco.

Cuitcatl took Roger aside.

"I have bad news from Mexico," he said. "You were right, and I was
mistaken. A portion of the Spaniards and Tlascalans succeeded in
crossing the breaches in the causeway, and gaining the mainland.
However, it is said that two-thirds of their number perished. As
they have lost the terrible weapons, that committed such
destruction, they will be at our mercy. We know now that they are
not invincible. Their terror has departed.

"Be assured that they will not escape us. They have reached land on
the opposite side of the lake, and will have to make a great
circuit, which will give us time to collect our forces. Cuitlahua
has already dispatched a messenger to every town and village,
ordering all to assemble under their chiefs; and to be prepared to
march, at a moment's notice, when the rendezvous is settled upon. I
would it had all been finished on the causeway, but there can be no
doubt as to the result.

"At most there are but four hundred Whites and four thousand
Tlascalans, while we shall number over one hundred thousand. They
say the white men have lost not only their great guns, but those
they carry on their shoulders; and that only twenty or thirty of
their strange animals have survived. Therefore, this time, we shall
fight with something like equal arms, and shall overwhelm them as
the sea overwhelms the rock."

"Your simile is an unfortunate one, Cuitcatl. The sea covers the
rock, but when it retires the rock remains. Still, it does seem to
me that, however valiantly the Spaniards may fight, they cannot
withstand such terrible odds.

"But I cannot rejoice with you. You know that I abhor, as much as
you do, the cruel massacre at the temple. My sympathies were with
your people, while struggling to throw off the yoke that the
Spaniards had imposed upon them; but I am white, like them. I know
that many among them are noble men, and that much of the harm they
have committed has been done from conscientious motives; just as
your people have, from a desire to please the gods, offered up
thousands of human victims, every year. Much as they love gold, many
of them--and certainly Cortez among them--think more of spreading
their religion than they do of personal ambition, or even of gain.
I have many acquaintances and some good friends, among them; and I
cannot think of their being all destroyed, without regret and
horror. I do not say that you are not justified in killing all, for
your existence as a nation is at stake; but to me, it is terrible."

"I can understand that, my friend; but nothing can avert their
destruction.

"Now, as to yourself. Had it not been for Cacama's death, I should
have said it were best that you should marry Amenche, at once; but
among us, it would be most unseemly for a sister to think of
marrying, when her brother has but just died."

"It is the same with us," Roger said. "A certain time must always
pass, after the death of a near relative, before marriage. Besides,
the present is no time for thinking of such a thing. My fate is
altogether uncertain, and I own that I consider there is small
ground for hope that I can escape from the present troubles. If, as
seems certain now, the Spaniards are all destroyed, the people will
more than ever venerate their gods, and the power of the priests
will be almost unlimited.

"It is useless for me to try to deceive myself, Cuitcatl. I know
your friendship, but you would not have the power to withstand the
decision of the priests. They will never permit a single white man
to remain alive in the land. Had Cacama lived, he might possibly
have protected me; but I think that even his authority would have
been insufficient to do so. If the Spaniards are destroyed, I have
but one chance of my life: and that is, to make my way down to the
coast, and to sail away with the Spaniards there."

Cuitcatl was silent, for he felt the force of what Roger said.

"If you go, you must not go alone," he replied at last. "Amenche
would die, were you to desert her."

"I will assuredly take her, if she will accompany me," Roger said;
"but I do not think that there is much chance of my escape, even in
that way. The news of the destruction of the Spaniards will be
carried, with the speed of the wind, down to the coast; and the
tribes there will instantly rise and fall upon the Spaniards. Those
who have been the most friendly with them will be the very first to
take up arms against them, in order to make their peace with the
Aztecs, and to avert their vengeance for the aid they have given
the Spaniards. Long before we could reach the coast, the Spaniards
there would either be killed, or driven on board their ships."

Cuitcatl could not deny the justice of Roger's reasoning.

"There is nothing to do," the latter went on, "but to wait--at any
rate, until this battle has taken place. Impossible as it seems,
the Spaniards may yet extricate themselves from the toils; in which
case I should join them. If not, and I find my escape by the coast
cut off, by the rising of the tribes there, the only thing that I
can see is to take to the mountains; and to live there, as I did
with Bathalda, on the proceeds of the chase. I might then, perhaps,
in time make my way to people in the far north, who have not such
reason as they have here for hating a man with a white skin; or I
might wait until the Spaniards send another expedition, to carry
out what Cortez has failed to accomplish."

Leaving their fires burning, the remains of the Spanish army
marched, at midnight, from the temple where they had enjoyed rest,
and had recruited their strength and spirits. The sick and wounded
were placed in the center, and carried on litters, or on the backs
of the porters; while others, who were strong enough to sit
upright, rode on the horses behind the mounted soldiers. All night
the march continued without disturbance; but in the morning, large
parties of natives were seen moving about. Tlacopan lay on the most
westerly point of the lake, and the most direct route of the
Spaniards would have been to keep along by its margin; but had they
done so, they would have been liable to attack from the capital; as
the troops could have poured out across the causeway to Tepejacac,
and headed them there. They therefore struck off due north, with
the intention of passing to the west of Lake Xaltocan.

The country was a broken one; and the Mexicans, gathering on the
hills, rolled stones down upon them, with volleys of arrows and
darts. Sometimes they even ventured to descend into the plain, and
fall upon the rear of the column. As often as they did so, however,
the little body of cavalry drove them off. The infantry column kept
steadily on its way, though greatly harassed by the continued
attacks.

Day after day passed in this manner, the Spaniards being reduced to
great straits, from want of food; as the natives, in the small
towns and villages through which they passed, carried off all
provisions and stores; and the only food the soldiers could obtain
were wild cherries, and a few ears of corn that had been left by
the harvesters. Sometimes a horse fell dead, from exhaustion, and
afforded a welcome supply of food.

Many of the soldiers dropped, lifeless from fatigue and famine.
Others, unable to keep up the march, fell behind and were captured
by the enemy, and carried off to furnish sacrifices for the gods.
To lighten themselves, the soldiers threw away the gold, to obtain
which they had dared so many dangers, and suffered so many
hardships. Life itself was at stake, and the precious metal had
ceased to have any value in their eyes.

Through those terrible days Cortez, as usual, set a splendid
example to his solders. He was in the front, wherever danger
threatened. He bore his full share of the hardships, and by his
cheerfulness and calmness kept up the spirits of the soldiers, and
cheered them by assuring them they might yet escape from the
dangers that menaced them.

The Tlascalans also behaved admirably; and appeared to bear no
grudge, whatever, against the Spaniards, for the sufferings which
their alliance had brought upon them.

Passing through the town of Quauhtitlan, and round the north of
Lake Tzompanco, they at last turned their faces east; and on the
seventh day reached the edge of the plateau, and looked down upon
the plains of Otompan. They were still but thirty miles, in a
direct line, from the capital; but they had traversed fully three
times that distance, in their circuitous journey.

During the last day's march, the numbers of the natives who
surrounded them had considerably increased; and menacing shouts, of
the fate that awaited them, greeted them as they marched along. The
nature of the peril was not understood until, on reaching the crest
from which they looked down on the valley of Otompan, they saw that
it was filled with a mighty army; whose white cotton mail gave
it--as one of their historians states--the appearance of being
covered with snow. Here were all the levies that Cuitlahua had
collected. The whole of the cities of the plains had sent in their
quota, and the bright banners of the chiefs and nobles waved gaily
over the snowy array of their followers.

The numbers of the Mexicans were put down at varying amounts by the
Spanish historians, some of them having them as high as two hundred
thousand; but it is probable that at least half that number were
assembled, to bar the march of the worn-out little force that
surveyed them from the heights. Even the most hopeful and
courageous of the Spaniards felt something like dismay, as they
viewed the tremendous array before them. Deprived of the weapons on
which they had chiefly depended for victory, with their cavalry
reduced to a mere handful, the prospect seemed indeed desperate.
But there was no room for hesitation. They must cut a way through
the enemy, or die.

Cortez addressed the troops in a short speech of encouragement. He
reminded them that they had already won victories against enormous
odds; and that numbers, indeed, were but of slight consequence,
when the arm of God was with them.

"Assuredly He, who had carried them safely through so many perils,
would not now abandon them, and His own good cause, to perish by
the hand of these infidels."

With steady step and in compact array, the little force descended
the hill into the plain; and as soon as they reached the level
ground, the Aztec host attacked them, on all sides. The handful of
cavalry, consisting almost entirely of the personal friends and
officers of Cortez, cleared the way for the head of the column by
repeated and desperate charges; while the infantry, with pike and
sword, maintained a front that the Aztecs, although fighting with
the greatest bravery, were unable to break.

The Tlascalans fought as stoutly as the Spaniards. Their native
land lay almost within sight, and the love of home, and the
remembrance of many a victory gained over the Aztecs, animated them
to rival the steadfastness of their white comrades.

Yet though unbroken, the little force was but as an island in the
midst of an ocean. The attacks, although always repulsed, were
constantly renewed. The gaps in the ranks of the enemy were filled
up with fresh combatants and, as hour after hour went on, even the
most hopeful in the Spanish band began to feel that the contest
could have but one termination; and that they would be overcome,
not so much by the arms of the Aztecs, as by fatigue, thirst and
hunger.

The cavalry had performed prodigies of valor. Breaking up into
knots of threes and fours, they had charged into the dense crowd of
the enemy; clearing a way for themselves with lance and sword, and
by the weight of the horses and armor. But such charges could have
but little effect on the fortunes of the day. The numbers of those
they slew counted for nothing, in such a host; and the lanes they
made closed behind them, until, after making a circuit, they again
joined the main body.

For hours the fight raged. The Spanish battle cry, "Saint James and
Our Lady!" still rose sternly, in answer to the triumphant yells of
the Aztecs. Their front was still unbroken, but all felt that
nothing, short of a miracle, could save them. Not one but was
wounded in many places by the Aztec missiles. Their arms were weary
with striking. The sun blazed down upon them with scorching heat.
Their throats were parched with thirst. They were enfeebled by
hunger.

The Aztecs, seeing that their foes were becoming faint and wearied,
that the horses of the cavaliers could scarce carry them, and that
the end was approaching, redoubled their shouts; and pressed more
heartily and eagerly than ever upon the Spaniards, driving the
cavalry back, by sheer weight, into the ranks of the infantry.

Cortez, at this supreme moment, still maintained his calmness. He
saw that all was lost, unless a change was made, and that speedily.
Another hour at latest, and the resistance would be over, and the
brave men who had followed him be either dead, or prisoners
reserved for sacrifice.

Throughout the day he had ordered his cavaliers to strike ever at
the chiefs, knowing well that undisciplined bodies of men become
lost, without leaders. Raising himself in his stirrups, he looked
round over the seething mass of the foe; and at some distance
beheld a small body of officers, whose gay and glittering attire
showed them to belong to the highest rank of nobles; gathered round
a litter on which was a chief, gorgeously attired with a lofty
plume of feathers floating above his head; rising above which was a
short staff, bearing a golden net.

Cortez knew that this was the symbol carried by the Aztec
commanders in chief. He called to his comrades--Sandoval, Olid,
Alvarado, Avila, and the other cavaliers--and pointing to the
chief, cried:

"There is our mark! Follow, and support me."

Then he spurred his wearied horse forward, and dashed into the
throng, followed by his cavaliers.

The fury and suddenness of the attack bore all before it. The
compact little body of horsemen, shouting their battle cry, clove
through the ranks of the enemy, making straight for the Indian
commander, whose name was Cihuaca. In vain the Mexicans tried to
bar the way. In vain, when after a few minutes of tremendous
exertion, Cortez reached his goal, the nobles and the bodyguard
strove to defend their chief. Cortez, fighting with almost
superhuman vigor, clove his way through all opposition; and with
his lance ran through the Aztec general, and hurled him to the
ground, when one of his followers, leaping from his horse, quickly
dispatched him.

The guard, appalled by the suddenness of the attack, broke and fled
in all directions, scattering panic among the lately triumphant
host. Scarce knowing what had happened, but feeling that some
dreadful misfortune had occurred, and all was lost, the Aztecs were
seized with a blind terror; and breaking their ranks, thought only
of escape.

As if by magic, a victorious army was transformed into a flying
mob. The Spaniards and Tlascalans took instant advantage of the
change. Fatigue and thirst, wounds and exhaustion were forgotten.
With shouts of triumph, and vengeance, they broke their ranks and
followed hotly upon the fugitives. These, impeded by their very
numbers, and half mad with panic, offered no resistance whatever.
Great numbers were overtaken and slain and, when the Spaniards
abandoned the pursuit at the summons of their leader's trumpet, and
assembled round him, the field was covered with the bodies of their
fallen foes.

An hour was spent in gathering the booty from the bodies of the
chiefs, of whom great numbers had fallen; and then, after offering
up thanks to God for their marvelous deliverance, the army again
renewed their march. It was already late in the afternoon, and they
halted at sunset at a temple standing on an eminence, which
afforded them shelter and a defensive position, should the Aztecs
renew the assault.

But of this there was little fear. Their defeat had been utter and
complete. There was no chance of their rallying.

The victory of Otompan was one of the most remarkable ever won. The
discrepancy of numbers was immense. The Spaniards were unprovided
with artillery or firearms, and owed their success to their
discipline and bravery, and still more to the extraordinary valor
and quick-sightedness of their leader.



Chapter 20: At Tlascala.


Roger was sitting in the evening, conversing with Maclutha and
Amenche on the probabilities of the battle that was expected to
take place on that day, when Cuitcatl suddenly entered. His robe of
bright feather work was gone. The panache of floating plumes was
shorn from his head. His white garment was stained with blood. He
was overcome by exhaustion and grief.

No words were needed to explain what had taken place. Impossible as
it had seemed, the Aztec army had been defeated. A cry broke from
the two ladies, as he entered.

"The white man's God has triumphed," he said, "and the Aztecs have
been defeated. You were right, Roger. Mere handful as they were,
the white men have gained the day. Even now, I hardly know how it
came about. Never did my countrymen fight more bravely. For hours,
the Spaniards stood as a wall which we, in vain, tried to break.
Thousands fell on our side, but not for a moment did we waver.
Others took their places until, as the hours went on, the Spaniards
grew weary, and victory seemed in our grasp. Their horsemen had
charged through and through us, but though many chiefs were slain,
it mattered little. The ranks closed up, and each time they fell
back on their infantry, having achieved nothing. Their horses were
weary, and their attacks grew more feeble.

"Already, our cries of victory were raised. An hour more, and not a
Spaniard would have remained on foot. Just at this time my command
had been ordered up, and we were fighting in the front rank.

"Suddenly I heard, from all parts of the field, loud cries. What
had happened I knew not. We stood for a moment, irresolute, not
knowing what had befallen us elsewhere. Then a panic seized my men.
In vain I shouted and ordered. They were deaf to my voice. They
were deaf to everything, save fear.

"I was swept away with them, as a leaf on a stream. When at last I
freed myself from the torrent, and looked round, I saw that the
whole army was in mad flight; while the whites and Tlascalans, like
hounds in pursuit of deer, were hanging on their rear, slaughtering
all they overtook.

"In vain I gathered a few men, and made a stand. It was useless. We
were beaten down and overpowered. With the greatest difficulty I
broke away and escaped; and had it not been for Bathalda, who
fought side by side with me, I should have been taken by two or
three fleet-footed Tlascalans.

"For the present, all is lost. The fight cannot be renewed
tomorrow, and before the sun sets the enemy will have reached the
borders of Tlascala, and will be safe there."

"But what was it that caused so sudden a panic in your ranks?"
Roger asked.

"It was the death of Cihuaca, our leader. The Spanish horse,
headed, as I hear, by their general himself, burst through our
ranks, cut their way to his litter, overthrew his bodyguard, and
slew him. His death would have mattered little, as the victory was
already won. We needed no further orders. We had but to keep on
fighting, and the end would soon have come. It was simply a panic.
None knew what had happened. The word passed from man to man, 'All
is lost!' and, like a herd of deer, our bravest soldiers fled. It
is not a thing to reason about--the gods deserted us, and we were
no longer men. That is all I can tell you about it."

And the chief flung himself down upon a pile of rugs. Wine and food
were brought to him, and his wounds dressed.

"Roger," he said presently, "you must leave us, tonight. Those of
my followers who have escaped will soon make their way back, and my
authority will be unable to save you. The priests would head the
movement against you. You would be bound and carried to Mexico, at
once.

"The whites, in their march tomorrow, will pass along the road four
miles to the north of this. Conceal yourself in a wood until
morning, and join them as they come along.

"As to the future, you can make no plans, now. You know not whether
Cortez will retire to the coast and take ship there; or whether he
will remain at Tlascala, till reinforcements arrive from across the
sea, and then again advance. When this is decided, you will know
what course to take.

"Bathalda will accompany you. I have already given him orders to do
so. He will bring down a message from you, when you know what
course has been decided on."

"And if you go, dear, I will go with you," Amenche said, rising and
putting her hand on Roger's shoulder. "Send for me, and Bathalda
will escort me to you. I will bring such gems and gold as we can
carry, so I shall not be a bride without a dower. You promise to
send for me, do you not, Roger?"

"Certainly I do," Roger said, pressing her to him; "if I quit this
land alive, you shall accompany me. I should be unworthy of your
love, indeed, Amenche, were I to prove faithless to you now. I
regard you as being as truly my wife, as if we were already
married."

A short time afterwards Bathalda entered, and said that a number of
soldiers were gathering in the courtyard, that some priests were
among them, and that they were talking loudly about carrying the
white man to Mexico, as a sacrifice to appease the wrath of the
gods.

"There is no time to be lost," Cuitcatl said. "You had best go,
Roger, before they surround the house and make escape impossible. I
will fetch you a dark-colored robe, so that you may escape, unseen,
by anyone who may be approaching the house on this side."

So saying, he left the room. Maclutha signed to Bathalda to follow
her, and they went out, leaving Roger alone with Amenche.

The girl's firmness deserted her now, and she threw herself,
weeping, into Roger's arms. He consoled her by his assurances that
their parting would not be for long; and that the next time they
met, whatever the circumstances, he would make her his own.

"If we retire, and you join me in Tlascala," he said, "we will be
married by Father Olmedo, in Christian fashion. If I return hither
to you, we will be married at once, in Mexican fashion, and go
through the ceremony again, when we join the Spaniards."

A few minutes later Cuitcatl returned, as did Maclutha and
Bathalda, the latter bearing a basket with some provisions. The
parting was brief, for the servants had brought news that the
soldiers were becoming more and more clamorous; and were
threatening to force an entrance, if the white man were not handed
over to them.

Bathalda and Roger left by a small door at the back of the house
and, passing through the garden, took their way across the country.
An hour's walking brought them to a wood, near the road by which
the Spaniards would travel in the morning, and there they sat down
and awaited daylight.

It was not until some hours after sunrise that the little army was
seen approaching. On its flanks were large bodies of natives; who,
however, contented themselves by hovering at a distance; except
where the ground was impracticable for the action of cavalry, when
they approached near enough to discharge their missiles at the line
of troops. As the head of the column approached, Roger threw oil'
his Aztec cloak and, accompanied by Bathalda, issued from the wood
and ran towards them, and in two or three minutes reached the
horsemen who rode in the van.

"Why, Sancho!" Cortez exclaimed, as Roger ran up. "Is it you? We
all thought you had fallen in the fight on the causeway. I am glad
to see that you are safe. How did you escape?"

"I was, like many others, your Excellency, seized by the Aztecs,
pulled down the causeway, and thrown into a boat. I should have
been taken to Mexico and sacrificed, had it not been that the
commander of the boat was a young cazique, who had been my closest
friend while dwelling in Tezcuco. He directed his men to row me
across the lake, and took me to his house, which is but four miles
away from here. There I have remained, having my wounds cared for,
until now. He took part in the fight at Otompan, and returned last
evening with the news of your wonderful victory, and that you would
pass along here this morning.

"I had a narrow escape, last night, for some of the Aztec soldiers
would have seized me and taken me a prisoner to Mexico; but the
cazique aided me to escape, and gave me this follower of his, as a
guide. He is the same man who accompanied me in my flight from
Tezcuco, and brought me to join you at Tlascala."

"I am right glad that you have escaped, Sancho. Firstly, because
every stout arm is sorely needed. Secondly, because Marina has
grieved much for your loss. Truly, had you been her brother she
could not have been more affected. She is in the center of the
column. You had best tarry here until she comes along, and then
join her. She will be rejoiced to see you again."

Marina was indeed delighted, when she caught sight of Roger's tall
figure, and greeted him with much emotion. As they walked together,
she heard how he had escaped; and she related to him how she, under
the guard of the Tlascalans, had survived the terrible fight on the
causeway; and then gave him a full account of the great battle, on
the previous day.

"And what are we going to do now?" Roger asked, when she had
finished her narration. "Think you that we shall proceed to the
coast, and take ship for Europe?"

Marina tossed her head scornfully.

"You do not know Cortez," she said, "or you would not ask such a
question. He is already thinking how he can return, and capture the
capital."

"But unless he receives large reinforcements, that would seem
impossible," Roger said. "You have yourself told me that, had it
not been for the fall of the Mexican leader, nothing could have
saved you from destruction. The Aztec loss was heavy, no doubt; but
they can fill up their ranks and take the field again, in a week or
two, with a force as large as that which fought at Otompan. They
will not be dispirited, for they will know that it was but an
accident which deprived them of victory, and will no longer deem
the Spaniards invincible."

"It matters not," Marina said, carelessly. "Cortez will manage
things. Whatever he undertakes, that he will carry out."

Late in the afternoon, the army arrived at the barrier across the
road that marked the boundary of the Tlascalan territory. As they
passed it, the native allies burst into cries of gladness; and the
Spaniards joined in the shout, for to them, too, it seemed that
their dangers were at an end, and that they had reached rest and
abundance.

Cortez and the leaders, however, were by no means sanguine as to
the reception they should meet with. Their alliance had brought
misfortune upon the Tlascalans. Little more than one thousand out
of the eight thousand men who had marched with them had returned to
tell the tale. The rest had fallen in the defense of the palace, in
the fighting in the streets of Mexico, in the passage of the
causeway, or in the battle of Otompan.

What would the Tlascalans think, when they saw the broken remnant
of the army, which had marched out so proudly, and knew that they
brought on themselves the bitter enmity of the whole of the people
of Anahuac? Might they not well be tempted to avert the wrath of
the Aztecs, by falling upon the strangers, whose alliance had cost
them so dearly?

At the place at which they halted for the night, a town of some
fifteen thousand inhabitants, they were so kindly received by the
natives that these apprehensions were somewhat laid to rest. The
people came out to meet them, invited them to their houses, and
treated them with the greatest hospitality. Here they remained
three days, resting after their terrible fatigues.

They were visited here by Maxixca, the most influential of the four
great chiefs of the Tlascalans. He had been their most cordial
friend, on their first arrival; and his sentiments were in no wise
changed by the misfortunes that had befallen them. Indeed, his
admiration for them was heightened, by the manner in which they had
withstood the whole power of the Aztec nation.

The cordial greeting, given to them by one whose counsels were of
the highest authority in the Tlascalan nation, restored the
confidence of Cortez; and he accepted the invitation to continue
his march, at once, to the capital, which was some fifteen miles
away. The sick and wounded were placed in hammocks, which were
carried on the shoulders of the friendly natives; and as the army
approached the capital, crowds of people flocked out to meet them,
with cries of welcome, and escorted them into the city.

Cortez and his officers took up their abode in the palace of
Maxixca, and the rest of the army were quartered in that part of
the city over which he exercised special authority. Here they
remained for some weeks, during which the wounded recovered from
their injuries, the sick regained their strength in the bracing
mountain air, and the whole army shook off the effects of the
terrible hardships they had undergone, while retreating from
Mexico.

Cortez, during this time, was confined to his couch. The wound on
the hand, which he had received in the conflict in the capital, had
been so inflamed and aggravated that he had lost the use of two
fingers; and he had, in the retreat, received two severe wounds in
the head, one of which became so inflamed from inattention, and
from the fatigue and excitement he had gone through, that a portion
of the bone had to be removed; and the general lay, for some time,
at the point of death.

The news came, in a day or two after the army reached its resting
place, that a party of five horsemen and forty foot, who had gone
forward in charge of invalids and treasure from Tlascala, had all
been massacred; and twelve other soldiers, marching in the same
direction, had also been killed. Upon the other hand, they heard
that all was quiet on the coast; and the friendly demeanor of the
natives, there, was in no way changed.

Roger, seeing that for a time nothing could be done, and that the
troops were all eager to retire to the coast, dispatched Bathalda,
a few days after his arrival at Tlascala, to Amenche; to say that
he considered it certain that the Spaniards would retire; and that,
if she would come up to him in charge of Cuitcatl, whose safety he
could guarantee, while in Tlascalan territory, they might be
united; as Malinche had promised to obtain the consent of Cortez,
who always encouraged marriages between his followers and the
natives.

Before leaving, Bathalda handed to Roger a small bag.

"This," he said, "Maclutha gave to me, for you. It was for that
purpose she drew me aside, before you started. She bade me not
deliver it to you, unless I was compelled to part from you. It
contains some of the principal jewels taken from the treasure
house; and she said they might make you and the princess rich, when
you reach home.

"They are useless to her. She has no children and, now that Cacama
has gone, it is naught to her who rules over Tezcuco. Moreover,
these are but a small portion of the treasure in her possession."

Roger sent his warm thanks to Maclutha and, after Bathalda had
started, examined the contents of the bag, which he saw at once
were very valuable--consisting of large pearls, diamonds, and other
gems.

On the evening of the second day after starting, Bathalda returned,
alone.

"I have very bad news," he said, "so bad that I hardly like to tell
it. Four days since, an officer and guard arrived from Mexico, with
orders to arrest Cuitcatl, who was reported by the priests in the
neighborhood to have harbored a white man, and to have permitted
him to escape. Maclutha and Amenche were also arrested, and though
treated with every personal courtesy, were conducted to Mexico,
where the official said they were, for the present, to remain in
seclusion, in the royal palace."

Roger was stupefied by the news. What was to be done, he knew not.
To desert Amenche was not to be thought of, and yet he saw no way
of rejoining her, still less of rescuing her. In the present
excited state of the Aztec population, it would be certain death to
venture beyond the frontier of Tlascala.

He regarded his height, now, as the greatest misfortune. Had he
been short and slight, he would have disguised himself as a
Mexican, and under the guidance of Bathalda, have made his way to
the capital; but with a figure which would be instantly remarked,
wherever he went, this would be impossible.

He entered the palace, and sent in an urgent message to Malinche,
who was nursing Cortez. She listened patiently to his narrative.

"I pity you, Roger," she said, when he had finished; "but there is
nothing to be done."

"But I cannot march away and leave her," he said. "Rather than
that, I will disguise myself and take all risks, even though I know
that I must fail."

"You must have patience, Roger," she said. "Cortez will, I feel
sure, recover."

"But if so, it will only be to march down to the coast," Roger
broke in. "The whole army are eager to be off, before the Mexicans
can gather their forces and be ready to fall upon them."

"The army may think what it likes, and wish what it likes,"
Malinche said, quietly. "I am sure that Cortez will not go down to
the coast; and what he wills, he does. The others may grumble, but
Cortez leads them like tame deer. When he is well enough to speak
to them, they will listen and obey him. His thoughts, ill as he is,
are all of a fresh march to Mexico."

Hitherto, Roger had been as desirous as any of his comrades of a
return to the coast. It had seemed to him that there was no
possibility of success, and he longed to be on his way to Europe,
with his Indian bride.

But now everything was changed. He had come to have a faith in
Cortez, almost as absolute as that entertained by the general's
devoted followers; and he well knew that, if he still thought there
was a possibility of a successful march to Mexico, that march would
be made. He now, therefore, waited with impatience for Cortez to be
on his feet again.

But the waiting was long and tedious. Four weeks passed before the
general was again himself.

As soon as he became convalescent, the regulations which he issued
for the army, and the orders that he sent to the coast, for every
available man to be sent up to reinforce him, showed the soldiers
that he had no intentions of retiring; and a remonstrance was
signed, by a large number of officers and soldiers, against a
further stay in the country. But Cortez was not shaken. He prayed
them not to discredit the great name they had won, nor to leave
their glorious enterprise for others, more daring, to finish. How
could they, with honor, desert their allies who, at their
persuasion, had taken up arms, and had shared their fortunes, and
so leave them to the vengeance of the Aztecs? To retreat now would
be but to proclaim their weakness, and give confidence to their
foes.

If, however, there were any who preferred going home to the glory
of this great enterprise, then in God's Name let them go. He would
feel stronger, with but a few brave spirits with him, than if
surrounded by a host of false or cowardly men.

The troops of Narvaez had been the loudest in their complaints, but
they were silenced now by the enthusiasm with which the soldiers of
Cortez responded to the appeal of their leader; and all agreed to
postpone their departure, for the present.

A fresh source of danger speedily arose. Six Aztec ambassadors
arrived, bearing presents, and inviting the Tlascalans to forget
old animosities, and to enter into a treaty with them. All the
nations of Anahuac, they urged, should make common cause in defense
of their country; and they conjured them, by their common religion,
not to allow the white men to escape from their hands; but to
sacrifice them, at once, to their gods. These proposals were made
at a solemn council, called to receive them.

There had, even before the arrival of the ambassadors, been a
strong party in Tlascala who viewed the Spaniards, with hostility,
as the authors of the heavy losses they had suffered; and as
becoming, by their continued stay there, a burden to the state. The
head of this party was the young chief Xicotencatl, who had led the
Tlascalan armies in the desperate resistance they offered to the
Spaniards, on their first coming. When the ambassadors had made
their offers, he rose and urged his hearers to assent to the
proposal; saying that it were better to unite with their kindred,
and those of their own language, faith, and custom, than with these
fierce strangers.

The young warriors enthusiastically agreed; but, happily for the
Spaniards, the four great chiefs, one of whom was the father of
Xicotencatl, were opposed to the proposal. Maxixca especially
combated the idea.

"The Aztecs," he said, "are always false in speech, and false in
heart. It is fear that drives them, now, to offer their friendship
to the Tlascalans; and when the cause for fear has passed, they
will again be hostile. What? Are we to sacrifice the white men to
the gods--the men who have fought with us side by side against our
enemies, and who are now our guests? Were we to act thus, it would
be an act of the grossest perfidy."

Xicotencatl replied; but Maxixca, losing his temper, seized him
and, with sudden violence, thrust him from the chamber. So unusual
a step so astonished the assembly that it silenced all opposition,
and the alliance with the Mexicans was unanimously rejected.

Confident now that the Tlascalans were to be trusted, Cortez sent
out expeditions, composed of his own men and bodies of the allies,
and inflicted terrible punishment on the districts where the
isolated parties of Spaniards had been cut off and destroyed; and
defeated the natives in several hardly fought battles, capturing
their towns and enslaving the inhabitants.

Having thus restored the confidence of his followers and allies, he
prepared for a forward movement. Martin Lopez, ship builder to the
expedition, had escaped the slaughter on the causeway; and he now
ordered him to build at Tlascala thirteen ships, which could be
taken to pieces and carried on the shoulders of the Indians, to be
launched on Lake Tezcuco. The sails, rigging, and ironwork were to
be brought from the coast, where they had been stored since Cortez
had sunk his ships.

The Tlascalans placed a great number of men at the ship builders'
disposal. Timber was cut from the forest. Pitch, an article unknown
to the natives, obtained from the pines. New arms were manufactured.
Powder was made, with sulphur obtained from the volcanoes. And the
work, heavy though it was, was rapidly brought to a conclusion.

While it was going on, however, a terrible scourge swept over the
country. Smallpox, a disease hitherto unknown there, broke out on
the seacoast and swept across Mexico, carrying off great
numbers--among the victims being Maxixca, the faithful friend of
the Spaniards; and Cuitlahua, Montezuma's successor.

The latter was succeeded by Guatimozin, nephew of the two last
monarchs, who had married his cousin, one of Montezuma's daughters.
Like Cuitlahua he was a gallant prince, and had distinguished
himself greatly in the attacks on the Spaniards, in Mexico. He
continued the preparations Cuitlahua had begun for the defense;
but, like him, was greatly hampered by the fact that a large
proportion of the tribes recently conquered by the Aztecs had
seized the opportunity, caused by the confusion in the empire, to
throw off their allegiance; the royal orders being really obeyed
only by the population of the Valley of Mexico, itself.

Before starting on his march towards Mexico, Cortez permitted
several of his companions, who were disinclined to face a renewal
of the trials and hardships they had suffered, to leave; placing
his best ship at their disposal. Their loss was more than made up
by the capture of two vessels sent by Velasquez, who was ignorant
of the fate which had befallen Narvaez; and who considered it
certain that Cortez was a prisoner in his hands. The ships sailed
into port, where the captains and crews were at once seized, and
were then easily persuaded to join Cortez. Two ships fitted out by
the Governor of Jamaica also put into port, to repair damages after
a storm; and their crews were also persuaded, by the liberal
promises of Cortez, to abandon their service and join him. He thus
received a reinforcement of at least a hundred and fifty well-armed
men, together with fifty horses.

But this was not the end of the good fortune of Cortez. A merchant
ship, laden with arms and military stores, touched at Cuba; and the
captain, hearing of the discoveries in Mexico, thought that he
should find a good market there. He therefore sailed to Vera Cruz,
where his ship and cargo were purchased by Cortez, and the crew
swelled the force under him.

By Christmas everything was ready for the advance The army now
amounted to six hundred men, forty of whom were cavalry, with
eighty musketeers and crossbow men. It had also nine cannon taken
from the ships. The force of the native allies which joined them
was estimated at from one hundred and ten thousand, to one hundred
and fifty thousand; and consisted not only of the Tlascalan troops,
but of those of Cholula, Tepeaca, and other neighboring towns; who,
after their defeat by Cortez, had submitted themselves to the
Spanish rule.

But Cortez had no idea of taking all these with him, as it would be
difficult to obtain provisions for such a host; and he left them
behind, to bring on the vessels when completed, and to aid in
further operations. He himself marched with the Spaniards and a
small body of allies, and reached Tezcuco without opposition. The
prince whom Montezuma had appointed to succeed Cacama, fearing the
vengeance of the population, had fled to Tlascala; but returning,
in hopes of finding a party there in his favor, was seized and put
to death by Coanaco, another brother, who had been recognized as
king by the Tezcucans.

When the Spaniards approached the city, they found it almost
entirely deserted, the inhabitants having fled across the lake to
Mexico. Their ruler had accompanied them, and Cortez appointed
another brother in his place. This prince lived but a few months,
and was succeeded by another member of the royal house--the prince
who had, during Cacama's lifetime, obtained a large portion of his
dominion; and who proved a valiant and faithful ally of the
Spaniards, in their struggle with his countrymen.

The Tezcucans gradually returned after Cortez had nominated a new
sovereign, and Cortez at once set a large number of them to dig a
canal from the town itself to the lake, so that the men putting
together the ships could labor under his very eye.

Several of the cities round sent in to make their submission; and a
week after his arrival Cortez marched, with a body of Spaniards and
allies, against Iztapalapan, a town of fifty thousand inhabitants,
lying near the narrow tongue of land dividing the great lake from
that of Xochicalco.

The natives came out to meet them, and fought bravely, but were
driven into the city. The greater part of those who could not
escape were slaughtered. While engaged in the work of plunder, the
Spaniards were alarmed by a rush of water; the natives having
broken the bank of the great lake. The troops with the greatest
difficulty escaped with their lives, many of the allies being
drowned.

The fate of Iztapalapan excited consternation among the other
cities, and many sent in to make their submission, among them
Otompan and Chalco. Not only had the Mexican Empire fallen to
pieces, by the detachment of its distant provinces; but even near
home long smoldering rivalries broke into flame. The Aztecs were
but a small portion, even of the people of the Valley of Mexico;
and the greater portion of these were glad to take advantage of the
distress of the capital to break up the union that had so long
existed. Cortez, by promises and presents, assisted the work.

After some weeks' stay at Tezcuco, the news came that the ships
were all completed, and ready to be carried down; and two hundred
foot and fifteen horse, under the command of Sandoval, were sent to
escort them. But scarcely had he reached the frontier of Tlascala
than he saw a vast procession advancing. The ships had already been
put together, and tried on a lake among the hills; and were now
being brought down in pieces by an immense number of porters, with
a great military escort. Sandoval sent the larger portion of the
Indian escort home, but kept twenty thousand of the best warriors.
After four days of painful labor, the host of porters and fighting
men reached Tezcuco. It was, indeed, an immense undertaking that
had been accomplished; for the whole of the wood and iron work, of
thirteen ships, had to be carried for upwards of sixty miles, over
a difficult and mountainous country.

A few days later, Cortez took half of his Spanish force and the
whole of his allies, and started on an expedition to reconnoiter
the capital, and to punish some of the towns which had returned
insolent answers in reply to his summons.

The town of Xaltocan, standing on an island, was first attacked.
The dike leading to it was found to be cut through; and the
Spaniards, for a time, suffered greatly. They found a ford,
however; reached the town, and put all who resisted to the sword.

Three other towns, which had been deserted by their inhabitants,
were occupied and sacked. They then marched against Tlacopan and,
after a battle outside the town, occupied the suburbs. Another hot
fight was necessary before the town was fully taken.

Here the Spaniards halted for some days, fighting almost daily with
the Aztecs. In one encounter, Cortez allowed himself to be decoyed
on to the great causeway, upon which he had before suffered such
disaster. When he was halfway across the Aztecs turned,
reinforcements arrived from the city, swarms of canoes attacked the
Spaniards in flank; and it was only after desperate fighting, and
some loss, that they regained the mainland.

Having accomplished their object, the force returned to Tezcuco,
greatly harassed on the march by the enemy. Other expeditions were
undertaken. During these events the work of putting together the
vessels was continued and, to the great satisfaction of the
Spaniards, news reached them from the coast of the arrival of three
ships, with reinforcements: two hundred men, seventy or eighty
horses, arms, and ammunition.

When these reached Tezcuco, Cortez felt confident that he should
now be able to overcome all opposition. On the fifth of April he
again started on an expedition. Passing through some deep gorges,
he attempted to carry a mountain fortress; but was repulsed, with
loss, from the volleys of stones and rocks rolled down upon the
assailants.

After several other battles they neared Xochimilco, one of the
richest of the Aztec towns. Like Mexico, it stood in the water, but
at a small distance from the edge of the lake. This was only
captured after desperate fighting, Cortez himself having a narrow
escape of his life. The next morning at dawn, great numbers of
Aztecs landed from canoes, and fell upon the Spaniards; and it was
only after a long and desperate struggle that the latter gained the
day.

They now continued their march to Tlacopan, the enemy following
closely, and striking whenever they saw an opportunity; and the
troops were glad, indeed, when they again reached Tezcuco. By this
time the canal was finished and the ships were put together; and
after discovering and punishing another conspiracy against his
life, Cortez gave orders for the fleet to advance. Solemn mass was
held, and then the vessels, in the sight of an enormous concourse
of people, dropped down the canal, one after the other, and reached
the lake.

Cortez mustered his men, and found that he had eighty-seven horse;
eight hundred and eighteen foot, of which one hundred and eighteen
were musketeers or crossbow men; three large iron field pieces, and
fifteen light brass guns. Three hundred of the men were told off to
man the ships.

The Indian confederates arrived punctually: fifty thousand
Tlascalans, and a vast number of levies from the other tribes.

The army was divided into three corps. One was to take up its post,
under Alvarado, at Tlacopan. Another, under Olid, was to aid in
capturing the causeway; while Sandoval had command of the third,
whose movements were to be determined by circumstances. Cortez
himself took charge of the fleet.

A quarrel arose between a Spanish soldier and a Tlascalan chief,
who was a relation of Xicotencatl; who at once left the army, and
started for Tlascala. He had always been bitterly hostile to the
Spaniards; and Cortez saw that, unless the movement was stopped, it
might become very serious. He sent a party of natives after him,
with instructions to prevail upon him, if possible, to return. He
refused to do so. Cortez dispatched a body of cavalry in pursuit,
arrested him in Tlascala, brought him down to Tezcuco, and there
hung him in the sight of his own countrymen.

The divisions of Alvarado and Olid met with no resistance in
establishing themselves at Tlacopan. They cut the reservoir that
supplied the city with fresh water, the great lake being salt. The
next day the two divisions marched on to the causeway to make
themselves masters, if possible, of the first bridge.

The natives pursued their former tactics, desperately defending
barricades thrown across the causeway, and attacking the invaders
with a crowd of missiles from canoes. After a long and obstinate
fight, the Spaniards and their allies were obliged to fall back,
with considerable loss; and Olid drew off with his division to his
station commanding the other causeway.

Iztapalapan having been again occupied by the enemy, Sandoval's
division attacked them by land; while Cortez, with his fleet, lay
off the shore. After capturing the town, Cortez turned his
attention to the canoes of the natives, which darkened the surface
of the lake. At this moment a fresh breeze sprang up; and the
ships, spreading their canvas, dashed amongst the canoes,
overturning and destroying great numbers; while the cannon tore
others to pieces, with discharges of bullets; and comparatively few
succeeded in regaining the city.

It was now getting nearly dark, and the fleet coasted along the
great southern causeway to the fort of Xoloc, where another branch
of the causeway joined the main dike.

The fort was feebly garrisoned. Cortez landed his soldiers and
carried it by storm. Here he established his headquarters, landing
some of the cannon from the ships to strengthen the position.

He was now within half a league of the city, and two out of the
three great approaches were already in his hands. Night and day the
natives attacked the garrison; but the ships, and the guns in
positions, repulsed their assaults.

After some days' delay, a simultaneous attack was made by the
Spaniards. Two of the ships, one on each side of the causeway,
advanced abreast of the army, sweeping the dike with their fire.
The enemy were driven back; and Cortez, passing gap after gap,
reached the island on which the city stood. Behind them, as they
advanced, the native allies filled up the breaches, and made them
practicable for artillery and cavalry; and as soon as the work was
completed, the Spaniards who had already passed were reinforced by
large numbers of their allies.



Chapter 21: A Victim For The Gods.


The street which the Spaniards entered, after leaving the causeway,
intersected the city from north to south. It was broad and
perfectly straight and, from the roofs of the houses which lined
it, a storm of missiles was poured on the Spaniards, as they
advanced. Cortez set the allies to work to level the houses, as
fast as the Spaniards won their way along the street. This they
did, until they reached the first canal. The bridge here had been
broken down, and after the Indians had crossed, the temporary
planks were pulled after them, and they joined their countrymen
behind a solid rampart of stone, erected on the other side of the
canal.

It was not until after two hours' hard fighting, and the use of
artillery, that this obstacle was cleared away; and the Spaniards,
wading across the canal, pressed forward without further resistance,
until they reached the great square, on one side of which stood the
palace they had so long occupied. The Aztecs--disheartened at the
manner in which all the defenses on which they relied had been
captured by the Spaniards, and by their presence in the heart of
the city--for some time desisted from their efforts; but they were
roused to fury, as a body of Spaniards rushed up the winding terraces
to the summit of the great temple, and hurled the priests from its summit.

Then, with a yell of fury, they threw themselves upon their
enemies. Their headlong rush swept the Spaniards back into the
square, when they were attacked by bodies of natives, pouring down
every street. For once the Spaniards lost their presence of mind,
fell into disorder, and were swept before the torrent, down the
street which they had just traversed.

In vain Cortez attempted to stem the stream. The panic spread to
the allies, and the whole mass were flying before the natives; when
a body of cavalry came up and plunged into the crowd. The natives
were shaken by the appearance of the enemies they feared so much;
and Cortez, taking advantage of the confusion, rallied his
followers, and again drove the Aztecs back into the square.

Night was now at hand and, dragging off the cannon which had been
abandoned in their flight, the force marched off in good order,
though hotly pressed by the natives, and retired to Xoloc. Alvarado
and Sandoval also succeeded in crossing their respective causeways,
but neither of them could penetrate into the city.

The attack had failed, but it had strengthened the position of the
Spaniards; for seeing the speedy manner in which they had overcome
all the defenses erected by the Mexicans, many of the cities which
had hitherto stood aloof now sent in their submission, and supplied
levies to assist them in their work; while Ixtlilxochitl, who had
now become Lord of Tezcuco, and was a strong adherent of the
Spaniards, brought up a force of fifty thousand Tezcucans, who were
divided among the three armies.

Another simultaneous attack was now made, the advance along the
causeway being, as before, covered by the ships; but the enemy
fought stoutly, and some hours elapsed before the Spaniards again
entered the city. The advance was now more easy than on the
previous occasion, owing to the destruction of the buildings
bordering the streets. The natives, however, still fought with the
greatest obstinacy; but the great square was at last reached.

Thinking to discourage the natives, by the destruction of some of
the principal edifices, Cortez ordered the palace which had served
as the former barracks to be set on fire, as also the house of
birds adjoining Montezuma's palace, and those were soon a mass of
flames. The Aztecs, however, were infuriated rather than
intimidated; and the fight raged with greater fury than ever.
Having accomplished his object, Cortez again gave the order to fall
back and, covered by the cavalry, retired down the street; so
desperately assailed, by the natives, that but few men reached the
fort unwounded.

Day after day the same tactics were repeated, the Mexicans every
night repairing the breaches cleared out every day by the Spanish
allies. Cortez found it impossible to guard the causeway and
prevent this, the soldiers being already overcome by the fatigue of
their daily encounters. Alvarado's division, however, held at night
the ground they won in the daytime; but the troops suffered
dreadfully from the incessant toil, and from the rain, which poured
down in torrents. The soldiers of Cortez fared little better, for
the buildings in the fort of Xoloc afforded shelter but to few; and
the rest had to sleep on the causeway in its rear, exposed to all
the tempestuous weather.

Frequently, too, they were called up to battle; for the Aztec
emperor, contrary to the usual practice of his countrymen,
frequently attacked by night; often making simultaneous attacks on
the three divisions on the causeways, while at the same moment
troops from the neighboring towns attacked their camps in the rear.
He did not content himself with open attacks, but resorted to
stratagem. On one occasion he had a large number of canoes in
ambuscade, among some tall reeds bordering the lake. Several large
boats then rowed near the Spanish vessels. Believing that they were
filled with provisions intended for the city, two of the smaller
vessels pursued them. The Aztec boats made for the reeds, the
Spaniards followed, and presently struck upon submerged timbers the
Indians had driven in. They were instantly attacked by the whole
fleet of canoes, most of the men were wounded, and several,
including the two captains, slain, and one of the Spanish craft
captured.

It was now three months since the siege had begun, and the attitude
of the Mexicans was as bold and defiant as ever. Several attempts
which Cortez had made to open negotiations with the young emperor
had been received with scorn. It was certain that, sooner or later,
famine would do its work; for the approaches to the city were all
in the hands of the Spaniards, and as the towns of the lake were
either friendly or overawed by the great army of their allies, even
the canoes, which at first made their way in at night with
provisions, had ceased to steal across in the darkness. The great
native levies were of little use to the Spaniards in the absolute
fighting, but they did good service by overawing the towns, making
expeditions against the tribes that had not yet consented to throw
in their lot with the invaders, and by sweeping in provisions from
a wide extent of country.

But to wait until famine did its work little suited the spirit of
the Spaniards. The process would assuredly be a long one, for men
who fought so stoutly would resist starvation with equal tenacity;
besides, the duration of the siege was already beginning to excite
discontent among the allies, whose wars were generally of very
short duration. The Spaniards, too, were suffering from severe
illness brought on by fatigue, exposure, and hardship.

It was now determined to make a grand effort to obtain possession
of the great market of Tlatelolco, which lay on the northwestern
part of the city. Its possession would enable the force of Cortez
to join hands with those of Alvarado and Sandoval; and the spacious
market itself, with its halls and porticoes, would furnish
accommodation for the army; and enable them to attack the city at
close quarters, instead of having to fight their way, every day,
along the causeway.

Sandoval was to join Alvarado, sending seventy picked troops to
support Cortez. Advancing along the causeway, and supported not
only by the ships, but by a countless host of canoes filled with
the allies of the lake cities, who penetrated the canals, and
caused confusion in the rear of the Aztecs, the division of Cortez
cleared the suburbs of their opponents, and then advanced towards
the square of Tlatelolco by three great streets.

Alderete commanded the force that advanced by the main central
avenue. This was a raised causeway, with canals running on either
side of the road. Tapia and a brother of Alvarado commanded one of
the other columns, while Cortez led the third. A small body of
cavalry, with three guns, remained in reserve in the great street
leading to the causeway; and here the column were to rally, in case
of disaster.

The three columns advanced simultaneously. The Spanish pressed the
Aztecs back before them. Their allies filled up the canals as they
took them, one by one. The Tlascalans stormed the houses, and
attacked the enemy on their roofs; while the canoes engaged those
of the Aztecs, and so prevented them from interfering with the men
occupied in filling up the breaches. The parallel streets were near
enough to each other for the Spaniards to hear the shouts of their
companions in the other columns, and to know that all were gaining
ground steadily.

The enemy in the streets fought with less obstinacy than usual; and
Cortez, with his usual keen-sightedness, at once apprehended that
the feebleness of the resistance indicated some device, and that
the Aztecs were allowing them to advance, only to lead them into a
trap.

He had received a message from Alderete saying that he was getting
on fast, and that he was but a short distance from the great
square. Fearing that this officer, eager to be the first to gain
the marketplace, was not taking proper precautions to secure his
retreat; Cortez, with a small body of troops, retraced his steps,
and turned up the street by which Alderete's column had advanced.
He had gone but a short distance, when he saw that his stringent
orders had been neglected; for he came upon an opening some thirty
feet wide, full of water at least twelve feet deep. A slight
attempt, only, had been made to stop the gap; and stones and
timber, lying by the side, showed that it had been abandoned as
soon as commenced.

The general saw, too, that the road had been narrowed as it
approached this point, and that the work had evidently been
recently done. Much alarmed at the consequence of this neglect, he
at once set his men to fill up the breach; but they had scarcely
begun the operation when a terrific yell arose, drowning the
mingled clamor of the distant conflict.

Alderete had, as Cortez supposed, pressed on the retreating Aztecs
with too great eagerness. He had carried the barricades which
defended the breach, and had given orders that the chasm should be
filled up. But in their eagerness to be first in the square, the
Spaniards had pressed on, none caring to stop to see that the
allies carried out the order. So, taking position after position,
they pressed on until they were close to the square.

Suddenly the horn of Guatimozin, the emperor, sent forth a piercing
note from the summit of a temple. As if by magic, the retreating
Aztecs turned and fell on their pursuers; while swarms of warriors
from the adjoining streets, lanes, and corners attacked the
advancing column.

Taken completely by surprise, bewildered by the suddenness and fury
of the onslaught, appalled by the terrific war yells, smitten down
by the rain of missiles from the Aztecs, the Spaniards fell into
confusion, and were swept down the street like foam on the crest of
a wave. In vain their leaders attempted to rally them. Their voices
were drowned in the din, and their followers, panic stricken, now
thought only of preserving their lives.

On they came, until they reached the edge of the cut. Here some
plunged in, others were pushed in by the pressure from behind.
Those who could swim were pulled down by their struggling comrades.
Some got across and tried to climb the slippery side of the dike,
but fell back and were seized by the Aztecs; whose canoes now
dashed up, and added to the confusion by hurling a storm of
missiles into the crowd.

Cortez, with his little party, kept his station on the other side
of the breach. They were already surrounded by Aztecs, who had
landed on the causeway behind them; but held their ground
desperately, and endeavored, as far as possible, to assist their
comrades to climb out of the water. Cortez was speedily recognized,
and storms of missiles were poured upon him, but these glanced
harmlessly from his helmet and armor. Six of the Aztecs threw
themselves upon him together, and made a desperate effort to drag
him into their boat. In the struggle he received a severe wound in
the leg, and fell.

Olid, one of his followers, sprang to his rescue, severed the arm
of one of the natives, and ran another through the body; and being
joined by a comrade named Lerma, and by a Tlascalan chief, stood
over the body of Cortez and drove off his foes, dispatching three
more of his assailants; but Olid fell, mortally wounded, by the
side of his leader.

Quinones, the captain of the guard, with several of his men now
fought his way up, lifted Cortez from the water, and laid him on
the road. One of his pages brought up his horse, but fell, wounded
in the throat by a javelin. Guzman, the chamberlain, then seized
the bridle, and held it while Cortez was helped into the saddle;
but was himself seized by the Aztecs, and carried off in a canoe.

Cortez, wounded as he was, would still have fought on; but
Quinones, taking his horse by the bridle, turned it to the rear,
exclaiming that his leader's life was "too important to the army to
be thrown away there!"

The mass of fugitives poured along the causeway. The road was soft,
and was so cut up that it was knee deep in mud; and in some places
the water of the canals beside it met across it. Those on the
flanks were often forced, by the pressure, down the slippery sides;
and were instantly captured and carried off by the canoes of the
enemy. Cortez's standard bearer was among those who fell in the
canal, but he succeeded in recovering his footing, and saved the
standard.

At last the fugitives reached the spot where the cannon and cavalry
had been placed in reserve. Here Cortez rallied them, and charged
the Aztecs with the little body of horse, while the artillery
opened a hot fire upon them. He then sent orders to the other two
columns to fall back and, when these had rejoined him, the division
retired, Cortez covering the movement with the cavalry.

As soon as they were freed from the city, Tapia was sent round on
horseback to acquaint the other commanders of the failure. They had
advanced at the same time as Cortez, and had on their side nearly
gained the square; when they, too, were startled by the blast of
Guatimozin's horn, and by the terrible yell that followed it. Then
they heard the sound of battle, which had before been clearly
audible, roll away in the distance; and knew that the division of
Cortez had been driven back.

In a short time the attack upon themselves increased in fury, as
the troops who had been engaged with Cortez returned and joined in
the attack upon them. Two or three bloody heads were thrown among
them, with shouts of "Malinzin!"

Although Sandoval and Alvarado did not credit the death of their
commander, they felt that it was useless to persevere, and indeed
were unable to withstand the furious assaults of the Aztecs. With
great difficulty they drew off their troops to the entrenchment on
the causeway, and here the guns of the ships, sweeping the road,
drove back their assailants. The greatest anxiety prevailed as to
the fate of Cortez, until Tapia arrived, bleeding from several
wounds, which he had received from parties of men whom Guatimozin
had stationed to interrupt the communication between the two camps.

Sandoval at once rode round. He, too, was attacked on the road; but
his armor, and that of his horse protected him from the missiles
showered upon them. On arriving at the camp, he found the troops
much dispirited. Numbers had been killed and wounded, and no less
than sixty-two Spaniards, with a multitude of allies, had fallen
into the hands of the enemy. Indeed, the column around Alderete had
been almost entirely destroyed, and two guns and seven horses had
been lost.

Cortez explained to his follower the cause of the disaster, and
told Sandoval that, as he should be unable to take the field for a
few days, he must take his place, and watch over the safety of the
camps.

Roger Hawkshaw had borne his full share in the desperate conflicts
that had taken place. In the previous combats he had fought only to
preserve his own life, but now he was eager for the fray. His
friend Cuitcatl and his promised bride were prisoners in Mexico,
and he fought now to deliver them. It was nearly a year from the
time when he had first retreated along the fatal causeway; and in
that time his frame had broadened out, and his strength increased;
and so terrible were the blows he dealt that Cortez, himself, had
several times spoken to him in terms of approval of his valor, and
had appointed him to be one of his own bodyguard. He had stood
beside him at the edge of the breach, and had done good service
there.

"You fight like a paladin," Cortez said, as Roger cut down three
natives who had rushed upon him; "but see, Sancho, put up your
sword for a minute, and take up that pike. If you hand the end to
those poor fellows in the water, your strength will be sufficient
to haul them up."

Roger at once set to, at the work of saving life, and dragged more
than a score of men who would otherwise have been drowned. He heard
the cry which was raised, when Cortez was attacked; and throwing
down his pike and drawing his sword, turned to rush to his
assistance; but at this moment two Mexicans threw themselves upon
him, his foot slipped in the mud, and in another moment he and his
two assailants were rolling down the deep bank into the water.

With a mighty effort, he freed himself from their grasp and,
gaining the bank, tried to climb up; but a canoe dashed up
alongside, a dozen Mexicans threw themselves upon him, and with a
triumphant shout drew him into the boat, which at once paddled off
from the scene of conflict.

Roger, as he lay at the bottom of the canoe, felt that all hope was
over. He knew that the Aztecs never spared a captive taken in war,
and that all who fell into their hands were destined for the altars
of their gods. He regretted deeply that he had not fallen in
battle; but determined that, at any rate, he would not die tamely;
and resolved that, rather than be slaughtered in cold blood on the
altar, when the time came, he would offer so desperate a resistance
that they would be forced to kill him.

Passing along several canals, the canoe stopped at some stairs.
Roger was taken out, and led through a shouting crowd to a great
temple, where he was thrust into a prison room, already occupied by
several Spaniards. Their numbers increased, until they amounted to
twenty.

Few words were spoken among the prisoners. Their arms were free,
but their legs firmly secured with ropes; and ten armed Aztecs kept
watch over them, to see that they made no attempt to unfasten their
bonds.

One of the prisoners Roger saw, to his regret, was his friend Juan.
He was severely wounded in several places; as indeed was Roger
himself, although in the excitement of the battle he had scarce
noticed it.

"Well, lad!" the old soldier said. "This is a bad ending of our
gold seeking. Who would have thought that it was to be one's lot,
first to be murdered on the altars of a hideous god, and then to
furnish a meal to a race of savages?"

"The furnishing the meal does not trouble me," Roger replied.
"Whether one is drowned and eaten by fishes, or killed and eaten by
Aztecs, makes, as far as I can see, but little difference to one.
However, I don't quite make up my mind to the worst yet, Juan. They
must have captured a great number of us, for I saw many carried off
who are not here; besides a multitude of Tlascalans and our other
allies. I do not suppose they will sacrifice us all at once, but
are likely to take so many a day. In that case, we may have the
luck to be among the last; and before our turn comes, the Spaniards
may be masters of the town."

Juan shook his head.

"It is just as well to hope, lad; but I think the chances are next
to nothing. Even if Cortez himself gets out safe, and the troops
draw off without much further loss, it will be some days before
they will attack again, after such a maiming as we got, this time.
Even then their chances of success will be no better than they were
today; worse, in fact, for we have lost something like a sixth of
our force, beside what may have fallen in the attack from the other
side; put it at a quarter, altogether. Our natives will be
dispirited by their defeat today, and the Aztecs will have gained
in confidence.

"By Saint James, but those fellows fight well! Who would have
thought, when we saw them bowing and smiling when we first arrived
in the city, and submitting so meekly to everything, that they
could fight like fiends? Never did I see men so reckless of life.

"Pedro has fallen. I loved him as a son. But far better dead than
here."

"I am sorry, indeed, to hear that he has fallen, Juan. I feared
that he had, for he would not have let you be captured, had he been
alive.

"I don't give up all hope for ourselves. The Mexicans fight like
heroes, but in the end we must win, in spite of their valor. Even
if we do not take the town by storm, which I don't think we ever
should do, if it were provisioned, we shall take it by hunger. They
must be well-nigh starving now. In another month there will not be
a soul alive in the city.

"You do not think there is any chance of our making our escape?"

"Not unless wings could sprout out from our shoulders," Juan said,
"and we could fly through the air. You may be sure these fellows
will keep too sharp a lookout upon us to give us the shadow of a
chance; besides, if we were to get out, we could not go on foot
without being detected.

"You might manage, lad, with a dark night to hide your color, and
with the aid of a native dress, for you can speak their tongue; but
as for me, the idea is hopeless, and not to be thought of. No, no,
lad, I do not delude myself. My time has come; and I shall bear it,
I hope, like a man, and a Christian."

From time to time, Aztecs came in to see that the prisoners were
safe. From their conversation with the guards, Roger gathered that
the attack had everywhere failed, and that the Spaniards had
retired to their camps.

Late in the afternoon some priests entered. Two of the prisoners
were selected by them, their bonds cut, and they were taken away.
Soon afterwards, the sound of the great war drum reverberated
through the city.

The Spaniards in their camps started to arms, on hearing the sound;
but they were not long in understanding its meaning, for from their
camps they beheld a great procession winding up the principal
pyramid. Alvarado's camp, which was the nearest to the city, was a
short mile away from the temple; and in the clear evening air the
troops could see that there were five or six white figures among
them.

As usual, the victims were decorated with plumes of feathers, to do
honor to their own sacrifice. They were driven along with blows
and, when they reached the summit of the temple, were seized and
thrown, one by one, upon their backs upon the sacrificial stone,
which was convex, so as to give a curve to their bodies. The
principal priest then, with a sharp stone knife, cut through the
skin and flesh between two of the ribs and, plunging his hand into
the orifice, dragged out the heart, which he presented to the
figure of the god.

The sight, distant as it was, excited the Spaniards to the verge of
madness; and if it had not been for their officers, they would have
seized their weapons and rushed forward again to the attack, to
avenge the murder of their comrades.

The feelings of the captives, as they heard the sound of the drums,
the shouts of the natives, and once or twice caught the scream of
agony of their comrades, were terrible. This was the fate that
they, too, were to undergo; and men who had, a hundred times,
looked death in battle in the face, shuddered and trembled at their
approaching doom.

Each day two of their number were taken, and the same terrible
scene was gone through. Roger was rather surprised that he himself
was not one of the first selected, as his height and figure made
him specially conspicuous among his comrades; but he supposed that
he was being one of those reserved for some special festival.
Whatever the famine might be in the city, the captives were well
fed; for it was a point of honor, among the Aztecs, that all
victims offered to the gods should be in good health and condition.

The guards were changed every six hours, and on the third day, in
the officer over the relief, Roger recognized, to his surprise and
delight, his friend Bathalda. The latter, as he entered, made a
significant motion to Roger, as he caught his eye, to make no sign
that he recognized him.

The Aztecs, as usual, sat down in groups, chatting. They had no
fear whatever of the prisoners attempting to escape in the daytime,
and it was only at night that they exercised any special vigilance
in seeing that they did not attempt to unloose their bonds.
Bathalda presently sauntered up into the corner in which Roger was
sitting.

"How are my friends?" the latter asked, in a low voice.

"Well," Bathalda replied. "Cuitcatl explained to the young emperor
the circumstances under which he came to know and assist you, and
was at once restored to favor, and now commands a large body of
troops here. I have not seen the princess. She is at the palace.
Cuitcatl bade me tell you that they are working for you, and will
rescue you before the time comes for your sacrifice; but at present
the watch is too strict."

"But I may be chosen, any day," Roger said.

Bathalda shook his head.

"Cuitcatl has bribed the priests who choose the victims to leave
you until the last; so you need not feel uneasiness on that score.
Be patient and watchful. If any of your guard approach you and say,
'The time is at hand,' you will know that he is a friend. Act as he
tells you. I dare not say more, now."

Ten days passed. Juan had gone, and Roger had been much moved at
parting with him--more so, indeed, than the old soldier himself,
who had kept up firmly, and was prepared to meet his fate with
contempt for his enemies, in the assurance that his death would be
terribly avenged.

Bathalda had not reappeared. As the number of prisoners had
decreased, the guard had been diminished; and as there now only
remained Roger and one other, and both were still bound, a single
Aztec relieved the two who had, the night before, kept guard.

He stood, indifferently gazing through the loophole, until Roger's
companion fell asleep. Then he approached him and said:

"The time is at hand. Tomorrow the other will be taken. The number
will be made up from the other prisons. At night Cuitcatl will be
outside. The door here will not be bolted. You will have but one
man to watch you; but we know not whom he may be, and may not be
able to arrange with him. If we do, he will give you the password.
If not, you must deal with him. The man who will follow me is in
the secret. You must unfasten your ropes while he is here, and he
will aid you to do them up again, so that, while to the eye they
will seem secure, they can be shaken off instantly.

"Bathalda and another will accompany you. I do not know who the
other is; but I was told that you would understand."

That other Roger felt sure must be Amenche; and his heart beat
hotly, at the thought that his dear princess would share his
flight.

The hours passed quickly. The next day the last Spaniard was taken;
and no sooner had he been forced, struggling and resisting, from
the chamber; than the guard who, since he had taken up his post
four hours before, had made no sign to Roger, gave the password
agreed upon. The latter rose to his feet and, with the aid of the
native, unfastened the cords that bound his ankles together.

For half an hour he paced up and down the chamber, to restore the
circulation to his feet. Then the guard replaced the cords, but did
it in such a way that, though they seemed as tight and secure as
before, they would at a slight effort fall off, and leave him free.

At eight o'clock in the evening the guard was relieved. He had told
Roger that he was to listen for the cry of an owl outside, twice
repeated; and that upon hearing this, he would know that his
friends were without. Roger listened anxiously for the password
from his new guard; but as it did not come, he concluded that
Cuitcatl had not been able to bribe him, and that he must himself
overpower the man.

The Aztec placed himself at the loophole, and stood looking out;
turning, from time to time, to see by the light of the torch, which
was fixed close to where Roger was lying, that he was making no
attempt to release himself from his bonds.

It was not until nearly midnight that Roger heard the expected
signal. No sooner was the second call given, than he pulled the
knot which kept the cords together, raised himself noiselessly to
his feet, and sprang upon the Aztec. Taken by surprise, the man was
no more than a child in Roger's strong grasp. In a moment he was
thrown down, his cloth was twisted round his mouth, so as to
prevent any cry from escaping him, and his arms were bound behind
him with Roger's rope.

Roger then took his sword and javelin, and went to the door. As he
had been told would be the case, the outer bolts were unfastened.
Passing along a passage, he came to the outside gate. This was
securely fastened, but Roger had no difficulty in scaling the roof
of a building leaning against the outer wall; and on reaching this,
he pulled himself up and dropped down into the street beyond.

Three persons were standing at the gate, and he at once made
towards them. One ran forward with a little cry, and threw herself
into his arms. The others were, as he had expected, Cuitcatl and
Bathalda. The former saluted him warmly.

"Thank the gods you are free, Roger," he said. "I have a canoe
close at hand for you. Bathalda will accompany you and the
princess. I cannot leave. I am an Aztec, and shall fight until the
last, with our brave young emperor."

"I hope, Cuitcatl, that when the resistance is over--as it must be
before long, for I know from the talk of the guards that famine is
among you, and that hundreds are dying daily--I hope that I may be
able to aid you, as you are aiding me."

"I care not to live," Cuitcatl said. "The empire is lost."

"But there is no dishonor in that," Roger replied. "No men could
defend themselves more bravely than you have done, and there is no
disgrace in being vanquished by superior arms. I trust that you may
live, and be happy, yet."

"Let us not stand here talking," the young cazique said. "It is not
as it was before. Then you might walk through the city at midnight,
without meeting with a single person. We sleep no longer now, but
make nightly attacks on the Spaniards; and at any moment bodies of
troops may come along."

The little party moved forward, and in a minute descended the
steps. Bathalda took his place in a small canoe lying there.

"Here is a weapon which will suit you better than that sword and
javelin," he said, handing him a war club, a heavy weapon, with
pieces of sharp-pointed obsidian fixed in it.

Roger helped Amenche into the canoe, wrung Cuitcatl warmly by the
hand, and then stepped in.

"Go," the latter exclaimed. "I can hear troops approaching."

So saying, he bounded swiftly away. Bathalda sat listening for a
moment, to discover the direction from which the troops were
coming. As soon as he made out the soft tread of the shoeless feet,
he dipped his paddle in the water, and the boat glided noiselessly
away.

It was not long before they emerged from the narrow water way on to
the lake; and then the boat's head was turned in the direction in
which lay the Tlacopan causeway. Presently Amenche, who had been
sitting nestled close to Roger--too happy even to speak--sat up and
said:

"Hush!"

Bathalda ceased rowing.

"There is a large canoe coming up behind us," he said, listening
intently. "I can hear others on the lake, beyond us."

"We had better make into the shore again," Roger said, "and let
them pass us."

The canoe, however, was not very far behind; and those on board
caught sight of the little craft, as she rowed in towards shore. It
was unusual to see so small a boat at night. The idea that it might
contain a spy occurred to them, and they shouted to them to stop.

Bathalda exerted himself to the utmost, but the canoe came rapidly
up to them. As the command to stop was again disregarded, a volley
of javelins was discharged.

"We cannot escape," Bathalda said. "They will be upon us, before we
can land."

"Cease rowing," Roger said.

"Amenche, lie still, dear, at the bottom of the boat. I will deal
with them."

Seeing that the oarsmen had stopped paddling, the volley of
javelins ceased; and the canoe, which contained some twenty men,
ran alongside.

As she did so, Roger sprang on board her. Three or four of the
natives were struck down in an instant, with his terrible weapon.
The others, as soon as they recovered from their astonishment, rose
from their seats and attacked him. Their numbers were but of slight
avail. Standing in the bow of the boat, and swinging his weapon
round his head, Roger kept them off; beating down one, each time
his weapon fell. In vain they tried to close with him. His great
size, and the suddenness with which he had attacked them, acted
upon their superstitious fears. They knew not what sort of being it
was with whom they had to deal, and the terrible strength
displayed, and the instant fate that fell on all who approached
him, appalled them.

Roger soon took the offensive and, making his way along the boat,
drove them back before him. At last, when more than half their
number had fallen, the rest sprang overboard and swam to the shore.
Roger had been wounded by three or four spear thrusts, but these
had been too hastily given to penetrate very deeply.

"I am unhurt, Amenche," he said, making his way forward again, and
stepping into the canoe.

There was no reply. He stooped over, as she lay quietly there.

"She has fainted," he said.

"Row on, Bathalda. You had best give me the other paddle. I can
hear boats coming in this direction. No doubt they heard the yells.

"Skirt along the shore. We shall be unseen, close in; and if they
approach us, can take refuge in a canal."

But they passed along unnoticed. When they caught sight of the
causeway, stretching away dimly in front of them, they again rowed
out into the lake and, making a long circuit to avoid the canoes
attacking Xoloc, the guns of which were firing hotly, came down on
the causeway again in its rear.

They were hailed as they approached, for the Spaniards were all
under arms. Roger shouted that he was a friend, who had escaped
from the prison; and the Spaniards, in return, gave a shout of
welcome. In another two minutes, the canoe lay alongside the
causeway.

Bathalda sprang on shore, and held the canoe while Roger lifted
Amenche up, and stepped out. A dozen hands were held out to assist
him to climb the slippery bank.

His figure was known by them all. Many exclamations of welcome
greeted him, and many were the inquiries as to the other captives.

"I will tell you all about it, directly. Bring the torch a little
closer. I have a lady here who has fainted. We were attacked as we
came out. The fight was a sharp one, and has scared her."

A soldier brought a torch and, as he did so, Roger uttered a loud
cry. Amenche's face was bloodless, and her eyes were closed. But it
was not this that had caused Roger's cry. There was a dark stain on
her white dress, and in its center the feathered head of an arrow.
While Bathalda and Roger had escaped the missiles, with which those
in the boat heralded their attack; an arrow had struck Amenche, as
she turned, when Roger sprang on board.

So great was Roger's horror that he reeled, and would have fallen,
had not the soldiers standing round supported him.

"I think that she has but fainted from loss of blood," Bathalda
said; and Roger, refusing all assistance, carried Amenche to the
fort through the ranks of the Spaniards, who were engaged hotly
with their assailants in the canoes.

He bore her, at once, to the chamber occupied by Marina. She was up
and dressed, for the attack was a hot one, and there was no sleep
in Xoloc. She uttered a cry of welcome, and gladness, as Roger
entered.

"I have escaped, Malinche," he said; "but I fear that she has died
in saving me. I have brought her to you, as you are the only woman
here."

Marina took the girl tenderly, and laid her on a couch.

"I will see to her," she said, softly. "Leave her to me, Roger."

As Roger, blinded with tears, left the room, an officer met him at
the door, and told him that Cortez had just heard of his arrival,
and desired his presence. The general received him with great
kindness.

"It is something to see one of my comrades back again, Sancho," he
said. "I hear how sad a misfortune has befallen you; for I suppose
the lady you brought ashore was she of whom Marina spoke to me. She
told me that she did not give up all hope that you might return;
for that the princess whom you loved was in the city, and would,
she was sure, do all that she could to save your life."

"She did so, General," Roger said; "and I fear at the cost of her
own--she and a noble young cazique, who was a brother to me, when I
was living at Tezcuco."

"I will not trouble you now with questions," Cortez said; "but tell
me--do you know whether any of the other prisoners are alive? Every
evening we have marked that terrible procession to the summit of
the temple. Fifty-eight have been sacrificed, but we know not
exactly how many more remain; being ignorant which of our comrades
fell, and which were captured."

"I cannot tell," Roger replied. "I was the only one left, out of
twenty who were in prison together. If they were taken in the same
proportion from the other prisons, there can be but a few remaining
now. I was set aside until the last, because the priest who had
daily chosen out the victims had been bribed by my friend
Cuitcatl."

Roger hastened away, as soon as Cortez dismissed him, and hurried
back to Malinche's apartment. Her Mexican attendant, who was
standing outside the door, opened it when she saw him approaching;
and as she came up Malinche stole out, with her finger on her lips.

"We have taken out the arrow," she said. "She is still insensible;
but the leech thinks that it is from loss of blood, and hopes that
no vital point has been injured. More than that he cannot say, at
present.

"You had best have your own wounds attended to, now. I will have a
pile of rugs laid for you, in this little room to the left; and
will let you know if any change takes place."

"Do you think that there is any hope, Malinche?"

Malinche shook her head.

"I know not, Roger. I have already sent off to the mainland, to
fetch a leech famous for his skill in the use of herbs. Our people
have many simples of which you know nothing in Europe, and they are
very skillful in the treatment of wounds--much more so, I think,
than the white men."



Chapter 22: Home.


After having had his wounds dressed, Roger threw himself down upon
the bed that had been prepared for him, and lay tossing for hours.
Hitherto he had believed, and had often reproached himself for it,
that he had not loved Amenche as she had loved him. She had loved
him with the passion and devotion of the people of her race, and it
was no figure of speech when she said that she was ready to give
her life for him.

Roger knew that, until lately, his love had been poor by the side
of hers. From the time he had sailed from England, to his first
meeting with her, he had pictured to himself that some day, when he
came to command a ship of his own, he would marry his cousin, if
she had borne him in mind since he parted with her on Plymouth Hoe.
This dream had faded away, from the time he had first met Amenche;
and when Cacama had proposed the marriage to him, he had accepted
the offer gladly. His chance of ever leaving the country, at that
time, seemed slight; and he felt sure that he should be happy with
Amenche. Since that time, the girl's frank expression of her love
for him, her tender devotion, and her willingness to sacrifice
country, and people, and all, to throw in her lot with him, had
greatly heightened the feeling he had towards her; and he had come
to love her truly; but still, perhaps, rather with the calm earnest
affection of a brother, than the passionate devotion of a lover.

But now he knew that she had his whole heart. If she died, it
seemed of little consequence to him what became of his life. It was
for his sake that she had risked everything, had left all--friends
and home and country--and he felt that he would gladly die with
her.

Morning was breaking before Malinche came into his room.

"She is sensible," she said, "and my countryman, who is with her,
thinks that she will live."

The relief was so great that Roger burst into tears.

"Come with me," Malinche said, taking his hand. "We do not think
she knows what has happened, but she looks anxiously about the
room. She is very, very weak; but the leech thinks that if she sees
you, and knows that you are safe and well, it will rouse her and
put her in the way of recovery. You must not talk to her, or excite
her in any way."

Roger followed Malinche into her room. Amenche was lying, without a
vestige of color on her face, and with her eyes closed and her
breathing so faint that Roger, as he looked at her, thought that
she was dead.

"Take her hand and kneel down beside her," Malinche whispered.

Roger took the girl's hand. As he did so, a slight tremor ran
through her, as if she recognized his touch. Then her eyes opened.

"Amenche, my darling, do you know me?" Roger said, as he stooped
his face close to hers.

Her face brightened suddenly, and a look of intense happiness came
into her eyes.

"O Roger!" she whispered; "I dreamed that they had killed you."

"I am safe and well, as you see," he said. "They have hurt you,
darling; but you will get better, and we shall be happy together.
You must not talk, but I may stay by you, if you will keep quiet.

"Drink this first," and he handed to her a cup that the Mexican
doctor held out to him; and placing his arm under Amenche's head,
raised it and poured the liquid between her lips.

Then he laid her head down again on the pillow and, kneeling beside
her, held her hand in his.

She lay looking up into his face, with an expression of quiet
happiness, occasionally murmuring, "Dear Roger."

Presently her eyelids drooped, and in a few minutes her regular
breathing showed that she was asleep.

The Mexican doctor placed another cup of medicine within Roger's
reach, and murmured in his ear, "I think that she will do now. Give
her this when she awakes. I shall be within call, if I am wanted."

Amenche slept for some hours, and Roger, overcome by want of sleep,
and from the anxiety through which he had passed, dropped off many
times into short dozes.

He woke from one of these at a slight movement of Amenche's hand,
and opened his eyes at the moment that she was opening hers.

"What has happened, Roger? And where am I?" she asked, in wonder.

"First drink this medicine, and then I will tell you," he said.
"You remember, dear, we were in the boat together, and we were
attacked. An arrow struck you, but I knew nothing about it until I
had reached the causeway, and found you senseless, and brought you
here to Malinche's room; and she and one of the doctors of your
country dressed your wound, and now you have been sleeping quietly
for some hours."

"Oh yes," she said, "I remember now. I was struck with an arrow. It
was a sharp pain, but I did not cry out; for you had need of all
your strength and vigor. I lay there quietly, and heard the din of
fighting; and at last, when I knew that you had conquered, I felt a
faintness stealing over me, and thought that I was dying; and then
I remember nothing more, only it seemed that, in my dreams, you
came to me and knelt by the side of me and kissed me; and now I
know that that part is true, and I have been having such happy
dreams, ever since.

"But why should I lie here? Cannot I get up?"

"No, dear. You are weak from loss of blood, and quiet is necessary.
Lie here a minute. I will fetch the leech in, to see how you are."

The Mexican was sleeping on some mats outside the door. He at once
came in and, after examining Amenche, pronounced her decidedly
better. Malinche, who had given orders that she was to be informed
as soon as the princess was awake, came in a minute or two; and a
consultation was held, when it was decided that Amenche should at
once be taken from the fort, which was crowded with soldiers, as
well as exposed to the din and turmoil of the night attacks.

Malinche went out and soon returned, saying that she had spoken to
one of the Tezcucan caziques in alliance with the Spaniards. He had
at once offered to receive Amenche at his palace, which was situate
but three miles from the end of the causeway.

"I cannot leave Roger again," the princess said, when she
understood what was proposed.

"There is no thought of your leaving him," Malinche said, kindly.
"Roger is to accompany you. He needs rest and peace almost as much
as you do. Besides, he has been seriously wounded, though he makes
light of it.

"The cazique has sent off a messenger for a party of his people to
meet you. A boat will be in readiness to take you across the lake,
at sunset. You will be carried in litters from the landing place to
his palace."

This programme was carried out and, by nine o'clock that evening,
Roger and Amenche were both settled in luxurious apartments in the
cazique's palace.

Cortez, now recovered from his wounds, prepared for a fresh
advance; which was this time to be conducted in a different manner.
Against so stubborn and active a foe the advance must be
irresistible, steady, and continued. In future, no step backward
was to be taken. Every breach, every canal, was to be filled up so
firmly and solidly that it could never again be disturbed; and for
this purpose every building--whether a private house, temple, or
palace--was to be demolished. It was with the greatest reluctance
that Cortez arrived at this determination. He would fain have saved
the city intact, as the most glorious trophy of his success; but
his experience showed him that with every house a fortress, every
street cut up by canals, it was hopeless to expect to conquer it.

The Indian allies heard his intention with the greatest
satisfaction, for there was ever in their mind the dread that,
should the white men depart, the Aztecs would take a terrible
revenge upon their rebellious subjects. Enormous numbers of men
were assembled, and provided with implements for the work. This was
steadily carried out, until the whole of the suburbs were leveled,
and a wide space round the city left open for the maneuvers of the
cavalry and the play of the artillery.

Before making the last attack, Cortez tried once more to persuade
the emperor to yield; and sent three Aztec nobles, who had been
captured in one of the late fights, to bear a message to him. He
told Guatimozin that he and his people had done all that brave men
could, and that there remained no hope, no chance, of escape. Their
provisions were exhausted. Their communications cut off. Their
vassals had deserted them, and the nations of Anahuac were banded
against them. He prayed him, therefore, to have compassion on his
brave subjects, who were daily perishing before his eyes, and on
the fair city now fast crumbling into ruins. He begged him to
acknowledge his allegiance to the sovereign of Spain; in which case
he should be confirmed in his authority, and the persons, the
property, and all the rights of the Aztecs should be respected.

The young monarch would have instantly refused the terms, but he
called a council to deliberate upon them. Many would have accepted
them, but the priests threw all their influence in the scale
against it; reminding the king of the fate of Montezuma, after all
his hospitality to the Whites, of the seizure and imprisonment of
Cacama, of the massacre of the nobles, of the profanation of the
temple, and of the insatiable greed that had stripped the country
of its treasures.

The answer to the Spaniards was given in the form of a tremendous
sortie along each causeway; but the guns of the Spanish batteries
and ships drove the assailants back, and the operations of
destruction went on. Day by day the army of workers leveled the
houses and filled the canals, although the Mexicans made incessant
attacks upon the troops who covered the workmen. For several weeks
the work continued, while the wretched inhabitants were fast
wasting away with hunger. All the food stored up had long since
been consumed, and the population reduced to feed on roots dug up
in the gardens, on the bark of trees, leaves, and grass, and on
such rats, mice, and lizards as they could capture.

The houses, as the besiegers advanced, were found to be full of
dead; while in some lay men, women, and children in the last stage
of famine. And yet, weakened and suffering as they were, the Aztecs
maintained their resolution, rejecting every overture of Cortez.

At last the division of Alvarado cleared its way into the great
square, and a party, mounting the great temple where so many of
their comrades had been massacred, defeated the Aztecs who guarded
the position, slaughtered the priests, and set fire to the
sanctuary; and the next day the division of Cortez won their way to
the same spot, and joined that of Alvarado.

Seven-eighths of the city was now destroyed; and with the exception
of the king's palace and a few temples, all the buildings that had,
when they first saw it, so excited the admiration of the Spaniards,
and had made the city one of the loveliest in the world, had been
leveled.

In the portion that remained the whole of the Aztec population were
crowded. Their number was still vast, for before the siege began
the people from many of the surrounding cities had flocked into the
capital. Pestilence was aiding famine in its work; and the Spanish
writers say that "as the troops advanced, the bodies lay so thick
that it was impossible to walk without treading on them."

Again and again Cortez endeavored to negotiate with the emperor.
Although so reduced by weakness that they could scarce keep their
feet, the Aztecs maintained their defiant attitude, and the advance
of the allies recommenced. The Aztecs fought as bravely as ever;
but they were so weakened that their missiles were no longer
dangerous, and their arms could scarce lift their weapons.

It was a dreadful carnage. The confederates, panting with hatred of
the race that had subdued and so long humiliated them, showed no
pity; and even when Cortez ordered that quarter should be shown to
all who asked it, the allies refused to be checked, and the work of
slaughter went on until the Spanish trumpets sounded a retreat.

During that day, alone, it was calculated that forty thousand
persons had fallen. That night a mournful stillness reigned over
the city. In silent despair, and yet with no thought of surrender,
the Aztecs awaited their fate.

The next morning, August 15th, 1521, the troops were formed up
again; but before ordering the advance Cortez obtained an interview
with some of the principal chiefs, and persuaded them to see the
emperor, and try to induce him to surrender; but the answer came
that Guatimozin was ready to die where he was, and would hold no
parley with the Spanish commander. Cortez still postponed the
assault for several hours.

Then, finding delay unavailing, he reluctantly gave the order for
the attack to recommence. As upon the previous day it was a mere
slaughter. Many of the Aztecs sought to fly in canoes, but these
were cut off by the fleet.

Presently, however, while the butchery was still going on, the
welcome news was brought that Guatimozin himself had been captured
by one of the vessels. With him was his wife, the beautiful
Princess Tecuichpo, a daughter of Montezuma; and twenty nobles of
high rank. The news of his capture spread rapidly through the fleet
and city, and the feeble resistance the Aztecs still offered ceased
at once.

Guatimozin was brought before Cortez, and behaved with a dignity
and calmness that excited the admiration and respect of the general
and his followers. The next morning, at the emperor's request,
Cortez gave permission for all the survivors of the siege to leave
the town; and issued strict orders, both to the Spaniards and their
savage allies, that no insult or injury should be offered to them.
For three days sad processions of men, women, and children--worn
out with fatigue, wasted with fever and hunger, and in many cases
scarred with wounds--made their way along the causeways. The number
of men, alone, was variously estimated at from thirty to seventy
thousand.

The losses during the siege were also placed at varying figures by
contemporary writers. The lowest estimate was one hundred and
twenty thousand, while some writers place it at double that amount.
The higher figures probably approximate most nearly to the truth,
for the population of the city, in itself very large, was
enormously swelled by the vast number of persons from all the
surrounding cities, who took refuge there at the approach of the
Spaniards.

The Spanish loss was comparatively small, the larger portion of it
being incurred upon the day of the destruction of Alderete's
column. The loss of the allies, however, was very large; as they
were not provided, as were the Spaniards, with armor which defied
the missiles of the enemy. Of the Tezcucans, alone, it is said that
thirty thousand perished.

The amount of booty taken in the city was comparatively small, and
the army was bitterly disappointed at the poor reward which it
reaped for its labors and sacrifices. There can be no doubt that
the Aztec treasures were removed and buried, before the approach of
the Spaniards to the city. Indeed, during the siege the Aztecs
constantly taunted them with shouts that, even if they ever took
the city, they would find no gold there to reward their efforts.

The defense of the city of Mexico has been frequently likened to
that of Jerusalem against Titus. In each case a vast population,
ignorant of the arts of war, resisted with heroic constancy the
efforts of a civilized enemy, and succumbed to hunger and disease
rather than to the foe.

The fate of the Aztecs befell them because, while a conquering
people, they had enslaved and tyrannized over the nations they
subdued; extending to them no rights or privileges, but using them
simply as means of supplying the pomp and luxury of the capital,
and of providing men for its wars. Even the cities of the valley,
the near neighbors of Mexico, were kept in a galling state of
dependence; and the result was that the whole of the Aztec Empire
broke up at once, and fell upon its oppressors as soon as the
coming of the Spaniards afforded them the opportunity for
retaliation and revenge. Had it not been for this, it would have
needed a force many times as numerous as that of Cortez to conquer
an empire so extensive and populous, and composed of peoples so
brave and fearless of death.

Terrible as the destruction of life was, in the capture of Mexico,
the Spaniards were not open to blame for it; except in the massacre
of the nobles, for which conduct Cortez was in no way responsible.
The war was not conducted with the cruelty that too often
distinguished the warfare of the Spaniards. Cortez had certainly no
desire to destroy the beautiful capital of the country he had
conquered for Spain. The prisoners taken during the siege, and the
people who came out and surrendered, were always treated with
kindness, even when the Spaniards were maddened by the sight of the
daily sacrifices of their countrymen by the Aztecs. Again and
again, during the siege, Cortez endeavored to induce the enemy to
come to terms; and after the fighting was over, the whole of the
survivors were permitted to depart unharmed.

A fortnight after the fall of Mexico, Amenche and Roger were both
convalescent. Amenche's wound had, after the first day, caused but
little anxiety. She had fainted from loss of blood, and from the
effects of the long strain which she had undergone, from the time
that she had heard that Roger was a captive in the hands of the
Mexicans, and destined for sacrifice at the temple. Under the
influence, then, of happiness; and of the care and attention she
received; she was, in two or three days, well enough to get up and
go into the adjoining room, and sit by the couch of Roger; who was
prostrated by fever, the result of imprisonment, anxiety, and his
wounds. For a time his life was in danger; but after the crisis had
passed, he too recovered rapidly.

Malinche came several times to see them, and a warm affection
sprang up between her and Amenche.

"What do you mean to do, Roger?" she asked him one day, when she
found him alone.

"I mean to marry Amenche, at once," he said; "and to go back to
Europe, if possible, without delay."

"I have managed that for you," Malinche said. "I spoke to Cortez
yesterday. The city cannot resist many days longer, and after that
we hope that there will be no more fighting. At any rate, I told
him that you were so shaken from what you had gone through, it
would be a long time before you would be fit to carry arms again;
and that you desired greatly to go to Europe, for a time; and he
has consented that you shall go down to the coast with the first
convoy of wounded, as soon as the city falls. Of course, he has
given consent for your marriage with Amenche; and said, when I
asked him, that she had fairly won you. He says that, if you return
hither, he will give to Amenche a wide portion of her brother's
dominions. I did not tell him that it was little likely he would
ever see you out here, again."

During the next fortnight, Roger instructed Amenche in the outlines
of the Christian faith and, the day before the convoy was to start,
three weeks after the fall of Mexico, Father Olmedo received her
into the Church, and the marriage ceremony took place. It was
attended by Cortez and most of his leaders, and by many of the
native nobles.

Among them, Roger was glad to meet Cuitcatl. He was one of the
party who had been captured with the emperor; and had been at once
released, by Cortez, when the latter was informed by Malinche that
he had befriended and released Roger. That evening, the two friends
had a long talk together.

"You will be happy," Cuitcatl said, "and will come, in time, in
your home in your own country, to look back at this terrible time
as a troubled dream. I do not mourn for Cacama or Maclutha. They
are fortunate in escaping the troubles that yet remain, for my
unhappy country; for I well foresee that the Spaniards will
gradually subdue those who have served them so well in their
campaign against us. Their allies will in time become their
subjects, until the whole empire of the Aztecs will lie prostrate
at their feet.

"But whatever happens, I shall take no further part in it. I have
fought by the side of the Aztecs against my own countrymen. I have
done my best to save our nation from falling under the dominion of
the Spaniards. I shall retire now to my estates, and devote myself
to them. Cortez has given me a paper, signed by him, saying that I,
although fighting against him, saved the life of a Spanish
prisoner, who was the only one of those captured who escaped being
sacrificed; and that, therefore, he orders all Spaniards to treat
me with kindness and consideration, and confirms to me and my
heirs, to all time, the possession of my estates free from all
takes or imposts whatever. Malinche obtained this document from
him, and has induced the treasurer and chamberlain, also, to affix
their seals to it; and she says that it will be undoubtedly
respected.

"As you know, Roger, I should long ago have married my cousin, who
was one of Maclutha's ladies in waiting; but we deferred it until
these troubles should be over. I have been to Tezcuco today, and we
shall be married at the end of the week; so that I have every hope
of leading a quiet and happy life, and think that, in the end,
these troubles will tend to the happiness of the people of the
country. As a Tezcucan, I can acknowledge that the Aztec tyranny
was a heavy one, that the people were sorely oppressed. The
wholesale sacrifices at the temples, now abolished forever, were
the cause of constant wars; and I think that when the Spaniards
once overcome all resistance, and establish a firm and stable
government, the people will be happier than they ever could have
been under the Aztec rule.

"What has become of Bathalda?"

"He accompanied us here, and then went off to your estates; saying
that he should collect a few of his friends and occupy your house,
to see that none took advantage of the troubles to plunder it. I
recommend him to your care, Cuitcatl."

"There is no occasion to do that, Roger. He has been a faithful
servant and friend, and shall in future be my right hand."

The next morning Malinche came to say farewell to them.

"How much has taken place, in the last four years, Roger!" she
said. "Then, I was a slave girl. You were a captive in a strange
country. What scenes we have passed through since then!

"I am sorry, indeed, that you are going, Roger," and the tears came
into her eyes; "you were my first friend, and I have loved you ever
since, as a brother. I shall miss you sorely, indeed. However, I
know that you and Amenche will be happy together.

"Princess, I have something of yours," and she held up a heavy
girdle.

Amenche gave a cry of joy.

"I missed it," she said, "but I thought that it must have fallen
off in the boat, or as Roger carried me thence to the castle.

"See, Roger," she said, holding it out to them, "this is my dowry.
I told you I should not come to you a penniless bride, but I have
thought lately that I was mistaken. Maclutha, when she died, gave
me all the jewels we carried away from the treasure room at
Tezcuco. I selected all the most valuable ones, and sewed them into
this broad girdle, which I put on under my things on the night when
you escaped. Its loss has grieved me, though you have said that the
two little bags you have, already, would suffice to make you rich.
Still, they were Maclutha's, and I wanted to give you mine; but I
could not think what had become of the belt."

"I found it on you, Amenche, when we loosened your robe to examine
your wound; and put it by to give to you or Roger, whichever might
recover; and now I am glad to hand it over, as your joint property.
I have already returned Roger his own two little bags, that he had
given me to take care of.

"And now, farewell to you both. You will think of me, sometimes, in
your distant home in England?"

And Malinche, bursting into tears, hurried away.

The journey to the coast was an easy one, as the sick were all
transported on litters, carried by native porters. The bracing air
of the high land did much to restore the strength of the sick men,
who had been suffering much from the terrible heat of the valley.
The officer in command of the convoy halted them for a week on the
Tlascalan plateau, in order that they might get the full benefit of
the cool air; and by the time they reached the coast, and were
carried on board ship, Roger felt his strength fast returning.

A comfortable cabin was assigned to him and Amenche, as Cortez had,
at Malinche's request, written a letter specially commending them
to the care of the officer in command of the ship. The voyage to
Spain was a long one and, before the vessel arrived at Cadiz, Roger
and Amenche were completely restored to health and strength.

Roger's success, indeed, had been beyond his wildest hopes. The two
bags of jewels, and those which Amenche had brought away with her,
would suffice to make him a very rich man. He had, too, an
assortment of the finest Mexican stuffs, which Malinche had given
him as a special present for his friends at home; and he had a bar
of gold, of the value of a thousand pounds, which was his share (as
one of Cortez's bodyguard) of the gold found at the capture of the
capital.

He had learned, from a vessel which was spoken as they neared
Spain, that England and Spain were in alliance against France; and
he had no doubt, therefore, that he should find English ships at
Cadiz. His heart was gladdened, as the vessel entered the port, by
seeing the English flag flying on several vessels in harbor.

As soon as Roger and his companions landed, they were surrounded by
an eager crowd, all anxious to learn more of the capture of Mexico;
of which a swift vessel, sent off as soon as the city fell, had
brought news six weeks earlier; and Roger had to tell the story of
the siege a dozen times over.

As soon as he could get free from the crowd, he went to a money
changer's, and obtained Spanish gold in exchange for his bar. Then
he purchased, at a clothier's, a suit of garments of Spanish
fashion and, putting these on, was able to move about without
attracting observation.

Amenche did not disembark until after nightfall, but Roger's first
care after landing was to purchase a chestful of garments, fit for
a Spanish lady of rank, and to send them out to the vessel. Having
sent these off, he made his way down to the port and, inquiring
among the sailors, found that an English ship would sail on the
following day.

Hiring a boat, he went on board. He determined to maintain his
character as a Spaniard to the last, as he would thereby avoid all
questions; and it was, accordingly, in that language that he
arranged for a passage for himself and his wife, the captain taking
him for a Spanish gentleman having business with the Court in
London.

Having settled this, Roger returned on board and, late in the
evening, was rowed with Amenche to the English ship, which was to
sail early the next morning. The wind was favorable, and the ship
made a quick passage. The captain and sailors amused Roger by their
comments on his appearance. Never, they agreed, had they seen a
Spaniard of such size and strength before.

"He stands six feet three, if he is an inch," an old sailor said,
"and he is as broad as any man I ever saw. He is never a bit like a
Spaniard in appearance, with his blue eyes and light brown hair. If
you were to put him in good English broadcloth, and teach him to
talk like a Christian, no one would dream he was other than an
Englishman. The Spaniards generally have solemn faces, but this
chap looks as if he could laugh and joke with the best of us. One
could almost swear that he understood what I am saying, now."

Roger was several times tempted to say that he did understand, but
he kept his counsel.

As soon as they landed, near London Bridge, they went to an inn;
and when the sailors who had carried his trunk for him had left, he
addressed the landlord in English.

"Can you direct me to a clothier, where I can obtain suitable
clothes?" he said. "I have been staying in Spain and, having been
wrecked and lost all my outfit, had to rig myself in Spanish
fashion. I also wish to purchase clothing of English fashion for my
wife."

"I thought you were an Englishman, by your looks," the landlord
said; "though the fashion of your clothes was altogether foreign,
and you speak, too, with a strange accent."

For indeed, Roger found the English words come with difficulty;
after having, for nearly six years, spoken nothing but Mexican and
Spanish.

"I have been some time away," he said; "and have been talking with
the Spaniards until I have well-nigh forgotten my own tongue."

Two hours later, he was attired in the fashion of a well-to-do
merchant; and Amenche made, as he told her, the prettiest wife
merchant ever had. They stayed for a week in London, Amenche being
greatly amused and interested in all she saw. At the end of that
time, having purchased a stout horse, and a sword to defend himself
against any robbers he might meet with on the way, Roger started to
ride down to Plymouth, with Amenche behind him on a pillion.

Six days after leaving London they entered the town, and Roger,
having seen Amenche comfortably bestowed at the principal inn, took
his way to the house of Master Diggory Beggs. The latter was in his
shop, and came forward, bowing, as Roger entered it.

"What can I do for you today, good sir?" he said. "I have goods of
all sorts and kinds: Italian work and Spanish; silks, and satins,
and velvets."

"I would have a talk with you alone, Master Beggs. I am the bearer
of a message from an old friend of yours. If you will grant me a
few minutes' talk, we may do business together."

"By all means," the merchant said, thinking that such an
introduction offered some important transactions. "Will you be good
enough to follow me?" and he led the way upstairs.

Dame Mercy was sitting at work with her youngest daughter when they
entered the room, Diggory saying:

"Please to leave, Dame. This gentleman and I have business of
importance to discuss together."

"There is no occasion for you to leave us," Roger said. "My
business is not so private but that you and Mistress Agnes may hear
us."

"You know my daughter's name!" Dame Beggs exclaimed, in surprise.

"The gentleman comes with a message from an old friend of ours,"
Diggory said; "and has doubtless heard him mention our daughter's
name."

"And Dorothy," Roger asked; "she is well, I hope."

"My eldest daughter was married, three months since," Dame Mercy
replied.

Roger gave an exclamation of satisfaction.

"And so none of you know me?" he asked. "And yet, you are but
little changed; except that Mistress Agnes has grown into a young
woman, whereas she was but a child when I parted from her."

Diggory Beggs and his wife gazed at Roger in astonishment. Agnes
stood up, with her hands tightly clasped together.

"It is Roger," she cried. "Oh, mother! It is Roger, come back to
us."

"I am Roger, sure enough, aunt," he said, stooping and kissing her;
and then shaking hands with his uncle, and kissing Agnes.

"And your father," Diggory asked, "and the Swan?"

"It is a sad story," Roger said. "A very sad story, uncle. Six
years ago, the Swan was wrecked on the coast of Tabasco; and every
soul, save myself, lost."

It was a blow for Diggory Beggs. He had, indeed, long since given
up all hope of ever seeing his cousin Reuben, or of obtaining any
return for the capital he had embarked on the Swan; but the sight
of Roger had, for a moment, raised his hopes that the venture had,
after all, been productive. However, he speedily recovered himself.

"I am grieved to hear it, Roger, though in no ways surprised. For
two years we looked for your return; but we have all, long since,
given up hope, and written off our shares in the Swan as lost
money. I am sorry for Reuben, very sorry, for I loved him like a
brother.

"Well, well, do not let us talk about it, now. You are restored to
us, safe and sound; and though the loss was a heavy one, and
crippled me for a time, I have got over it.

"Now, tell us what have you been doing, ever since. And by what
miracle have you returned, safe and sound?"

"It is a long story, uncle. A very long story. But before I begin
it, I may tell you that, though the ship and its venture were lost,
I myself have returned by no means penniless; and can, indeed,
repay to the full all the money expended upon the Swan and her
outfit.

"Now I want you all to come round with me to the inn, for there I
have left a lady whom I would fain introduce to you."

"Your wife?" Mistress Mercy cried. "You don't say you have brought
home a wife, Roger?"

"That do I, aunt. She is a princess, in her own country; but what
is much better, she is the dearest of women, and all but gave her
life to save mine."

Mistress Mercy looked grave, and was about to speak, when Roger
interrupted her.

"I know what you are about to say, aunt. The thought of having a
foreign woman for your niece is shocking to you. Never mind, leave
it unsaid, until you have seen her.

"But as we go, let us call in and see Dorothy, and take her on with
us. I should wish her to be one of the first to welcome my wife."

Dorothy was as astonished as the others had been, when they arrived
at her house with Roger; and cast a meaning glance at him, when she
heard that he had brought home a wife.

"I know what you are thinking of, Dorothy--our parting on the hoe."

Dorothy laughed.

"I meant it when I said it, Dorothy, and meant it for a good time
afterwards. It was only when it seemed that I should never come
back again that I fell in love with some one else; and when you
have heard my story, and know what she did for me, and how much I
owe her, and come to love her for herself, you won't blame me."

"I don't blame you one bit, Roger," she said, frankly. "When you
went away, we thought we cared for each other; but of course we
were only boy and girl then, and when I grew up and you did not
come home, and it seemed that you never would come home, as you
say, I fell in love with someone else.

"And now I will put on my hood, and come round and see your wife.
What is her name?"

"Her name is Amenche," Roger said; "and Amenche I mean to call her.
When she was christened--for of course she had to be christened
before we were married--Father Olmedo said she must have a
Christian name, and christened her Caterina; but for all that her
name is Amenche, and we mean to stick to it.

"But come along; she has been an hour alone in this strange place,
already, and must begin to think that I have run away from her."

Dorothy and Agnes were at once won by the soft beauty of the
dark-skinned princess; and when, that evening, Roger told the story
of all that had taken place in Mexico, Dame Mercy's last prejudice
vanished, and she took Amenche in her arms and kissed her tenderly.

"My dear," she said, "Roger has always been as a son to me, and
henceforth you will be as one of my daughters."

As to Diggory, his delight and satisfaction were almost too great
for words. He was overjoyed that Roger had returned, vastly
gratified that the money he expended on the Swan was to be repaid,
and greatly captivated by Amenche.

The princess could speak but a few words of English, for Roger had
been afraid to commence her tuition in that language until they
were safely in England: but she was greatly pleased with the
welcome she received; and began, for the first time, to feel that
someday she might come to regard this strange country as home.

There was a long talk, between Roger and his uncle, as to the steps
that should be taken. It was agreed that, now Spain and England
were so closely allied, it would be imprudent in the extreme to
allow it to become known that the Swan had sailed for the Western
Indies, or that Roger had obtained wealth there; for if it came to
the ears of the Court--and such strange news would travel fast--it
might well be that a ruinous fine might be imposed upon all
concerned in the matter. Therefore, it was arranged that nothing
whatever should be said about it; but that it should be given out
that the Swan had been wrecked in foreign parts; and that Roger,
who had been sole survivor of the wreck, had settled abroad and
made money there, and had married a foreign lady.

More than that, it would be unnecessary to tell. The gems could be
sent over, a few at a time, to Amsterdam; and there sold to
merchants who would care nothing whence they came; and the partners
of Diggory Beggs, in the venture of the Swan, would be only too
glad to receive their money back again, and to ask no questions as
to how it had been obtained. And so matters were carried out.

For some months, Roger remained in nominal partnership with his
uncle; and then bought a large estate, a few miles out of the town,
where he set up as a country gentleman. He was, for a time,
somewhat shyly looked upon by the magistrates of the county, who
deemed it an unheard-of thing for a Plymouth merchant thus to
settle among them; but in time he was accepted, especially after it
became known that, when he went up to town, he held his place among
the highest there, and kept a state and expenditure equal to that
of many of the nobles.

His wife was remarkable, not only for her beauty, but for the
richness of her jewels, many of which were fashioned in a way such
as had never before been seen at the English Court. As time went
on, and the relations between England and Spain grew cold, there
was no longer any occasion for secrecy; and little by little it
became known that the Swan had sailed to the Spanish main, that
Roger had formed one of the conquering band of Cortez, and that
Amenche was not a Spaniard but an Aztec Princess. This caused a
great talk at the time, and added much to the consideration in
which Roger was held. He took a leading position in the country
and, many years after, fitted out two ships at his own cost to
fight against the Spanish Armada.

Happily, Amenche's health never suffered from the change to the
comparatively cold climate of Devonshire. She bore Roger several
children, and to this day many of the first families in Devonshire
are proud that there runs in their veins the blood of the Aztec
princess.





End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of By Right of Conquest, by G. A. Henty

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BY RIGHT OF CONQUEST ***

***** This file should be named 19398.txt or 19398.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/1/9/3/9/19398/

Produced by Martin Robb

Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.



*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.org/license).


Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.  See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
     License.  You must require such a user to return or
     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
     Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
     of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.


Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.


Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org

For additional contact information:
     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
     Chief Executive and Director
     gbnewby@pglaf.org


Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate


Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.


Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.


Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

     http://www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.